|
|
100 Bullets #100 |
Apr 15, 2009
show
|
|
|
|
|
100th Anniversary |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
100th Anniversary: Guardians of the Galaxy #1
July 30, 2014
|
|
Regardless of whether or not they've been following the rest of Marvel's 100th Anniversary Specials, Guardians of the Galaxy lovers will want to give this comic a look. It's entertaining and oddly engrossing for what is really just an alternate universe story at the end of the day. If we can't have more Dan Abnett/Andy Lanning Guardians comics, the Lanning/Marz team is a good substitute.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
100th Anniversary: The Avengers #1
July 23, 2014
|
|
I also appreciated the fact that, for all this comic's weirdness, Stokoe doesn't remain fixated on the humorous elements. This is not a self-deprecating or cynical comic. Quite the opposite. This clash between good and evil leads to a surprisingly heartfelt conclusion. In some ways, it's more like an Avengers comic of a bygone era than it is a product of some crazy future.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
1872 #3 |
Sep 24, 2015
show
|
|
Most of the plot twists can be seen coming a mile away as the downtrodden heroes of Timely begin rising up against Mayor Fisk and his bloodthirsty agents. Even so, there's a lot of enjoyment to be had in seeing Gerry Duggan's Wild West re-imagining of iconic Marvel characters, especially as characters like Carol Danvers join the fray.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
30 Days of Night (2017) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
30 Days of Night #1
December 21, 2017
|
|
There's a pretty obvious question that arises from the announcement that IDW is publishing a "reimagining" of the original 30 Days of Night miniseries - why?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
30 Days of Night #2
January 25, 2018
|
|
The idea of of 30 Days of Night getting a full-blown remake from its original writer/co-creator is interesting, but after two issues, the new 30 Days of Night hasn't done much to justify its own existence.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
5 Days to Die #1 |
Sep 01, 2010
show
|
|
Chee's art is as pleasant a surprise as the writing in this issue. Chee reminds me very much of the gritty, crime noir stylings of Michael Lark or Matthew Southworth. Strong, competent line-work, heavy blacks, and emotional energy are the name of the game here. Chee's work isn't quite monotone, but features different color washes depending on the scene at hand. This issue is a strong debut both visually and in terms of the story. I'm pleasantly surprised with 5 Days to Die, and I hope that readers interested in 1 Month 2 Live will also give IDW's weekly series a fair chance.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
A Game of Thrones #1 |
Sep 21, 2011
show
|
|
Again, this is a competent adaptation, but a project like this needs to offer something more than competence. Either offer a deeper exploration of the series' mythology, as in the Dark Tower comics, or deliver a comic so beautifully rendered that the actual text doesn't even matter, like in Marvel's Oz books. Right now, there isn't much incentive to read this interpretation of A Game of Thrones over the original novel or the HBO series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
A-Force #1 |
May 20, 2015
show
|
|
While certain details regarding the nature of this team and their connection to the old marvel Universe remain unclear, A-Force #1 marks a worthy debut for Marvel's newest team book. It's fun and fast-paced, but also features great characterization and clear ties to the larger framework of Secret Wars. Marvel picked a solid creative team for this series, and it's already paying off.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
A.D.: After Death |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
A.D.: After Death #1
November 23, 2016
|
|
A.D. is every bit as compelling a comic as one would expect from a Scott Snyder/Jeff Lemire team-up. It's intensely emotional, beautifully rendered and very diverse in its presentation. It does seem like the story would have been better served as a single graphic novel, but at least readers don't have to wait long for the next chapter.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
A.D.: After Death #3
May 11, 2017
|
|
I do wish the creators had emphasized sequential art over illustrated prose a little more with this book, but regardless of approach, A.D. works as a very intimate, very emotional look at a man finally coming to terms with death.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
A+X |
7 issues
show
|
|
|
A+X #1
October 31, 2012
|
|
A+X isn't a bad read as long as you don't allow the cover to fool you into thinking it has anything at all to do with Avengers vs. X-Men. Hopefully future issues will be more consistent on the promise to skip continuity and tell simple, fun done-in-one tales.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
A+X #2
November 28, 2012
|
|
Though A+X has its quirks and weak moments, the series can't be accused of not delivering on its simple premise. Even Marvel readers tired of the event machine might want to look beneath the AvX-style cover page and enjoy the simple, lighthearted tales within.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
A+X #3
December 19, 2012
|
|
Fans of Black Panther and Storm and/or Ferry's art will want to check out this issue, but the $3.99 cover price may be asking too much of everyone else.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
A+X #5
March 6, 2013
|
|
If the first few issues of A+X were a bit rocky and uneven, these most recent two chapters have been milking the team-up concept for all its worth.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
A+X #6
March 27, 2013
|
|
After an early string of issues wherein only one of the two tales managed to live up to the premise, this is the third issue in a row where both segments are worth the price of admission. Judging from the newest solicits, Marvel doesn't appear to have any intention of wrapping up this book. And why should they at this rate?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
A+X #7
April 24, 2013
|
|
The CG art style is interesting, showcasing what a Pixar or Dreamworks-animated Marvel movie might look like. The downside to this is that there's little storytelling flow from panel to panel since the story consists of so many splash pages and large shots. But on the other hand, the artists do an admirable job of giving the figures a sense of fluidity, something that is all too rare with CG artwork.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Abbott #1 |
Jan 25, 2018
show
|
|
This comic manages to look both gritty and sentimental at the same time. Those few moments of supernatural horror stand out all the more because they're employed so sparingly. In short, this is a series worth following.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Abe Sapien: The Abyssal Plain #1 |
Jun 30, 2010
show
|
|
One of the benefits of following Mike Mignola's Hellboy universe is that even the spinoffs are generally worth reading. Abe Sapien: The Abyssal Plain doesn't break that trend. Mike Mignola and John Arcudi offer a tale less overtly steeped in horror and more plain creepy as Abe dives deep below the surface to seek out a lost artifact inside a sunken Russian sub. Peter Snejbjerg doesn't always capture the foreboding tone of his surroundings as well as he could, but there are some shots worth admiring. Those hoping that Mignola and Arcudi will shed new light on Abe's past might be disappointed, but the hero stands tall on his own once again. And those who just want more of those traditional clashes with monsters and demons should have their thirst quenched in issue #2. Though not an essential read, Abyssal Plain is just one more worthwhile and accessible entry in the increasingly vast Hellboy-verse.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Absolute Carnage #1 |
Aug 07, 2019
show
|
|
Absolute Carnage #1 is a slow but haunting start to Marvel's latest crossover event.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Action Comics (1938) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Action Comics #868
August 13, 2008
|
|
Naturally, Johns's story achieves a similar level of success. I really enjoy the looming sense of peril Johns is slowly building up. It's comparable to what Morrison is doing with Final Crisis, except simpler and.. you know... better. It's hard to ignore the feeling that something truly terrible is going to happen to Superman's loved ones, something that will likely kick off New Krypton at the end of the year. If this issue's story has any weak point, it's simply that fact that it doesn't move as quickly as I'd like. Johns spends the first half in the shadows, allowing Gary Frank's art to do all the talking. I really can't blame him for that, and yet I can't help but want more. This is, without a doubt, the best in-continuity Superman tale in a very long time. I'm always going to want more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #872
December 10, 2008
|
|
The simple fact that an issue like this is taking place so late into "New Krypton" leaves me seriously worried about the overall impact of the crossover. At this point Johns and his collaborators have precious little time to accomplish what they set out to do. Forget matching the impact of "The Sinestro Corps War," at this point I'm just hoping for a crossover that doesn't fizzle out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #878
June 10, 2009
|
|
Diego Olmos handles the pencils in this issue. It's nice to have one single artist handling the interior, at least. Olmos is no substitute for Barrows, but he's pretty competent in his own way. His pencils are a little more grounded and in keeping with Rucka's espionage flavor. In the quieter story segments and those focusing on human characters, Olmos is a solid fit. His page layouts and overall storytelling are fluid and easy on the eyes. On the other hand, his figure work is a little underwhelming, and this really starts to drag the book down in the more action-oriented sections. Olmos is a good match for Rucka, but not necessarily a good match for Action Comics.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #880
August 12, 2009
|
|
Crossover is increasingly becoming a dirty word in the industry, but it doesn't have to be. So far "Codename: Patriot" is a strong example of how to do these stories properly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #889
April 28, 2010
|
|
This wasn't a bad finale by any stretch. All the same, I look forward to seeing Nightwing and Flamebird become more actively involved in the greater franchise over the next month. Anything after that remains to be seen.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Action Comics (2011) |
25 issues
show
|
|
|
Action Comics #0
September 5, 2012
|
|
Sholly Fisch delivers another backup feature to complement the main tale. Interestingly, this story delves into Morrison's ongoing mythology much more than these backups have tended to in the past. Fisch doesn't focus on Superman here, but rather the origins of the Captain Comet/Neo-sapiens subplot from recent issues. Again, this material isn't necessarily that vital, but it adds a bit of color to previous stories. It's nice to have one issue that slows down the breakneck pace of the series and focus on the characters before Morrison begins his final push.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #8
April 4, 2012
|
|
In short, the larger plan for this book is beginning to come together, and it all seems promising. Is there any chance Action Comics can find a more timely and consistent art crew now?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #9
May 3, 2012
|
|
Finally, the backup story is an enjoyable read. It too focuses on Earth-23 Superman on a slightly smaller scale adventure. Writer Sholly Fisch explores the sometimes conflicting responsibilities a president/superhero faces and suggests the character is headed for a reckoning at some point in the future. If that means more of the character in Morrison's run, I'm all for it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #10
June 6, 2012
|
|
Though Nimrod himself turns out to be a dud, he does facilitate an interesting twist that could have a profound impact on the Superman franchise depending how far Morrison chooses to push it. Even when this series stumbles, it remains an ambitious and exciting reinvention of the Man of Steel.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #11
July 5, 2012
|
|
Finally, Sholly Fisch delivers a backup story about the man who supposedly crafted Superman's T-shirt. The story doesn't complement the main feature in the way these backups have tended to, but it's an enjoyable read nonetheless. CAFU's artwork is as slick and expressive as ever, and it's a shame the rest of the book doesn't look this presentable.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #12
August 1, 2012
|
|
The problem with this finale chapter is that certain threads are wrapped up too quickly and neatly. There's the aforementioned Captain Comet sendoff, but more annoying is how little the Johnny Clark persona amounts to in the end. Superman's identity crisis had far more potential to explore, but it seems there just isn't space to continue along that path. Meanwhile, a last-minute character reveal could have used a bit more room in the script. Overall, this series just doesn't seem to have the room to expand to its full potential, nor the visual consistency it really deserves.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #17
February 20, 2013
|
|
The backup feature this month ranks among the better efforts from Sholly Fisch. Part of this is thanks to artist Chris Sprouse, who takes to Superman like a fish to water. But the script is heartfelt in its own right as it explores the last meeting between Clark and his father. The time travel aspect makes it a bit redundant in light of Morrison's All-Star Superman #6, but it works well nonetheless. The only problem? An editor's caption explains that the backup is meant to take place after Action Comics #18. Clearly the last-minute addition of that final chapter messed up the flow of the series, but couldn't this strip have been saved until then?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #18
March 20, 2013
|
|
Sholly Fisch and Chris Sprouse also return for one final back-up story. As mentioned, it isn't closely tied to Morrison's story, but it does tackle the idea of Superman from a different angle as it explores how a boy in the far future is inspired to stand up to a bully thanks to the Superman Museum. It's a little formulaic, though Fisch spices up the tale by cutting out all dialogue and using sound effects from the Museum to convey information instead. And there's no reason to complain about Chris Sprouse drawing a Superman comic, even if Superman himself is present only in spirit.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #21
June 5, 2013
|
|
But if nothing else, the "World of Krypton" backup feature holds some entertainment value. Though also burdened by excess dialogue at times, this segment features much sharper plotting and pacing, as well as some unusually detailed and energetic art from Philip Tan. It's enough to make you wish the backup feature could replace the main feature.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #28
February 6, 2014
|
|
Aaron Kuder's artwork perfectly matches the charming tone. His style is a little less focused on superheroic action and spectacle and more on unique character designs and overall energy. His facial work suffers a bit whenever the figures are framed from an angle, but otherwise Kuder brings a vibrant, slightly more cartoony look to Superman's world.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #29
March 5, 2014
|
|
And more and more, Aaron Kuder emerges as just the right artist to bring that eclectic blending to life. His work is expressive and dynamic, focusing less on big muscles and pretty faces and more on unique creature designs, quirky facial expressions, and awesome displays of Superman's might. I can't wait to see what these creators have in store for Superman as this run continues to unfold.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #30
April 2, 2014
|
|
The art in this issue is also easy on the eyes, despite the fact that Aaron Kuder doesn't illustrate every page. Kuder's work is as expressive and dynamic as ever, but guest artist Karl Kerschl also manages to impress with some intricate, jaw-droppingly gorgeous underwater scenes. Where can we sign up for more of that?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #32
June 5, 2014
|
|
Unfortunately, Aaron Kuder doesn't pencil this issue, instead making way for Scott Kolins. Kolins proves to be a perfectly decent replacement, however. His slightly cartoony style offers a similar vibe. Kolins renders the big action scenes well, though his facial work isn't quite as expressive and varied as Kuder's tends to be. Still, it's a vast improvement over Superman #31's rapid-fire switching between artists.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #36
November 6, 2014
|
|
The main appeal with this issue is seeing Aaron Kuder back on board as artist. Kuder's expressive style has been as integral to this series' newfound success as Pak's writing. And despite the generally cartoonish quality of Kuder's art style, he's able to perfectly match the darker tone of this story. This arc could be a showcase for Kuder's superhero versatility.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #37
December 4, 2014
|
|
It's also nice to have artist Aaron Kuder back in the saddle. This may just be Kuder's best issue of Action Comics to date. The sheer amount of visual variety alone makes this a blast to read. Kuder's typically expressive characters are in full effect, but he also has the chance to cut loose and design some really horrific and hyper-detailed monsters. On top of that, a brief flashback to Clark and Lana's childhood allows Kuder to tap into a different art style. It's like a blend between Kuder's cartoony approach and the sentimental paintings of Norman Rockwell.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #39
February 5, 2015
|
|
Action Comics #39 caps off Pak's post-Doomed story arc in very satisfying fashion. It has less to do with the horror elements or Pak's new take on Ultra-Humanite at this point. The emotional core of this issue is what makes it thrive.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #43
August 13, 2015
|
|
This issue offers a rousing conclusion to the current conflict, one that plays well on Clark's more vulnerable state and the way he continues to inspire those around him. Aaron Kuder's expressive yet down-to-earth style seems to suit the book more than ever given all these changes. Unfortunately, the story loses some of its punch as this issue wears on.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #44
September 10, 2015
|
|
Pak is great about exploring Clark's new status quo and his unflappable optimism in the face of one defeat after another. But as far as molding Wrath into a compelling villain? Not so much.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #46
November 19, 2015
|
|
Pak strikes a balance between letting Clark's darker side come out while still respecting the fundamentally good man beneath. If anything, this reads less like "Evil Superman" and more like a weary hero finally getting the chance to cut loose and enjoy himself again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #50
March 9, 2016
|
|
It's unfortunate that such a talented creative team is forced to wrap up their Superman saga as cogs in a bigger machine, but Pak and Kuder make the most of their final issue of Action Comics. This issue is a rousing celebration of Superman and his supporting cast. The mish-mash of artists leads to a visually inconsistent issue, but Kuder's pages are worth the price of admission all on their own.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #51
April 21, 2016
|
|
Pete Tomasi's "Final Days of Superman" storyline continues to be a breath of fresh air in terms of Superman's characterization. As the Man of Steel confronts his own mortality, he suddenly feels more like classic Superman than he has in a long time. Unfortunately, that characterization isn't enough to save this issue from its various storytelling missteps.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #52
May 11, 2016
|
|
At this point "The Final Days of Superman" will go down in history as a flawed crossover at best. In some ways, it's just the shot in the arm this franchise needed. In other ways, it suffers from the same problem so many Superman crossover have in the past - poor pacing and too much exposition among them. Still, there's enough that works in this issue to suggest that Tomasi is the right creator to take over the relaunched Superman comic this summer.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Action Comics (2016) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Action Comics #957
June 8, 2016
|
|
It's good to have a classic-numbered Action Comics back on the stands. This first issue doesn't completely live up to its potential in terms of Lex Luthor's role in the series, but it does offer a fun blend of old and new Superman elements as Superman and Luthor butt heads in front of Metropolis' residents. This issue looks great, and the series shows potential to keep building on the crazy twists and turns already brought about by DC Rebirth.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #959
July 14, 2016
|
|
It's unfortunate that we're barely a month into DC Rebirth and fill-in art is already becoming more common. But in this case, Tyler Kirkham's work stands out because it's so different from Patrick Zircher's rather than because it's poorly suited for the story Dan Jurgens is telling.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Action Comics #1000
April 18, 2018
|
|
Action Comics #1000 isn't without its disappointments. A lackluster plot twist prevents Brian Bendis' first DC story from making the impact it should, and in general the short length of these stories tends to limit their scope. Still, there's a lot of heart in these pages, and no shortage of gorgeous artwork. It's impossible not to be moved by the many loving Superman tributes these creative teams have put together.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Action Man #1 |
Jun 23, 2016
show
|
|
Writer Nick Barber is able to strike a balance between innocent, old-school spycraft and a more grounded, real-world-influenced take on the franchise.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Adventures Of Superman #1 |
May 29, 2013
show
|
|
The only real complaint worth registering about this issue is that it costs a dollar more than it would to download the three chapters digitally. But to be fair, it does offer at least as much content as any normal $3.99 comic would. Whichever viewing method you choose, this is a series that all Superman lovers need to be reading.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Age of Apocalypse (2012) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Age of Apocalypse #1
March 7, 2012
|
|
Age of Apocalypse is a solid book all around in its debut issue, but it has plenty to prove in the coming months. Does this particular alternate universe have enough legs left to carry an ongoing series? Will the X-Terminated continue to hold their own alongside the other cast members? Again, time will tell.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Age of Apocalypse #12
February 14, 2013
|
|
Renato Arlem adeptly handles the visual side of things. He creates a look of a world wracked by years of war and suffering that equals the tone established by Roberto de la Torre. And if anything, Arlem's facial work is more defined and nuanced, which is key in an issue like this where the dialogue-driven scenes take center stage. I'll be sorry to see this series end, but crossover or not, I have little doubt Lapham and his artists will manage to deliver the finale saga Age of Apocalypse deserves.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Age of Apocalypse #13
March 6, 2013
|
|
The artwork is sold this month, with Renato Arlem tackling the bulk of the issue and Valentine De Landro handling the bookend pages. Both capably channel Roberto de la Torre's gritty, noir-esque style. It's a style that somehow works even though the tone and locations are comparatively cheery in this issue. One complaint, though, is that some characters are a bit harder to recognize now that most of them have ditched their costumes for civilian attire.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Age of Apocalypse #14
April 3, 2013
|
|
This issue has two pencillers. Andre Araujo handles the scenes set in the 616 universe, while Renato Arlem lends his usual touch to the AoA universe. It's good that the story allows for such a logical separation of content, but the two artists are so completely stylistically different that the constant shifts are still jarring. Araujo's style is attractive in its own kooky way, but not necessarily dark enough to suit the tone of this story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Age of Heroes #1 |
May 19, 2010
show
|
|
And therein lies the core problem. Age of Heroes doesn't offer enough bang for the buck. $3.99 is too much to ask for four short stories, only two of which are of significant length. If both of the longer stories were of equally high quality that might help to justify the price, but they aren't. And in a week with so many promising new releases, it seems particularly hard to recommend an anthology book that can't offer full value and consistent quality.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Age of Ultron |
10 issues
show
|
|
|
Age of Ultron #2
March 13, 2013
|
|
As nice as it is to see Bryan Hitch working in the Marvel Universe again, his work isn't as consistent as I would like. The landscapes and environments tend to be more impressive than the actual figures. Hitch creates a powerful sense of mood as he renders cities where buildings have crumbled and corpse-ridden vehicles litter the streets. But the figures suffer from many of the same problems Hitch's work so often displays lately. Characters seem to have chronically dislocated shoulders with the unnatural way their arms bend. Facial work is riddled with stray, haphazard lines. The latter quality is something that the inking should be able to fix, but instead Paul Neary's inks only highlight the unnecessary lines.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Age of Ultron #3
March 27, 2013
|
|
The inking becomes a major problem at times, as it routinely fails to accomplish its basic purpose -- to lend weight and definition to the pencil lines. The inks are so scratchy and haphazard in some pages that I'd rather Marvel had just skipped that step entirely and released this series with plain penciled art.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Age of Ultron #4
April 3, 2013
|
|
This is Bryan Hitch's penultimate issue of the series, and at this point there's little left to be said about his artwork. His various landscape shots look great. He crams ample amounts of detail into his ruined cityscapes and other environments. He paints an equally bleak picture of a Savage Land gutted by apocalyptic warfare. The many wide shots lend the book a generally cinematic, event-worthy feel. But his figures never benefit from the same sense of consistency and vitality. Background figures and panels that feature a large assortment of characters are much more loose haphazard. One odd quirk with this issue is that the interior art and cover alike make it obvious that Luke Cage wasn't originally drawn with hair. His hairdo looks scribbled on at the last minute.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Age of Ultron #5
April 10, 2013
|
|
As mentioned, this is Hitch's final issue, and his work continues to show the same strengths and flaws as before. At the very least, issue #5 offers more diversity and allows Hitch to zoom in on a few key characters rather than tackle group shots of the Avengers. The detail in his figure work bumps up considerably in the flashback pages and any other page where the camera is zoomed in. But in general, this is still a familiar example of how Hitch's landscapes and environments outstrip his character designs. And as has often been the case with Hitch's Marvel work, there are certain objects and shapes he seems to struggle in rendering properly, most notably Iron Man's helmet. At this point, a visual refresh might not be such a bad thing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Age of Ultron #6
April 17, 2013
|
|
Honestly, my one real complaint with the story at this stage is that the future timeline feels almost incidental when held next to the past. Most of the dramatic impetus falls on Wolverine now. There's fighting and even death in the future, but the death only highlights the fact that much of this story will be wiped away by the finale issue. There's no longer any doubt as to whether Age of Ultron will have lasting ramifications for the Marvel Universe, but we need to see more of this future realm and Ultron himself before it becomes clear whether those ramifications extend to all angles of the story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Age of Ultron #7
May 1, 2013
|
|
Perhaps we'll find that this new alternate setting really is crucial to the development of Age of Ultron. But with the finale fast approaching and still no sign of the titular villain, it's difficult not to feel that the series is back to dragging its heels.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Age of Ultron #8
May 15, 2013
|
|
The artwork is equally haphazard in this issue. Brandon Peterson handles the entire comic, having temporarily transitioned from Ultron's digitized future to this dystopian present. The story is the same as it has been. Some of Peterson's pages look spectacular, especially with the big action sequence as le Fay's armies attack and Stark's Helicarriers begin crashing out of the sky. But Peterson's facial work is too often stiff and jagged. Not that a harsh look is ill-suited to this new landscape, but the emotion of the script is too frequently lost in a mishmash of lines and shadows.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Age of Ultron #9
June 5, 2013
|
|
As for Pacheco, his work is a little flat and lifeless compared to previous chapters. The muted color palette of the past-era scenes, while a clever way of calling back to marvel's Bronze Age past, doesn't do enough to bring life and depth to the pencils. Pacheco's storytelling also comes up short in certain scenes. One page shows a panel of Wolverine sneaking up behind Invisible Woman, followed by another where she's lying on the ground unconscious and he's off on his merry way. This entirely physical exchange falters because it lacks sequential flow.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Age of Ultron #10AI
June 26, 2013
|
|
There are a few odd quirks in this story, such as when Pym looks to the battle with Loki in Avengers #1 as his life's crowning achievement. But regardless, this is a fun read and, like with Avengers Academy before it, a welcome change of pace for such a normally glum character. The larger problem is that this issue gives too little indication of what to expect from Sam Humphries on Avengers A.I. next month. Will he retain this fun and lighthearted approach or strive for something different? That remains to be seen.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Age of Ultron #10
June 19, 2013
|
|
Each sequence is less story and more teaser ad, culminating in a single page spread extolling readers to buy the book in question. Between these sequences and the multiple pages reprinted from Avengers #12.1, it's fair to question why Marvel still charged $3.99 for this comic. The actual Ultron conflict is more or less forgotten by this point. None of the immediate fallout is explored, because as far as this issue shows, there isn't any. The focus is all about the next wave of events and tie-ins. As much as I resented Fear Itself #7 for losing sight of its own story in favor of setting up future books, Age of Ultron #10 is worse.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Age of Ultron vs. Marvel Zombies |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Age of Ultron vs. Marvel Zombies #1
June 24, 2015
|
|
This series succeeds in shining a light on one of the more compelling regions of Battleworld and those unlucky few who call the Deadlands their home. However, this first issue is unfocused and doesn't offer a clear sense of what the book's core struggle will be.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Age of Ultron vs. Marvel Zombies #2
July 30, 2015
|
|
This issue certainly establishes the stakes, though it spends a little too much time exploring the history of Salvation's defenders and poking fun at Hank Pym's "Aw, shucks!" shtick than fleshing out either Ultron's faction or the Marvel Zombies.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Agents Of Atlas (2009) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Agents Of Atlas #1
February 4, 2009
|
|
The backup story, set in the original era of the team and guest-starring Wolverine, is more along the lines of what I want from this book. It's humorous and filled with plenty of sci-fi B-movie cheesiness. It even manages to use its Wolverine appearance to great effect, which is not a particularly common occurrence in these types of stories/ Even the retro-flavored art style seems more suited to the tone of the series. To be fair, I think Carlo Pagulayan turned in some great work with this issue. Particularly thanks to the coloring of Jana Schirmer, his pencils pop in a vibrant way they haven't in some of his recent work. I just find Benton Jew's style to be more along the lines of what this book can and should be. Agents of Atlas shows great promise in its first issue. I'm really just hoping that the book can move from underneath Dark Reign's shadow as Captain Britain did and establish itself as something truly unique in Marvel's catalog.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Agents Of S.H.I.E.L.D. #1 |
Jan 13, 2016
show
|
|
Agents of S.H.I.E.L.D. the comic doesn't do much to live up to the legacy of the TV series. The cast may be similar, but the comic has no clear sense of purpose of a compelling conflict to propel these characters forward. Hopefully that will come with time and we'll see the comic make strides as great as the show once did in its troubled early months.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Air (2008) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Air #1
August 20, 2008
|
|
M.K. Perker is another source of mixed emotions for me. I love his page layouts. Though he relies on a very traditional six panel structure, Perker's work is compelling and easy on the eyes. I only wish his figures were able to measure up. Thanks mostly to his flat, uniform inking style, the characters stand out in odd ways, almost like they were carved out of wood. This was a problem in Cairo as well, but it only becomes worse through the addition of color. I don't know if a separate inker would be able to turn things around, but I'd like to see vertigo give it a try. Air certainly has potential, but it really needs to be held on the runway for maintenance right now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Air #2
September 17, 2008
|
|
Still, this book has improved significantly in just one month. I'm hopeful that it'll continue to do so as the main conflict becomes more clear. We still have a long flight ahead of us, after all.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Air #3
October 15, 2008
|
|
Air has the potential to be something really great. For the time being, though I feel that the series is still struggling to find its rhythm. Call it some early flight turbulence if you like.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Aliens (2009) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Aliens #1
May 27, 2009
|
|
I can see potential in this series. Arcudi and Howard are both talented. The problem is that neither creator really put their talents to good use in this issue. Hopefully that will change soon.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens #3
September 30, 2009
|
|
This newest Aliens comic got off to a very rocky start, but it seems to be doing pretty well for itself now. I'm disappointed we don't have an Aliens book that looks more like an Aliens book should, but at least it satisfies all those baser desires for blood and gore. Perhaps it satisfies them a little too much...
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Aliens vs Predator: Three World War |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Aliens vs Predator: Three World War #3
April 7, 2010
|
|
Though his review of issue #1 was generally positive, Tim ultimately lamented the fact that his inner 10-year-old wasn't tickled by the plot of this book. I didn't find myself disagreeing with him at that stage in the game, but now Jesse Jr. is feeling quite happy and stimulated. And I'm only expecting this story to get more bloody and exciting from here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aliens vs Predator: Three World War #6
September 15, 2010
|
|
The only real weakness in Stradley's final issue is spotty pacing. Certain scenes deserve more room to breathe than they are given. The ending in particular could have sorely used an extra page or two. Unfortunately, Three World War is too flawed to achieve true greatness, but it still provides ample entertainment and leaves the door wide open for future stories. With any luck, Dark Horse will pursue more sequels to this saga. If I can't count on the movies to do this concept any justice, I'll gladly settle for more comics.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Aliens: Dead Orbit #1 |
Apr 26, 2017
show
|
|
Even if Alien: Covenant fails to live up to its promise, at least fans of the franchise are getting one worthwhile Alien story this spring. Dead Orbit is an excellent throwback to the original film, focusing on claustrophobic horror and dread rather than action and spectacle. This is what happens when you give a talented storyteller the reins of a beloved franchise and simply let them go wild on the page.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Aliens: Fire and Stone #2 |
Oct 30, 2014
show
|
|
Oddly enough, this comic is at its least successful when it comes to channeling the tone and horror of the Alien franchise. Between the outdoor jungle setting and the sudden segueways from character interaction to Xenomorph attacks, there isn't room for the sort of creeping, claustrophobic tension you find in the movies.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Aliens: Life and Death #1 |
Sep 22, 2016
show
|
|
The plot is basic and the characters pretty standard Aliens fare, but that doesn't mean the story isn't engaging. Dan Abnett taps into the survival horror aspect while also wrapping this first issue on an intriguing note.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Aliens/Vampirella #1 |
Sep 02, 2015
show
|
|
The idea of Vampirella battling Xenomorphs is definitely enticing, but this first issue does little to capitalize on the potential of this crossover. The best we can hope for is that the series will veer away from formulaic Alien tropes and make better use of its heroine in future installments.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
All-New All-Different Avengers |
10 issues
show
|
|
|
All-New All-Different Avengers #4
January 27, 2016
|
|
All-New, All-Different Avengers is still struggling to find its footing as it transitions from its first story arc to the second. The art quality improve in this issue, and Waid's characterization of Thor is a highlight. Unfortunately, the general team dynamic hasn't come together, and little about the conflict in this series is very remarkable.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New All-Different Avengers #5
February 10, 2016
|
|
All-New, All-Different Avengers lacks a compelling villain right now, so it's good to see that the core team dynamic is becoming strong enough to offset that flaw. Waid's characterization of Vision alone makes this book worth reading, but the improving visual quality, the general team banter and the Ms. Marvel-centric material don't hurt either.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New All-Different Avengers #6
February 25, 2016
|
|
All-New, All-Different Avengers has made some clear improvements over the course of this first story arc. The general team dynamic is stronger, and the series is in a better visual place as well. Unfortunately, this issue still caps off the arc on a fairly underwhelming note. There are still flaws that need addressing, but with the Avengers Standoff crossover coming up it's not clear how soon that will happen.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New All-Different Avengers #7
March 24, 2016
|
|
Basically, it's the character drama rather than the action that distinguishes this series at the moment. That's partly because Adam Kubert's art in this issue isn't up to the book's recent standard.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New All-Different Avengers #9
May 12, 2016
|
|
Waid plays around with time travel in small, fun ways here, but the script doesn't make enough of an effort to explain what exactly is happening with Vision or why. The script is a bit choppy as a result, but it ultimately sets the team on two divergent but equally intriguing paths.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New All-Different Avengers #11
June 30, 2016
|
|
This current story arc is the first to really tap into what I was hoping for from All-New, All-Different Avengers in the first place, which is a combination of fun, old-school-style Avengers threats mixed with an unpredictable "rookie vs. veteran" team dynamic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New All-Different Avengers #14
September 8, 2016
|
|
While ostensibly a Civil War II tie-in, this issue is more a launching pad for Jeremy Whitley and Elsa Charretier's upcoming series The Unstoppable Wasp. Which is just as well, as the script tend to be at its weakest when it attempts to draw in the events of Civil War II.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
All-New Captain America (2014) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
All-New Captain America #1
November 12, 2014
|
|
Marvel's latest Captain America relaunch is off to a successful start. Remender and Immonen waste no time before diving in the action and showcasing Sam Wilson in action. This issue looks great, and the dynamic between Sam and his new partner help give the series some extra flavor. The Hydra conflict may be pretty basic for now, but there's every reason to expect this new series to develop into something special.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Captain America #4
February 19, 2015
|
|
Rick Remender was wise to throw Sam into the deep end with this united Hydra enemy. It's allowed the hero to shine and stand well apart from the other characters to wield the shield.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Captain America #5
March 19, 2015
|
|
If you need proof that Rick Remender is aware of the criticisms lobbied against Sam Wilson becoming Captain America, the first page of this issue will do the trick. Remender continues to demonstrate Sam's worthiness both in word and deed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
All-New Captain America: Fear Him #1 |
Feb 05, 2015
show
|
|
The strong writing keeps the story moving, even as the art and wonky perspective threaten to slow it down again. Visually, this comic can't really measure up to the core All-New Captain America book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
All-New Classic Archie: Your Pal Archie #1 |
Jul 27, 2017
show
|
|
If you pine for the simpler, more innocent Archie Comics of yore, then Your Pal Archie is the comic for you. This new series offers basically the exact same take on the Riverdale crew that fans have seen from those grocery store digests for decades. Simple, innocent, all-ages fun, in other words.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
All-New Doop |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
All-New Doop #1
April 9, 2014
|
|
As I was reading this issue, I did worry the premise would leave Doop marginalized within his own story too much. Do we really need five issues of him toying around behind the scenes of a completely different X-Men storyline? Luckily, the final pages deliver a major shake-up and promise that the mini-series will be shifting in a different direction. This is shaping up to be a very enjoyable and stylish addition to the X-Men franchise.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Doop #3
June 26, 2014
|
|
t's unfortunate to see David LaFuente joined by a fill-in artist in this issue, but the good news is that Jacopo Camagni is able to adhere to LaFuente's distinctive aesthetic and slip in and out of the issue with a minimum of fuss.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Doop #4
July 24, 2014
|
|
Needless to say, the book remains as entertaining as ever. And it's great to see Milligan making use of his old X-Statix cast as well. There's even a tease at a possible X-Statix revival. But it does feel like this book has lost sight of its original conceit - exploring how Doop appeared 'in the margins' of Battle of the Atom. Not that this change in direction is even a bad one, but the book does feel unfocused.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
All-New Ghost Rider |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
All-New Ghost Rider #1
March 26, 2014
|
|
Time will tell if All-New Ghost Rider can find more sales traction than the previous book. But at least the new creative team are off on the right foot. All-New Ghost Rider offers an engaging, accessible entry point into the franchise that doesn't trip over itself trying to introduce the new hero. And in the tradition of new series like She-Hulk and Moon Knight, the unique visual style immediately sets this Ghost Rider apart from the ones that have come before. Hopefully this series can only get better as the creators work through the origin story and further establish Robbie's world.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Ghost Rider #4
June 26, 2014
|
|
It's easy to ridicule this new take on Ghost Rider based on the hyper-stylized art and the fact that he doesn't drive a motorcycle, but the series is coming along nicely. Tradd Moore's art is easily the biggest draw still, packing enough energy and expressive character design to fill three or four normal comics.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Ghost Rider #5
July 31, 2014
|
|
All-New Ghost Rider's first story arc wraps up with a finale that focuses more on action and spectacle than providing firm answers or explaining the new hero's true connection to the Ghost Rider mantle. But with an artist like Tradd Moore rendering the book, would you want something different?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Ghost Rider #6
August 20, 2014
|
|
Felipe Smith's second story arc sees Robbie settling into his role as a supernatural avenger. And everything is coming up Robbie lately. He's making good money by using his Ghost Rider powers to win races. He's able to spend more time with his brother. The only one not happy in this equation is his spectral partner Eli. Above all, this issue is great at building a sense of dread. Everything in Robbie's life is so positive that it's obviously going to collapse on him sooner rather than later. The question is how badly. Robbie is still very early in his hero's journey, and he has yet to learn the important lesson about power and responsibility (something Smith acknowledges in a very direct way here). The conflict Smith begins building isn't all that memorable aside from a purely visual standpoint, but clearly bigger things are brewing underneath.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Ghost Rider #11
February 12, 2015
|
|
The dynamic between Robbie Reyes and his younger brother has become far more compelling thanks to the latter's recent personality shift. Couple that with dark new revelations about Robbie's ghostly partner and its plans for the two brothers, and the drama is really mounting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Ghost Rider #12
March 26, 2015
|
|
All-New Ghost Rider is another All-New Marvel NOW title reaching a premature end. To his credit, writer/co-artist Felipe Smith doesn't try to close the book on Robbie Reyes or wrap up every single loose end in these 20 pages. This issue reads more like the end of an arc than a series finale.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
All-New Guardians of the Galaxy |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
All-New Guardians of the Galaxy #1
May 3, 2017
|
|
Marvel's relaunched Guardians comic isn't quite as different as its title would have you believe. In fact, it pushes the franchise in an even more movie-inspired direction. But it does offer plenty of fun featuring Star-Lord and the gang., as well as a terrific sense of visual style. For now, that's enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Guardians of the Galaxy #3
June 8, 2017
|
|
This issue may raise more questions than it answers, but those questions are more than enough to hold the reader's attention. The fact that this issue also goes a long way towards showcasing how this series will diverge from the movies rather than echo them certainly doesn't hurt.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
All-New Invaders |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
All-New Invaders #1
January 22, 2014
|
|
No, this isn't a flawless debut for the latest Invaders revival. But I can forgive this issue's storytelling missteps in light of the sheer ambition and fun already apparent in the story. Robinson and Pugh aren't simply dusting off an old team and coasting on a wave of nostalgia. They're trying to do something distinctly different with the Invaders, and that alone is enough to capture my interest.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Invaders #7
July 10, 2014
|
|
For this series' Original Sin tie-in, James Robinson has revealed that the Invaders failed to stop the dropping of the atomic bombs that ended WWII. That premise is a lot more interesting than what is actually delivered in issue #7.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
All-New Marvel NOW Point One #1 |
Jan 08, 2014
show
|
|
It's a little weird that this issue has no connective threads or build-up to Orginal Sin, especially considering that the first Point One issue teased Original Sin over two years ago. But that aside, this issue is well worth the price of admission, and serves as a strong showcase for Marvel's 2014 lineup.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
All-New Ultimates |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
All-New Ultimates #1
April 10, 2014
|
|
Depending what you're looking for in All-New Ultimates #1, you may walk away disappointed. This is less a replacement for the classic Ultimates team and more an extension of Ultimate Spider-Man. But while this first issue is held back by some strange storytelling choices and a generally choppy script, at least it tries new things and doesn't come across as just another in a long line of teen superhero comics. It adheres to the promise of the Ultimate Universe being a home for new and unexpected kinds of stories.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Ultimates #6
August 21, 2014
|
|
I really wish I could enjoy this series, based both on Michael Fiffe's pedigree and the great work that was done setting up this team on the previous volume of Ultimate Spider-Man. But All-New Ultimates continues to disappoint after six issues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Ultimates #12
January 14, 2015
|
|
But to his credit, Fiffe caps off a solid character arc for Bombshell. Lana has emerged a stronger and more fully realized character thanks to this series. The decision to frame this arc from her viewpoint was an inspired one. The final few pages focus on Lana and the rest of the team bonding as a family unit, and they reinforce the great dynamic uniting these heroes. It's a shame the book never built a more engaging conflict around that dynamic, and that this may be the last we see of this particular incarnation of the Ultimates.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
All-New Wolverine |
25 issues
show
|
|
|
All-New Wolverine Annual #1
August 31, 2016
|
|
If all you want from this issue is a fun, goofy team-up between two of Marvel's most prominent heroines, you won't leave disappointed. This comic looks great and delivers a steady stream of body-swap comedy. But given how well the main series has managed to blend humor and emotional drama, it's disappointing that the annual feels so light and inconsequential by comparison. There's too much missed potential with this crossover.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Wolverine #1
November 11, 2015
|
|
The Wolverine franchise has finally found its bearing, and all it took was a completely new character underneath that distinctive mask. This first issue is lean and fast-paced, tossing readers right into the heat of battle and proving the former X-23 worthy of inheriting the mantle of Wolverine.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Wolverine #2
November 25, 2015
|
|
There's a real momentum to this series even so early into its lifespan. Taylor's pacing is quick, but not to the point where he does the characters or conflict a disservice.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Wolverine #3
December 31, 2015
|
|
All-New Wolverine has the distinction of being the best of Marvel's new X-books so far. This issue continues that trend, as Tom Taylor digs deeper into the relationship between Laura and her clones and pits them against Taskmaster.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Wolverine #4
January 14, 2016
|
|
In the end, Strange's role in this book might be fleeting, but he offers a fun change of pace for the series while also helping to reinforce the bond between these "sisters."
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Wolverine #5
February 11, 2016
|
|
The Janet/Laura team-up in this issue is fun to read (who would have ever expected Laura to don an Ant-Man suit and go cruising through a human body?), but the heartfelt bond between the new Wolverine and her sisters is where the real heart of this issues rests.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Wolverine #6
March 10, 2016
|
|
In the end, this issue accomplished exactly what the finale of an opening story arc should - it closes the door on one conflict while laying the groundwork for darker and more dramatic battles to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Wolverine #8
May 19, 2016
|
|
Somehow this series manages to be the silliest and most entertaining of the X-Men line while simultaneously offering some of the deepest characterization.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Wolverine #9
June 2, 2016
|
|
You might as well ignore the "Road to Civil War II" banner, because this comic has no tangible connection to the events of that big crossover. What it does have is plenty of wacky fun and adventure as Laura literally climbs into the belly of the beast in order to rescue Old Man Logan from being digested by Fin Fang Foom.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Wolverine #11
August 18, 2016
|
|
All-New Wolverine's Civil War II tie-in arc is unfolding in the same way it is in so many other books. Ulysses has a vision about a specific hero, and then everybody panics. As has been the case from the start, however, it's the top-notch characterization that makes this book shine.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Wolverine #13
October 6, 2016
|
|
The original "Enemy of the State" was a watershed storyline for Wolverine, influencing many stories that followed in the years to come. The hope is that "Enemy of the State II" will do the same for the new Wolverine. So far, this arc seems to be on the right track.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Wolverine #17
February 9, 2017
|
|
Much like the issue in the original "Enemy of the State" that focused on S.H.I.E.L.D.'s efforts to de-program Wolverine, this issue hinges on the attempt to break Laura's weakness to her control scent. The difference being that Taylor frames the ordeal as an introspective, even intimate battle that hinges on the sisterly bond between Laura and Gabby. It's a firm reminder that, for all the mistakes this series can make at times, Tom Taylor really knows how to write Laura Kinney.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Wolverine #18
March 8, 2017
|
|
It's a shame the art in All-New Wolverine #18 isn't more dynamic, because otherwise this issue manages to deliver a strong finish to "Enemy of the State II" and the first 18 months oft he series as a whole. It embraces positivity rather than darkness and it paves the way for a newer, more hopeful era for the new Wolverine.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Wolverine #19
April 6, 2017
|
|
All that really matters is that the new status quo allows both Laura and her younger sister Gabby to serve as superhero partners. Their relationship continues to be the driving force of the series and the main reason All-New Wolverine is one of Marvel's most purely enjoyable superhero comics.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Wolverine #22
July 6, 2017
|
|
This issue continues to mine gold from the wonderful Gabby/Deadpool partnership, while also making the most of Laura's new team-up with the Guardians of the Galaxy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Wolverine #23
August 10, 2017
|
|
Tom Taylor and Leonard Kirk continue to make the most of the Wolverine/Guardians of the Galaxy team-up here, even using character traits like Drax's newfound pacifism and Rocket's hatred of animal lab testing to their advantage.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Wolverine #25
October 12, 2017
|
|
There's some concern that the series is treading into overly familiar territory as Tom Taylor again digs into Laura's tragic past. However, the addition of Daken and the emphasis on lingering threads from the Wolverine Origins days does help to spice up the new conflict. And certainly, the unexpected cliffhanger promises to shake up Laura's world in a big way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Wolverine #27
November 23, 2017
|
|
This series has received a real shot in the arm with Marvel Legacy. Part of that simply boils down to the change in artist. Juan Cabal's dynamic, expressive style gives All-New Wolverine a sense of energy it's been lacking lately.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New Wolverine #28
December 14, 2017
|
|
I still have certain reservations about the "Orphans of X" (including their weird knack for taking down some of the biggest heavy-hitters in the Marvel U), but overall things continue to look up for this series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
All-New X-Factor |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
All-New X-Factor #1
January 8, 2014
|
|
Carmine Di Giandomenico provides a new look and feel to go with the new direction and status quo. Everything is light and angular, befitting a corporate-led mutant team. Di Giandomenico's storytelling shines best early on, during Gambit's botched robbery attempt. The coloring is the one visual flaw right now. Between the wardrobes and odd lighting choices, characters often appear almost monochrome in many panels.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Factor #9
June 5, 2014
|
|
While the story quickly heats up this month, the pacing does seem almost too fast for its own good (especially considering the pointless opening sequence). But between David's characterization and Carmine Di Giandomenico's expressive art, there's plenty to like here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Factor #10
July 3, 2014
|
|
The current X-Factor storyline has definitely picked up the pace, though not quite to the point where it proves detrimental to the plot like it did last month.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Factor #12
August 21, 2014
|
|
As much as All-New X-Factor has read like a clean break for the team from David's past work, this material really bridges the gap between the old and the new and furthers Pietro along the path to redemption. It's a rewarding read after a decade of seeing Pietro stumble and fall.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Factor #16
November 6, 2014
|
|
With this series due for cancellation in a couple months, it's good to see that Peter David isn't letting this AXIS tie-in derail the book's momentum or the focus on character relationships.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
All-New X-Men (2012) |
21 issues
show
|
|
|
All-New X-Men Annual #1
December 24, 2014
|
|
Basically, if you enjoyed Uncanny X-Men Annual #1 earlier this month, you'll get a kick out of this one, too. It remains a treat to see Andrea Sorrentino working his magic on the Marvel Universe.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #6
January 16, 2013
|
|
Even the temporary (I hope) loss of Immonen can't prevent this new series from firing on all cylinders. Bendis is weaving a very engaging tale that celebrates the long history of the X-Men while also managing to appeal to people who have no prior attachment to the characters.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #18
November 13, 2013
|
|
Stuart Immonen remains on board in the aftermath of Battle of the Atom. Naturally, his work is clean, engaging, and visually dynamic even though the script involves little more than talking heads. His art is as much responsible for differentiating this series as any other element. It's good to have a less stylized and more traditionally superheroic look at Cyclops' faction of mutants to offset the art in Uncanny X-Men.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #19
November 27, 2013
|
|
All-New X-Men #19 isn't a bad comic, though the art frequently leaves a lot to be desired. It's more that this series is lacking in the excitement and ambition that defined it prior to Battle of the Atom. Hopefully that will change quickly enough when the crossover begins.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #21
January 15, 2014
|
|
Perhaps this new Stryker will eventually emerge as a worthwhile X-villain. There's little doubt after this issue that Bendis has plenty more planned for him. But for now, I'm just as happy to move onto the big Guardains of the Galaxy crossover storyline.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #22.NOW
January 22, 2014
|
|
But the good news is that Stuart Immonen is back on board as artist. Given how rushed Battle of the Atom was towards the end, it's been a while since we've seen Immonen in top form with this series. His talent for rendering epic action and expressive, emotional figures is as impressive now as it was at the beginning of All-New X-Men. Immonen is in good company as he works alongside Sara Pichelli with this crossover, and I'm eager to see the final product collected in one package.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #23
February 12, 2014
|
|
Not to mention that Stuart Immonen is delivering some amazing visuals. Bendis' script gives Immonen a wide variety of material to work with. There are intimate emotional scenes that hinge on facial work. There's slapstick, comedic banter. There's epic space warfare and explosions abound. If we've learned anything from this crossover so far, it's that there's nothing Immonen can't draw impeccably well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #24
March 12, 2014
|
|
The issue manages to function on a deeper level thanks to Stuart Immonen's art. Immonen has been on his A-game all throughout this crossover. He's able to convey a great deal about Jean's emotional turmoil through his bold page layouts and nuanced facial work. Similarly, Immonen is able to convey a great deal about Oracle and her conflicted role in the story simply through facial work.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #25
April 9, 2014
|
|
And the varied artwork helps a great deal. I don't know that this is "the greatest artist roster ever assembled" as the cover proclaims, but it's a mighty fine assortment either way. The issue features a nice mix of classic X-Men pencillers (Art Adams, Paul Smith) and artists you wouldn't normally expect to see on a Marvel book (Bruce Timm, Jill Thompson). These artists contribute a variety of splash pages and more traditional sequential work scattered in among David Marquez's framing sequence, with the overall flow and effect working better than the similarly focused Ultimate Spider-Man #200 from last week.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #27
May 14, 2014
|
|
All-New X-Men is always at its best with Stuart Immonen providing the art. This issue allows Immonen to tackle a wide range of material, from a dramatic birthing scene to dimly lit, underground battles to neon-drenched scenes of the future Marvel U. Maybe none of the material is quite as epic as what we saw in the "Trial of Jean Grey" crossover, but who knows where this arc will venture before the end?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #28
June 11, 2014
|
|
And once again, Stuart Immonen is at the top of his game. His work takes on a slightly darker tone than usual with this arc, especially in the shadowy future scenes as the Brotherhood plot and scheme. The constant back-and-forth in the script helps keep the story humming along, and Immonen's shadowy scenes frequently open up into widescreen displays of psychic fury. That Immonen can keep up this level f detail and craft coming right on the heels of the "Trial of Jean Grey" crossover is very impressive.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #29
July 9, 2014
|
|
Issue #29 also serves as Stuart Immonen's swan song on the book, unfortunately. His vibrant, dynamic art will be sorely missed. This issue does show a few rough edges in terms of loose facial details and such, but that's to be expected considering how many pages Immonen has tackled in recent months. He still brings an awesome sense of scale and drama to every page, and the interplay between the real world and the psychic plane helps distinguish this issue even further.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #30
August 13, 2014
|
|
It's unfortunate that the ending sequence has to come along and kill the groove the issue had achieved. Bendis finishes the story with a rehash of a scene from Uncanny X-Men #23. It feels out of place and not terribly relevant to the other story segments.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #31
August 27, 2014
|
|
Mahmud Asrar makes the jump from Wolverine and the X-Men to illustrate this arc. It's a bit of a thankless job considering the impossibly high standard artists like Stuart Immonen and Sara Pichelli have set. Asrar's art isn't on that level in terms of energy or refinement, but he does a respectable job of maintaining the series' aesthetic. Some pages look great and feature bold action, while others suffer from loose details or reused panels.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #34
December 17, 2014
|
|
Mahmud Asrar has some stiff competition with this book, coming on the heels of greats like Stuart Immonen and David Marquez. But he's also coming into his own as a Marvel artist. Some of Asrar's pages are dynamic and detailed enough that it's almost tough to tell Immonen ever left. The Iceman scenes in particular showcase Asrar's storytelling abilities. Other pages never hit that level, though, and at times his facial work is too muddy and simplistic to keep up with Bendis' dialogue-heavy approach.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #36
February 11, 2015
|
|
There's a sense that Bendis is offering the Ultimate X-Men one final moment of triumph before Secret Wars swoops in and upends their world for good. Speaking of which, a number of teases in this issue call to question just how directly this arc is setting up the events of Secret Wars. But more intriguing is a development at the very end that looks to dictate the course of this series in its final months.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #37
March 12, 2015
|
|
Brian Bendis uses this issue to explore one of the more oft-ignored character dynamics in his X-men run - Emma Frost and young Jean Grey. And even if this chapter does little to advance the larger plot, it's worth a read for that element alone.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #38
February 25, 2015
|
|
But again, at least the art impresses. This issue does stand out in the sense that previous Black Vortex chapters did a solid job of adhering to the aesthetic laid out by Ed McGuinness in the Alpha issue. Andrea Sorrentino's style is a far cry from McGuinness'. That's a flaw in the greater context of the crossover, but on its own merits this issue really shines in the visual department. Sorrentino does cosmic spectacle every bit as well as gritty superhero drama. The transformed heroes especially stand out thanks to Sorrentino's striking figure work and the general surreal tone he generates. Brian Bendis may well have found his next great collaborator in Sorrentino.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #39
March 18, 2015
|
|
Andrea Sorrentino's distinctive style may put him at odds with the rest of the artists working on this crossover, but on his own merits he's a great fit for this sort of cosmic drama. His dynamic layouts shine best during the scenes of carnage and destruction. During the more emotionally charged scenes, he brings a subtler touch that emphasizes body language and emotion. A lot is conveyed in simple looks between Kitty and Star-Lord or Cyclops and Jean.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men: Special #1
October 2, 2013
|
|
Much of the appeal with this issue rests on the fact that it's Anka's first full-length sequential work at Marvel. He doesn't disappoint, bringing the same sense of energy and strong design work that have characterized his covers. The characters are simple but expressive, and the overall style manages to pay homage to the X-Men's Silver Age roots while still offering the sort of ferocious action you expect from modern superhero fare. We'll just have to see how well the crossover holds up as other artists tackle the remaining two issues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
All-New X-Men (2015) |
11 issues
show
|
|
|
All-New X-Men Annual #1
November 24, 2016
|
|
This series is often at its best when it focuses on smaller, character-driven stories rather than trying to contribute to the mess that is current X-Men continuity. Even without regular writer Dennis Hopeless on board, this issue taps into that appeal.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #1
December 2, 2015
|
|
All-New X-Men #1 doesn't race right out of the gate like the previous series did in its first issue, but this is an enjoyable debut all the same. Hopeless shows a strong handle on his cast of mutant heroes, while Bagley is right at home in this corner of the Marvel U. However, the needlessly slow pace and emphasis on team-building over plot do hold this issue back.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #6
March 17, 2016
|
|
This issue continues Dennis Hopeless efforts to use the Blob conflict as a means of exploring each character's state of mind. That means there's a lot of clunky, ponderous introspection and not a great deal of plot progression.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #7
March 31, 2016
|
|
Not only is this issue emotionally gut-wrenching, it's also very claustrophobic and unsettling thanks to to catacomb setting and the physical suffering Cyclops endures.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #8
April 14, 2016
|
|
This issue serves as a transitional chapter as the books shifts from the opening conflict with The Blob and Toad to the events of "The Apocalypse Wars." Frankly, it reads more like a filler issue than an integral addition to the series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #9
May 12, 2016
|
|
All-New X-Men might just be the most vital addition to the growing Apocalypse wars crossover, given the fact that one of the core team members is a teenage clone of the world's oldest and most evil mutant. At the same time, it's unfortunate that this series is covering the same ground as its sister X-books.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #10
June 9, 2016
|
|
This issue explores what happens when Evan buddies up with the teenage En Sabah Nur and realizes that even Apocalypse himself was once an ordinary, even loving boy. It makes for an interesting reality check, but this issue doesn't do much more than reiterate Evan's shock and confusion and chronicle the ancient Egyptian equivalent of a beach trip.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #12
August 11, 2016
|
|
Though the Laura/Warren romance is a major focus here, it's actually the Laura/Scott dynamic that stands out the most. The two have developed an entertaining friendship under Hopeless' hand.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #13
September 15, 2016
|
|
This series has had plenty of ups and downs, but at its best it showcases what's possible with such an eclectic team of teenage X-Men. This issue serves as a high point for Dennis Hopeless and Mark Bagley's run so far.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-New X-Men #19
March 30, 2017
|
|
The hope was that Dennis Hopeless would be able to wrap up his series on a high note in the aftermath of IvX. Sadly, that doesn't turn out to be the case.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
All-Star Batman |
8 issues
show
|
|
|
All-Star Batman #1
August 10, 2016
|
|
It just doesn't feel right not having Scott Snyder writing Batman. This series fills the void that's existed since the end of Batman Vol. 2, but more importantly, it shows that Snyder still has plenty of tricks up his sleeve when it comes to the character. Plus, this issue is worth reading solely for the gorgeous visuals provided by John Romita, Jr., Declan Shalvey and the rest of the art team. It's just a shame this is the one Batman comic that isn't twice-monthly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-Star Batman #2
September 14, 2016
|
|
No matter how many great Batman comics DC publishes, Scott Snyder's work will always stand out. This issue offers a rousing road trip adventure, plenty of impeccably rendered action, dramatic foreshadowing of things to come and a dash of real world allegory to boot. All these ingredients combine to from an eclectic and very enjoyable Batman comic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-Star Batman #3
October 13, 2016
|
|
Throw in the return of a fan-favorite Batman character and an increased role for Duke, and this issue serves as a new benchmark for the still-young series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-Star Batman #4
November 10, 2016
|
|
Needless to say, a story that already felt plenty timely is only growing more so in light of recent political developments. But this issue also has plenty of brutal, hard-hitting action to offer as Batman's physical gauntlet grows more harrowing and The Beast re-enters the fray.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-Star Batman #6
January 11, 2017
|
|
The Batman franchise really offers an embarrassment of riches these days. This issue succeeds in revitalizing a villain whose stock had plummeted in recent years, while also serving as a terrific reunion for Scott Snyder and his Detective Comics collaborators. It's just a shame Jock won't be sticking around longer.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-Star Batman #7
February 8, 2017
|
|
If All-Star Batman were nothing more than an excuse for Scott Snyder to work with a who's who lineup of talented artists, the series would be well worth following, This issue offers a gorgeous take on the Batman/Poison Ivy dynamic courtesy of Tula Lotay. But there's plenty of depth to this story, to boot, as All-Star Batman continues to be a showcase for the enduring appeal of Batman's villains.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-Star Batman #8
March 16, 2017
|
|
This issue finds a strong emotional hook in the way it explores themes of anxiety and self-doubt and forces Batman to question even fundamental truths about himself and his past. Giuseppe Camuncoli's art matches the story well, as he's able to transition from a relatively straightforward superhero style to something far more twisted and surreal over the course of this issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-Star Batman #9
April 19, 2017
|
|
"Ends of the Earth" wraps with what is easily one of the strongest chapters of All-Star Batman to date. This issue manages to drag the Dark Knight out of his comfort zone even as it offers a powerful meditation on the end of the world and the power the Batman symbol holds to light the way in dark, confusing times.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
All-Star Batman and Robin the Boy Wonder #10 |
Sep 24, 2008
show
|
|
I'm sure some readers will disagree with a lot of what I've said here. All I ask is that you consider what you really enjoy about this book. To me, All-Star Batman & Robin is a joke. Just because it lets you in on the joke doesn't mean you should be laughing along with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
All-Star Section 8 |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
All-Star Section 8 #1
June 10, 2015
|
|
Artist John McCrea doesn't miss a beat with these characters. His vision of the Cauldron is both outlandishly cartoony and slathered in grime and grit. It's a very unique visual sensibility relative to the rest of DC's comics. McCrea crams in various visual gags as well, with the standout example being several homages to classic Batman artists like Neal Adams and Kelley Jones. It appears these homages were directly lifted from the old comics in question rather than recreated, but they're integrated in an effective and hilarious way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-Star Section 8 #2
July 9, 2015
|
|
John McCrea's art is great at channeling and enhancing the humor of Ennis' script. His pages are full of gritty, grimy charm and dynamic, almost Tex Avery-esque storytelling. But beneath all of the goofiness, there's not much of a story to be had with this book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-Star Section 8 #3
August 13, 2015
|
|
John McCrea's art shines once again, contrasting the high-minded heroism of Martian Manhunter with the gritty, grimy, downright filthy world that this team occupies. But now that we're halfway through this comic, maybe it's time to get the plot in gear?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
All-Star Western |
13 issues
show
|
|
|
All-Star Western #5
January 25, 2012
|
|
Hopefully the writers will pick up the pace of the main story in issue #6, as reading about Hex and Arkham bickering and battling Bat people can only sustain the book for so long.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-Star Western #6
February 22, 2012
|
|
The Barbary Ghost backup tale proves entertaining in its final chapter, if also a bit rushed in its own way. Luckily, the story leaves room for more adventures with this unique Western heroine. And both the lead and backup features boast impressive visuals. Moritat delivers some of his moodiest and most consistent work of the series to date. And Phil Winslade's bold figures and striking imagery go a long way towards elevating the Barbary Ghost pages. Hopefully he can continue to play a role in this series as it moves forward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-Star Western #7
March 28, 2012
|
|
Unfortunately, Moritat's artwork isn't really up to snuff this month. His style seems to vary quite a bit from month to month, and in this case it becomes far more loose scratchy, with flat characters that don't do enough to convey action and motion. The art in the backup feature is far stronger and more refined in comparison. Still, this issue goes a long way towards proving that All-Star Western has strong legs beyond the Batman connections.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-Star Western #8
April 25, 2012
|
|
All-Star Western is doing well for itself at the moment. The only question is whether the imminent Night of the Owls crossover will derail the plot or enhance it further.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-Star Western #11
July 25, 2012
|
|
On the plus side, the new backup feature this month is particularly memorable. The writers continue their Wild West-ification of modern DC heroes by offering up a new version of Doctor Thirteen. This take is basically an amalgamation of Sherlock Holmes and Teddy Roosevelt, which is every bit as awesome as that sounds. This segment has a fun horror vibe as Thirteen clashes with a Headless Horseman-esque villain named the Haunted Highwayman. Scott Kolins once again proves that his style is well-suited to the horror realm. Hopefully Doctor Thirteen can enjoy more of a lasting presence in the series beyond this short feature.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-Star Western #12
August 22, 2012
|
|
Fianlly, the writers wrap up their short revamp of Doctor Thirteen in the backup feature. The backup loses some of the fun factor it had in the previous chapter, as the story takes a decidedly grim turn. Even so, there's a lot to love about the idea of a Teddy Roosevelt-esque hero who battles evil with brains and common sense. Scott Kolins provides a bold, simple, but shadowy look for the story that suits the script well. More than any backup so far, I hope to see this Doctor Thirteen material return in a larger capacity down the road.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-Star Western #15
January 2, 2013
|
|
The current Tomahawk backup is notable not for the script, which is fairly by-the-numbers and a little overwrought at ties, but for the visuals. Phil Winslade delivers panel after panel of bold, energetic action. The strip looks like a lost relic of DC's classic Western era in many ways, but this is hardly a bad thing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-Star Western #16
January 30, 2013
|
|
The Tomahawk backup makes up for the sporadic art quality, though. Phil Winslade's dramatic depiction of American Indian warfare is as gorgeous as anything you'll see in a DC book this week. The story here is nothing terribly special. But for a book where the visuals are too rarely a draw in either the main feature or the backups, this sudden boost in quality is welcome indeed. I'd love nothing more than to see Winslade take over the main feature for a while and give Moritat some time to focus on the finer details that his pages can often lack.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-Star Western #17
February 27, 2013
|
|
The backup feature is a bit more well-rounded. Here, Palmiotti and Gray introduce readers to the 19th Century incarnation of Stormwatch. The star of this opening chapter is that era's Century Baby, Jenny Future. As much as this backup could be viewed as a rehash of Demon Knights in a different time period, all that really matters is that it offers a fun blend of Wild West adventure and steampunk aesthetic. I'm very much looking forward to seeing this version of Stormwatch take shape in subsequent chapters.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-Star Western #18
March 27, 2013
|
|
The backup feature is particularly strong this month, as it always is when Palmiotti and Gray focus on Doctor Thirteen. If Teddy Roosevelt were a DC superhero, Doctor Thirteen is pretty much what you'd get. Entertaining in its own right, this segment also acts as a piece in a larger puzzle as the writers continue assembling the 19th Century incarnation of Stormwatch. The visuals in this segment aren't terribly memorable, but Thirteen's antics alone are well worth the price of admission.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-Star Western #19
April 24, 2013
|
|
Staz Johnson's pencils show a flair that is sometimes lacking in Moritat's work in the main story. Johnson offers up some dynamic page construction and framing that, coupled with the moody inking and coloring, effectively blend Wild West action with a more foreboding sense of horror. I'm eager to see where these backup features are headed once the full roster is finally assembled.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-Star Western #22
July 25, 2013
|
|
The shift to the present allows Moritat a chance to branch out a great deal from the usual dusty landscapes and seedy bar rooms of past storylines. Luckily, Gotham is seedy enough that his textured style is still a strong fit. As usual, there's a fair amount of discrepancy in the detail from panel to panel. Some panels see Moritat devote painstaking attention ti every scar and crag on Hex's face, while others feature characters that are little more than loose outlines. But when Moritat is on top of his game, he paints a picture of Gotham that's tough to beat.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
All-Star Western #34
August 27, 2014
|
|
Needless to say, the resolution satisfies. And Hex's adventures have never looked better thanks to the Cooke/Stewart team-up. Cooke is a master storyteller, and his clean, elegant line-work is every bit as home in the Wild West as it is rendering DC's heroic age or the seedy crime drama of the Parker graphic novels. If this series had to go, at least it was able to go out on a tremendous high note.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Alpha Flight #1 |
Jun 15, 2011
show
|
|
Fear Itself has done this new series no real favors. Luckily, it doesn't appear as though the book will be dealing so directly with that event after this issue, instead focusing on its own characters and conflicts. As long as that proves to be the case, Alpha Flight should have no problem living up to its full potential.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Amazing Mary Jane #1 |
Oct 23, 2019
show
|
|
Despite arriving at just the right time, The Amazing Mary Jane #1 doesn't exactly live up to its name.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man (1999) |
40 issues
show
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man Annual #37
May 26, 2010
|
|
But quirks aside, this annual manages to be quite a bit of fun. Were it priced at the expected $4.99 level, I might have a hard time recommending it. Luckily, Marvel is only charging $3.99. With many current books asking that much for far less content, I see no reason not to give this annual a shot. The Gauntlet may be a particularly strong example of how engrossing Peter Parker's life becomes in its darkest moments, but even Spider-Man needs a break now and again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man Annual #39
May 30, 2012
|
|
All told, this actually isn't a bad issue to hand a new reader curious about the current status quo of Spider-Man and his world. At $4 for 40+ pages, it's certainly a better value than most books the Big Two put out. Still, the script never reaches its true dramatic potential, and that's a shame.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #547
January 16, 2008
|
|
More than anything, I'd like a few more answers regarding Spidey's new status quo. I've been compiling a growing list of questions regarding the many changes to his history which, at this point, could probably fill a novel. I need to know that Marvel isn't simply building towards a big "Spider-Man is really a Skrull" revelation later this year before I can allow myself to become fully invested in a promising but flawed new direction for the character.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #551
February 20, 2008
|
|
The worst part is that, instead of taking more time to explore the Menace mystery in the next arc, we'll be subjected to yet another new villain. It's nice to have a fun, relatively happy-go-lucky Spider-Man again, but the Brand New Day approach clearly values style over substance. If I don't see more improvement in the coming quarter, I fear a pink slip may be in order.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #553
March 12, 2008
|
|
I'm doing my best to keep my spirits up as far as Brand New Day is concerned. The next arc definitely sounds intriguing, even without its contents being alluded to on every other page of this issue. However, I can't keep wading through arcs like this in hopes of finding something better at the other end of the tunnel.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #555
April 2, 2008
|
|
Sure, the villains (what little we see of them) come across as goofy, and the Wolverine guest appearance is a bit pointless, but this is by far the most fun I've had with BND so far. It seems a lot of seasoned Spidey writers could learn a thing or two from the relative rookie Wells.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #557
April 16, 2008
|
|
As for Wells, his dialogue is as amusing and well-crafted as ever. However I was just struck by a few odd lapses of story logic (something that seems to be all-too common in Brand New Day) and an ending that lacks the necessary oomph. Other than advancing a few mundane details of Peter's life (he has a roommate now! Yippee!) it can be argued that nothing of consequence happened in this brief arc. Consequences be damned, though. I'm just glad that, for three weeks, Spidey once again became the headline character he deserves to be.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #561
June 4, 2008
|
|
Those pluses aside, this issue would have fared a whole lot worse if it wasn't for Marcos Martin. Martin is, put simply, one of the best artists to handle Spidey in many years. His art is fluid, dynamic, ad everything you could hope for in a Spidey comic. It manages to hearken back to the classic days while still retaining modern storytelling sensibilities. If only I could say the same for the writing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #566
July 16, 2008
|
|
The story isn't entirely watertight, unfortunately. For one thing, Guggenheim inserts an unnecessary tie-in to the original Kraven's Last Hunt in the form of Vermin. The character does absolutely nothing other than keep several characters busy and pad out the pages for a while. The connection to KLH is also problematic because of the many unanswered BND continuity questions. I know answers are supposedly forthcoming, but it's mid July now. I think we've all waited long enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #581
December 17, 2008
|
|
After a full year and 36 issues, Marvel has shown us what to expect from Amazing. When the scripts ignore the jangled mess of continuity and retcons that make up Brand New Day and just tell fun stories, the series works marvelously. When they get too caught up on exploring the new status quo, we get issues like this. I hope Marvel takes these examples to heart in 2009. There's no reason these past two months can't be the norm rather than the exception.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #588
March 18, 2009
|
|
Still, Guggenheim has tossed out enough juicy nuggets that I'm keen to keep reading. More than anything, I'm just anxious to get back to the clean, simple, and, most importantly, devilish good fun of the stories we saw in November and December. "Character Assassination" didn't raise the bar, but it did ultimately come close to brushing it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #589
March 25, 2009
|
|
Van Lente could really bring something to this series, but he needs more to work with than one D-List villain and a band of generic thugs. Though this issue leaves the doors open for further developments, I can't say I have a huge interest in a sequel. Let's keep the biting humor and move onto something more interesting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #590
April 1, 2009
|
|
The best issues of ASM lately have been the ones with the highest fun factor. Issue #590 has fun in droves, but it unfortunately carries some of the more annoying qualities of the Brand New Day approach along with that fun. I really hope this is the arc that finally answers some of those burning questions. Not so much because I crave the answers, but because I'm sick and tired of being teased with them. The series has too much to offer at this point to dwell in the past any longer.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #591
April 15, 2009
|
|
Thanks to Slott's last minute twist, Mark Waid has a treasure trove of material to work with as he embarks on the next arc, "Spider-Man 24/7". I'm looking forward to it quite a bit. Now that the series seems to be striking a better balance of fun and revelation, I'm optimistic the future will stay bright for Spidey's readers, if not Spidey himself.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #592
April 22, 2009
|
|
Spider-Man 24/7 certainly has its merits so far, not least of which being more slick pencils from Mike McKone. However, issue #592 offers up a far more mundane beginning than I would have expected. I'm hopefully the next issue can do better. Until then, I'm going to busy myself trying to scrub all memory of the final page out of my brain.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #593
May 6, 2009
|
|
Once again, this arc is saved by some solid Mike McKone art and a few bright spots amid the underwhelming portions. I like what is being done with the new love birds, and the new Vulture has the potential to be another quality addition to Spidey's rogues gallery. But the core premise of this arc continues to fall flat, and nothing can really make up for that.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #594
May 20, 2009
|
|
"Spider-Man 24/7" proved to be far more underwhelming than I would have expected. But my enthusiasm for "American Son" and issues beyond hasn't diminished, so I'd say the series as a whole is still riding a pretty nice wave at the moment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #609
October 21, 2009
|
|
What this arc needed more than anything was some helpful trimming. By toning down the flashbacks and eliminating Screwball's presence altogether, this story could probably have been comfortably told in two chapters. Still, I suppose there's always hope that Guggenheim will have some surprises in store for the third and final chapter. We'll see.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #629
April 28, 2010
|
|
Rounding out the issue is a short story by Zeb Wells and Chris Bachalo that serves as a prologue for next month's "Shed". It's not much, but Wells turns in a haunting portrayal of Curt Connors. Maybe it's just Bachalo's pencils at work, but the Lizard is shaping up to be creepier and more interesting than ever when he returns. After an overly long jaunt outside the confines of The Gauntlet, I think "Shed" will be just what the doctor ordered.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #631
May 12, 2010
|
|
Unfortunately, there is an artistic problem in this issue. Emma Rios steps in for Bachalo and handles the first third of the issue. It's disappointing to see any fill-in artist on this arc. Sadly, it's rare for any multi-issue story on this series to pass by without some fill-in work. I'm getting to the point where I'd welcome a hiatus for the series so that the Spidey Brain Trust can build a longer lead time. But worse is the fact that Emma Rios could not possibly be more different in style and tone from Bachalo. Luckily, she doesn't reuse the same manga-esque style seen on Mark Waid's Strange mini-series. There is a bit more depth and grit on display here, but not nearly enough. Rios isn't inherently wrong for the series, but to pair her with an artist Like Bachalo on such a violent, bleak story seems a very strange choice. The letters page admits that Rios was brought in so Bachalo could focus on issue #632. Hopefully that means the arc will finish on a strong note. Wells and Bachal
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #637
July 14, 2010
|
|
Ultimately, "Grim Hunt" wasn't quite the epic finish to "The Gauntlet" I might have expected given the creators involved. When it comes to Peter's struggle, the emotional core rings a bit hollow. But there are still plenty of admirable qualities to be found in this last issue, and I doubt many readers will feel their $3.99 was wasted.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #639
August 4, 2010
|
|
In terms of visuals, this issue is also an improvement on Paolo Rivera's end. Rivera's work is allowed more freedom and room to breathe now that it doesn't have to share page space with Paul Ryan's panels. Rivera is given some very emotional scenes to work with, and he captures that emotion well. Quesada's framing art, on the other hand, still suffers from overly soft and extremely inconsistent character renderings. Ultimately, this arc succeeds as OMD damage control, but not quite so much as a simple, engaging story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #641
September 9, 2010
|
|
As a bookend to one emotional era of Peter Parker's life, OMIT is fairly successful in what it sets out to do. And yet, the arc failed to answer all the lingering questions surrounding current Spidey continuity. I'm fully content to put all this business behind me and get back to what Spidey does best. Hopefully the series will oblige as "Origin of the Species" debuts.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #644
September 29, 2010
|
|
Mark Waid's scripting is somewhat haphazard. Humor has never been his strong suit with the series, so the straightforwardly dramatic tone of this issue is a boon. Waid still shows a tendency to overwrite his hero, though. Having Spidey voice his sense of personal torment isn't nearly as effective as having the issue show it organically. Waid had the opportunity for a truly memorable scene in this issue as Spidey and Rhino encounter each other for the first time since the latter's tragic meltdown in issue #625. While Waid mines the scene for some of its depth, it's difficult not to imagine how much more could have been done in a story that allowed the proper space. Paul Azaceta's art is also frustratingly haphazard. The action scenes have a dynamic quality, but Azaceta's unattractive figures and facial work tend to drag down the more dialogue-centered panels. Hopefully "Origin of the Species" can find its legs in these last two issues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #645
October 13, 2010
|
|
Not unexpectedly, the Spidey crew are forced to bring in a filler artist for a good portion of this issue. Matthew Southworth's dark, noir-infused pencils make this story seem even more in line with The Grim Hunt, but in that sense it's hardly a bad move. Southworth's work is unfortunately rushed, but still attractive and well-suited to the tone of the story. His assistance also allows Paul Azaceta to deliver his best work of the arc in the final pages. Based on the cliffhanger, the last chapter of "Origin of the Species" should be a doozy. The arc has generally improved over time, and Waid has the chance to end the Brand New Day saga with a bang if he can bring his loose threads together.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #646
October 27, 2010
|
|
As for the art, Paul Azaceta is once again joined by Matthew Southworth. As with the previous issue, Southworth's presence allows Azaceta to deliver more consistent, detailed pencils, and the shift between the two is rarely jarring. Issue #646 is a decent conclusion to the arc, and if nothing else, Harry Osborn is in store for big things in the future. As for Spidey, let's hope issue #647 can offer a truly satisfying sendoff for Brand New Day.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #647
November 3, 2010
|
|
BND fans should find enjoyment in this issue, even if the bulk of the backup material doesn't compare to the main story. On the whole, the Spidey Brain Trust were able to see the hero out in style. This issue sets the stage in some small way for the next era of Spider-Man. Luckily, unlike last time, the character begins his new life in good, solid shape.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #648
November 10, 2010
|
|
I knew from the start that this issue would leave me slightly disappointed because of Ramos' art. Unfortunately, I wasn't expecting such a chaotic and crowded first script from Slott. This first issue leaves me very excited for the future of the series, but in and of itself it certainly could have benefited from a tighter, leaner script.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #649
November 24, 2010
|
|
"Big Time" has already met with significant improvement in its second issue. That bodes well for Slott's run on the series. It's clear the writer isn't pulling punches in this new era, and readers can rest easy knowing only that the won't know what to expect moving forward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #664
June 29, 2011
|
|
The art in the main story segment is fine, if a little flat at times. Giuseppe Camuncoli's pencils could benefit from stronger, more vibrant colors. Luckily, the art is the star of the show in the Spidey/Shang-Chi backup. Max Fiumara's work is always welcome on this series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #668
August 31, 2011
|
|
Spider-Island is good fun so far. The stakes aren't really there, but Slott still has plenty of time left to ramp up the danger and deliver on the promise that Spider-Man's world will be dangerously overturned by this event.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #673
November 2, 2011
|
|
As ever, it's clear that the chaos and drama of Peter Parker's world won't be letting up. Issue #673 shows plenty of promise for the future, but also some worrying signs. Hopefully the former will define the series going forward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #675
December 7, 2011
|
|
Giuseppe Camuncoli's art style is a bit unusual for a Spider-Man comic, but certainly effective for this story. Klaus Janson's inks bring an even more harsh and jagged edge to Camuncoli's lines. The darker edge suits the new take on Vulture and his crew. Camuncoli clearly isn't suited for all types of ASM stories, but the same could be said for most artists on this book. The visual variety is part of the fun of this format.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #676
December 21, 2011
|
|
Again, this issue is a little goofier than you might expect given the subject matter, but it still serves as an effective teaser for 2012 and a nice way to wrap up 2011.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #681
March 7, 2012
|
|
It's nice to see Giuseppe Camuncoli being employed effectively on the book. Camuncoli's harsh, jagged figure work isn't always the best fit for Spidey's world, but in a darker setting like this it works very well. Hopefully Slott can continue to tailor his arcs to best fit Camuncoli's artistic sensibilities.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #689
July 5, 2012
|
|
If not without its flaws, No Turning Back is a refreshing change of pace for the series, and not a bad gateway for prospective new readers looking for more Spider-Man vs. Lizard shenanigans.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #693
September 5, 2012
|
|
There's some decent character work to enjoy in this issue as Peter interacts with Max Modell, his family, and various superhuman allies. Sadly, none of it involves Alpha himself. As poorly executed as these two issues have been, my enthusiasm for the series and the build-up to Amazing Spider-Man #700 is beginning to wane.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #700
December 26, 2012
|
|
Long story short, yes, ASM #700 is worth venturing to the shop. The execution falls short in a couple of key areas, but it nonetheless gives the long-running series proper closure and paves the way for a very interesting and unpredictable 2013.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #700.1
December 4, 2013
|
|
There's also the problem that the concept as a whole feels a bit thin for a five-issue mini-series. Morrell only lightly hints that there's something bigger at play with Peters condition and the encroaching blizzard. He'll need to start showing his hand quickly in order to justify another four issues of this material.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man (2014) |
27 issues
show
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #1
May 1, 2014
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #1 offers a solid, enjoyable look at Peter Parker's return to the Marvel Universe. Not every element in this first issue is a home run, but Slott and Ramos succeed at bringing back the fun and excitement of classic Spider-Man while still building on the events of Superior Spider-Man. This issue might have been better off forfeiting some of the less compelling backup material and lowering the cover price accordingly. But regardless, there's plenty of reason to be excited for Spider-Man's future with Peter back in the saddle.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #1.1
May 7, 2014
|
|
A retread this is not. Learning to Crawl avoids rehashing a story readers have seen countless times, instead opting to explore Peter's slow, painful evolution into the hero he is today. It's definitely a worthy companion to Slott's core Spider-Man series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #1.2
June 12, 2014
|
|
This 'Learning to Crawl' mini-series would be worth reading if for no other reason than because Ramon Perez perfectly marries the Steve Ditjo era of ASM with more modern storytelling sensibilities.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #1.4
August 27, 2014
|
|
Slott is able to build up the drama in this penultimate issue so that the odds are stacked against Peter in a typically Spider-Man-ish way. If anything, he actually oversells the drama in the final pages as literally every part of Peter's world goes to hell in front of him. The book doesn't need quite that much darkness as Peter continues to wrestle with the notion of power and responsibility. But regardless, the creators have set the stage for a fitting conclusion to this previously untold tale of a young, inexperienced Spider-Man.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #1.5
September 24, 2014
|
|
But if this issue is guilty of focusing too much on Peter himself, that's an understandable sin. Slott's script delivers where it matters most in terms of tracing Peter's final steps towards true heroism. The final splash page alone is a terrific cap to the series and an homage to decades of Spider-Man history. Never has Ramon Perez's Ditko-esque art style stood out so much. There's also a more subdued but no less memorable scene between Peter and Aunt May. Just as it seems Slott's writing is veering into sappy territory, he throws a majorly unexpected curve ball. It's nice to see that a flashback story like this can offer its share of surprises.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #2
May 22, 2014
|
|
As with issue #1, the main weak point with this new story arc is Electro. Max Dillon feels very much like a shoehorned villain, and this issue shows that his role could have been filled by several other Spidey rogues easily enough. Whereas Slott delivered a great Lizard-centric storyline to coincide with the first Amazing Spider-Man movie, this Electro appearance seems to do little else but tick off those boxes on the movie tie-in checklist.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #3
June 25, 2014
|
|
As usual, Humberto Ramos' art works better during the action scenes than it does the quieter, character-driven moments. Some of his facial work is wonky in this issue (wonkier than usual, anyway), but there's also plenty of energy to the clash between Spidey and Black Cat or JJJ's latest vitriolic rampage.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #4
July 23, 2014
|
|
By the end, I found myself very eager to see more of the Peter/Cindy connection and how it'll play into Black Cat's ongoing vendetta. As for why Electro is relevant to this storyline? Who knows?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #5
August 13, 2014
|
|
Despite never having been the biggest fan of Humberto Ramos' style, I've been impressed with his work on this new series so far. Ramos' tendency to exaggerate facial features and body proportions seems toned down slightly. Meanwhile, his Silk design and his Black Cat redesign both look great. The book has a vibrant sense of energy that really begins to heat up as the two heroes and two villains begin to clash.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #6
September 10, 2014
|
|
In general, this issue suffers from a common problem in that it feels disjointed and rushed in many spots. Slott is constantly juggling plot points and characters and setting things up for the future. Often all that prep work can have a detrimental effect on the story being told in the present. Hopefully Spider-Verse itself will be more streamlined and focused.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #7
October 8, 2014
|
|
All in all, this is an eventful and entertaining issue, but the Spider-Man/Ms. Marvel team-up might have benefited from being published on its own in a completed form.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #8
October 22, 2014
|
|
The backup feature, as with last month's story, manages to intrigue and upset in how it takes a fairly lighthearted character (in this case, Mayday Parker), and engulfs her world in darkness and bloodshed. At least this Spider-Girl now has genuine stakes in the Spider-Verse conflict, but is it necessary to keep putting these characters through the wringer in each and every backup? We already have a good grasp on how terrible Morlun's family is and how dire the situation has become.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #9
November 6, 2014
|
|
After weeks of memorable build-up, Spider-Verse hits the ground running. This event loses none of the appeal of Slott's ongoing Spider-Man work, managing to balance humor and drama and make the most of a concept that brings all the Spider-Men together for one grand adventure. And with Coipel making Peter Parker and his world look better than ever, there's a lot to love in Marvel's latest event storyline.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #10
November 20, 2014
|
|
This issue serves as the major launching point for the various tie-ins and spinoffs Marvel has in the wings. On one hand, it's nice to see Slott find time for so many alternate Spider-Men and Women to shine as numerous characters are shifted along the board. Many old favorites are given their due, while a handful of new players leave an impression as well (particularly Spider-Punk). Even with the scope as big and dire as it is, Slott finds room for humor and banter. The interaction between Spider-Monkey and Spider-Ham is priceless. On the other hand, the final pages are a nonstop barrage of exit scenes and editor's captions directing readers to this tie-in or that tie-in. Hopefully this issue has taken care of all that editorial business and the core Spider-Verse conflict can resume its normal course in the next chapter.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #11
December 10, 2014
|
|
Spider-Verse is rapidly shaping up to be Marvel's best event comic of 2014. Even though it occasionally gets bogged down in setting up tie-in books, ASM #10 is a tremendously fun read that delivers the Peter Parker/Otto Octavius showdown we've been waiting for. It also looks great and further builds up the threat of the Inheritors. It's nice to have an event that actually lives up to the hype.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #12
January 7, 2015
|
|
The latest chapter of Spider-Verse is somewhat disappointing compared to the previous three, but that hardly means there's no entertainment to be had. Dan Slott manages to ramp up the drama without losing sight of the inherent fun of this concept. Giuseppe Camuncoli, meanwhile, fills in for Olivier Coipel as well as anyone could hope. It's mainly the lack of forward momentum in this issue that disappoints. With only two chapters remaining, this storyline needs to kick into high gear.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #13
January 21, 2015
|
|
Spider-Verse is building steam as it nears its big finale. This issue doesn't suffer as much as previous chapters when it comes to setting up or interacting with the various tie-in comics, although there are still some problems on that front. But for the most part, Slott and Camuncoli deliver a clean, attractive comic that allows many characters their moment in the spotlight and sets the stage for a very memorable final battle.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #14
February 11, 2015
|
|
Unfortunately, the Spider-Verse saga ends on a relative low note. Amazing Spider-Man #14 packs in a lot of cool moments, but too often the fast pace and action-heavy approach steamrolls right past the big developments. Meanwhile, Coipel's normally stellar art is prone to weak spots, despite only drawing about half the issue. Hopefully issue #15 will be able to better wrap up this saga with a bow and address the problems of this finale.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #15
February 25, 2015
|
|
Spider-Verse has been a great event comic over all, but some of the structural choices have really come back to bite Amazing Spider-Man in the butt. Issue #14 was the official conclusion to Spider-Verse. Unfortunately, its heavy emphasis on action prevented any real resolution to the story. Thus, it falls on Amazing Spider-Man #15's epilogue story to wrap up all loose threads and give this event the proper conclusion it needed. If only it were a little more successful in that regard.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #16
March 11, 2015
|
|
Spider-Verse was always going to be a tough act to follow. Even so, there's definite potential in this new conflict, as the writers emphasize Peter's personal and professional woes over his costumed antics. Unfortunately, there's precious little time for the series to build momentum before the main story is interrupted by a pointless backup tale.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #17
April 2, 2015
|
|
Humberto Ramos illustrates both story segments. My usual problems with his exaggerated style and use of perspective remain, especially during the early scenes that focus more on dialogue and character interaction than superheroics. Things do pick up once the focus shifts to Parker Industries. Ramos draws a great Ghost, rendering him as lithe, deadly, and more than a little creepy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #18
May 6, 2015
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man hasn't been firing on all cylinders in recent months, and this finale issue does nothing to reverse that trend. While Ghost makes for a good villain, the rushed pacing and divided focus are a drag on both stories.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #18.1
June 4, 2015
|
|
Conway has been delivering a perfectly enjoyable tale with "Spiral," a storyline that feels right at home alongside Dan Slott and Christos Gage's recent ASM work. Conway does the writers one better in this issue, offering a more nuanced and less annoying Black Cat than we've seen since the post-Superior Spider-Man relaunch
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #19.1
July 2, 2015
|
|
I do wish this storyline had a more consistent roster of villains rather than a rotating lineup (especially as Conway was doing a great job of salvaging Black Cat last month), but the focus on the two lead heroes is enough to offset that problem.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #20.1
August 13, 2015
|
|
Spiral was a solid read over the past few months, but in its final issue it comes across as less a compelling Spider-man conflict and more a means of bridging the gap between volumes of the main series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man (2015) |
38 issues
show
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #1
October 8, 2015
|
|
The new Amazing Spider-Man has the distinction of feeling both fresh and comfortably familiar at the same time. This series boasts an exciting new status quo for Peter Parker, but one that still feels like a natural extension of Slott's previous work. This is shaping up to be the book the previous volume of ASM should have been.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #1.4
March 31, 2016
|
|
This mini-series may scratch an itch for certain Spider-Man fans who want to see Peter Parker getting back to basics and swinging around New York. But even four chapters in, it's hard to shake the notion that Spidey feels poorly matched for the conflict at hand.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #3
November 5, 2015
|
|
This issue manages to both take advantage of Peter's new status quo while honoring his more humble roots, and that's exactly the sort of balance this series needs to achieve.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #4
December 9, 2015
|
|
The new volume of Amazing Spider-Man is exciting in a way the previous series sometimes struggled to achieve. The new status quo is great, lending a much bigger scope to Peter's world while retaining his basic appeal as a well-meaning but unlucky hero. But as often as Slott's previous books became bogged down by too many simultaneous plot threads, it's worrying that this series might be moving in that direction as well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #5
December 23, 2015
|
|
The real success with this issue, though, is how much Dan Slott focuses on Peter's new status quo as a delicate house of cards. He may be living the dream, but Peter is also dangerously overextended and starting to make bad decisions as a result. The Parker Luck seems to remain in full effect.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #6
January 5, 2016
|
|
The new volume of Amazing Spider-man is quickly eclipsing the previous one. Rarely has Dan Slott's Spider-Man saga felt this focused, both in terms of is visual style and the emphasis on Peter Parker's personal struggles. Having Mister Negative, Cloak and Dagger back in the picture just adds to the appeal.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #7
February 4, 2016
|
|
Matteo Buffagni's style doesn't impress quite on the level of Giuseppe Camuncoli's, but there's a clear energy to his storytelling as he renders the violent clashes between Spidey and the brainwashed Cloak and Dagger.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #8
February 17, 2016
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #8 is the first real disappointment of the new volume. This issue looks great thanks to Matteo Buffagni's dynamic action scenes, but the conflict fizzles out and fails to provide much closure for Mister Negative's story. At this point it's just as well Peter is moving on to bigger and more challenging problems again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #9
March 9, 2016
|
|
Whatever momentum this series might have lost in the previous issue is instantly reclaimed as Dan Slott and Giuseppe Camuncoli reunite and continue Spider-Man's conflict with Zodiac. This issue is crammed with epic superhero spectacle, but it also established the new Scorpio as a credible and unpredictable threat to Peter Parker's growing global empire.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #10
April 14, 2016
|
|
It's a dark issue in some ways, but one that also emphasizes Peter's resiliency. Plus, the banter between Anna Maria and The Living Brain make for a fun contrast to all the doom and gloom.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #11
April 28, 2016
|
|
This issue continues the book's trend of offering bigger, more challenging problems worthy of an internationally focused Spider-Man. At the same time, there's plenty of humor and silliness to offset all the sweeping drama
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #12
May 4, 2016
|
|
This issue serves as an enjoyable palate cleanser after the recent drama in Peter Parker's life. It makes the most of the Peter Parker/Tony Stark rivalry, even if it's annoying that the two characters are practically starting from square one. With top-notch art, a steady stream of humor and an emphasis on some long-dormant supporting characters, this issue starts off the new story arc on the right foot.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #13
June 2, 2016
|
|
Camuncoli's storytelling is as solid as ever, so at least the constant battling is allows him to strut his stuff, but it fails to satisfy on a narrative level.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #15
July 6, 2016
|
|
After spending so much time on the sidelines, it's great to see Mary Jane front-and-center and saving the day when Peter Parker falters. Still, this story arc never managed to build regent into a compelling villain, and this finale issue suffers as a result. Hopefully better things lie ahead as Slott shifts focus towards building to the events of The Clone Conspiracy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #17
August 31, 2016
|
|
This issue goes a long way towards building a strong foundation for Dan Slott's next Spider-Man epic. It gives Hobie Brown some much-needed attention, while at the same time offering readers a closer glimpse of the Jackal and his plans for the Marvel Universe. The art isn't quite as strong without Giuseppe Camuncoli at the helm, but this issue has plenty of strong storytelling moments regardless.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #18
September 21, 2016
|
|
Clone Conspiracy has a tall order to fill if it's going to surpass Dan Slott's previous Spider-Man crossovers. But at least Slott is giving himself plenty of compelling material to work with as he sets the stage for that event. As much as Amazing Spider-Man #18 is weighed down by exposition at times, it also offers a compelling look at the return of an iconic Spider-Man villain.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #19
October 6, 2016
|
|
Those who feel the current status quo doesn't tap into Peter's "unlucky loser" vibe may be singing a different tune by the end. This is an emotionally hard-hitting issue that adds a great deal of weight to what's to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #21
November 16, 2016
|
|
Budget-minded Clone Conspiracy readers can probably skip this issue without missing too much of importance. However, it does offer a more cohesive and satisfying read than the main event is providing at the moment. It also makes a strong case for the idea that Kaine deserves his own comic again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #22
December 21, 2016
|
|
As far as event tie-ins go, they don't get much more important than Amazing Spider-Man #22. This issue adds crucial depth to the Jackal and his motivations for creating this latest batch of clone-related melodrama. Anyone who's been following the main event would do well to check out this companion tale.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #23
January 19, 2017
|
|
The decision to focus so little attention on the big reunion between Peter Parker and the Stacys in The Clone Conspiracy itself is a bit odd, to say the least. And while this issue is eager to make up for that omission, it doesn't prove entirely satisfying.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #24
February 22, 2017
|
|
The Clone Conspiracy disappointed with its abrupt, open-ended finale issue, and this epilogue chapter doesn't do enough to give the event the closure it needed. It focuses too little on Otto Octavius, and it doesn't do enough to shift Ben Reilly from sinister villain to compelling protagonist again. Giuseppe Camuncoli's art is always a draw, but this series clearly needs a fresh start.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #25
March 15, 2017
|
|
This new issue of Amazing Spider-Man has a lot going for it. The main story, if a bit awkwardly paced, delivers some big twists, a dark tone and plenty of gorgeous art from Stuart Immonen. Unfortunately, this issue struggles to justify the hefty cover price. Too many of the backup stories read like pointless filler rather than meaningful additions to Peter Parker's increasingly chaotic world.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #26
April 12, 2017
|
|
Dan Slott's Spider-Man run hit a slump with The Clone Conspiracy, but Amazing Spider-Man is quickly bouncing back in its aftermath. This issue delivers a fun, visually dynamic superhero romp that also asks some difficult questions about where Peter Parker's responsibilities truly lie these days. Peter himself, not Norman Osborn, may well be the real antagonist of this arc.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #28
June 8, 2017
|
|
Dan Slott can sometimes be too preoccupied with setting the stage for future conflicts at the end of current ones, and that approach gives this battle a slightly anticlimactic feel in the end.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #29
June 28, 2017
|
|
The Amazing Spider-Man is quickly shaping up to be one of the stronger Secret Empire tie-ins, though this issue's strengths have less to do with Marvel's latest crossover event and more with the ways in which it furthers several of the series' key plot threads. With top-notch art from Stuart Immonen, a nuanced look at the warring sides of Peter Parker's life and the grand return of Otto Octavius, there's plenty for ASM fans to chew on here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #31
August 9, 2017
|
|
Slott and Immonen really made the most of this tie-in arc, using the carnage of Secret Empire to further key story threads and accelerate the collapse of Parker Industries. This issue delivers more epic, emotionally charged visuals and sets the stage for what promises to be a fascinating new status quo for Peter Parker in Marvel Legacy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man Annual #42
February 14, 2018
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man Annual #42 isn't a terribly essential read for Spider-Man fans on a budget. Apart from adding a bit of extra closure to Clone Conspiracy, this issue mainly focuses on telling a self-contained mystery story. That mystery suffers from inadequate payoff, but at least the book highlights the Betty/Peter dynamic in a fun way. And with Slott's run so near the end, any new material is appreciated.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #789
October 11, 2017
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man's new direction in Marvel Legacy is a bit of a mixed bag right now. As satisfying as it is to see a classic, "down on his luck" version of Peter Parker, the series needs to prove that Peter can continue to evolve as a character even as he falls back into old habits. Fortunately, the proven creative team are still able to deliver an entertaining start to this new era for the series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #790
October 25, 2017
|
|
Peter Parker is back in a more classic status quo thanks to Marvel Legacy. For the most part, that's working in Amazing Spider-Man's favor. It's fun to see the inverted dynamic between Peter Parker and Spider-Man, and the book continues to look spectacular. However, between the forced rivalry between Spidey and Human Torch and the worry that the series is trying a little too hard to leave behind the Parker Industries era, there is some cause to worry about where ASM is heading.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #791
November 15, 2017
|
|
While a few nagging flaws hold this issue back slightly (the flawed coloring, the generally rushed pacing), it does it part to flesh out Peter Parker's new status quo and reassure readers concerned about the character sliding back into old routines. The great dynamic between Peter and Bobbi and the always dependable artwork of Stuart Immonen help the whole package go down that much more smoothly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #792
December 13, 2017
|
|
The second chapter of Venom Inc. isn't quite as as strong as the first. Lee Price and his symbiotic minions aren't exactly the most compelling threat Spider-man has ever faced. But this crossover continues to thrive in two key areas. The characterization frequently shines as Slott explores the constantly evolving relationship between Peter and Flash. And Stegman's gritty, powerful art recalls the best aspects of the early '90s Spider-Man books.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #794
January 24, 2018
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #794 boasts a strong premise that often feels constrained by the limitations of the single issue format. Perhaps more could have been accomplished with the return of Scorpio, but it's hard to complain too much when a comic is able to achieve such a strong balance between dramatic tension and goofy comedy and deliver such eye-popping visuals.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #795
February 7, 2018
|
|
Spider-Man and Loki make a great team. That was true during J. Michael Straczynski's time on Amazing Spider-Man, and it's true now. This issue makes the most of each character's respective status quo as they briefly join forces, even as it continues laying the groundwork for "Go Down Swinging." It's a shame this team-up couldn't have been explored in a lengthier format, but it's plenty of fun while it lasts.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #796
February 21, 2018
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man tends to be one of Marvel's more reliable monthly titles, which makes a disappointing installment like this one all the more unusual. Issue #796 sets a couple wheels in motion, but for the most part it tells a formulaic Spidey adventure that doesn't live up to the standard of its predecessors.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #801
June 20, 2018
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man #800 may have wrapped up Dan Slott's last major storyline, but the real emotional climax of that story comes in this epilogue issue. Slott and artist Marcos Martin are able to weave their magic with the character one last time, delivering a sweet, uplifting tribute to Peter Parker. This issue is over a little too quickly, but there's something to be said for leaving readers craving more, even after ten years.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man (2018) |
21 issues
show
|
|
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man & Silk: The Spider #1 |
Mar 03, 2016
show
|
|
The main disappointment with this first issue is that the series doesn't exploit the Peter/Cindy dynamic to very good effect. There's little to their interaction beyond Peter's excessive wisecracking and Cindy's exasperated responses. There's a lot of untapped potential there that hopefully Thompson will address in future installments.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man Extra #2 |
Jan 28, 2009
show
|
|
I don't get the impression that this issue will factor as heavily into later ASM stories like the first one did, but that doesn't mean it isn't worth checking out. Wells and Rivera turn in exactly the kind of entertaining Spidey adventure I crave more of. If the other half doesn't measure up, at least it doesn't fall flat either.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man: Family Business #1 |
Apr 07, 2014
show
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man: Family Business should have a pretty broad appeal. It caters to casual readers who want a self-contained, accessible Spidey adventure. It appeals to those who crave a tale with Peter back in the saddle. And even those who crave a different sort of Spider-man adventure will find plenty to love here. It's a solid effort from all the creators. Unfortunately, it's not as long or well-paced a story as it could have been, and the lack of more permanent, obvious repercussions on Peter's life is disappointing. This OGN is definitely worth a look, but maybe not at the current $25 price tag.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man: Renew Your Vows (2015) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man: Renew Your Vows #1
June 2, 2015
|
|
If you've been craving a comic featuring a married Peter Parker, Renew Your Vows won't disappoint. Maybe it doesn't take place in the traditional Marvel Universe, but this issue effectively established the Parker family dynamic and then quickly builds a sense of danger and dread. Couple that with great visuals from Adam Kubert and the series has most of the right ingredients in place. Only a bland, unremarkable villain hold Renew Your Vows back a little.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man: Renew Your Vows #4
August 19, 2015
|
|
This new issue is fairly disappointing given the quality of the previous chapters of Renew Your Vows. It fails to keep the book's momentum going, and the visual quality is a noticeable step down. On the other hand, the renewed focus on young May is welcome, and there's little reason to expect the quality won't pick up when the finale hits.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man: Renew Your Vows #5
September 10, 2015
|
|
Renew Your Vows doesn't quite live up to the promise it showed in earlier issues. It's fun seeing the entire Parker family united in battling evil, but said evil is still a bland, unremarkable villain. This finale issue doesn't pack enough of a punch, and it offers no indication of what elements might cross over into the relaunched Amazing Spider-Man.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man: Renew Your Vows (2016) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man: Renew Your Vows #1
November 9, 2016
|
|
If the current incarnation of Amazing Spider-Man isn't floating your boat, maybe Renew Your Vows can do the trick. This new series boasts a terrific creative team exploring a more classically oriented Spider-Man status quo. Luckily, the series doesn't just coast by on nostalgia, as the fact that Peter is now a loving husband and father adds crucial new layers to his story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man: Venom Inc. |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man: Venom Inc.: Alpha #1
December 6, 2017
|
|
Fans of the enduring Spider-Man/Venom rivalry are in for a treat with Venom Inc. This crossover already contains the depth and strong characterization that was lacking in Venomverse. This issue makes the most of the rivalry between Flash Thompson and Eddie Brock, as well as the unexpected x-factor that is Spider-Man. Combine that with Ryan Stegman's gorgeous art, and you have a winning debut issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing Spider-Man: Venom Inc.: Omega #1
January 17, 2018
|
|
Venom Inc. was never the deepest Spider-Man crossover, and that certainly doesn't change in its final chapter. But if driven almost entirely by spectacle, this issue is worth the price of admission solely to gaze at the dynamic visuals of Ryan Stegman. Between that and the occasional moments of strong characterization, this crossover manages to wrap up on solid footing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Amazing X-Men (2013) |
8 issues
show
|
|
|
Amazing X-Men #1
November 6, 2013
|
|
Amazing X-Men #1 isn't a fundamentally different book from Wolverine and the X-Men. This story could just as easily be an arc of that book. But there's a sense of fun and whimsy at work that the X-books don't always tap into. Between that and the terrific artwork, Amazing X-Men #1 is definitely worth a purchase.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing X-Men #4
February 19, 2014
|
|
At this point, the weakest element of this story is its villain. Aaron has improved Azazel as a character, but not necessarily elevated him to the point where he makes for a particularly memorable or imposing threat. And the fact that he doesn't even appear in this issue doesn't help. Hopefully issue #5 can turn things around in that regard.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing X-Men #5
March 26, 2014
|
|
Still, there's plenty of pirate-y action to round out the story. Ed McGuinness remains in top form as he renders cutesy Bamf battles and X-Men all geared up and ready to wage pirate war. His visuals alone are enough to distinguish the series, with its clean, sleek lines and classical superhero imagery. So at least if Aaron is nearly out the door, we can count on more from McGuinness in the near future.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing X-Men #6
April 16, 2014
|
|
Amazing X-Men #6 serves as a generally effective way of welcoming Nightcrawler back into the fold and celebrating his many relationships. It's not a wholly satisfying as a cap to Aaron's X-Men saga, but it's not exactly fair to judge it as such. And that last page is pretty great.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing X-Men #15
January 14, 2015
|
|
Unfortunately, the art is a significant problem at times. Jorges Fornes delivers a very rough, harsh style that would be better suited to an old-school X-Force comic than a contemporary X-Men series. Fornes also doesn't do enough to distinguish among his characters physically. Colossus hardly has more muscle mass than iceman in most panels. The storytelling suffers from a lack of dynamic perspective. Characters are generally rendered either head-on or form the side and show little energy during the minimal action sequences.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing X-Men #16
January 29, 2015
|
|
This issue suffers from flat, lifeless characters and facial expressions that do little to convey emotions or drama. Hopefully the latter two issues of this arc can pick up the pace and do justice to the mighty Juggernaut.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing X-Men #18
March 25, 2015
|
|
Above all, I wanted this arc to do something different with the Juggernaut mythos rather than resorting to the same old tropes. Yost has largely succeeded in that regard. Even if the final pages seem to indicate a return to more familiar territory, I'm confident the writer still has some tricks up his sleeve for the finale.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Amazing X-Men #19
April 23, 2015
|
|
It's been nice to see writer Chris Yost play with the usual conventions of an X-Men vs. Juggernaut story over the course of this story arc. Unfortunately, this final issue retreads more familiar territory as Colossus makes his desperate stand against an even more powerful Cain Marko.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ambush Bug: Year None #1 |
Jul 23, 2008
show
|
|
Bad jokes aside, the look and feel of this comic is very similar to past efforts from Giffen and Fleming. Giffen provides pencils, which are a bit scratchy but plenty good enough to show you why DC's weekly books relied so heavily on him for art direction. The man still knows how to lay out a page like no one's business. As much as I know he loves Bug, I can't help wishing he was devoting his time to something a little more important. Or, at the very least, something funnier. Year None is not comedy gold, but for hardcore Ambush Bug fans, it's probably good enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ame-Comi Girls #1 |
Mar 06, 2013
show
|
|
With formulaic superhero storytelling and art that imitates manga only in the most superficial ways, there's really no reason to recommend this series in either digital or print form.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
America #1 |
Mar 01, 2017
show
|
|
If there were any doubts that Miss America truly needed her own comic, America #1 should put them to rest. This new series features an engaging take on the adventurous America Chavez, one that emphasizes goofy humor and grounded character drama over superheroics. Anyone who enjoys The Unbeatable Squirrel Girl or Hawkeye will feel right at home here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
American Gods: Shadows #1 |
Mar 15, 2017
show
|
|
American Gods: Shadows is shaping up to be a competent adaptation of the source material, but one that only sporadically uses the new medium to good effect. The rest of the time, the heavy reliance on Gaiman's original text begs the question of why readers shouldn't just turn to the novel instead.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
American Monster #1 |
Jan 21, 2016
show
|
|
American Monster #1 is an intriguing debut for this gritty crime drama, if not an entirely cohesive one.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
American Way: Those Above and Those Below #1 |
Jul 12, 2017
show
|
|
Even if you're not familiar with the original America Way, this sequel is well worth checking out. It balances out biting, insightful social commentary with thoughtful characterization and engaging visuals. Even with as many deconstructionist superhero stories as we've seen over the years, The American Way has something important to add to the mix.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Angel & Faith Season 9 |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Angel & Faith Season 9 #1
August 31, 2011
|
|
All of these qualities, coupled with a nice little twist at the end, ensure that this series should have little problem holding the attention of Buffy fans. With luck, the actual Season 9 book can manage as strong a start.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Angel & Faith Season 9 #4
November 30, 2011
|
|
Both Buffy books are a welcome change of pace for the franchise. However, Angel & Faith is emerging as the clear winner of the bunch in these early months. Let's hope Gage and Isaccs have a long and successful run ahead of them.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Angela: Asgard's Assassin #1 |
Dec 03, 2014
show
|
|
Phil Jimenez handles art duties on the main story, while Stephanie Hans tackles the interlude segment. Of the two, Hans stands out more thanks to the ethereal watercolor approach that goes hand in hand with the storybook quality. Jimenez renders some solid action, but otherwise his work doesn't quite capture the otherworldly vibe of the characters and setting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Angela: Queen Of Hel #1 |
Oct 29, 2015
show
|
|
This first issue serves as a fairly easy gateway into the saga of Angela and her partner/friend/lover Sera. It deftly summarizes what's transpired now without losing focus on Angela's new status quo. The relationship between Angela and Sera is very much the heart of the book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Animal Man #19 |
Apr 03, 2013
show
|
|
Steve Pugh handles the entirety of this issue; he really steps up the plate with a stark, gripping style that could be mistaken for a cleaner version of Foreman's work. If this is the level of storytelling fidelity and clarity we can expect from the book going forward, Animal Man will be in good hands.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Annihilation: Conquest - Quasar #4 |
Oct 31, 2007
show
|
|
Having now read the first chapter of Conquest itself, I know for a fact these characters can be written better than they are. I don't even blame Gage entirely. The writer is one of Marvel's most eclectic, penning issues of everything from Union Jack to Iron Man to World War Hulk: X-Men. Every writer has their own strengths, and operatic space epics simply aren't Gage's. Rest assured that Phyla-Vell will be moving on to grander and more exciting adventures from this point, and let's just hope that the upcoming House of M: Avengers plays more to Gage's talents.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Annihilation: Conquest - Starlord |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Annihilation: Conquest - Starlord #3
September 26, 2007
|
|
The situation becomes less absurd and more desperate this month, as the team struggles to find the mysterious secret weapon of the Phalanx and avoid capture. The latter proves to be especially difficult. I'm also loving Timothy Green's art, even though I still find myself wishing he were a little more diverse in drawing facial expressions. The Kevin Maguire comparisons are never far behind when it comes to Green, but without strong facial work the comparison just doesn't stick. That aside, this continue to be my favorite Conquest book, and I'll be an unhappy camper indeed if I can't have my Rocket Raccoon on a monthly basis from now on.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Annihilation: Conquest - Starlord #4
November 7, 2007
|
|
Here at the end, I'm happy to say Starlord was the best of the four Conquest books. It started out strong, unlike Wraith. It continued strong, unlike Quasar. Most importantly, it finished strong, unlike Nova. I don't know if we'll ever get the chance to read the continued adventures of Peter Quill and friends, but if we do I'll fight tooth and nail to be first in line.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Annihilation: Conquest - Wraith #4 |
Oct 24, 2007
show
|
|
Up till now, Wraith has been little more than a composite of every mysterious gunman you've ever seen in movies, television, and anime. Equal parts Clint Eastwood and Vampire Hunter D, in other words. In this issue Wraith finally meets someone who convinces him to ditch the cowboy hat and do something more. The only question is if the rejuvenated Wraith can put a stop to the Phalanx's secret weapon before it instantly assimilates everyone in the galaxy. Granted, a bad outcome isn't exactly likely with a larger mini-series looming, but that's the same storytelling limitation all four Conquest books have had to deal with. The important thing is that Javier Grillo-Marxuach has managed to turn around what was unequivocally the least enjoyable Conquest book and give it a surprisingly rousing conclusion. He's helped somewhat by artist Kyle Hotz. Hotz's work has been a real mixed bag so far. His figures tend to look both jagged and washed out, if such a thing is possible. However, Hotz is cap
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Annihilation: Conquest (2007) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Annihilation: Conquest #1
November 7, 2007
|
|
Essentially, Annihilation: Conquest #1 is a decent first issue that requires you to take a leap of faith. Based solely on the pedigree of Annihilation and everything that's come before, I'm still confident this series will prove ultimately satisfying. The next couple issues will be the real judge.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Annihilation: Conquest #2
December 5, 2007
|
|
So really, I have very few bad things to say about about Conquest. I am a tad bit disappointed in the art. Tom Raney isn't one of those artists whose style has a significant amount of overt flaws to pick out. As long as you don't mind certain characters having different jaw structures every panel, there's little to complain about. At the same time, there's nothing especially praise-worthy about this issue. When compared to Andrea do Vito's masterful work in the original Annihilation, the art is one aspect of this sequel that just doesn't measure up. The story fares better, though. Superior in some ways, slower and more restrained in others, Annihilation Conquest manages to stand out as one of the best event books of the year. Whether it will retain that title when Secret Invasion hits next year is another story entirely.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Annihilation: Conquest #3
January 2, 2008
|
|
If Marvel had simply allowed this sequel to ferment for a few months longer I think we all would have been much happier. Conquest originally began as a story arc in Nova, and I think its defining flaw is that it never quite grew out of those smaller limitations.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Annihilation: Conquest #4
February 6, 2008
|
|
At this point Conquest stands little chance of living up to the original in any sense except the butt-kickingly cool covers. The most I'm hoping for is that Conquest will spawn at least one new series that impresses on the same level as Nova. The potential is certainly there.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Annihilation: Conquest #6
April 16, 2008
|
|
Frankly, the best thing this issue does is set up the new Guardians of the Galaxy ongoing series. Individually, many cosmic characters have benefited greatly from some Conquest exposure. The fact that we're now getting a book starring Star-Lord, Rocket Raccoon, Drax, and Cosmo makes this all worth it. Collectively, though, Conquest has been one bungled opportunity after another. It's one thing to have tie-in books that follow along with an event comic. It's another entirely to literally force readers to follow everything to fully comprehend what's going on. And trust me, unless you've been reading Nova you're going to spend more time scratching your head about the presence of Warlock and his buddy Tyro than you will actually reading the issue. The most I can hope is that all creators involved have learned some valuable lessons from this project. The next Annihilation event - and we all know there will be one - needs to kick things into high gear if the cosmic Marvel renaissance is goin
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Annihilator |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Annihilator #2
October 8, 2014
|
|
The idea of real and fictional worlds colliding has bee explored before in Morrison's stories, and with more subtlety and nuance to boot. It's still great to see these two creators working together again, but Morrison's past work casts a long shadow over this new story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Annihilator #3
November 20, 2014
|
|
This remains the rare Grant Morrison comic where the art outshines the writing. Mind you, Morrison is delivering a perfectly enjoyable tale of reality and fictional worlds bleeding together and influencing one another. The interplay between writer Ray Spass and his creation Max Nomax is a lot of fun. But compared to a lot of Morrison's work, it all seems surprisingly straightforward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Annihilator #6
June 25, 2015
|
|
What initially seemed like a fairly by-the-numbers (for Grant Morrison, anyway) tale of meta-science fiction has grown steadily more ambitious and mind-bending over time. This finale is wonderfully weird and emotionally satisfying, while managing to veer away from becoming overly sappy or sentimental in the final pages.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Annihilators: Earthfall |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Annihilators: Earthfall #1
September 28, 2011
|
|
But forget all that noise. The real question worth asking is how the Rocket Raccoon and Groot feature shapes up. Sadly, the duo are no longer granted a full-length co-feature, but are merely relegated to back-up status. The story is definitely a lot of fun, and Timothy Green's art is stellar, but it's far too short and sweet. The one benefit to the reduced content is that the cover price has been adjusted accordingly. Hopefully that and the presence of the Avengers will be enough to bolster the readership for a series that sorely deserves it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Annihilators: Earthfall #2
October 26, 2011
|
|
One area this series continues to excel in is the Rocket Raccoon/Groot backup. Though criminally shortened compared to the previous series, this adventure packs in all the comedy, frantic action, and cosmic hijinks readers could hope for. And Timothy Green's art ties it all together in a very attractive package.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ant-Man (2015) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Ant-Man #1
January 7, 2015
|
|
It's been a long time since any hero calling themselves Ant-Man has had a solo comic to call their own. Luckily, this new series shows plenty of staying power. It's funny, emotionally engaging, and easily accessible regardless of your familiarity with the character. This debut issue presents a cohesive, standalone adventure that sets up the hero's new status quo and provides a foundation for the creative team to tell bigger and more unusual stories. Chalk this up as another successful addition to Marvel's growing lineup of quirky, character-driven comics.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ant-Man #3
March 12, 2015
|
|
In addition to being a fun, accessible gateway into the world of Ant-Man, this series continues to fill the void left by The Superior Foes of Spider-Man. It taps into a similarly fun, blue collar superhero vibe as Scott Lang struggles to make a name for himself in a new city and maintain a relationship with his daughter.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ant-Man #4
April 9, 2015
|
|
Nick Spencer really seems to have found his niche writing oddball heroes and villains who struggle for success and acceptance. This particular issue takes a slightly more ensemble focus as Scott Lang adds to his growing crew of reformed, D-List villains in a desperate bid to rescue his daughter. Even as the book becomes more urgent and dramatic, it also taps into the same lovable loser vibe that made Superior Foes of Spider-Man such a blast to read.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ant-Man: Larger Than Life #1 |
Jun 25, 2015
show
|
|
All told, there's a fair amount of content here for the $3.99 cover price, but those interested in learning more about the character are better served looking elsewhere.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Aquaman (2011) |
25 issues
show
|
|
|
Aquaman #0
September 26, 2012
|
|
Aquaman #0 is a visual marvel, but it's not a wholly effective flashback tale. The methodical pace is destroyed in the final pages when Arthur encounters a helpful new friend who proceeds to explain, at great length, the history of Atlantis, Arthur's birth, and the fate of his mother. It's a lot of exposition to hit the reader all at once. Nor does the issue offer a very satisfying or conclusive ending. Instead, the final pages read more like a giant tease for what's coming up in the near future. Perhaps the main flaw with Aquaman #0 is that this story deserved more space than one, lone issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman #8
April 25, 2012
|
|
Penciller Ivan Reis and inker Joe Prado continue their excellent collaboration. This arc is far more visually diverse than the first and allows the duo to tackle a number of interesting and unique situations not normally glimpsed in an Aquaman book. Together, the entire creative team show a willingness to push Aquaman in new directions without ignoring what made him work in the first place. That's exactly what the New 52 is supposed to be about.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman #9
May 23, 2012
|
|
Ivan Reis nails the various action scenes and character interactions. While there's a slight inconsistency in style and quality due to Reis being inked by three separate artists, it's a slick and visually dynamic issue by any standard. Aquaman is really benefiting from having one of DC's best writers and one of its best artists in control. The series seems destined to only get better from here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman #10
June 27, 2012
|
|
Already a strong book among the New 52 lineup, Aquaman became something truly special with this second arc. Who would have thought more Black Manta was all Aquaman needed to shine brighter?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman #12
August 29, 2012
|
|
But again, in terms of plot, there's not much forward momentum in this chapter. Johns doesn't shed any new light on these mysterious artifacts or their connection to Arthur's legacy. There's a battle between Aquaman and Black Manta, but it's really more of a prelude to a later showdown. Oddly, Manta is brutally impaled by Arthur in one panel and appears completely unscathed in the next. There is one major development late in the issue that lends an extra bit of emotional weight to the proceedings. It's going to be a long, difficult wait for the finale in October's issue #13. Still, it's usually a good sign when a comic can induce that sort of frustration in readers. Let's hope issue #0 can manage to tide us over until then.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman #15
December 27, 2012
|
|
THE VERDICTIt's a little early to be drawing comparisons between Throne of Atlantis and The Sinestro Cops War. Even so, this crossover is showing many of the same qualities that make Sinestro Corps such a standout comic book event. It's dramatic, engaging, and expertly rendered. Its's also a very straightforward crossover with no pointless tie-ins or filler. No muss, no fuss.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman #20
May 22, 2013
|
|
I'd like to think that there's a more permanent place for The Others in the New 52 lineup, and perhaps this issue is being used as a testing ground. Maybe this team isn't bankable, but whether Johns or Ostrander is writing them, they're certainly entertaining.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman #21
June 26, 2013
|
|
My only real complaint with the direction of this arc is the depiction of the First Kin. We still know so little about the character even two months after the original reveal, and he doesn't feel like a clear and present danger in the same way the Orm loyalists or the Scavenger do. Not to mention the fact that the idea of a villain being the "first" something seems a bit redundant in light of "Wrath of the First Lantern."
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman #25
November 27, 2013
|
|
I was nearly prepared to be disappointed with this issue's depressing ending until Johns pulls a 180 and gives Aquaman the more uplifting sendoff he deserves. Meanwhile, the epilogue strongly suggests that Johns isn't quite done with this corner of the DCU, even as he passes the torch to Jeff Parker. The ride isn't over yet.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman #26
December 31, 2013
|
|
Paul Pelletier's artwork certainly helps smooth the transition as well. Whether the issue focuses on undersea intrigue or epic brawls with giant crabs, Pelletier is able to expertly capture the action and emotion of the story. Unfortunately, there are several fill-in pages from artist Netho Diaz in this issue. Diaz's storytelling is sound, and even on par with Pelletier's at times. But his facial work is a little stiff, making it all too obvious when the issue bounces between the two pencillers.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman #27
January 29, 2014
|
|
With a winning balance of intrigue, action, and sentimental reflection, this issue further establishes Parker as a worthy heir to the Aquaman throne. The series hasn't radically changed from where it was a couple months ago, but Parker drops just enough hints about the future of the series to suggest we won't have too long to wait before he makes the series entirely his own.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman #28
February 26, 2014
|
|
This is the first issue of Parker's run entirely penciled by Paul Pelletier, and the visuals are markedly improved as a result. Pelletier has no trouble switching from epic undersea action to surface world character banter and back again. More than ever, it's clear this series remains in very capable hands.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman #31
May 29, 2014
|
|
Parker doesn't neglect his other brewing plot threads despite the brief crossover. There's continued momentum on the Mera front s she investigates her own attempted assassination. Parker provides a compelling new glimpse of Atlantean society and its social stratas here.And there's more mystery and horror aboard Triton Base to balance out the book. The issue does feel a bit choppy in that the three segments don't really have any interplay and read more like three separate stories. But Aquaman is never guilty of failing to entertain.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman #32
June 26, 2014
|
|
The book becomes more cohesive in the aftermath of the Swamp Thing crossover. And the fact that Paul Pelletier is able to pencil the entire issue for a change doesn't hurt this story either.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman #39
February 26, 2015
|
|
Parker continues to strike a balance between delivering fun, rollicking adventure, emotional family drama and expanding and enriching the mythology of Atlantis. Paul Pelletier's art also remains in top form despite being five months into this storyline now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman #40
March 26, 2015
|
|
Jeff Parker has proven a more capable replacement for Geoff Johns on this book than anyone could have hoped for, so it's disappointing to have to bid him farewell with this issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman #41
June 25, 2015
|
|
Bunn's new status quo is intriguing, as is the frequent intercutting between past and present. But as much as this series has dealt with Aquaman's struggles for acceptance in Atlantis, in some ways it feels as though the book is retreading old ground.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman #43
August 27, 2015
|
|
Aquaman didn't really need a status quo shake-up, but the series got one anyway thanks to DC You. The book's new direction is unfolding well enough under Cullen Bunn's hand, with a renewed emphasis on Arthur as a loner and the divide between he and Mera.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman #50
March 31, 2016
|
|
Aquaman reaching its 50th issue doesn't carry the same significance as many other DC books given how much creative turnover there's been on this book of late. But if this issue doesn't feel especially momentous, writer Dan Abnett does make use of the boosted page count to deliver and fun and occasionally dramatic look at Aquaman trying to foster relations between Atlantis and the surface world and confronting a mysterious oceanic killer.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman #52
May 19, 2016
|
|
Apart from a final sequence that hearkens back to the very beginning of the series, this issue doesn't do much to send Aquaman off in style.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman: Futures End #1
September 3, 2014
|
|
It's definitely intriguing to see so many running conflicts come to a head five years in the future. But Jurgens' handling of the characters isn't quite on par with Jeff Parker's work on the main series. There's an overabundance of dialogue in places where less would be more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Aquaman (2016) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Aquaman #6
September 8, 2016
|
|
Ultimately, though, the Aquaman/Superman battle comes across as a bit forced and unnecessary. And in the end, a little pointless given Superman's peacekeeping mission. But despite that, this issue manages to bring the current conflict to a close while offering a sobering reminder of the cost if Aquaman can't balance his dual responsibilities to his kingdom and his friends on the surface.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman #9
October 20, 2016
|
|
While this current arc got a fairly slow start in the previous issue, it builds steam here as Aquaman battles to save his hometown from a rampaging Shaggy Man.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman #14
January 5, 2017
|
|
Aquaman's woes continue in this issue as Atlantis is attacked by a group of genetically modified super-soldiers calling themselves the Aquamarines. It's a memorably wacky concept that unfortunately isn't exploited to its fullest here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman #20
April 6, 2017
|
|
Mix Aquaman with a healthy dose of 1987's The Abyss and you basically have the "H2.0" storyline. The name is a little dumb, but the execution sure isn't.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Aquaman And The Others |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Aquaman And The Others #1
April 3, 2014
|
|
Aquaman and the Others #1 isn't an entirely successful first issue. It's certainly accommodating for newcomers and Aquaman neophytes, but at the expense of building momentum and really establishing the series among the New 52. But the building blocks are definitely there, and this issue has no trouble capturing the most important elements of Geoff Johns and John Ostrander's Aquaman work. Assuming Aquaman and the Others can build and maintain an audience, we could be in store for something special here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman And The Others #2
May 8, 2014
|
|
Aquaman and the Others #1 was a decent, if cluttered offshoot of the main series. Issue #2 makes some further missteps and proves a little less satisfying than the first.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman And The Others #7
November 6, 2014
|
|
Geoff Johns' introduction of the Others showed what potential there was for this team to thrive on its own apart from Aquaman himself. Unfortunately, this series can't seem to move beyond the obligatory Aquaman guest appearances or focus the attention that needs to be devoted towards fleshing out the regular cast members.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Aquaman And The Others: Futures End #1
September 25, 2014
|
|
The dialogue can be clunky at times, but there's still a strng team dynamic anchoring the story and a moving scene as one of the Otehrs passes their mantle to another character. All of this dovetails with Aquaman's struggle as he again confornts King Atlan and tries to unite his people.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Aquaman: Rebirth #1 |
Jun 09, 2016
show
|
|
This issue serves as a good starting point, but the goal going forward should be to showcase what makes Aquaman new and different in DC Rebirth.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Archie #666 |
Jun 04, 2015
show
|
|
This issue is no more or less than a lighthearted celebration of the franchise. Pretty much every Riverdale favorite turns out to help Archie through his latest crisis, with the comic reaching a predictably happy ending.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Archie #4 |
Nov 25, 2015
show
|
|
This issue finally delves into the infamous "Lipstick Incident" and just what drove former power couple Archie Andrews and Betty Cooper apart. Waid deftly blends humor and bittersweet tragedy as he sheds light on the incident.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Archie Meets: The Ramones #1 |
Oct 06, 2016
show
|
|
Writers Alex Segura and Matthew Rosenberg craft a fun, charming little tale as Archie and his bandmates are whisked back to 1976 to learn about the magic of punk rock from the "in their prime" Ramones.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Army of Darkness Vol. 4 #1 |
Dec 04, 2014
show
|
|
Larry Watts brings a dynamic energy to the book with his art. His Ash is instantly recognizable as Bruce Campbell, and he handles the nonstop barrage of zombie gore and free-floating combat very well. The coloring also helps the storytelling a great deal. It's brighter and more flamboyant than you might expect from an Evil Dead comic, but that's appropriate given the unusual setting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Army of Two #1 |
Jan 13, 2010
show
|
|
Like the games themselves, perhaps Army of War the comic is best enjoyed with a friend. At least then you can share a laugh over the silly, generic script and awkwardly framed visuals. Sadly, it seems videogame tie-ins like this are still the rule rather than the exception.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Arrow |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Arrow #1
November 28, 2012
|
|
None of the three stories here do much to flesh out the characters and conflicts of Arrow. Even at its most competent, this book is an easy pass for all but the most hardcore fans of the show.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Arrow #2
January 2, 2013
|
|
Rounding out the issue is a segment from Cho and Ben Sokolowski. This portion reads like Arrow in microcosm, as it manages to breeze through the general structure of an episode in a mere handful of pages. It works surprisingly well in these limited confines, showcasing Ollie and Diggle carrying out an international mission. Mike Grell's art serves the story well. It's grim and finely textured, though certain panels feel a bit cramped. This is one instance where the smaller digital format might have been a hindrance. This segment also suffers from the same horrible Ollie monologue that plagues so many episodes of the show. I've often wondered if those monologues might play out better on the printed page than spoken aloud. The answer is no, no they don't.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Arrow #3
January 30, 2013
|
|
Capping off this issue is a story from Schwartz and Katherine Walczak and artist Mico Suayan that focuses on Helena Bertinelli's past and the events that led to her becoming Huntress. This segment basically just rehashes what we learned from her conversations with Ollie, but it's nice to see it play out visually and to see her relationship with her late fiance play out. Suayan's pencils are easily the strongest of the issue. He delivers a gritty, noir-tinged feel that compliments the writing, and he also manages to nail the actor likenesses without sacrificing the quality of the storytelling.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Arrow: Season 2.5 |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Arrow: Season 2.5 #1
October 8, 2014
|
|
It remains to be seen how well the overall conflict will develop, though. These chapters smoothly pick up where the show left off in terms of Detective Lance's illness, the crumbling Queen Consolidated empire, and so forth. But Guggenheim's decision to revisit Brother Blood in a new form is a little worrisome. As adept as this comic is at respecting the source material, I'd hate to see it retread familiar ground when the possibilities are practically endless.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Arrow: Season 2.5 #2
November 13, 2014
|
|
The second chapter in this issue spends a bit too much time on flashback material and revisiting familiar scenes from Season 2, though it is fun to see more connections form.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Arrow: Season 2.5 #5
February 12, 2015
|
|
I continue to be impressed with just how much the dialogue, the plotting, and the general tone of this comic recreate the feel of the TV series. That's the benefit of keeping Marc Guggenheim and Keto Shimizu so closely invovled.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Arrow: Season 2.5 #7
April 9, 2015
|
|
This series continues to succeed in its mission of telling stories that flesh out and enhance the world of the TV show. In certain ways (particularly when it comes to spotlighting Roy), it does the show one better.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Arrow: Season 2.5 #8
May 14, 2015
|
|
Having Marc Guggenheim at the reins of this book has been a major boon. Guggenheim's role on the show and his prior comics experience means that this series is a very faithful extension of the source material. And in many ways, Huntress is a more enjoyable character in this issue than she's ever been on the show.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Art Ops #1 |
Oct 29, 2015
show
|
|
The newest Vertigo series is certainly a visual showcase. It also boasts a clever concept. But with too much focus on exposition and setup (despite the lingering questions about this universe) and a lack of any truly compelling characters, this first issue isn't the strong debut Arts Ops needed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Assassin's Creed #1 |
Oct 15, 2015
show
|
|
Assassin's Creed has a surprisingly strong track record when it comes to comic book tie-ins. So far, it doesn't appear that this new series is going to break that trend.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Assassin's Creed: Awakening #1 |
Nov 10, 2016
show
|
|
Titan's latest Assassin's Creed comic is unique both in that it's a direct adaptation of one of the games (Black Flag, to be specific) and a translated Japanese manga story. Unfortunately, there's little to recommend this version of the story over simply playing the game.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Assassin's Creed: Templars #1 |
Mar 23, 2016
show
|
|
The newest Assassin's Creed comic is already shaping up to be a worthwhile addition to the ever-growing franchise. Templars #1 stands out for several reasons, but above all because it works to humanize the Templar faction and makes great use of a very distinctive historical setting. This first issue is a solid start, and it leaves plenty of room for the book to get even better in the next four chapters.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Assassin's Creed: The Fall |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Assassin's Creed: The Fall #1
November 9, 2010
|
|
Assassin's Creed: The Fall is a welcome breath of fresh air in the normally depressing video game comic market. Though it carries some minor flaws, issue #1 is an engaging and enjoyable read regardless of your exposure to the Assassin's Creed franchise. Let's just hope two issues are enough for the creators to deliver a satisfying character arc for Nikolai and Daniel.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Assassin's Creed: The Fall #2
December 15, 2010
|
|
And even if the script were forgettable, The Fall would still thrive on the strength of its art. Kerschl and Stewart make an impressive team. Though the two each handle their own assigned timelines, Kerschl and Stewart have similarly bright, animated styles that allow for a very cohesive look. It's arguable whether a slightly darker visual style might have suited the tone of the games better. On the other hand, part of the appeal of this series is seeing the result of a creative team who are fully involved in both sides of its production. There's an undeniable energy and storytelling flow that comes when a creator writes and draws a page themselves, and that energy is readily apparent in The Fall. It's unfortunate this book is so unusually brief. Still, it's refreshing to have a video game comic leave the reader so desperately wanting for more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Assassin's Creed: Uprising #1 |
Feb 02, 2017
show
|
|
Unfortunately, while the script mostly avoids becoming too cluttered, the same can't be said for the art. Jose Holder makes many odd framing choices that make it difficult to follow the flow of battle and leave key characters relegated to the background or obscured by shadow at awkward times.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Astonishing Thor #5 |
Jul 06, 2011
show
|
|
Astonishing Thor is not without merit, but it doesn't exactly warrant the "Astonishing" moniker, either. How long until books like this and the post-Whedon Astonishing X-Men cause the Astonishing line to lose its credibility?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Astonishing X-Men (2004) |
10 issues
show
|
|
|
Astonishing X-Men Annual #1
November 28, 2012
|
|
Unfortunately, Marvel had to go and spoil things to an extent by pricing this issue at $4.99. The main story is no longer than an average issue of Astonishing. Padding out the remnant is a reprint of the Alpha Flight issue where Northstar originally came out of the closet. Historical significance notwithstanding, that alone doesn't justify an extra dollar, and I wish Marvel would stop acting as if annuals automatically need to cost more. The reprint isn't even worth the hassle of reading. The hardcore 90s artwork, with its muscles piled on top of more muscles and criminal overuse of crosshatching, is enough to make your eyeballs leak out of your skull. Trust me. I'm writing this review blind thanks to this book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Astonishing X-Men #23
November 7, 2007
|
|
As always, the main flaw with this issue of Astonishing X-Men is that we won't see another one for so long. I hate to think that I won't get to read another Whedonesque adventure until 2008. I think I'll use the new issue of Messiah Complex to wipe my tears away.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Astonishing X-Men #25
July 2, 2008
|
|
Here's the real problem with Astonishing at the moment - I don't know why I should care. The series no longer fills a niche. This same group of A-list X-Men will also occupy Uncanny on a monthly basis. The only real difference there is that Uncanny will substitute Pixie for Armor as the current "peppy female student with everything to prove." With no real story to speak of yet and art that's firmly in the good-but-not-great category, Ellis has his work cut out for him in the months ahead. I don't blame anyone who chooses to trade-wait this book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Astonishing X-Men #31
October 7, 2009
|
|
"Exogenetic" is a step in the right direction, but on the whole Astonishing just isn't succeeding on the level it should considering the talent involved. As an X-fan who is frequently invested in the direction of the franchise, I recognize the necessity of an accessible book like this. I only wish the finished product was as attractive as the concept.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Astonishing X-Men #34
June 30, 2010
|
|
It seems the only consistent thing about Astonishing X-Men is its inconsistent shipping schedule. Even as Warren Ellis' saga has moved forward with the Xenogenesis mini-series, Exogenetic still needs wrapping up. Sadly, Xenogenesis' successes only highlight how dull and forgettable the previous storyline is. Ellis' X-Men lack the playful quality seen in Xenogenesis, instead spouting endless bits of snark and sarcasm. Painfully unnatural interactions between Cyclops and Beast only highlight how far behind the curve this story is working. As for the art, Phil Jimenez once again provides breakdowns upon which Andy Lanning finishes. Given how heavy and thick Lanning's inks have been over Jimenez's pencils in the past, the difference is scarcely noticeable. Between those heavy blacks and the unnatural colors of Frank D'Armata, the series is just too grungy and dreary for its own good. I've certainly read worse X-storylines, but Ellis has proven he can handle the team in a much more interest
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Astonishing X-Men #37
May 11, 2011
|
|
This series is something less than astonishing right now, but at least it offers clean, uncluttered fun for X-Men readers. The real question is how the series will be impacted by the sudden switch in focus with issue #38.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Astonishing X-Men #38
May 18, 2011
|
|
Hardcore Astonishing fans may be happy to simply have another issue of the series in hand so soon, but so far this arc is doing nothing to establish itself as more than filler.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Astonishing X-Men #39
June 1, 2011
|
|
Daniel Way's script is a mixed bag in quality. The highlight of his arc is seeing Armor rise to the forefront, as she doesn't seem to factor into the rest of the X-books very often. However, Way doesn't prove as adept with the remaining three X-Men. His Emma is neither as humorous nor as bitchy as she should be. Meanwhile, a handful of potentially strong scenes between Cyclops and Wolverine aren't used to their full potential. In general, once the fun of monster battling wears off, this arc doesn't have much else to offer. It's just as well Way's next issue will cap off this particular story. There doesn't seem to be much life left in this particular Astonishing tale.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Astonishing X-Men #55
October 24, 2012
|
|
While Astonishing has its moments, I'm quickly growing eager for this arc to wrap up so Liu can move on to new material that once again emphasizes characterization over action.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Astonishing X-Men #58
January 23, 2013
|
|
Though hardly bloated at only two issues, I do feel that Liu could have trimmed the story even further by reducing the role of the other X-Men. Other than the Christmas celebration with Karma in issue #57, the various other characters didn't really add anything to the conflict or Warbird's journey. As a single one-shot issue, this storyline might have been that much stronger and more tightly paced.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Astonishing X-Men (2017) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Astonishing X-Men #1
July 19, 2017
|
|
As underwhelming as Marvel's ResurrXion relaunch has been as a whole, at least Astonishing X-Men seems capable of living up to the hype. The series gets off to a strong start thanks to an eclectic cast, memorable characterization and typically strong artwork from Jim Cheung. This is the ideal comic for those who want to dip their toes into the franchise and those who have been craving something different in the X-Men universe.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Astonishing X-Men #4
October 5, 2017
|
|
While this series was billed as having more of a standalone approach to X-men storytelling than most X-books, it doesn't actually seem that way in practice. This opening storyline reads very much like one, continuous conflict. And a conflict that's becoming painfully drawn out, no less.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Astonishing X-Men: Ghost Boxes #1 |
Oct 29, 2008
show
|
|
Most glaring of all is the fact that neither story carries much of an X-Men flair. Switch out a few familiar faces and the stories could easily be taking place in another Ellis book like Planetary. Is that all Ellis' Astonishing run is going to amount to - a series that seems culled from unused plot points in other books? His work carries an inherent charm regardless, but I expect a lot more given the pedigree of Astonishing X-Men in the past.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Astounding Wolf-Man #4 |
Dec 12, 2007
show
|
|
It's going to be a while before Astounding Wolf-Man ascends to the level of quality seen in Kirkman's best books, and I'm not entirely sure it ever will. However, even if it doesn't, the likable cast and constant stream of surprise twists should be enough to tide Kirkman-junkies over between issues of Invincible.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Astro City (2013) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Astro City #1
June 6, 2013
|
|
Even the meta commentary, which can so often be annoying in superhero comics, works under Busiek's hand. Broken Man's frequent references to the all-seeing Oubor and the need to find heroes who are invisible to its influence could be interpreted as a jab at the New 52. I doubt that was Busiek's intention given how long this series has been in the works, but it's fitting considering how this is exactly the type of fun, charming superhero comic that the New 52 seems to have wiped out of existence.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Astro City #2
July 10, 2013
|
|
Brent Anderson expertly captures this blend of the mundane and the superheroic. He shows a strong sense of design as he renders the sci-fi-flavored workplace of the ECL, but the focus is generally on more basic elements like facial work and emotion as Marella explores her new world. At times the script is a slice-of-life drama, and others a superhero slug-fest, and Anderson is equally adept with either.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Astro City #3
August 14, 2013
|
|
Brent Anderson more than holds up his end of the issue, as his art is perfectly suited towards capturing that human element of Busiek's writing. His characters are brimming with emotion and varied facial work. Anderson is able to convey the scope of the superhero characters and their battles, but all of that is ultimately just window dressing in service of the more down to earth elements.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Astronauts in Trouble #1 |
Jun 18, 2015
show
|
|
Though somewhat looser than his current style, Adlard's work in these pages is still plenty imrpessive. The retro '50s setting suits his style especially well. All the book really needs is an ink wash to give the stark black and white lines some added depth. Unfortunately, while Adlard's art is impressive, the story is too jumbled to leave a good impression.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Atomic Robo #1 |
Oct 16, 2007
show
|
|
So far I haven't had anything bad to say about Atomic Robo #1. Granted, it did make for a unexpectedly satisfying read, but it does have one fairly major problem at this early stage. I mentioned a comparison to Forrest Gump, but in truth I'm forced to take writer Brian Clevinger's word on that. The intro page paints a pretty picture of Atomic Robo acting as a major catalyst for various 20th Century events, not unlike Mr. Gump. Unfortunately, Himalayan Nazis don't quite fit that bill. And where's my Tesla? I really hope that Clevinger and Wegener can increase the scope and live up to what is admittedly a terrific concept. Even in its present form, Atomic Robo is a breath of fresh air in a crowded indie market.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Atomic Robo and The Ring of Fire #1 |
Sep 10, 2015
show
|
|
The cover to this issue offers a pretty good clue as to the state of both Robo and the members of Tesladyne at the moment. But fear not, Atomic Robo hasn't veered so far into darkness that it loses sight of the fun, adventurous charm that made the series stand out in the first place
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Atomic Robo and the Temple of Od #1 |
Aug 25, 2016
show
|
|
The latest chapter in the Atomic Robo saga sends our metallic hero to Japanese-occupied China to team up with the local resistance and stop the creation of a doomsday weapon. It's a solid premise that allows for plenty of the humor and Indiana Jones-style adventure the series is known for.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Atomic Robo: Spectre of Tomorrow #1 |
Nov 02, 2017
show
|
|
This issue makes for a very slow, even quiet start to Spectre of Tomorrow, and because of that, this may not be the ideal jumping-on point for new and curious readers.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Avengers (2010) |
8 issues
show
|
|
|
Avengers Annual #1
January 4, 2012
|
|
This annual does finally pick up a bit of steam at the end. In the aftermath, Simon is written in a more evenhanded fashion, finally explaining hi position and motivations in a more convincing fashion. The interaction between him and Beast is also a nice touch. Ultimately, with as much as this short crossover did wrong, it does do its part to establish the general sense of unrest and anti-Avengers paranoia running rampant in the ongoing books. Ideally, this story should have unfolded several months ago and in a more intimate form without all the useless flash and noise.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #5
September 22, 2010
|
|
As far as the visuals go, certain points need reiterating regarding John Romita Jr.'s artwork. This is some terrifically dynamic stuff. Once again, the panels featuring Thor are the standouts, but Romita's general sense for action and choreography is nearly unmatched in the industry. Yes, his figures are somewhat blocky and unattractive. To some extent this is just the nature of his style. But the inking and coloring in this series are also to blame for lending an unnecessarily harsh edge to his figures. Romita's work in J. Michael Straczynski's Amazing Spider-Man was more effective because of the thinner inks of Scott Hanna and the brighter hues of colorists like Dan Kemp. It's unfortunate the visuals in this series can't fall a little more in line with those in Amazing, but the core appeal of Romita's pencils remains.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #7
November 17, 2010
|
|
John Romita Jr's art is a bit erratic this month, as it's inked by both Klaus Janson and Tom Palmer. Palmer's lighter, feathery touch is what Romita's pencils need to shine, not the overly thick and heavy inks of Janson. But while this arc displays a few odd qualities in its first issue, it also shows the potential to outclass the first and pay off on some threads still dangling form Bendis' earlier Avengers projects.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #13
May 18, 2011
|
|
The only real point of concern to be found right now is a romantic subplot introduced in this issue. Bendis seems intent on playing up a mutual attraction between two characters who really have no prior history together. So far it seems forced, unnecessary, and even a little awkward as the two interact. Hopefully that will change over the course of the arc and this new relationship can be properly fleshed out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #14
June 15, 2011
|
|
This Fear itself tie-in started off with a bang, and it's unfortunate that the follow-up isn't as strong. If the current formula is to continue, Bendis will need to ensure that the talking head scenes expand and flesh out the events of Fear Itself rather than simply rehash them.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #16
August 17, 2011
|
|
The art proves once again that John Romita Jr.'s art can thrive or falter depending on the inker and colorist involved. Paul Mounts' colors bring new life to the series. Unfortunately, Klaus Janson's inks are still too heavy and flat to do the art full justice.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #20
December 21, 2011
|
|
Daniel Acuna's art is doing its part to keep the story humming. My common complaint with his style is that it lacks depth and definition thanks to its over-reliance on color and lack of shading and shadow. Acuna seems to have struck the right balance between the two on this series, and the results are pleasing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #28
July 25, 2012
|
|
Ultimately, a story like this is always limited by the need to fit within the confines of the main event. And so there's little in the way of consequential plot progression or character growth. But if nothing else, Avengers #28 proves that Red Hulk still has a place among Earth's Mightiest Heroes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Avengers (2012) |
22 issues
show
|
|
|
Avengers #1
December 3, 2012
|
|
Little about Opena's approach has changed from his Uncanny X-Force arcs, other than the fact that he alters his style with a smoother, more organic approach for the brief flashback sequences. The question is how well the series will transition visually from arc to arc. Opena, Adam Kubert, Dustin Weaver, and Mike Deodato all have distinctly different styles. Will this even feel like the same book five issues down the road?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #2
December 19, 2012
|
|
Unfortunately, my other complaint regarding issue #1 remains true here. Ex Nihilo, Abyss, and the rest of the new villains really aren't that memorable beyond their interesting visual designs. Their motivations and actions feel too reminiscent of other recent storylines like The Dark Angel Saga in Uncanny X-Force or Hickman's own Ultimates work. If anything, the similarities grow more apparent as Ex Nihilo rants about ancient beings who manipulate genetics and seeds that can remake worlds. Hopefully this problem is merely a temporary one. Hickman has made it abundantly clear, both within this book and in various outside interviews, that these early issues barely scratch the surface of what he has planned.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #6
February 20, 2013
|
|
The real difference to the formula of these past few issues is that there's less question of how this new Avengers recruit fits into the larger picture. Hickman caps off this pseudo-arc by circling back to the larger events covered in issue #3 and a major new development that provides the spark for the next story. These character-focused issues have been enjoyable, but it'll be good to see what path the series takes from here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #12
May 22, 2013
|
|
Unfortunately, the eclectic nature of the issue isn't the best fit for Mike Deodato's pencils. Deodato's style is all about moody lighting and hulking figures, neither of which are really called for in the script. Deodato also shows a tendency to reuse character poses again and again. He gets an incredible amount of mileage out of one recycled Iron Man frame. This is a case where the lighter touch of Dustin Weaver probably would have worked better.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #25
January 22, 2014
|
|
Having illustrated several pages of issue #24, Salvador Larroca steps in for a full issue this month. Larroca delivers strong storytelling but weak figure work, leaving the colorist to fill in too much of the depth and detail on his characters. My main concern with this series and its sister books going forward is that any sense of visual cohesiveness will be lost thanks to the steady stream of rotating artists. It seems anyone who's anyone at Marvel will be drawing one of Hickman's Avengers books in the coming months.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #26
February 12, 2014
|
|
Nor does Salvador Larroca's art bring much to the table. Larroca's figures are as spartan as ever, but normally his framing and storytelling can make up for deficiencies in that area. Not so here. The action scenes between the Adaptoids and Avengers are dully framed. There's not enough scope to match the tenor of Hickman's writing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #27
March 26, 2014
|
|
With this arc over and with Original Sin fast approaching, hopefully Avengers can regain the momentum it had just a few months ago.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #28
May 1, 2014
|
|
It all makes for a fun read that has ramifications for more than one of Hickman's Avengers titles. And hopefully it's a sign that the series' recent doldrums are receding.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #29
May 14, 2014
|
|
This issue also sees Leinil Yu return to the series for the first time since the Infinity tie-in storyline. He's a perfect fit for the grim, foreboding tone of the tale, which culminates in a big battle between Avengers and iron Man drones worthy of a an action-oriented storyteller like Yu. The inking sometimes obscures the figures and the facial work unnecessarily, but not to the point that it derails the story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #31
June 18, 2014
|
|
Little has changed in terms of the art in this issue. Leinil Yu does a great jb of bringing this futuristic Earth to life, but the lack of clarity to his pencils and Gerry Alanguilan's inks is frustrating at times. Especially since there are a handful of pages here that do show the artists at their best and brim with cinematic detail.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #32
July 9, 2014
|
|
The art, unfortunately, is weirdly inconsistent in this issue. At times Leinil Yu's pencils and Gerry Alanguilan's inks merge in a scratchy, haphazard assortment of lines. But at other times, Alanguilan's inks smooth out and Sunny Gho's colors become more vibrant. Here the issue is at its best, and there are some definite shots of beauty as Franklin's garden blooms and he gives the Avengers a tour of the universe as it exists thousands of years from now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #35
September 17, 2014
|
|
In some ways, "Time Runs Out" is exactly what this series needed. It kicks the book into drive as the focus shifts ahead to a darker and more unpredictable Marvel Universe. But the time shift creates its own problems, and this issue is never entirely consistent in tone or visual style. But hopefully things can only improve as Hickman delves deeper into this new status quo.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #36
October 8, 2014
|
|
This issue also proves more visually cohesive now that Stefano Caselli illustrates the entire story. Caselli and Hickman have formed a great team dating all the way back to Secret Warriors. Caselli's expressive art captures both the massive scale of the story and the very real, emotional drama.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #37
October 22, 2014
|
|
Unfortunately, visual consistency just isn't this book's forte. Mike Deodato steps in as artist this month, giving the series a much darker and more foreboding vibe than it had in the previous two chapters. In general, that suits the setting and the tone of Hickman's writing. On the other hand, one flaw from Original Sin rears its head again in terms of figures standing out in stark contrast from the backgrounds. Some scenes also suffer from the lack of distinction between female characters or Deodato's tendency to draw frail, elderly Steve Rogers as a fairly robust character.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #38
November 20, 2014
|
|
And visually, this series is the clear winner. Stefano Caselli gives the comic an impressively bold and dynamic quality. His figures are sharply defined and vibrant, and the book takes on a larger-than -life tone that meshes well with the increasingly epic climax Hickman is building towards.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #39
December 11, 2014
|
|
Withthe focus more on action than plot progression, this issue isn't necessarily the most compelling to come out of this "Time Runs Out" storyline. Still, Hickman defintiely gives Mike Deodato plenty of great material to work with, especially the shots of Jim Rhodes' War Machine army or Captain Marvel battling Hulk.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #40
January 14, 2015
|
|
Frequent Hickman collaborator Stefano Caselli steps in to tackle the art this month. While the shift from Mike Deodato to Caselli does nothing to help this book's wildly inconsistent visual style, it's tough to complain about the final product. Caselli has a real talent for combining sleek superhero physiques with dynamic body language and expressive facial work. All of those qualities are integral to this issue's storytelling success. If only we could see him settle down on one series for a while.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #41
February 4, 2015
|
|
If I have any complaint about this chapter, it's that Mike Deodato does nothing to vary his style and strive to distinguish the Earth-616 and Earth-1610 settings. His bold, powerful figures serve the issue well despite the focus on dialogue, but the Ultimate and regular Marvel scenes might as well be taking place on the same world.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #42
March 4, 2015
|
|
This issue does make me wish Hickman had focused more on Cyclops and his mutant nation in recent months. Many key plot developments occurred off panel in the eight month gap that set up "Time Runs Out." Unfortunately, this is the oe that most needed fleshing out considering how little the X-Men have factored into Hickman's work before now. The Cyclops-centric scenes lack some of the impact they might have had because here's been so little build-up.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #43
April 2, 2015
|
|
Unfortunately, the art isn't always up to par in this chapter. Mike Mayhew's work is at its best when it focuses on the space battle and general spectacle rather than the human figures. Outside of those scenes, many characters suffer from wonky facial work and stiff poses. It's a shame these two Avengers titles can't offer a greater level of visual consistency during "Time Runs Out."
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #44
April 29, 2015
|
|
The Avengers #44 caps off Hickman's saga in grand fashion while also setting the stage for Secret Wars. This issue is full of epic drama, but often it's the character moments that shine the most. It's a shame that two artists with such clashing styles were called upon to finish out the series, but Caselli's pages never fail to impress.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Avengers (2016) |
11 issues
show
|
|
|
Avengers #1
November 2, 2016
|
|
Mark Waid's Avengers saga begins its new stage on slightly rockier ground. The team dynamic definitely suffers from the fact that the younger characters have departed to form their own team, and new recruits like Spider-Man and Hercules don't do enough to make up for that loss. But at least the Kang conflict is heating up. Plus, Del Mundo's art is incredibly striking, even if it occasionally gives the issue a more surreal tone than necessary.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #2
December 8, 2016
|
|
The Avengers themselves are the weak link in this latest incarnation of the series. Not only is the cast small, their personalities don't make for a particularly compelling mix.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #3
January 5, 2017
|
|
The resolution in this issue feels a bit cheap and easy considering the scope of the threat Kang and his other selves have posed, but at least it ties together the majority of the book's current loose ends.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #4
February 2, 2017
|
|
Despite the fact that the script is basically a long series of narrative captions, the book avoids coming across like a dry summary or Wikipedia entry. Del Mundo's gorgeous, surreal artwork certainly helps with that. This issue is really a chance for del Mundo to cut loose.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #5
March 2, 2017
|
|
Mark Waid and Mike Del Mundo deliver a fun tribute to Avengers past and present in this issue as the team uses Kang's methods against him. There's a real joy in seeing this new team join forces with the iconic Avengers of yesteryear, and Waid's humorous dialogue makes particularly strong use of the original Avengers.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #8
June 8, 2017
|
|
This series is the first outside of the Iron Man books to really take advantage of Victor Von Doom's current status quo. That led to a really fun Avengers/Doom team-up in issue #7. Unfortunately, this follow-up story mostly ignores that dynamic in favor of picking up threads left over from the recent Avengers: Four mini-series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #11
September 21, 2017
|
|
This issue breaks the the team into pairs and explores several key relationships. Between the blossoming Cap/Thor romance, Vision and Hercules pondering the nature of immortality and Spider-Man trying to get to the bottom of why Wasp doesn't like him, there's plenty of great character work on display here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #672
October 5, 2017
|
|
It's the character dynamics that make this issue worthwhile. Seeing Hercules and Amadeus Cho reunited is practically worth the price of admission all on its own.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #675
January 10, 2018
|
|
If you've been feeling apathetic about the state of the Avengers franchise in Marvel Legacy, the "No Surrender" offers new hope. While straightforward and focused more on spectacle than characters, this first chapter starts the crossover off on solid footing. If nothing else, it's clear that Marvel's Avengers writers are working closely in sync to bring this latest conflict to life.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #676
January 18, 2018
|
|
What began as a simple tale of heroes battling Roland Emmerich-worthy natural disasters is quickly evolving into something more ambitious
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers #677
January 25, 2018
|
|
So far, "No Surrender" is accomplishing what its creators set out to do by unifying the Avengers line and building a conflict worthy of Earth's Mightiest Heroes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Avengers (2018) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
|
|
Avengers / Invaders |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Avengers / Invaders #3
July 2, 2008
|
|
Given Alex Ross' involvement, I was hoping this series could at least impress on a visual level. Sadly, Ross doesn't appear to contribute much beyond cover images. Steve Sadowski's work is decent enough, even if he shows a far better handle on human characters than superhuman ones. Mostly, I just can't help but hold this book up to The Twelve, which aims for a similar look and tone. Unfortunately for Avengers/Invaders, it fails to measure up in any area. I'd tell potential readers to just hold out and trade-wait this series, but it's actually going to be more expensive to go that route. Instead, I'd recommend ignoring Avengers/Invaders altogether. Several current ongoing books are telling the same basic story, and they all seem to be doing it better.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers / Invaders #4
August 6, 2008
|
|
More annoying than anything, this issue ends on a pseudo cliffhanger with the promise that Avengers/Invaders will return in October. I really don't find the series to be worth waiting that long. It's already drawn out and lacking in substance as it is. I suggest readers spend this two-month vacation catching up on The Twelve and learning how this type of series can be done properly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Avengers Academy |
28 issues
show
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #1
June 9, 2010
|
|
For a book that I wasn't sure would capture my interest, Avengers Academy manages an impressive debut. So far Gage in working has succeeded with his new cast. The true test comes now as he begins to flesh out the various personalities and build towards a larger conflict.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #2
July 14, 2010
|
|
Mike McKone impresses once more with his detailed, precise pencils. Though the setting remains largely fixed, McKone is able to stretch his muscles a fair bit with a large cast. I'm still iffy on certain costume designs, but aside from that the series is very easy on the eyes. As long as Gage and McKone keep firing at this level I'm hopeful Avengers Academy has a bright future ahead of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #3
August 18, 2010
|
|
As for the art, Mike McKone delivers another 22 pages of gorgeous art. This issue allows him to stretch a bit and render plenty of outside villains and a few new Avengers to boot. I have serious doubts about the ability of this crossover to sustain itself for very long. For now, though, part 1 has the distinction of being Gage's best issue of Avengers Academy so far.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #7
December 15, 2010
|
|
Tom Raney fills in for Mike McKone on pencils this month (despite what the credits page would have you believe). Raney's recent Marvel work has been pretty variable in quality. Luckily, Raney is in solid form here, and the inks of Dave Meikis and Scott Hanna help bring an echo of McKone's precise pencils into the mix. Their rendering of Giant-Man's new uniform is startlingly inconsistent, however. Details and trimmings appear and vanish at random. The coloring of Jeromy Cox and Andrew Crossley is also fairly inconsistent, with one panel of Iron Man even featuring reversed colors. Though generally attractive, the visuals in this issue suggest a rushed schedule. Luckily, McKone is back next month, and readers have every reason to be excited for the continued future of this series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #14
May 18, 2011
|
|
My one worry with this issue was how Gage would handle the Sinister Six in general and Rhino in particular. After Joe Kelly did such great work with Rhino last year, I'm wary of other writers tackling him. Surprisingly, the newly bloodthirsty but still noble Rhino was one of the highlights of the issue. The villains proved to be organic additions to the series, and Gage leaves the reader wondering all the more what these baddies are cooking up.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #15
June 15, 2011
|
|
With the whole creative team firing on all cylinders, Avengers Academy may just be the strongest of the Fear Itself tie-ins alongside Journey Into Mystery. Hopefully that will convince a few more readers to check this book out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #16
July 27, 2011
|
|
The issue picks up considerably when it shifts focus to Veil. Gage puts her through a physical and emotional gauntlet that takes full advantage of the Fear Itself setting. Her story results in both triumph and tragedy and satisfies all the way. Tom Raney also really delivers on all fronts in these pages. With Pym's fight out of the way for now, hopefully upcoming issues will continue to spotlight the Academy recruits and the battles they face. That's where the meat of this tie-in lies.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #17
August 3, 2011
|
|
This continues to be the most engrossing arc of Avengers Academy yet. Let's just hope Gage doesn't wipe too many characters off the board when the action heats up in issue #18.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #18
August 17, 2011
|
|
There's no doubt at this point that the entire Fear Itself arc is the strongest Avengers Academy has ever been. The blend of action and character building continues to impress with each new chapter. The only problem now is that readers are bound to get spoiled from having a new issue every two weeks.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #19
September 28, 2011
|
|
It's good to know this series still has a healthy future ahead of it. But if it were to end, this arc would have been a fitting place to do so. Gage has effectively brought these characters full circle, and I look forward to what he has in store as the next phase begins.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #20
October 26, 2011
|
|
Tom Raney's art is also a bit underwhelming. It carries a rushed quality through many pages, with a team shot on page 7 looking particularly loose and wonky. As nice as it's been to have this series ship so often this year, a more methodical schedule might not be such a bad thing right now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #21
October 31, 2011
|
|
Avengers Academy doesn't ease perfectly into the post-Fear Itself landscape, but it shows plenty of promise. Seasoned readers will sympathize with the main cast, feeling mistrustful and wary of the new characters and what they'll bring to the series. It's up to Gage to bring the magic all over again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #23
December 14, 2011
|
|
There's even more material to round out the issue, including a field mission and even more revelations about the future versions of the Academy recruits. Gage stumbles in some areas, such as a less than ideal portrayal of Hawkeye, but generally the material is solid. The problem is that the various pieces of the script never come together in a truly satisfying whole. Where once the book focused on too few characters at once, now it focuses on too many. The delicate balance of recent arcs needs to be restored. Also troubling is that Tom Raney's normally solid figure work is surprisingly stiff in many of the action scenes. In more ways than one, the book needs a little breathing room and a chance to catch up to all the chaos that has unfolded these last few months.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #24
January 4, 2012
|
|
Tom Grummett steps on board as the new penciller with this issue. His art has a distinctly old-school feel, with its clean lines and simple figure work. That doesn't exactly help solidify the tone either, but it generally suits the book and its mishmash of old and new characters. Hopefully Grummet can offer the book the visual consistency it hasn't enjoyed much in the past year.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #25
February 1, 2012
|
|
Yes, the series is too crowded for its own good at the moment, and hopefully that flaw will be addressed in future issues. But issue #25 gives fans plenty to chew on as the current arc wraps up and offers the sort of fun, bombastic, old-school adventure that you won't find in many Avengers books these days.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #26
February 22, 2012
|
|
Tom Grummett's art continues to provide the series with an old-school aesthetic that might have been out of place on the other Avengers books, but fits in fine here. Grummett's characters don't always look their proper age, but his storytelling and facial work is solid.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #27
March 7, 2012
|
|
"But what of the unresolved plot threads from Immonen's run?" you may ask. Gage strangely chooses to address some lingering plot points but ignores others. Maybe that was an editorial mandate, or maybe too much focus on Runaways continuity would have annoyed AA readers. So while it's satisfying to have these characters back in some form, this issue only highlights the need to have an actual, ongoing Runaways series again. Heck, Marvel could do far worse than hand the reins to Gage himself.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #28
April 4, 2012
|
|
If Avengers Academy #27 didn't prove Gage should be writing a Runaways book, issue #28 cements the idea. We've gone far too long without a steady dose of these characters, and it's high time Marvel gave them another shot.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #29
May 3, 2012
|
|
Avengers Academy is enjoyable as always. However, the bar has already been set pretty high when it comes to AvX tie-ins, and it's difficult not to feel like Gage could be doing more with this arc.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #30
May 16, 2012
|
|
Tom Grummett's artwork is decent, if not particularly sleek or eye-catching. He handles the dialogue-heavy scenes and Shaw vs. Avengers action well, but the larger battle scenes are comparatively flat and bland. How his work will hold up now that the various character factions have converged on the battlefield remains to be seen.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #31
June 6, 2012
|
|
It doesn't appear as though this series is leaving behind AvX just yet, but if Gage has proven anything on this series, it's that he knows how to make the most of tie-in arcs.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #32
June 20, 2012
|
|
While I was happy to see Timothy Green come on board for this arc, the actual art quality is fairly disappointing. Green generally offers a surreal, almost European approach in his Marvel work, but this issue sees him struggle with a more traditional superhero style. Characters often seem overly stiff and posed, while the facial work consists mainly of grimaces and gritted teeth. It's too bad more of the energetic, manic style seen in Green's recent Rocket Raccoon/Groot stories couldn't have appeared in this book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #33
July 18, 2012
|
|
As with issue #32, Timothy Green's art is unexpectedly disappointing. His facial work is dull and lifeless, while his characters are often stiffly posed and suffering from wacky anatomy. Green has done top-notch work in several cosmic books recently, so it's strange to see him deliver such underwhelming work here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #34
August 1, 2012
|
|
No doubt we'll learn in the coming weeks whether Academy will be sticking around after Final Exam wraps up. Regardless of the outcome, Gage is showing every sign of doing justice to the characters he's built up these past two years.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #35
August 15, 2012
|
|
Andrea Di Vito steps in for Tom Grummett this month. While it's disappointing this arc won't have one, consistent penciller, Di Vito handles the characters well and delivers a bit more detail and depth in his panels than Grummett's issues had been offering. What the issue lacks in style it makes up for in good, solid storytelling.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #36
September 5, 2012
|
|
Much of this character building seems to lay the groundwork for future stories, which of course raises hope that maybe Gage won't be done with these characters just because the series is ending. No doubt there's still a wealth of material to explore in the coming weeks.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #37
September 19, 2012
|
|
With only one short arc remaining, I've given up hope of Gage completely wrapping up the series' various loose ends. Still, rather than rush to the finish, Gage is content to deliver more of the same quality characterization and plot twists that have made this series such a worthwhile read for the past two-and-a-half years.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Academy #39
November 7, 2012
|
|
It's sad to see this series go, partly because Gage makes it abundantly clear that there's still so much story left to tell with his cast, and partly because Avengers Arena does not appear to be the kind of book that will explore that potential. Regardless, we'll always have these past 40 issues to look back on fondly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Avengers Arena #3 |
Jan 09, 2013
show
|
|
I could tolerate the grotesque concept of this series if I felt like it served a greater purpose. Avengers Arena revels in its similarities to books like Battle Royale and The Hunger Games. But the common factor among those stories, and one that Arena lacks so far, is that the teen-on-teen violence served as a larger sort of social commentary. What purpose do any of these deaths serve besides depriving readers of future stories with the characters? Hopeless is so cavalier in killing off his protagonists that I'm beginning to suspect more and more that this really is all an elaborate illusion or simulation. The thought that Avengers Arena might be one giant red herring somehow seems even worse than it being a nonstop slaughter-fest.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Avengers Assemble |
9 issues
show
|
|
|
Avengers Assemble #1
March 14, 2012
|
|
Avengers Assemble #1 isn't a terrible entry point for new readers, as it's light on continuity and easy to dive into. Unfortunately, there could and should have been more substance to this issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Assemble #2
April 11, 2012
|
|
If you want a simple, action-oriented Avengers book, Assemble has its merits. Mark Bagley's work is attractive in this issue and actually shows a higher level of detail and consistency than it did in issue #1. There's not much continuity to get in the way of the action, and there's something to be said for that in a time when nearly every other Avengers book is becoming tied up with Avengers vs. X-Men. And so, as with issue #1, the readers most pleased by this effort are going to be the ones who don't have much Avengers experience. For everyone else, the simplistic plotting and frustrating characterization are major hurdles to contend with.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Assemble #3
May 9, 2012
|
|
I don't know whether to hope that incoming movie fans are able to enjoy this book as some sort of pseudo-sequel to the film, or that they'll take issue with the many glaring problems in Avengers Assemble too. In any case, there are far better Avengers comics from Bendis and numerous other writers they should be reading instead.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Assemble #4
June 13, 2012
|
|
By all rights, this series should have taken on a new level of excitement once it became apparent that Brian Bendis is working to reinvigorate Marvel's cosmic heroes and villains along with telling an accessible Avengers tale. Sadly, the execution just isn't there.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Assemble #7
September 12, 2012
|
|
Bendis would have a potentially much more interesting and enjoyable story on his hands if he were just writing a Guardians of the Galaxy comic. And perhaps one day he will be, and the Avengers will just have been a necessary evil in order to help provide causal readers a stepping stone into the Marvel cosmos. That still doesn't excuse this series for its storytelling shortcomings.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Assemble #11
January 16, 2013
|
|
That's not to say there's no deeper, emotional appeal in this issue. DeConnick offers some great material between Spider-Woman and Hulk as the two deepen their bond. This is really the first post-AvX comic to justify Hulk's return to the Avengers fold. In general the book is a celebration of the Avengers' family dynamic. It's cheerful in a way the franchise has so rarely been of late.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Assemble #15AU
May 8, 2013
|
|
It helps that Butch Guice is on board to provide the visuals. Guice's art rivals anything we've seen in the main series. He expertly captures the scope and detail of Ultron's destruction with his usual dark, noir-tinged style. But the premise allows him to branch out quite a bit, with some fun digital sequences that pay homage to the 8-bit era of gaming. It's enough to make one wonder how the core event would have turned out if Guice were the lead artist.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Assemble #18
August 21, 2013
|
|
In some ways the story is fragmented without Avengers #18 providing a larger context. But a more pressing concern is that DeConnick doesn't fully exploit the bond between Jessica and Hulk or her lasting revulsion toward Skrulls during various key moments where it would have made sense. Hopefully the next issue will make up for those omissions.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Assemble #22.INH
December 18, 2013
|
|
Again, the plot in this arc is hardly remarkable. It adds very little to the larger Inhumanity picture (not there there seems to be much to work with until Inhuman actually kicks off). But as this series has always been about characterization and fun over plot since DeConnick originally took over, that's no great crime.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Avengers Prime |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Avengers Prime #3
September 29, 2010
|
|
The story doesn't disappoint either, particularly now that Brian Michael Bendis seems to have found his rhythm with the scripts. This issue begins the process of reuniting the three Avengers, allowing plenty of time for Steve and Tony to play off one another. The humor is admittedly a bit overdone in spots, with Tony's dialogue in particular being overwritten. But in general Prime offers exactly the sort of unfettered fun and adventure Heroic Age promised. I just wish the series didn't seem to so frequently fly in the face of recent events in the main Thor series. A script dealing with Hela and the state of the other Norse realms is bound to run into continuity conflicts at the moment. However, that should hardly prevent fans of classic Thor and Avengers stories from digging into Prime. This mini is steadily improving and continues to justify the bimonthly wait.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Prime #4
November 10, 2010
|
|
The writing is of somewhat lesser concern, but that doesn't mean Brian Michael Bendis isn't delivering a satisfying script. There's a clear attempt to transition the trio from tense allies to comfortable friends again. For the most part this attempt is successful, though Bendis' portrayal of Tony Stark continues to perplex. It's no longer a matter of Bendis' portrayal not meshing with Matt Fraction' current handling of the character. Tony is annoying in his humor and reads awkwardly by any standard. It's a flaw that holds back an otherwise solid script. Bendis makes up for it somewhat with his strong handling of Hela and the welcome surprise appearance of another recent Thor villain. The pieces are moving into place for an epic finale in two months. The wait will be long, but these past four issues have shown it will be well worth it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Avengers Standoff |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Avengers Standoff: Assault on Pleasant Hill Alpha #1
March 1, 2016
|
|
Two chapters into Avengers Standoff, it's already clear that Marvel needs to turn to Nick Spencer for event comics more often. Spencer shows a knack for blending humor and darkness in this issue as he escalates the situation in Pleasant Hill and draws the Avengers into the fray. It helps that he has a very strong partner in Jesus Saiz. This crossover is off to a great start, but can it maintain that momentum in the hands of other creative teams?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Standoff: Assault on Pleasant Hill Omega #1
April 28, 2016
|
|
Nick Spencer really needs to be given the reins of more Marvel events. While Avengers Standoff became overly bloated as various Avengers and S.H.I.E.L.D.-related comics were drawn into the fray, Spencer's issues have maintained a distinctive balance between lighthearted charm and epic drama.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Standoff: Welcome to Pleasant Hill #1
February 17, 2016
|
|
As exhausting as it is to think Marvel is already launching into a new crossover event, Avengers Standoff is showing plenty of promise at this early stage. The political nature to the conflict and the mystery behind the nature of Pleasant Hill both combine to form a compelling conflict. The real question is whether this event can sustain itself as it draws in other books and other creative teams.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Avengers Undercover |
10 issues
show
|
|
|
Avengers Undercover #1
March 12, 2014
|
|
Avengers Undercover will serve as a smooth transition for fans of Avengers Arena. It has a familiar (if reduced) cast and the same creative team. And right away, this series capitalizes on the drama that comes from surviving a hellish gauntlet and returning to the real world. However, this issue doesn't do enough to establish the new status quo. And the strong character drama might not mean as much to those who didn't follow Arena. The first problem, at least, is soemthing that will hopefully eb addressed over the coming months.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Undercover #2
April 10, 2014
|
|
The series may be slow to build towards its ongoing status quo, but the benefit to this approach is a methodical, believable examination of how Niko, Chase, Cullen, and the rest could actually be tempted by villainy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Undercover #3
April 24, 2014
|
|
Only the art holds this issue back from being an early high point for the series. Cluttered panels and haphazard scene transitions don't do full justice to the tightly plotted, darkly humorous story being told.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Undercover #4
May 15, 2014
|
|
It's a busy, eclectic issue. And as with the previous three chapters, it shines best when Dennis Hopeless focuses on the character dynamics both among the team and with their friends and family (kudos on the Runaways reunion).
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Undercover #5
June 11, 2014
|
|
As much as I wish Kev Walker's pencils were still paired with Frank Martin's colors, Walker brings a lot to the table in this issue. He's great at conveying the seedy, surreal, even hellish nature of Bagalia, but also at giving life and expression to the heroes and making them seem like living, breathing characters.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Undercover #6
June 26, 2014
|
|
The real problem, however, is that we now know this series is ending with issue #10. There seems little chance of Undercover reaching a satisfying conclusion by then.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Undercover #8
August 14, 2014
|
|
It still smarts to know that Avengers Undercover is ending with issue #10. But the good news is that Dennis Hopeless is transitioning towards his big finale much more smoothly than might have been expected.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Undercover #10
September 10, 2014
|
|
Tigh Walker returns to finish out the series. Of the book's various artists, he's the most adept at replicating Kev Walker's distinctive style. Tigh's work is a bit more angular and stylized than before, but adept at conveying the tension and emotion and elation of the story as the battle races to its climax.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Avengers Vs. X-Men |
13 issues
show
|
|
|
Avengers Vs. X-Men #0
March 28, 2012
|
|
In the end, both halves of the issue are enjoyable (the first one a little more so). However, the issue comes up a bit lacking when it comes to ambition or a dramatic build-up to the main event. There's really nothing to link the two tales other than the vague shared element of two women clashing with the most important men in their lives. Nothing is revealed about the nature of Avengers vs. X-Men that hasn't been already. Fortunately, it's not as if we have long to wait for issue #1.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Vs. X-Men #1
April 4, 2012
|
|
Unlike most Marvel events, the hope is that this one will start off modestly and grow stronger over time. Issue #1 is a perfectly decent opening chapter, but it almost feels perfunctory in a way. The conflict needs to grow and evolve in interesting ways over the next 11 issues. And Cyclops certainly needs to be handled with more care going forward, lest this series repeat Civil War's mistake of making one faction look so crazy and militant that no one can sympathize with them.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Vs. X-Men #2
April 18, 2012
|
|
The best that can be said about AvX #2 is that it provides hope that the event won't always play out in such a dull and unremarkable fashion. The most memorable scenes in the issue are the ones that don't feature Avengers fighting X-Men at all, but rather characters like Thor and his deep space team preparing for certain doom. This series may be titled "Avengers vs. X-Men," but it's quickly looking as though the best thing that can happen is for the in-fighting to stop.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Vs. X-Men #3
May 2, 2012
|
|
There's no question that Avengers vs. X-Men could be a good, solid event comic. The operative word being "could." It's continuously frustrating to see writers doing such great work in the tie-in books and delivering so little of that quality and content on the main series. Maybe somewhere in the multiverse there exists a bizarre Frankenstein's monster of an event that actually crams the nuanced character work, epic blockbuster action, and tight plotting we're seeing in these disparate books into one, cohesive whole.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Vs. X-Men #4
May 16, 2012
|
|
If still a fractured and somewhat hollow event comic, AvX at least gained some traction in issue #4. And if nothing else, the plot continues to push forward rather than dwell on endless series of punch-fests between Avengers and X-Men. The next issue marks the end of Act 1, and perhaps the real indicator of whether the series can move past its initial storytelling mistakes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Vs. X-Men #5
June 6, 2012
|
|
Finally, there's the big, long-awaited twist that puts the cap on Act 1. This new development is bizarre, to say the least. I worry it pushes the conflict into silly a direction, but that's for future issues to confirm or deny. At the very least, the twist marks the point where AvX stops feeling predictable and begins exploring uncharted territory. A newfound sense of unpredictability and change can only be a good thing as the story moves into its second act.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Vs. X-Men #6
June 20, 2012
|
|
The Phoenix Five concept might have seemed silly on the surface, but in terms of execution Hickman really delivers in this issue. Finally we have an book that doesn't sacrifice characterization in favor of mindless spectacle. My enthusiasm is suddenly renewed for AvX as a whole, and even though this is already Hickman's final issue, I sincerely hope that issue #6 is an indicator of the quality readers can expect from this point forward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Vs. X-Men #7
July 5, 2012
|
|
As with nearly every chapter of this event, Avengers vs. X-Men #7 is guilty of glossing over certain vital parts of the story in its charge forward. Even so, the series remains in better shape than it was during Act 1. I would be surprised if issue #8 were to kill that momentum given the groundwork Fraction has laid here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Vs. X-Men #8
July 18, 2012
|
|
In the end, though AvX hit its current peak at the beginning of Act 2, the event is still in a better state than it was in its early months. Issue #8 offers an exciting and action-packed battle. It simply doesn't propel the conflict forward in the way a concluding chapter should.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Vs. X-Men #9
August 1, 2012
|
|
At its best, AvX manages to deliver on all the hype Marvel has placed on it. As we near the finish line, I can only hope that this renewed momentum means the event will remain at its best through the home stretch.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Vs. X-Men #10
August 15, 2012
|
|
I had hoped issue #9's strong showing meant we could expect a rousing finish to Act 3 and AvX as a whole. That didn't prove to be the case. However, there is still hope that this chapter was merely one last, unnecessary pit stop in an overly drawn out conflict, and that the remaining two issues will pick that lost momentum back up again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Vs. X-Men #11
September 12, 2012
|
|
In the end, the real importance of this death is going to be determined by how Marvel's writers deal with the fallout. I'm optimistic on that front. Unfortunately I'm somewhat less optimistic about the final issue of AvX. Jason Aaron has a tremendous amount of material to work through if the major beats of the event are going to reach a proper, satisfying conclusion.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers Vs. X-Men #12
October 3, 2012
|
|
Issue #12 drives the cover price up another dollar because of the extended page count. Unfortunately, this is one of those issues where the extra pages are devoted less to wrapping up the story itself and more towards laying the groundwork for other books. Much as Fear Itself #7 set up everything from Defenders to Fear Itself: The Fearless, Aaron's final pages build towards books like Uncanny Avengers and All-New X-Men. There's nothing wrong with this approach in theory, as long as the series is given a proper ending, but it does feel as though the emotional fallout of the event is being glossed over in favor of the "next big thing." Yes, there will be plenty of post-AvX tie-ins to explore that fallout. But that brings up the familiar complaint. Why are so many key emotional beats being relegated to tie-ins instead of unfolding in the main series? Will we ever have an event comic that offers a wholly complete and satisfying story in itself?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Avengers vs. X-Men: Infinite |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Avengers vs. X-Men: Infinite #1
April 4, 2012
|
|
By itself, Avengers vs. X-Men: Infinite #1 is simply an enjoyable and lavishly illustrated story featuring the latest hero to call himself Nova. But it also marks the beginning of a promising new approach to digital comics. Frankly, I'd be much more keen to embrace digital fully if more books read as cleanly and elegantly as this.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Avengers World |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Avengers World #1
January 8, 2014
|
|
Stefano Caselli's art is a nice way to round out the strong creative team on this series. Caselli is no stranger to pairing with the writers at this point, and his work helps further cement the bonds between this series and its two sisters. As always, his figure work pops off the page, and his art crackles with a manga-esque energy. We can only hope Caselli will be a regular player on the book, rather than the drifter he's been since leaving Secret Warriors.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers World #2
January 22, 2014
|
|
Between that quality and Stefano Caselli's gorgeously expressive artwork, this series is quickly shaping up to be a superior book to Avengers. So any fears that Avengers World might be a pointless, redundant, or unnecessary addition to Hickman's saga can be safely put to rest.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers World #3
February 19, 2014
|
|
The martial arts action in this issue is sublime, thanks in no small part to Stefano Caselli's dynamic visuals. This series only further proves that Caselli is the ideal artist to work with Gorgon and the Hand. But propping up the action is a terrific glimpse into Shang-Chi's mindset. The flashes to his ancestors and mentors as he steels himself for the big fight are effective in both fleshing out his character and further building tension. By the end, you'll be craving a martial arts-themed Avengers book from this creative team.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers World #5
May 1, 2014
|
|
Artistically, Avengers World remains the most satisfyingly consistent of Jonathan Hickman's Avengers crop. Issue #5 features more gorgeously vibrant and dynamic work from Stefano Caselli. But the series does begin to frustrate at times with the way it skips between conflicts.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Avengers: Children's Crusade |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Avengers: Children's Crusade #1
July 8, 2010
|
|
When it comes down to it, the shipping schedule is the only valid reason for not snatching this issue off the shelf. Children's Crusade sees the original Young Avengers crew back in very fine form. I can understand why readers might be hesitant to follow the book from chapter to chapter for the next year-and-a-half. But assuming the quality stays this high, the eventual trade should be high on their to-buy list. As a Young Avengers fan, I've grown accustomed to waiting and being rewarded for it in the end.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers: Children's Crusade #7
September 21, 2011
|
|
At least Jim Cheung's art never fails to satisfy. Even with the presence of so many separate inkers on the book, Cheung's pages are always expertly crafted, highly detailed, and engaging to the eye. I very much look forward to the day when this series is collected as an oversized hardcover. Not only will the long waits no longer be an issue, but the visuals will be at their very best.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers: Children's Crusade #9
March 7, 2012
|
|
Luckily, Jim Cheung's artwork is surprisingly strong considering the rush to finish the series before Avengers vs. X-Men. The presence of two inkers occasionally works to dull his precise line-work, but for the most part his cinematic appeal and knack for fine details remains. Children's Crusade will at least go own in history as a visual showpiece. It's a shame it couldn't do a better job of elevating the Young Avengers and building on past Marvel events too.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Avengers: The Initiative |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Avengers: The Initiative Annual #1
December 5, 2007
|
|
Nothing about Avengers: The Initiative Annual #1 is poorly done in any way. It's just the overall execution that falls a little flat, and it leaves me to wonder if we really needed it in the first place. Assuming we see a follow-up next year, Slott would do well to focus on telling a single, fulfilling story rather than a handful of forgettable tales. After all, annuals fell out of favor for a very good reason.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers: The Initiative #9
January 30, 2008
|
|
Other than that, I see no reason not to give Avengers: The Initiative a big recommendation. Few series manage to blend the light and dark elements of the Marvel universe with such grace.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers: The Initiative #17
September 24, 2008
|
|
The Initiative had the chance to stand as one of the better Secret Invasion tie-ins. Instead, a glaring lack of focus and an unfortunate rotating casts of artists have bumped it to the other side of the spectrum. There's still room for a bit of redemption, but I'm not holding out hope this series will ever again be as entertaining as it was in its first year.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers: The Initiative: Special #1
November 5, 2008
|
|
This issue certainly represents a step in the right direction for a book that has faltered in recent months. If nothing else, Gage proves he has the chops to continue on his own, and that's a good sign to this tired reader.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Avengers: The Origin #1 |
Apr 07, 2010
show
|
|
Whether or not you choose to buy this issue comes down to one question: Are you willing to lay down $3.99 for a superior take on a comic that has been printed and reprinted ad nauseum? One thing I would have liked to see from this book is evidence that Casey has a larger plan in mind. Presumably he won't spend the entire mini-series adapting old Avengers comics and nothing more. I'd just like to see signs that he has the same structured plan in place he did for Earth's Mightiest Heroes. As fun a read as issue #1 is, I wont begrudge readers who pass this book over.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Avengers: X-Sanction |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Avengers: X-Sanction #1
December 14, 2011
|
|
Avengers: X-Sanction feels a bit bare bones at the moment despite only being a four-issue series. There aren't many surprises to be had either. Knowing the basic premise of the series and the fact that it leads into Avengers vs. X-Men, it's easy enough to connect the dots. However, the art is strong, and Loeb proves he still has a handle on Cable. The best thing that can happen now is for the book to downplay the fighting and focus more on the characters themselves.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avengers: X-Sanction #4
March 21, 2012
|
|
If it was big, dumb action you craved, X-Sanction delivers well enough. If it was teases and revelations for AvX, it offers a few morsels. But in the end, even a humble four issues seemed too long for the meager conflict. Trade-waiters may be better off skipping this book entirely and moving straight ahead to AvX #0 next week.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Avenging Spider-Man (2011) |
13 issues
show
|
|
|
Avenging Spider-Man #1
November 8, 2011
|
|
Ultimately, this is a fun story, but one lacking in depth or content. It provides a decent counterpoint to Amazing without surpassing it in any significant way. The best thing Wells can do for the book is concentrate on expanding the conflict and giving the two heroes more to work with and more opportunities to play off of each other.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avenging Spider-Man #2
December 7, 2011
|
|
There are Marvel books that do a better job of blending big action and in-depth storytelling. But if there isn't enough simple fun in your superhero diet, you could do far worse than Avenging Spider-Man.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avenging Spider-Man #3
January 18, 2012
|
|
It's also pleasing to see Joe Madureira's art improve a bit in the final act. Madueira's work was never lacking for energy or dynamism, but the lack of inks led to an unnecessarily flat and hazy quality. Madureira seems to flip between that approach and a more traditional inked style in this issue, but the overall impression is a better one. Assuming Madureira is still returning to the series in a few months, hopefully this issue will be an indication of what to expect.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avenging Spider-Man #4
February 15, 2012
|
|
Land's art is fairly disappointing, though. His usual problems with mismatched facial expressions are still apparent, as are the recycled poses and photo-referenced figures. Compared to the pairing of Land and Guru eFX on Uncanny X-Men (also out today), the colors here don't enhance his pencils quite so well, either. The action does flow pretty well throughout the issue, and it's more a case of the subtler aspects not working very well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avenging Spider-Man #15
December 5, 2012
|
|
With the next issue of Avenging tying into Amazing Spider-Man #700 and likely taking the series into a darker direction, it's good to have one more fun and wacky storyline starring Peter Parker.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avenging Spider-Man #16
January 16, 2013
|
|
The one real flaw plaguing this issue is an excessive amount of exposition. Whereas past chapters of Avenging would use the goofy recap pages to establish everything new readers need to know about the main characters (i.e - not much), Yost laboriously uses Otto's monologue to introduce every single X-Man and offer the new Spider-Man's extended thoughts on mutants. Most of it is simply unnecessary information. Hopefully this won't be a recurring problem as Otto continues his tour of the superhero community.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avenging Spider-Man #17
February 27, 2013
|
|
Paco Medina's art captures the fun, bombastic tone of the script pretty well. His figure work is surprisingly adept at capturing the expressive, playful style of Mike Allred's FF comics. However, Medina's stiff, repetitive facial work remains a hindrance and perhaps the only true weak point in this latest issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avenging Spider-Man #18
March 13, 2013
|
|
This issue benefits heavily from Marco Checcetto's artwork. After spending so much time with Punisher and the seedier side of the Marvel Universe, it's refreshing to see Checchetto dabble with bigger, bolder superhero stories. He handles the action well, and his slightly ethereal style proves to be a solid match for the visual tone of the Superior era.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avenging Spider-Man #19
April 11, 2013
|
|
The only real flaw in this issue is that the done-in-one format isn't really ideal for the story Yost is telling. There's some awkward wrangling done in order to squeeze the conflict into the usual 20 pages, sacrificing most of the setup phase in the process. Sleepwalker also feels underutilized, especially considering that we probably won't see him pop up again for another five years now. Even so, this issue is another worthwhile installment in a series that so often manages to delight and impress.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avenging Spider-Man #20
May 8, 2013
|
|
But at least Marco Checchetto's artwork fits right in with the seedy world of espionage and intrigue that characterizes the current Secret Avengers title. This issue offers just the right blend of shadowy settings and dynamic super-heroics, with some top-notch character designs and facial work to boot. Hopefully the scripting can pick up enough to match the visuals in the second half of this arc.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avenging Spider-Man #21
May 29, 2013
|
|
Visually, this issue is another winner for Marco Checchetto. His dark, moody style couldn't be better suited for Chameleon, and the various shots of Chameleon wearing a tattered face are deliciously creepy. The action flows well and the various characters sizzle on the page. I once again finding myself wishing that Superior could display the level of visual fidelity and consistency that Avenging does every month.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Avenging Spider-Man #22
June 12, 2013
|
|
The issue does a better job of laying the groundwork for Superior Spider-Man Team-Up and Dan Slott's Superior Spider-Man than it does in simply telling a fun, character-driven story. Hopefully the build-up to the revamped series will prove to be worthwhile.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
AVX: Consequences |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
AVX: Consequences #1
October 10, 2012
|
|
Tom Raney's pencils are a bit mixed in quality. The inks lend an unusually harsh edge to his line-work. It's an interesting shift, but one that only works in the more dramatic scenes. Raney's figures also have a tendency to appear tense and slightly distorted here. Oddly, the issue features Captain America in his Jerome Opena-designed costume, rather than the more traditional costume seen in Uncanny Avengers. I assume we'll be seeing a lot of that back-and-forth in the early weeks of Marvel NOW.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
AVX: Consequences #2
October 17, 2012
|
|
Hopefully this second issue is a sign of how Gillen will approach the remainder of Consequences, with each chapter narrowing its focus to one group of characters glimpsed in issue #1.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
AVX: Consequences #3
October 24, 2012
|
|
Scot Eaton handles the artwork this week. His style falls closely in line with issue #2 -- solidly rendered, but not particularly flashy or memorable. Like Tom Raney in issue #1, Eaton seems to struggle with Captain America's overly busy new costume. Thankfully, it's a new costume we probably won't be seeing after this book wraps.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
AVX: Consequences #4
October 31, 2012
|
|
Mark Brooks handles the art this week, making issue #4 the standout of the series as far as the visuals are concerned. Brooks brings an extra sense of refinement and detail to the characters. If Iron Man's role is superfluous, I could still spend hours staring at the sleek lines that make up his armor. Brook's facial work is also top notch, and he really delivers on some key panels involving Namor and Magneto. Uncanny fans definitely shouldn't be passing this book up.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
AVX: Consequences #5
November 7, 2012
|
|
Even so, Gillen delivers a strong finish to a surprisingly enjoyable and important mini-series. More than ever, I'm eager to see what the future holds for Cyclops and his dwindling band of allies as the Marvel NOW! status quo kicks in.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
AVX: VS |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
AVX: VS #1
April 25, 2012
|
|
AvX: VS does exactly what it sets out to do. In some ways it's a more enjoyable read than AvX itself is so far. That said, there are far better and more ambitious books you can be spending your $3.99 on this week.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
AVX: VS #2
May 16, 2012
|
|
This series more or less delivers what it aims for. Still, it wouldn't hurt to see the writers strive to be more wacky and further embrace the brainless, bombastic nature of the book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
AVX: VS #3
June 13, 2012
|
|
So once again, AvX: VS. delivers two enjoyable superhero fights that fill in some of the gaps of the main series. On the other hand, both stories are too simple and brief to fill out a $3.99 comic. Yost's segment at least strives for more dramatic depth, but it's still over and done with almost as soon as it begins. If meatier, more character-driven tales aren't in the cards with this book, then maybe what VS. needs is either more than two segments per issue or a lower cover price.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
AVX: VS #5
August 29, 2012
|
|
Ideally, AvX: VS should be able to offer a mix of effective character moments and big, dumb action. Unfortunately, this issue is an example of poorly handled character moments simply getting in the way of the action.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Axe Cop: American Choppers |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Axe Cop: American Choppers #1
May 22, 2014
|
|
The stream-of-consciousness approach and hyper-violence are great, and the comic is genuinely funny, not just silly. The idea of a world called Captain Planet where all the captains of pop culture dwell is particularly inspired. Bring on more Axe Cop!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Axis: Carnage #1 |
Oct 29, 2014
show
|
|
German Peralta's art is solid, if not entirely suited to a character as visually dynamic and extreme as Carnage. Kasady is a looking a little plain here. But Peralta visualizes the new Sin Eater well, bringing a creepy vibe to his many scenes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Axis: Hobgoblin |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Axis: Hobgoblin #1
October 22, 2014
|
|
Even if you're not a fan of AXIS, this issue is probably worth checking out on the strength of the visuals and its celebration of Spider-Man's goblin-themed enemies.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Axis: Hobgoblin #2
November 13, 2014
|
|
The best thing that can be said about this AXIS tie-in is that it channels the same vibe as Superior Foes of Spider-Man. Kevin Shinick weaves a fun, goofy little tale about Roderick Kingsley trying to shift his franchising empire towards good and Phil Urich bristling at this perversion of Hobgoblin's bad name. The first issue's problems with exposition have been smoothed out, resulting in a more cohesive overall story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Axis: Revolutions #1 |
Oct 29, 2014
show
|
|
The second story reunites the X-men Legacy team of writer Simon Spurrier and artist Tan Eg Huat. This tale focuses on Doctor Strange, who unlike Spider-Man is very much afflicted by an excess of hate. This allows Spurrier to pour his trademark sense of snarky humor into Strange without it feeling out of character. The loopy premise also plays well into Huat's style, which sometimes struggles to mesh with the Marvel Universe. Strange's attempts to rectify the situation and avoid magically obliterating everyone he encounters makes for an entertaining read. It also makes you wonder if the character might not benefit from a harder, more caustic edge in general. Food for thought as Marvel begins spotlighting the character again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Azrael (2009) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Azrael #4
January 20, 2010
|
|
Azrael continues to be a surprisingly satisfying read that is unfortunately held back by sub-par visuals. Despite my fears, Michael Lane is a better character following his transformation. Let's hope the gulf between Lane and his alter ego continues to narrow in future issues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Azrael #6
March 17, 2010
|
|
But if Nicieza is doing his job in building up both the book and its star, artist Ramon Bachs isn't. In theory Bachs should be suited for the series. He has a gritty style that ditches superhero tropes for something a little more grounded and believable. But his work is ultimately too flat and bland to really leave a lasting impression. Bachs' depiction of Lane as Azrael is often less impressive and imposing than it should be. Well, Lane's historical counterpart fares no better. I can't help but think the series could be more exciting and dynamic if only Bachs brought more vitality to the page. Given the heavy religious elements at play, I want the book to resemble nothing if not a bold Renaissance painting in motion. It doesn't help that Francesco Mattina's covers continue to ensure Azrael is the best-looking Batman book on the stands... until you open it. Azrael needs more visual style to go with the substance.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Azrael: Death's Dark Knight #3 |
May 13, 2009
show
|
|
This issue makes no secret of the fact that Lane's story as Azrael is only beginning. It's unclear when or where we'll see him next, but I'm hoping the wait won't be too long. Azrael: Death's Dark Knight has proven to be a great pitch for a longer story, which is more than I could have hoped for from a mere tie-in project.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
B.P.R.D.: 1947 #1 |
Jul 08, 2009
show
|
|
And Ba and Moon certainly don't disappoint. The two are just similar enough in style that it can be difficult to distinguish between them at times. As best I can tell, Ba handled the first half of the issue, while Moon handled the second. The overall look is loose and kinetic compared to the normally dark and oppressive tone of many B.P.R.D. comics. Both artists tend to inject their comics with a unique sense of energy. All the same, there are certain B.P.R.D. trademarks to be seen in the art. Overall, Moon's later pages are the strongest. He manages to build tension both with his inventive panel structure and with the assistance of colorist Dave Stewart. The stark lighting and dense, eerie fog seen in the final pages are definite visual treats. I can't wait to see how the art fares once the crazier story elements begin to crawl out of the woodwork. Once again, this is a fairly slow start, but still a promising one for the latest B.P.R.D. tale.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
B.P.R.D.: Hell On Earth |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
B.P.R.D.: Hell On Earth: New World #1
August 11, 2010
|
|
New World lacks a hook, and it reads a bit dull because of it. Isolated scenes work well, particularly those involving Abe Sapien. There just needs to be more consistency and a larger driving conflict. Paper pushing and office politics don't really cut it. Luckily, Guy Davis is still around to keep the characters looking good. His thin, laid back line-work is complemented surprisingly well by the rich colors of Dave Stewart. Hopefully the story can kick into gear with issue #2. After last week's issue of Hellboy: The Storm, my standards are pretty high concerning this franchise.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
B.P.R.D.: Hell On Earth: New World #2
September 9, 2010
|
|
Guy Davis' art helps keep the story moving, though it is a bit looser and scratchier than I'd like. Davis has done a better job in the past of adhering to the traditional Hellboy/B.P.R.D. style while allowing his own voice to shine through as well. "New World" isn't a terrible start for B.P.R.D.'s ongoing Hell on Earth direction, but it's taking too long for this series to establish itself and its larger purpose.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Back to the Future |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Back to the Future #1
October 21, 2015
|
|
This new series may not be the full-fledged sequel some Back to the Future fans were hoping for, but it certainly does the trick as far as capturing the look and feel of the original trilogy and telling fun new stories set in that universe. The first story in particular shows how much potential there is in exploring the back-story of these characters and fleshing out the key relationships in the films.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Back to the Future #2
November 12, 2015
|
|
Despite the fact that this mini-series focuses on shorter vignettes over a full-length story, it adds a surprising amount of depth to the characters and events of the original BttF trilogy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Back to the Future: Biff to the Future #1 |
Jan 26, 2017
show
|
|
Alan Robinson succeeds in capturing the lighthearted vibe of the films, but that alone isn't enough to salvage what's shaping up to be a big missed opportunity.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Backstagers #1 |
Aug 18, 2016
show
|
|
This is not a comic afraid to get silly or weird, and that's one of its greatest strengths.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Baltimore |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Baltimore: Empty Graves #1
April 7, 2016
|
|
In general, Peter Bergting is a solid addition to the lineup of artists playing in the Mignola-verse sandbox, but his stark, eerie style really comes alive in this flashback to a harsh, demon-infested desert wasteland.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Baltimore: The Plague Ships #1
August 4, 2010
|
|
Fortunately, the same chilling atmosphere common to most of Mignola's work is still present here. Scenes of vampire hunting should entertain, even if the characters themselves don't. Ben Stenbeck's art also helps matters. As with Witchfinder: In the Service of Angels, Stenbeck provides a very old-fashioned visual style that nonetheless evokes Mignola's own familiar style. For the most part, all this series accomplishes is to make me vaguely curious about the original novel. Perhaps that can be considered a success. Still, when held against the copious output of Mignola and his collaborators at Dark Horse, Baltimore falls somewhat short of the mark.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bane: Conquest |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Bane: Conquest #1
May 4, 2017
|
|
Perhaps it was too much to hope for more than one great Bane story out of DC this year. Bane: Conquest comes right on the heels of Tom King and David Finch's "I Am Bane" storyline, but it does little to build on that momentum.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bane: Conquest #2
June 8, 2017
|
|
The appeal of having Bane co-creators Chuck Dixon and Graham Nolan working with the character again was deflated after reading the first chapter of this new maxi-series. Issue #2 makes some solid improvements, but Conquest still isn't on the level of their previous Batman work.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bang! Tango #1 |
Feb 04, 2009
show
|
|
Bang! Tango is certainly interesting, but it also doesn't hook the reader immediately in the way Kelly's best work tends to do. I'll need at least another issue in the can before I'll feel comfortable in making a firmer judgment. For now, I'll just say that it was a fun first dance. Same time next month, eh?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bankshot #1 |
Jun 29, 2017
show
|
|
Together, De Campi and ChrisCross create a boisterous, explosive tale of modern war and espionage, one where the liens between good and evil are practically nonexistent. If the plot comes together, this could become a truly memorable addition to Dark Horse's lineup.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Barb Wire #1 |
Jul 02, 2015
show
|
|
The main problem with this first issue is that none of the characters really stand out apart from Barb and her brother. Most are simply one-note caricatures.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bat Lash #1 |
Dec 12, 2007
show
|
|
At least the art leaves me with few complaints. Granted, it's far less flashy than what we've seen in books like Lone Ranger, but John Severin packs in a pleasing amount of detail into each panel. From a visual standpoint, Bat Lash fits in quite nicely with fellow DC cowpoke Jonah Hex. The story is somewhat less successful so far, but it shouldn't do anything to kill the latest cowboy craze sweeping the industry.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batgirl (2009) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Batgirl #3
October 14, 2009
|
|
This opening arc has been pretty weak, all things considered, but I see no reason why the book can't make significant strides in future arcs. As long as Miller can strike and maintain a proper dynamic between his leading ladies, the rest should eventually fall into place.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batgirl #7
February 10, 2010
|
|
With so little to recommend about this book, I won't blame Batgirl fans for giving up on the series. After seven issues I'm still not sold. And with a new Birds of Prey series set to return Barbara to her rightful status in the DCU, I have even less reason to stick around. Hopefully Miller has something big planned after the Red Robin crossover ends.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batgirl #8
March 10, 2010
|
|
Upon finishing Batgirl #8, readers are invited to move right along to Red Robin #10. I would strongly recommend against that. These two books have constantly struggled to remain relevant or even readable among the current crop of Bat titles. Bringing the two together is clearly doing nothing to aid either character.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batgirl (2011) |
13 issues
show
|
|
|
Batgirl #5
January 11, 2012
|
|
On the plus side, issue #5 addresses a number of lingering questions about the book, such as the source of Babs' "miracle" and the current state of the Gordon family tree. Simone also continues to succeed in painting her heroine with the right mix of renewed optimism and youthful uncertainty. The book isn't perfect, but it's certainly engaging.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batgirl #6
February 8, 2012
|
|
On the down side, Ardian Syaf's line-work continues to waver in quality, with some panels boasting significantly more detail and clarity than others. The pacing is also really off in this issue. The conflict reaches an early crescendo, dies down, and then picks back up again. The pages focused on the tension between Barbara and her mother read like wasted space, and it would be nice to see this plot point ether shoved aside or dealt with quickly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batgirl #39
February 18, 2015
|
|
The overall effect on this personal and professional drama is to ramp up the tension in her life and set the stage for the big twist. This issue becomes progressively more engrossing as Babs gets closer to the truth behind the supposed "real Batgirl" plaguing her life. This issue proves that Babs Tarr's slick and expressive art style can handle emotional drama as easily as it can flamboyant superheroics and scenes of 20-somethings partying it up. And when the big twist hits, it's impossible not to be excited for this books future. It's tough to say how far the creative team are going with the revelation, but here's hoping they have something bold and dramatic in store for next month's installment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batgirl #40
March 18, 2015
|
|
The new Batgirl team are able to give their first story arc the big finale it deserved. This issue offers an exciting, tense finale that pits Barbara Gordon against her own troubled past. This issue's biggest accomplishment is putting that past to rest and setting the stage for Barbara and her new friends to embrace a brighter, more unpredictable future.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batgirl #42
July 29, 2015
|
|
There's ample potential when it comes to exploring the new Gordon family dynamic, and so far this series is doing a great job. This issue is fun and lighthearted, but also uses the complicated history between Jim and Barbara to great effect. Livewire's role in the story is pretty generic, but this issue is less about the villain than the Batgirl/Batman team-up.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batgirl #43
August 27, 2015
|
|
This new issue of Batgirl manages to be a lot of fun even as it explores the increasingly hectic and dangerous landscape of Barbara's life. The diverse visuals and the increased emphasis on the supporting cast don't hurt either.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batgirl #44
September 24, 2015
|
|
Though this issue of Batgirl is marred by some some overly expository dialogue and weird pacing, the fundamental appeal of the series is as strong as ever. Stewart and Fletcher continue to put the supporting cast to great use, building a storyline that offers compelling drama, lighthearted fun and charming romance in equal measure. Even the absence of Babs Tarr this month does nothing to diminish the book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batgirl #45
October 29, 2015
|
|
What should be the big selling point of this issue is actually the weakest element. As nice as it is to see Dick Grayson and Barbara Gordon reunited, this issue doesn't do much with the team-up or even justify Dick's presence in the first place. It falls on the stylish art and the emotional wedding scene to make up for that disappointing team-up, which they mostly do.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batgirl #46
December 17, 2015
|
|
Much like Harley Quinn in early 2015, Barbara Gordon is beginning to feel the pressure of juggling her personal, academic and superhero lives. The result is a fairly crowded new issue, as Cameron Stewart and Brenden Fletcher pile on new challenges from every corner. It's certainly an entertaining one, though.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batgirl #47
January 21, 2016
|
|
This chapter of Batgirl takes a predictable dip in quality thanks to the absence of Babs Tarr. The book still has its moments of visual excitement, though. And between the three-way superheroine team-up, the father/daughter bonding scene and the return of a character who deserves more attention, this new storyline is quickly heating up.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batgirl #48
February 3, 2016
|
|
The current Batgirl conflict is building momentum as Babs teams up with an old friend and gets to the heart of her recent memory problems. This issue often struggles to find its groove as it barrels through several big scenes, but it finally settles down in time to do justice to this team-up.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batgirl #51
April 28, 2016
|
|
This short epilogue arc isn't necessarily remarkable because of its villain (a minor footnote compared to the likes of Fugue, really), but rather in how it celebrates the ensemble cast the series has built up over the past couple years.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batgirl (2016) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Batgirl Annual #1
March 30, 2017
|
|
This issue features the first team-up between Batgirl and Supergirl in current DC continuity, which is just one more reason why Rebirth needed to happen in the first place. Unfortunately, the main story doesn't do a whole lot with that dynamic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batgirl #1
July 28, 2016
|
|
So far, this series doesn't break any new ground in terms of storytelling, but it has plenty to offer Batgirl fans.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batgirl #4
October 27, 2016
|
|
The plot in this first arc has become a bit convoluted as Batgirl continues to bounce from one Asian city to the next. What began as a simple tale of Batgirl taking a vacation and getting in touch with her inner warrior has suddenly become an international romp involving wacky villains spawned by the horrors of cram school.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batgirl #12
June 29, 2017
|
|
It's a suitably low-key, lighthearted chapter of the series, poking fun at ghost hunting culture and highlighting Babs' rational scientist mindset as she struggles to find a rational explanation for the supernatural. The actual mystery angle falls a little flat, however.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batgirl and the Birds of Prey: Rebirth #1 |
Jul 21, 2016
show
|
|
There are various reasons why DC's New 52 Birds of Prey comic never really connected, but one of the biggest is that it never featured the core Birds of Prey trinity - Barbara Gordon, Dinah Lance and Helena Bertinelli. This new series at least rectifies that problem. Unfortunately, the decision to portray the trio as a squabbling, dysfunctional unit does nothing to recapture the old dynamic that's been missing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman #689
August 12, 2009
|
|
In its first three issues, Winick's new Batman run has impressed me far more than I would have expected. It offers a nice counterpoint to the visually stunning but sometimes light-on-content Batman & Robin. As a Bat fan, it's hard to imagine being more satisfied at the moment. Let's hope Batgirl doesn't go and ruin everyone's high spirits next week.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #699
May 12, 2010
|
|
Overly brief and cluttered, this arc nonetheless proves Daniel is a natural fit for the series. I look forward to his return later this summer and whatever changes that might bring.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #700
June 9, 2010
|
|
Issue #700 doesn't seem to have a great deal of relevance to the greater picture. I went in expecting connections to The Return of Bruce Wayne. Though Professor Nichols' time travel device is suspiciously similar to Darkseid's Omega Effect, I was hard-pressed to find anything of real merit. Bearing that in mind, Bat fans should check out this book not as a vital piece of the puzzle, but more as a lighthearted celebration of Batman's long and storied career. Issue #700 allows Morrison to jam with some top-notch artists and cover a great deal of territory in a relatively small space. It's not his best Batman work, but still highly entertaining.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #704
November 17, 2010
|
|
Daniel continues to impress more and more with his artistic abilities. Whatever storytelling flaws the artist suffered from in his earlier Batman work have largely been ironed out by now. Thankfully, the slightly more exaggerated style Daniel exhibited in his recent collaboration with Morrison has been toned down again. This issue is a showcase for Daniel's character designs, some of which are more successful than others (again, Catgirl is particularly offensive). If Daniel's work has a flaw right now, it's that he tends to be a little overly aggressive in his inking. His figures don't always need as many lines as they exhibit, and in one particularly odd panel a character appears to have spontaneously donned a mask based on the amount of unnatural shading at work. But again, the art in this series is fundamentally sound with just a few quirks weighing it down. The same goes for the book as a whole. This new arc is off to a chaotic start, but an enjoyable one nonetheless.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #705
December 31, 1969
|
|
Daniel's art is mostly pleasing as well. His style is a bit more restrained and realistic than his recent collaborations with Morrison. I would like to see Daniel adjust his inking style a bit, with less feathery lines and more substantial blacks. Though not without its quirks, Daniel's Batman is proving it has the quality to stand up to the other high profile books in the Batman line these days.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman '66 |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman '66 #27
September 24, 2015
|
|
This issue offers a new take on Bane, one that gives the fearsome villain a campy, luchador-inspired makeover. It works surprisingly well, especially with all the nods to previous Bane stories (the cameos by Bird, Trogg and Zombie are an especially neat touch).
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman '66 #30
December 17, 2015
|
|
One of DC's longest-running digital-first comics comes to a close with this issue. It's a fitting finale, especially for a franchise that's never been big on continuity or long-form storytelling.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman '66 Meets Steed and Mrs. Peel #1 |
Jul 06, 2016
show
|
|
The world never got the Batman '66/Avengers TV crossover it so richly deserved, but at least DC can make up for that omission in comic book form. Even at this early stage, it's clear this new team-up series is combining the best of both franchises for a fun, retro-flavored crossover that any Bat-fan can enjoy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman '66 Meets The Man From U.N.C.L.E. #1 |
Dec 23, 2015
show
|
|
Sadly, Batman and Robin don''t actually cross paths with Agents Solo and Kuryakin in this first issue. Writer Jeff Parker focuses instead on separate but parallel adventures as each Dynamic Duo battles fiendish villains and narrowly escapes death. The mash-up works very well, and Parker achieves a happy medium between spy drama and campy superhero charm.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman '66 Meets Wonder Woman '77 |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman '66 Meets Wonder Woman '77 #1
January 25, 2017
|
|
Batman '66 and Wonder Woman '77 are two great tastes that go great together. While this first issue is a bit slow, it quickly proves that writers Jeff Parker and Marc Andreyko are intent on making the most of this team-up rather than simply going through the usual crossover motions. Already the series is making a strong case for the need for an ongoing Batman '66/Wonder Woman '77 comic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman '66: The Lost Episode #1 |
Nov 20, 2014
show
|
|
This story is well worth a read for Batman '66 fans as a glimpse of how Two-Face might have fared on the show had things worked out differently. Unfortunately, the $9.99 price tag is a tough pill to swallow. Less than half of the issue is even devoted to the story itself. DC padded out the issue by reprinting every one of Garcia-Lopez's pages in raw pencil form, and then reprinting Ellison's story treatment in its entirety. Both sections will be of interest to some readers, but I'm sure most would rather just pay a far more reasonable $4 or $5 for the main event alone.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman (2011) |
17 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman Annual #2
July 31, 2013
|
|
Wes Craig proves to be a decent fit for this issue in terms of providing a clean, stark style that somewhat recalls Greg Capullo's distinctive work. Unfortunately, with so many inkers at play in these pages, certain sequences are far more detailed and refined than others.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman Annual #3
December 24, 2014
|
|
Artist Roge Antonio brings the right touch to this issue - slightly understated but still very shadowy and unsettling. He depicts Gotham as it is for the average man on the ground, while still casting Joker as a larger-than-life figure who seems to be operating on a different plane than everyone else.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman Annual #4
September 30, 2015
|
|
Batman Annual #4 has some compelling elements as it ties into the larger Superheavy conflict. It taps into the potential of Bruce Wayne's amnesic state in a way the main Batman comic couldn't. Unfortunately, this issue loses steam once the focus shifts to a battle between Bruce and his old rogues gallery.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #23.3
September 18, 2013
|
|
The artwork in this issue is nothing remarkable, with fairly bland page layouts and characters (apart from Penguin himself) that tend to look very similar and interchangeable. The storytelling is competent enough, but this bird might have soared a little higher if the visuals were able to exploit the full depravity of Penguin's world.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #34
August 13, 2014
|
|
It's easy to be disappointed at the prospect of a Batman issue without Scott Snyder and Greg Capullo at the helm. And while this issue doesn't always read like the Batman we know, it doesn't come across as a pointless filler issue either. Between the unique new villain and Scalera's gorgeous imagery, this is still a worthwhile addition to Snyder's overarching saga.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #40
April 29, 2015
|
|
Batman #40 is a satisfying conclusion to Snyder and Capullo's second Joker epic. While the early scenes focused on Batman's other villains and sidekicks are under-cooked, the bulk of the issue and its focus on the Batman/Joker rivalry is an enthralling read. The creators paint an unsettling, bloody and very dramatic picture of two old enemies locked in one last, desperate battle for the fate of Gotham. And the best part is that this issue, rather than merely acting as a finale to one story, only opens the door for new conflicts to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #42
July 8, 2015
|
|
After such a big, loud, epic conflict involving the Joker, this series really needed a chance to slow down and take in the changing landscape of Gotham City. That's exactly what "Superheavy" is accomplishing right now. Snyder and Capullo are doing a great job of exploring what makes Gordon a different breed of Batman, but also why he's the only one that could have been the new Batman in the first place. Now if only the limited Bruce Wayne material were so successful.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #43
August 12, 2015
|
|
This issue of Batman doesn't come together as cohesively as most, nor does it place the spotlight on Gordon as much as he deserves. However, there's plenty of good material on tap in issue #43. Capullo's work is as strong as ever, and Snyder's refined dialogue results in a number of standout scenes and moments for heroes and villains alike.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #44
September 10, 2015
|
|
Though this may be an interlude issue, it's not a filler chapter by and stretch. Batman #44 features two talented Batman writers working in sync alongside a very stylish artist, resulting in a very cohesive collaboration. This issue is less about the murder mystery or the origins of Mr. Bloom and more about challenging Batman's world view and place in his own city. In other words, it's a perfect companion to Snyder's ongoing storyline.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #45
October 15, 2015
|
|
This latest issue puts Jim Gordon back in the spotlight, and the results are very enjoyable. Between last month's flashback issue and now this chapter, the tone and direction of Superheavy is beginning to solidify. It makes for a very different type of Batman comic, and certainly an exciting one to read.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #46
November 12, 2015
|
|
The Superheavy storyline continues to move into interesting and unexpected places as Mr. Bloom makes his presence known across Gotham. This issue has its problems, but it offers a great showcase for the three core players in this storyline and the promise of more surprises and drama to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #47
December 10, 2015
|
|
"Superheavy" is only getting better as it heads towards its climax. This issue deftly juggles all three lead characters while building up the menace of Mr. Bloom and throwing out some unexpected curve balls for good measure. The last page alone is going to make the wait for issue #48 very painful indeed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #48
January 20, 2016
|
|
"Superheavy" seems to keep getting better as it goes along. This new issue delivers thrills and character drama in equal measure. Capullo's art shines regardless of subject matter, and Snyder again shows a firm handle on the rivalry between Batman and Joker. Best of all, this issue strongly suggests that life won't simply return to normal in Gotham once this storyline is finished.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #49
February 10, 2016
|
|
Batman #49 is far from being a mere stopgap before the big finale to Superheavy next month. This issue offers a compelling look at Bruce Wayne's return to being Batman and whether the immortality of the Dark Knight is a blessing or a curse. It's a very different comic from the ones that preceded it in both look and feel, and that's part of why this issue is such a great read.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #50
March 23, 2016
|
|
Assuming Batman #51 doesn't turn out to be a disaster of epic proportions, it's safe to say that Snyder and Capullo stuck the landing on their years-long Batman run. This issue is a fitting end-cap not just to "Superheavy," but all 50 issues of the series. It's gorgeously rendered and emotionally stirring, reminding us that a fictional character like Batman can shape and influence the world in very real ways.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #51
April 27, 2016
|
|
It would be silly to expect anything less than greatness from the final chapter of Scott Snyder and Greg Capullo's Batman saga. This issue ties up all remaining loose ends while creating a fitting sense of symmetry with the beginning of the run. It sports more terrific art from Capullo, Miki and Plascencia and offers a powerful meditation on the impact Batman has had on his city. What more could readers ask for?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #52
May 11, 2016
|
|
Batman #52 is a perfectly enjoyable series finale, albeit one that doesn't really measure up to issue #51 when it comes to bidding farewell to the Dark Knight. Taken on its own merits, though, this issue provides a heartwarming look at the bond between Bruce and Alfred and showcases Riley Rossmo's considerable storytelling talents.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman (2016) |
84 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman Annual #1
November 30, 2016
|
|
As with most anthology issues, the stories included in Batman Annual #1 are fairly uneven in quality. But there's plenty of enjoyment to be had as Batman and friends celebrate the winter season. And with everyone from Tom King to Scott Snyder to Neal Adams pitching in, it's hard to go wrong with this creative lineup.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman Annual #2
November 29, 2017
|
|
Some of the best chapters of Tom King's Batman run have dealt with the Batman/Catwoman romance, and this issue continues that trend. It's often a very funny read, but one always anchored by the sad, desperate longing these two character share with one another. This issue also happens to be one of the prettiest additions to King's run, which is no small feat at this point. If you enjoy this particular superhero pairing, this issue is not to be missed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #2
July 6, 2016
|
|
The new Batman series may not be offering the story readers were expecting, but that's hardly a bad thing. Tom King and David Finch are showing a knack for blending familiar Batman tropes with new conflicts and challenges. With a little more character growth for Gotham and Gotham Girl, this story arc could develop into something truly memorable.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #3
July 20, 2016
|
|
The latest issue of Batman suffers from a slight sense of decompression, but there's still some food for thought as King sheds new light on the background and motivations of Gotham and Gotham Girl. Couple that with top-notch art from Finch and Bellaire, and this relaunched series remains on solid footing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #4
August 3, 2016
|
|
As bizarre as it is to see this story arc suddenly skip forward several beats, that increased sense of momentum definitely helps the series. Tom King's voice becomes more pronounced as he explores the losing battle Gotham and Gotham Girl are fighting to remain uncorrupted by their city. And in a time when few Rebirth titles are maintaining consistent art teams, this series is on;y looking better after two months.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #5
August 17, 2016
|
|
The first arc of Batman wraps up on a high note as Tom King and David Finch chronicle the violent clash between the Dark Knight and the fallen hero known as Gotham. This issue looks great, and it also delivers an effective blend of humorous moments and darker drama. If you weren't sold on the new series and its status quo before, this issue might just change your mind.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #6
September 7, 2016
|
|
Who would have thought a standalone epilogue issue like this would turn out to be the best issue of the new Batman to date? Batman #6 offers some much-needed character development for Gotham Girl, offering a very effective blend of heartfelt emotion and goofy humor along the way. And who better to channel that emotion that Ivan Reis? This issue serves as a great cap to the series' first story arc and sets a high standard for new stories to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #7
September 21, 2016
|
|
If you've ever wanted to see Batman and his partners battle a pack of rampaging kaiju in Gotham City, then "Night of the Monster men" is right up your alley. The first chapter succeeds on the strength of its memorable creature designs, surreal artwork and a generally entertaining script. However, this isn't shaping up to be the deepest Batman story you've ever read, and fiscally conservative readers might prefer to take a break until the series' next major storyline begins.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #9
October 19, 2016
|
|
This new series got off to a solid start, but "I Am Suicide" seems poised to push Batman to a new level. The creative fusion between tom King and Mikel Janin is a joy to behold. This issue delivers plenty of surreal, moody imagery and strong characterization. Bane fans especially will want to keep this arc on their radar.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #10
November 2, 2016
|
|
It's disappointing to see this series follow up one of its best issues with its worst. The bizarre depiction of Batman in this issue dragged down what could have been a great reunion between the dark Knight and Bane. Still, the issue looks great (weird prison chamber scene aside), and there's no reason to believe things won't pick up again in issue #11.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #11
November 16, 2016
|
|
Tom King and Mikel Janin's latest Batman arc bounces back after a disappointing issue. Batman #11 delivers plenty of great Batman/Catwoman material while also fleshing out the rest of Batman's new team. And Janin's art never fails to impress, whether the focus is one mind-bending page design or more subtle forms of storytelling.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #12
December 7, 2016
|
|
This arc hasn't been especially consistent in quality, but it's clear that Tom King's Batman work is never stronger than when he's paired with Mikel Janin. This issue marks a new high point for the series, blending violent, brilliantly choreographed action scenes with a deep, disturbing look at the man underneath Batman's cowl.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #13
December 21, 2016
|
|
It's not easy following up one of the best Batman comics in recent memory, so it's not surprising that Batman #13 isn't on the same level as issue #12. This "I Am Suicide" finale features a great take on the Batman/Bane rivalry, but also some predictable plot twists and relatively underwhelming visuals.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #14
January 4, 2017
|
|
This issue proves two things - that the Batman/Catwoman romance is one of the most powerful relationships in the DCU, and that King and Gerads absolutely need to be doing a Catwoman book together. How they're supposed to manage that feat and also keep Sheriff of Babylon going is a mystery, but hopefully we'll see much more of this creative pairing in DC Rebirth.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #15
January 18, 2017
|
|
Just because two people love each other very much doesn't mean they're meant to be together. That's the hard lesson as Tom King and Mitch Gerads wrap up their gorgeous, moody look at the romance between the Bat and the Cat. Gerads' chameleon-like ability to switch between his own distinctive style and those of other iconic Batman artists is stunning, and together he and King are able to close the door on this chapter of the Batman/Catwoman saga.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #16
February 1, 2017
|
|
No two of Tom King's Batman storylines feel the same, and that's one of this book's strongest qualities. This issue doesn't entirely play to artist David Finch's strengths, but it does offer a solid blend of Bat-meta humor and foreboding build-up to what promises to be a titanic clash between Batman and Bane.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #17
February 15, 2017
|
|
"I Am Bane" is quickly shaping up to be one of the best stories to feature the titular villain. The "less is more" approach pays off handsomely when it comes to both Bane himself and Tom King's exploration of the Batman/Superman friendship. This issue is dramatic, suspenseful, and full of gorgeously detailed artwork. What more could a Bat-fan ask for?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #18
March 1, 2017
|
|
This series has taken its sweet time building up to the battle royale between Batman and Bane, and now that it's arrived, this issue doesn't disappoint. David Finch and Jordie Bellaire bring that fight to life in glorious, vivid detail, while Tom King's script eloquently points out the many ways in which Batman and bane have been linked since childhood.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #19
March 15, 2017
|
|
"I Am Bane" doesn't give the impression that it really needs five issues to be told. But that slow, methodical pace serves its own uses. This issue allows Tom King and David Finch to get into Bane's head in a more subtle way, exploring the tragedy of his return even as the villain mops the floor with every enemy Batman can throw at him. This issue looks and feels as unique as any of the others that have preceded it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #20
April 5, 2017
|
|
"I Am Bane" has been a worthy addition to Tom King's Batman saga, and it wraps up in strong form in Batman #20. It delivers a visually spectacular finish, one that thrives as much on Jordie Bellaire's mood-enhancing colors as David Finch's ultra-detailed pencils. It also reinforces the central themes of King's work, reminding readers once again that the Dark Knight might be mortal, but he can never be conquered.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #21
April 19, 2017
|
|
Batman #21 is a very slow-paced, methodical start to this crossover, which is a little frustrating considering that writers Tom king and Joshua Williamson only have four issues with which to work. Still, this is a gorgeous start to "The Button," and one that perfectly establishes the mood, even if it doesn't seem overly concerned with plot.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #22
May 3, 2017
|
|
"The Button" may be playing things conservatively when it comes to providing answers to ongoing DC mysteries, but it's certainly managing to tell a great story. The third chapter is easily the best yet, as Batman and Flash's journey takes an emotional turn and Joshua Williamson and Jason Fabok manage to channel much of what made DC Universe Rebirth #1 such a powerful read last year.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #23
May 17, 2017
|
|
With Batman #23, Tom King and Mitch Gerads further cement their status as one of the greatest creative teams currently working in comics. This issue offers a captivating blend of moody horror and zany humor, while the creators make the most of the surprisingly resonant bond between Bruce Wayne and Alec Holland. Its's enough to make you wonder why DC has kept Swamp Thing out of the spotlight for the past year.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #24
June 7, 2017
|
|
Batman #24 is a terrific way to cap off Tom King's first year's worth of Batman stories. This moody, introspective issue manages to both flesh out Gotham Girl and illuminate Batman's complicated psychological state in the wake of storylines like "Rooftops" and "The Button." This issue also makes the most of both artists, with the visuals anchored by the haunting colors of Jordie Bellaire.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #25
June 21, 2017
|
|
Tom King and Mikel Janin's new Batman epic is off to a fine start. This issue manages to set the stage for an epic conflict in Gotham City without losing the momentum by flashing back to the past. King's take on the two lead villains is fascinating, and the series never looks better than when Janin is by his side.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #26
July 5, 2017
|
|
"The War of Jokes and Riddles" is shaping up to be another classic Batman tale for King and Janin. This issue doesn't do much to push forward the present-day portion of the conflict, but it does built a growing sense of unease and showcase both Joker and Riddler at their best. And Janin's gorgeous art is yet another reminder that he and King make an excellent team.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #27
July 19, 2017
|
|
Batman #27 doesn't do much to add greater momentum to "The War of Jokes and Riddles," but ti does serve to greatly enrich a character who, until now, was treated merely as a recurring joke in the series. This issue chronicles the tragic rise of Kite-Man and further cements the idea that the war itself is less important than the terrible toll it's taking on Gotham's citizens.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #28
August 2, 2017
|
|
Despite an unsatisfying ending, this issue offers a compelling portrait of a city ravaged by war. Tom King and Mikel Janin prove once again what an effective team they are as they craft a comic dominated by symmetrical storytelling and moody, haunting visuals. This series is usually at its best when these two are working together.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #29
August 16, 2017
|
|
Not many creative teams could pull off a comic about Bruce Wayne sharing a fancy meal with Joker and Riddler, but Tom King and Mikel Janin aren't just any team. This issue serves as a tense, tightly rendered and slightly surreal addition to "The War of Jokes and Riddles." Despite another abrupt, underwhelming ending, this issue is another winner for the creators.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #30
September 6, 2017
|
|
Batman #30 marks another high point for the current Batman storyline. On one hand, it lends further depth and pathos to Kite Man, exploring just how much this outwardly goofy is motivated by tragedy and loneliness. On another, it changes Batman's role in this conflict in a major way and makes the Dark Knight a source of mystery and uncertainty. And with top-notch visuals from Clay Mann, Seth Mann and Jordie Bellaire, this issue truly fires on all cylinders.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #31
September 20, 2017
|
|
In terms of story, this is easily one of the more satisfying installments of "The War of Jokes and Riddles" yet. It captures the zaniness of Batman's temporary supervillain alliance, yet never loses sight of the true darkness fueling this conflict. Unfortunately, the bright, sunlit setting brings about some visual problems. Mikel Janin's work simply doesn't have the same impact when exploring the sunnier side of Gotham.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #32
October 4, 2017
|
|
While one of the big moments in this issue suffers from awkward build-up, otherwise Batman #32 serves as a satisfying conclusion to this lengthy story arc. It's dramatic and emotionally charged, yet also marked by moments of campy humor. And the twists in this issue promise to have a significant impact on the series moving forward. What more can readers ask for?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #33
October 18, 2017
|
|
One of the great things about this series is the way it always feels fresh and different with each new story arc. The return to the present, the increased emphasis on the Batman/Catwoman romance and the series debut of Jordie Bellaire all contribute to an exciting and unpredictable new storyline. As much as this series is highlighting the bond between the bat and the Cat, it also reminds us that marriage might not actually be in their best interests.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #34
November 1, 2017
|
|
Batman is normally one of DC's consistently best books, so it's a little strange to see the series take such a hit in the middle of this new story arc. Issue #34 reads very much like a transitional chapter, one that pads out a handful of key character moments with repetitive dialogue and fight scenes. The most we can hope is that issue #35 will redeem this troubled storyline.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #35
November 15, 2017
|
|
Even great comic book runs hit a few bumps in the road, and Tom King's Batman was probably overdue for a misfire. This issue does some solid work exploring and fleshing out the current Batman/Catwoman dynamic, but there's a general lack of closure to "Rules of Engagement." Even at a mere three issues, this story seems longer than it needed to be. Hopefully the next storyline can put this usually dependable series back on track.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #36
December 6, 2017
|
|
The only thing better than reading a terrific Batman comic from writer Tom King is getting one two weeks in a row. This new story arc looks to be making the most of Batman's surprise engagement, welcoming a stellar art team back into the fold and doing a fantastic job of fleshing out the complicated friendship between Batman and Superman.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #37
December 20, 2017
|
|
This series truly offers an embarrassment of riches. Issue #37 caps off a short but enthralling celebration of the Batman/Superman friendship, one that inspires both laughter and love for these enduring icons. The only reason this issue doesn't qualify as the series' best to date is that it's had such stiff competition over the past few weeks.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #38
January 3, 2018
|
|
Batman #38 is a perfectly solid and entertaining comic, just not one that meets the same high standard as the previous few chapters of the series. This issue struggles to establish its new villain as a worthy addition to Batman's rogues gallery, but at least it manages to offer a well-rendered, carefully constructed detective story. There are far worse ways to spend $3.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #39
January 17, 2018
|
|
It doesn't appear that this Batman/Wonder Woman team-up storyline will reach the same heights as the recent Batman/Superman pairing. The art is great, with Joelle Jones painting a vivid portrait of two heroes united in an eternal battle. Unfortunately, the characterization isn't as deep or compelling. Worse, King makes a very misguided choice when it comes to Diana's role in this story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #40
February 7, 2018
|
|
Ultimately, the latter half of "Superfriends" proves unable to do for Batman and Wonder Woman what the first half did for Batman and Superman. There's too much wasted potential, and this issue still suffers from poor choices made in Batman #39. Both the Catwoman scenes and the generally gorgeous art help offset those problems to some extent, but not enough to redeem the story in the end.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #41
February 21, 2018
|
|
After a rough couple issues, Batman is back on track thanks to a new story arc and the return of the always dependable Mikel Janin. This issue may annoy readers hoping for more consistency in how Poison Ivy is portrayed in the DCU. But on its won terms, this issue paints a vivid portrait of a villain dominating an entire planet and a Dynamic Duo rendered helpless in her wake.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #44
April 4, 2018
|
|
At first glance, Batman #44 comes across as a pleasant but fairly unremarkable addition to the series, one that arranges a few pieces leading up to the big wedding. It's only by rereading this issue and directly comparing it to the classic Batman stories it references that it becomes clear how King, Janin and Jones are commenting on the evolution of these characters and superhero comics in general.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #45
April 18, 2018
|
|
This series has developed a pretty spotty track record when it comes to spotlighting Batman's fellow Justice League members. The altered setting in this issue is great, offering a dark, dystopian look at a Gotham City without its traditional Batman. Unfortunately, it's depiction of Booster Gold as an unfeeling sociopath is hard to stomach. Hopefully there's a deeper plan at work here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #54
September 5, 2019
|
|
While not the best standalone issue the series has seen, Batman #54 is a satisfying celebration of fathers and sons.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #55
September 19, 2018
|
|
Batman #55 offers a winning blend of light and dark elements, though the jury is still out on the cliffhanger.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #57
October 17, 2018
|
|
Batman #57 delivers a disappointing and needlessly bleak conclusion to the Dark Knight's clash with KGBeast.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #59
November 21, 2018
|
|
Batman #59 is every bit as rock-solid a comic as one would expect from the Tom King/Mikel Janin pairing. It's expertly rendered, with art and coloring both helping the ease the many transitions between past and present. It casts Penguin in an unusually sympathetic light. And best of all, this issue explores why darkness and violence aren't always the answer for Batman. If he's going to dig himself out of this hole, he has to find a better way to beat Bane.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #71
May 15, 2019
|
|
Batman #71 ramps up the drama as even the reader is forced to question whether Batman can triumph against Bane.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #72
June 5, 2019
|
|
Batman #72 delivers plenty of critical answers while still telling a gripping story of revenge and betrayal.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #73
June 19, 2019
|
|
Batman #73 could almost be dismissed as an unnecessary addition to the series if not for a pair of important revelations about Thomas Wayne's motivations and larger role in the series. Even so, it's hard not to be frustrated by the repetition and general lack of momentum in this chapter. As good as this series often is, Batman is far too prone to dragging its heels as the buildup toward "City of Bane" slowly continues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #76
August 7, 2019
|
|
Batman #76 is an underwhelming addition to a normally great series, as "City of Bane" fails to live up to its promise.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #77
August 21, 2019
|
|
"City of Bane" finally builds steam in Batman #77, thanks to the assistance of Batman's bratty son Damian.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #82
November 6, 2019
|
|
Batman #82 finally gives readers the showdown they've been waiting for, but it's forced to cover too much ground.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #83
November 20, 2019
|
|
Batman #83 delivers a touching tribute to an iconic DC hero, even as it justifies the need to kill them off.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #84
December 4, 2019
|
|
Batman #84 provides some much-needed answers and a novel approach to depicting the life of Thomas Wayne.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman #86
January 9, 2020
|
|
While darker than expected, Batman #86 serves as a bold and fast-paced start to the next phase of Bruce Wayne's life.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman / Superman (2013) |
15 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman / Superman #1
June 26, 2013
|
|
Unfortunately, DC failed to advertise the fact that Lee doesn't handle every page in this issue. Ben Oliver steps in to render the final act of the story. While the visual shift makes sense in terms of how the plot makes a sudden swerve, there's no denying that Lee and Oliver have vastly different styles that don't mesh well at all. Oliver's work is strong and carries a hazy, dream-like quality that suits the story well, but it can't really hold up to Lee's work. Hopefully Oliver's presence was motivated by the fact that this first issue is longer than normal, and we won't be seeing fill-in artists on every issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman / Superman #5
November 6, 2013
|
|
Part of the selling point on this issue is the "widescreen" format, with a more horizontal approach to storytelling. Unfortunately, Brett Booth rarely takes advantage of the format shift, and many pages could just as easily be split in half and presented as normal. Booth's wonky, Jim Lee-meets-Rob Liefeld approach to character design doesn't really do the book any favors either.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman / Superman #6
December 5, 2013
|
|
It's not as though this Batman/Superman arc is the worst story to feature either character on the stands right now. It's more that it revolves around a one-note premise that's been spread too thin.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman / Superman #7
January 8, 2014
|
|
Capping everything off is the fact that this conflict ends on such a quiet, unremarkable note. The script directly references the superhero team-up trope of two heroes putting aside their differences to fight a common foe. From there, Mongul is tossed out of the fray as quickly as he appeared. It's all very anticlimactic. But the good news is that the conflict is finished, and hopefully the series can get back on track with its next story arc.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman / Superman #10
May 7, 2014
|
|
This series hasn't been able to offer much in the way of visual cohesion so far, and this issue is certainly a huge shift from Jae Lee's Gothic visuals. The storytelling from both artists is solid enough, though the figures and character designs are fairly plain. It would have been nice if only one penciller tackled the issue, but multiple artists is practically the norm for this series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman / Superman #12
July 3, 2014
|
|
Decent filler, but whether it has any consequence in the grand scheme of things remains to be seen. The art has a rushed quality to it, especially in regards to the facial work and its often bizarre proportions and angles
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman / Superman #17
December 17, 2014
|
|
Greg Pak's Batman/Superman work hasn't been as consistent as his Action Comics run, which is perhaps to be expected when you have such a disparate lineup of artists on board. Pak seems to be settling into a deeper groove with this new arc, however.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman / Superman #19
February 19, 2015
|
|
The art does sometimes hinder the story, as the rotating inkers bring different textures to Ardian Syaf's pencils and create an inconsistent and sometimes rough look.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman / Superman #20
March 19, 2015
|
|
Greg Pak's arc culminates with a knock-down, drag-out battle with Superman and Supergirl facing their brainwashed relatives. Supergirl's struggle actually proves the more compelling of the two, with brief, frequent flashbacks alluding to her past in Kandor. But either way, it's a nicely personal way to cap off Superman's recent gauntlet.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman / Superman #24
September 10, 2015
|
|
The common thread with all the Superman books involved in the "Truth" storyline right now seems to be that they feature great characetrization but are held back by lackluster villains or conflicts. That's certainly the case with Superman/Batman, which features a mess of a story involving Atlantean rebels and portable suns and some fairly inconsistent artwork divided among three pencillers.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman / Superman #30
March 10, 2016
|
|
Taylor seems to relish the opportunity to write Batman and Superman as friends rather than bitter enemies for a change, and their odd friendship is very charming to read.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman / Superman #31
April 14, 2016
|
|
It's ironic that it took a story about Superman confronting his imminent death for the character to finally regain the hope, optimism and decency he's so often lacked in the New 52.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman / Superman #1 |
Aug 28, 2019
show
|
|
Batman/Superman #1 is one of the strongest first issues of a DC series in recent memory.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman / Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman / Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles #4
March 9, 2016
|
|
Batman/Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles is a story worthy of all the crazy crossover fantasies fans have cooked up over the years. Issue #4 continues building a compelling conflict for our heroes to wrestle with, but the focus remains on exploring and celebrating the unusual bond between Batman and his mutated comrades. Hopefully the same attention will be paid to their enemies before this story wraps up.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman / Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: II #1
December 6, 2017
|
|
This miniseries proves there's still plenty of ground left to cover with the pairing of the Batman and TMNT families. This sequel feels at once more dramatically ambitious and more intimate than its predecessor. At the same time, the book hasn't lost sight of the sheer fun and bombastic nature of this pairing. If you enjoyed the original, there's absolutely no reason not to stick around for Round 2.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman / The Shadow #1 |
Apr 26, 2017
show
|
|
Batman/The Shadow shows every sign of living up to the recent high standard set by crossover comics like Star Trek/Green Lantern and Tarzan on the Planet of the Apes. It cleverly merges the two franchises and explores the enduring legacy of The Shadow in Gotham City, for good and ill. And thanks to Rossmo, the comic looks every bit as good as it reads.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman / TMNT Adventures |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman / TMNT Adventures #1
November 9, 2016
|
|
Every comic should ultimately be judged on its own merits, but it's impossible not to compare Batman/TMNT Adventures to DC and IDW's previous (and very recent) crossover. Even with this book spotlighting two different universes, it doesn't do enough to stand apart from Batman/TMNT or shake up the crossover formula in general. Mostly, this first issue begs the question of why the two publishers didn't simply commission a sequel. But with Batman/TMNT taking a couple issues to find its groove, hopefully the same will be true for this book, too.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman and Robin (2009) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman and Robin #1
June 3, 2009
|
|
I have little doubt Batman and Robin will rank among the best of the Bat family once all the respective books have had their chance to debut. Even in its early stage the series is a huge amount of fun and, for the most part, a visual stunner. But this issue didn't bowl me over like I hoped it might. It's certainly not Morrison's strongest debut on a series. Let's just hope that doesn't matter when held against the bigger picture.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman and Robin #7
January 27, 2010
|
|
Fortunately I still have enough brain function for that. I have issues with how Morrison executed his plot in this issue, but the core characterization remains very strong. As mentioned, Batman and Th Squire display a strong dynamic. Alfred once again steals the show in his brief scene. The villains are memorable in their own ways. Other than the out-of-place Batwoman, Morrison fires on all cylinders when it comes to his cast. Hopefully as the arc continues to grow and take shape, some of the pacing problems will be eliminated. Regardless of what happens, we don't have very long to wait for issue #8. It's a testament to how quickly Morrison won me over again that the thought excites me.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman and Robin #9
February 24, 2010
|
|
Batwoman aside, I did find this issue to be the most enjoyable since Frank Quitely was on board and Professor Pyg was doing his happy dance. Above all, I applaud issue #9 for raising new questions - not just about the state of Bruce Wayne - but regarding many of the mysteries Morrison has been building since the beginning. This won't be the first time I feel compelled to go back to the beginning and examine old stories in a new light. But it's always a good sign when a new issue leaves me with that compulsion.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman and Robin #18
December 15, 2010
|
|
Not helping matters is Scott McDaniel's art. McDaniel's style is far too loose and scratchy for its own good. Characters are overly stylized and angular, to the point where most of the male characters and even some of the females are interchangeable in appearance. McDaniel's page structure is a bit improved from the previous issue, at least. This story arc does what it needs to as far as filling a gap in the publishing schedule. Unfortunately, I can't picture the trade appearing on my shelf alongside Cornell's other DC work.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman and Robin (2011) |
9 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman and Robin Annual #2
January 29, 2014
|
|
Tomasi is once again at his best in telling a self-contained adventure that celebrates Damian's impact on the Bat family. The twist this time is that we get a much-needed glimpse of the original Bruce/Dick partnership. It's a reassuring confirmation that the core of the franchise hasn't changed much over the decades, and one that pays homage to a lighter, more fun era for the Dark Knight.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman and Robin #12
August 8, 2012
|
|
Impressively, Patrick Gleason has illustrated all but one issue of the series since it relaunched last year. Gleason has a talent for big action and graceful notion that is readily apparent throughout these pages. That said, the toll of the last year is apparent at times, as his figure work is less refined and detailed than normal. Hopefully the #0 issue next month will allow Gleason a bit of time to rest and return in top form for the next arc. And hopefully that next arc will see Tomasi return to the more methodical, character-driven focus of the first.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman & Nightwing #23
August 21, 2013
|
|
Tomasi also dusts off the concept of Internet 3.0, a tool he now uses to allow Bruce to revisit the night of Damian's death and struggle over and over again to save his son, despite the ultimate futility of it all. Tomasi makes great use of Nightwing during these scenes, foregoing the often questionable and selfish characterization Dick has shown in other books for a more classic dynamic. But even stronger than Dick this month is Alfred, as Bruce is forced to acknowledge that his faithful butler is suffering as much as he is in the wake of Damian's death. Tomasi has a unique talent for exploiting the Batman family dynamic to its fullest effect. No wonder so much of the post-Damian grieving process has been relegated to this series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman and Robin #23.1
September 4, 2013
|
|
Guillem March is an interesting choice for this issue in the sense that his style is marked by sleek, pretty, acrobatic figures and Two-Face is about half of the ugliest character in the DCU. But other than the fact that he draws Two-Face's scarred side too fleshy and bulbous, March does a solid job of exploring Gotham in a state of total anarchy. His page construction is often able to highlight Two-Face's duality as much as Tomasi's writing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman & Two-Face #25
November 21, 2013
|
|
This arc hasn't really featured Patrick Gleason at his strongest. His figure work is a bit muddier and less refined than normal. And though this is as much Tomasi's fault as Gleason's, this issue creates unnecessary confusion when it lapses into a flashback with little warning or indication. But Gleason's flair for action storytelling still shines, particularly during a dimly-lit prison fight sequence.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman & Two-Face #26
December 18, 2013
|
|
Only one scene in this issue rings false, involving a hackneyed speech by Bruce about duality and inner darkness. The art also continues to be relatively weak compared to Patrick Gleason's usual standard. His action storytelling is superb, but his figures are really beginning to suffer from inconsistent detail and line weight.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman & Two-Face #27
January 22, 2014
|
|
On the subject of duality, artist Patrick Gleason finds many ways to reflect that motif in his artwork. Plenty of thought went into the framing and design choices in this issue, and it pays off for the most part. There's one double-page spread that stands out as awkward. Tomasi and Gleason elect to suddenly call back to previous storylines by depicting the many tragedies Bruce has suffered with the collapse of the Bat family. It's a sequence that could have worked in a different context, but here it comes across as a forced and random way of reminding readers that there's a larger struggle facing Batman once this Two-Face conflict is through.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman & Wonder Woman #30
April 16, 2014
|
|
This issue is at its strongest when Tomasi's script veers into introspection mode. There's a great scene where Diana pays tribute to her petrified mother, and another where Batman reflects on the path Damian's life took. These scenes, coupled with the fact that this issue doesn't offer a great deal of plot progression, highlight the sense of disappointment that Tomasi didn't focus more on the relationship between Bruce and Diana. It's a good comic that could have been better.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman and Robin #40
March 25, 2015
|
|
You could argue that the creative team could have done more with the idea of Damian Wayne having super-powers. But in the end, all that really matters is that they wrap up their long run on this series with the right blend of fun and emotional heart. It's the ending Bruce and his son deserved after the past three years.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman And Robin Eternal |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman And Robin Eternal #1
October 8, 2015
|
|
While DC didn't necessarily need another Batman comic (much less a weekly one), Batman and Robin Eternal makes a strong case for itself in its first issue. While some aspects of this new series are as dark as its predecessor, the series also boasts a welcome dose of fun and adventure thanks to Dick Grayson's starring role. How well this six-month-long mystery will shape up remains to be seen, but this opening chapter starts off the series on the right note.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman And Robin Eternal #3
October 22, 2015
|
|
Batman and Robin Eternal is a much different beast from its predecessor, and that's a good thing. The series feels much more focused, with the cast (for now, at least) all united and pursuing similar goals. And despite the fairly heavy subject matter and dark conspiracies at play, the emphasis on humor and banter among the various Robins is a welcome change of pace.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman And Robin Eternal #8
November 25, 2015
|
|
Genevieve Valentine and Alvaro Martinez deliver another great collaboration as they explore Dick Grayson's first encounter with Mother. Valentine's snappy dialogue makes the most of this showdown, especially when it comes to painting Mother as a sinister figure despite her relatively innocuous appearance.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman And Robin Eternal #26
March 30, 2016
|
|
Batman and Robin Eternal's final issue doesn't quite live up to the promise the series had when it first debuted last year, mainly due to the underwhelming final bow for Mother. But as an end-cap to Harper Row and Cassandra Cain's intertwined story, this issue is very satisfying indeed. This finale does its part to get readers excited for what's to come in DC Rebirth.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman and the Outsiders #1 |
May 08, 2019
show
|
|
Batman and the Outsiders #1 suffers from a bland plot, but the characters and art make up for it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman and the Signal #1 |
Jan 03, 2018
show
|
|
Three issues already seems like too little to contain this ambitious look at Duke Thomas' new superhero status quo. But better too much ambition than not enough. Batman and the Signal looks great, and it successfully pushes the character forward and cements his new place within the Batman family. We can only hope DC has more planned after this brief miniseries wraps.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman Beyond #1 |
Jun 30, 2010
show
|
|
Unfortunately, as much as Beechen captures the flavor of the show in his writing, Ryan Benjamin is not so successful in his art. Benjamin's style seems to haphazardly replicate the look of the cartoon, neither offering the level of detail normally seen in a Bat book nor embracing the stylishly geometric character designs of Bruce Timm. The result is a hybrid style that doesn't upset the eyes but doesn't do much to draw attention either. Benjamin's work is far less plagued by the stray lines that ruined his Batman #675 work. That same inconsistency remains, however. Terry's body shape remains in constant flux. Coupled with his not entirely consistent face, Terry's age seems to vary between 12 and 30. Again, the art has its merits, but it's not the satisfying reproduction of the animated series that Beechen's scripting offers.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman Beyond #4 |
Sep 03, 2015
show
|
|
As much as I wanted to leave everything connected to The New 52: Futures End in the past, this series does have its appeal as it chronicles the ongoing battle between Tim and Brother Eye. There's a real sense of scope and drama to the conflict.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman Beyond Universe #1 |
Aug 21, 2013
show
|
|
Both halves run into problems stemming from the shift from digital to print. There's the aforementioned cramped quality in Silas' art. But the chapters themselves are also poorly organized. Rather than alternate chapters of both series, this issue crams the two Batman Beyond and Justice League Beyond tales into one singular story. In both cases, it's fairly obvious where the original chapter break would have occurred, and it throws off the pacing to see the issue barrel straight from a cliffhanger into the next chapter. As usual, my recommendation would be to give this material a look, but in its original digital form rather than print.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman Beyond: Rebirth #1 |
Sep 29, 2016
show
|
|
This issue is very efficient at recapping Terry's origin story and laying out the basics without getting tripped up over unnecessary details. Little direct mention is made of the previous volume's events, meaning that fans of the animated series can dive in just as easily as veteran comic readers.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman Confidential #20 |
Aug 13, 2008
show
|
|
If you're in need of a simpler, more light-hearted Batman tale, I doubt this arc will disappoint. It's good dumb fun that's not too heavy on the dumb. And it looks spectacular to boot.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman Incorporated (2012) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman Incorporated #1
May 23, 2012
|
|
Chris Burnham is no stranger to Morrison's Batman run, but this series finally marks the point where Burnham takes full control of the book's visual direction. Burnham hits the ground running in this issue. The similarities to the opening arc of Batman and Robin are as much due to Burnham's pencils as they are to Morrison's writing style. There's a similarly frenetic approach to depicting action and movement. Burnham frequently experiments with layouts and panel construction. These experiments don't always work as well as intended (the page with shots of Batman and Robin projected on the sides of buildings is pretty wonky), but the sheer amount of energy on every page can't be denied. Burnham proves right away he has the creativity, the flair for action, and the dramatic storytelling hops to do justice to Morrison's final Batman adventure.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman Incorporated #8
February 27, 2013
|
|
So the twist is handled well, but I have yet to be convinced it's the best direction for the series to take. It seems to kill a lot of future storytelling potential for the sake of immediate drama. But there are also four issues remaining on this series, and it's probably a safe bet that Morrison has more up his sleeve. After all the excellent stories that have come out of this run in the past seven years, he certainly deserves the benefit of the doubt.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman Incorporated: Special #1
August 28, 2013
|
|
And finally, this issue is rounded out with a silent tale from Dan DiDio and Ethan Van Sciver about the most important Batman incorporated member of all -- Bat Cow. If that doesn't justify a purchase, I don't know what does.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman, Inc. |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman, Inc. #5
April 27, 2011
|
|
Yanick Paquette is back this month, though Chris Burnham now casts a long shadow over the series. Paquette's figures lack the fluidity of Burnham's, and contribute at least somewhat to the more serious tone of the story. While Paquette's pages are impressively detailed and designed, his figures are too static for such an action-oriented affair. I find myself eagerly anticipating Burnham's return now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman, Inc. #8
August 24, 2011
|
|
It's not entirely clear when we're getting the last two chapters of Inc., but until they arrive, issue #8 offers a deceptively dense story to mull over. Just be prepared to squint while reading.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Arkham Asylum #6 |
Jul 01, 2015
show
|
|
Now that the Arkham Knight game has been released, this prequel series needs to work extra hard to hold the attention of Batman fans. Unfortunately, this issue does the opposite, devoting far too much time to a clash between Batman and Bane with little payoff and underwhelming visuals. Hopefully the book can get back on track with its next storyline.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Arkham City |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman: Arkham City #2
June 8, 2011
|
|
There are some pieces to the Arkham City puzzle I wish were more prevalent in these pages, but on the whole Dini and D'Anda are doing a fine job of bringing this version of Gotham to comics.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Arkham City #5
August 24, 2011
|
|
As mentioned,, issue #5 doesn't conclude so much as pave the way for the Arkham City game. That's to be expected, but it is somewhat unsatisfying to leave the story where it ends knowing that resolution won't come before another two months of waiting and $60. It doesn't help that Dini writes numerous splash pages towards the end, further rushing the book along towards its murky conclusion. Still, as a complete product, this series does a much better job of hyping the game than anyone had a right to expect.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Arkham Knight - Batgirl/Harley Quinn #1 |
Feb 11, 2016
show
|
|
Tim Seeley delivers two perfectly enjoyable tales that show a strong understanding of each character's psychology. Neither origin revision diverges significantly from the norm, but why fix what isn't broken.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Arkham Knight (2015) |
9 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman: Arkham Knight Annual #1
September 30, 2015
|
|
If nothing else, DC's various Arkham Knight prequel comics have been helpful as far as fleshing out the titular villain and his rivalry with Batman. This annual issue continues that trend. The catch is that the story is too light and straightforward to really justify the length (and therefore the cover price).
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Arkham Knight #1
March 11, 2015
|
|
Despite a few early hurdles, DC's Arkham Knight prequel gets off to a solid start. Tomasi is able to take advantage of the medium and deliver a tale that focuses more on humor and character drama without ignoring the brutal action the games are known for. There's enough meat to this story that it should appeal even to Bat-fans who don't care about this video game universe.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Arkham Knight #2
April 8, 2015
|
|
The second issue of DC's Arkham Knight comic isn't quite up to the standard of the first, mainly due to an underwhelming first chapter. However, the book picks up as the cast of villains grows, and this prequel saga promises to only grow more interesting from here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Arkham Knight #3
April 23, 2015
|
|
This prequel saga is definitely picking up steam as Tomasi draws more villains into the conflict and complicates Bruce Wayne's plan to save Gotham City. This issue offers the best balance so far of action, intrigue, and character dynamics, and it bodes well for the series going forward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Arkham Knight #4
May 14, 2015
|
|
This series seems to have hit its stride in terms of blending Arkham-worthy action with the character moments and humor Tomasi excels at. This issue doesn't add a huge amount to the unfolding narrative, but it certainly entertains.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Arkham Knight #5
June 3, 2015
|
|
This prequel comic continues to offer an enjoyable lead-up to the game, one that's distinguished more by its characterization and exploration of the wider Bat family than its action or spectacle. It focuses on Batman stories that wouldn't be suited for the games as much as those that would.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Arkham Knight #7
August 20, 2015
|
|
There's more solid character work here (even if Bruce seems unusually chatty with Tim), but the series seems to be lacking a clear and compelling conflict right now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Arkham Knight #11
December 3, 2015
|
|
Pete Tomasi has found the greatest storytelling success in exploring how Bruce is confronting his own mortality and worrying about the legacy he'll leave Gotham. That's a far more interesting tale than learning exactly how Scarecrow and the Arkham Knight hooked up. Luckily, this issue focuses more on the good stuff than some recent chapters.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Arkham Knight- Robin Special #1 |
Nov 25, 2015
show
|
|
The characterization is rock-solid, but this issue doesn't have much new or interesting to say with Tim. Other than a few superficial elements, there's no reason this story couldn't be taking place in just about any incarnation of the Batman universe.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Arkham Knight: Genesis |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman: Arkham Knight: Genesis #1
August 26, 2015
|
|
So far, Arkham Knight - Genesis is both a worthy addition to the mythology of the game and a solid character study of Jason Todd. This prequel comic also benefits from a more focused approach than its sister series. Hopefully the lack of emotional ties between Bruce and Jason now won't impact the book as the story grows darker.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Arkham Knight: Genesis #2
September 17, 2015
|
|
Arkham Knight: Genesis continues to be a worthy companion to the game. It fleshes out a relationship that probably should have been more of a focus in the first place, while tossing in a healthy blend of superhero action for good measure.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Arkham Unhinged #1 |
Apr 11, 2012
show
|
|
Unhinged #1 does little to expand the Arkham mythology. An actual sequel to Arkham City would have been preferable, if not necessarily feasible at this point. However, as the series shifts to other characters who were less prevalent in the games, there should be far more potential for writers to to work with.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Cacophony #1 |
Nov 12, 2008
show
|
|
|
|
|
Batman: Creature of the Night #1 |
Nov 29, 2017
show
|
|
Any fan of Superman: Secret Identity would do well to check out Batman: Creature of the Night. This series definitely reads like a sequel in many respects, or at least a riff on a similar theme. As dark as this story is, it's anchored by the very real, genuine bond between a boy and his uncle. Busiek and Leon prove here that's it's always possible to find a fresh new spin on the Batman mythos.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Curse of the White Knight #1 |
Jul 24, 2019
show
|
|
Batman: Curse of the White Knight is already shaping up to be a worthy sequel to Batman: White Knight.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Damned |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
|
|
Batman: Death Mask #1 |
Apr 09, 2008
show
|
|
The one thing I was really hoping for, and something that Natsume still stands a chance of accomplishing, is providing a glimpse of Bruce Wayne's training period in Japan. Even after Batman Begins, the comics have done a surprisingly lackluster job of exploring the pre-Batman years of his life. Unfortunately, this issue withholds any such flashback material, perhaps hoping to entice readers to follow the series completely. I'm rather doubtful that's going to work with me. I simply don't think I can stand anymore "earth-shattering" revelations about the nature of Batman.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Earth One #2 |
May 06, 2015
show
|
|
Batman: Earth One Vol. 2 is a showcase for the potential this graphic novel imprint still holds. It's not simply about streamlining the character, but making his world more reflective of our own and tracing Bruce Wayne's long, painful road towards truly becoming the Dark Knight. Geoff Johns' writing is adept at fleshing out that journey, while Gary Frank brings this Gotham City to life like only he can.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Eternal |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman: Eternal #50
March 18, 2015
|
|
As slow-moving as Batman Eternal has been in the past, this final month is finally paying off on all that setup. This issue includes a number of memorable moments featuring our heroes triumphing over evil. It also sets the stage for the final confrontation between Batman and the architect of Gotham's misery. Even the art contributes to a sensation of Batman being run ragged. With two issues remaining, hopefully Eternal will be able to stick the landing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Eternal #51
March 26, 2015
|
|
Last week's issue revealed the ultimate mastermind behind this yearlong plot against Gotham's heroes, and it wasn't the villain you'd might expect. With that in mind, you can forgive the villain for devoting so much time to monologuing and explaining how their master plan came to fruition. It all plays to one of the early themes of Scott Snyder's Batman run - that Batman doesn't know his city quite as well as he'd like to believe.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Europa |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman: Europa #1
November 19, 2015
|
|
Batman: Europa #1 doesn't necessarily justify the decade-long wait, but it does offer a reasonably enjoyable adventure that takes Batman out of his usual comfort zone. The main appeal in this first issue is seeing Giuseppe Camuncoli and Jim lee jamming together. Hopefully the book won't lose too much of its charm with Lee's departure.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Europa #2
December 16, 2015
|
|
Losing a name as big as Jim Lee could be the death knell for a comic like this. But surprisingly enough, Europa actually imprvoes in its second issue. The script shows a better balance between Casali and Azzarello's voices, while Camuncoli has no trouble flying solo and delivering a stunning depiction of Batman's European adventure.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Europa #3
December 31, 2015
|
|
"Batman: Europa undergoes another major stylistic overhaul with its third issue. This time Giuseppe Camucoli's layouts are finished by Diego Latorre, with the end result being a much more surreal and painterly approach to the series. That certainly has its merits, particularly when it comes to depicting the shadowy catacombs of Paris and conveying the growing madness both Batman and Joker are experiencing. Unfortunately, the book loses something when it comes to storytelling clarity.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: Europa #4
February 4, 2016
|
|
There's an ethereal quality to the book that speaks both to the ghostly locale and the deteriorating physical condition of both Batman and Joker.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Kings of Fear #1 |
Aug 22, 2018
show
|
|
|
|
|
Batman: Last Knight on Earth |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
|
|
Batman: Li'l Gotham #4 |
Jul 11, 2013
show
|
|
As usual, both tales are endlessly charming and feature gorgeous watercolor artwork from Dustin Nguyen. The Easter tale stands out particularly. The opening sequence with Damian playing a video game boasts some creative pixel art, while scenes set in Mad Hatters nightclub are awash with lush colors. The only complaint to lodge specifically involves this print version. Each digital segment costs 99 cents while each print collection is $2.99. It's hard to justify that extra dollar, particularly when the art is designed for a widescreen tablet format anyway. But whatever format you choose, this is a Bat book every DC fan should be reading.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Lost #1 |
Nov 08, 2017
show
|
|
Batman Lost isn't an absolutely critical tie-in for those Metal readers who are trying to buy as few books as possible. But it does do a lot to enhance and flesh out the events of that crossover. It also works well as a celebration of the long history of Batman himself. And despite the massive creative team, this issue manages to tell a very cohesive, effective story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Rebirth #1 |
Jun 01, 2016
show
|
|
The New 52 didn't dramatically revamp the Batman franchise, and it doesn't appear as though DC Rebirth will either. And why should it? Batman was a terrific comic under Scott Snyder and Greg Capullo, and it's shaping up to be a terrific comic under Tom Kinng, Mikel Janin and David Finch as well. This issue serves as a great showcase for the new team as well and offers a taste of the new flavor they'll be bringing to Gotham City.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Streets of Gotham #3 |
Aug 19, 2009
show
|
|
But backup feature aside, I'm getting quite a bit of enjoyment out of Streets of Gotham. Given how much good work Dini is doing for the villains of Gotham, I almost wish Batman and Robin would take on an even more diminished role. The series has its faults, but the strengths outweigh them by a significant margin.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: The Dark Knight (2011) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman: The Dark Knight Annual #1
May 29, 2013
|
|
The central flaw with this Annual is that it's too light and simple to justify the $5 cover price. The idea is fun and the execution solid, but, it doesn't even need to be as long as it is. This story would have been better off trimmed down into a one or two-part installment of Legends of the Dark Knight. At least then readers would only be asked to fork over a dollar or two.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: The Dark Knight #7
March 28, 2012
|
|
There's certainly room in the Batman franchise for a book that focuses more on big, loud, action-oriented storytelling . A simplistic Batman book can still be an enjoyable one. Sadly, Dark Knight is anything but enjoyable right now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batman: The Dark Knight #22
July 24, 2013
|
|
Sadly, this issue falls apart once the focus shifts back towards Batman. The scenes with Gordon in captivity are too few and far between to build any real sense of tension. Meanwhile, Hurwitz devotes far too much attention to Bruce's mourning over the death of Natalya. Her inclusion was one of the weakest elements of the previous arc. Batman has enough current trauma to work through without the need for another throwaway love interest. Because of the shift in focus, the issue loses steam as quickly as it built it. Still, there's plenty of room for this arc to pick up again in future issues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: The Return of Bruce Wayne #1 |
May 12, 2010
show
|
|
The Return of Bruce Wayne is off to a great start so far. It's a silly concept that is delivered with heart but also in a fittingly tongue-in-cheek manner. A surprise reveal towards the end also suggests this story won't be as simple or straightforward as it initially seemed. Now bring on Puritan Batman!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: The Unseen #1 |
Oct 07, 2009
show
|
|
Under far different circumstances, I could see this story working well enough. As an extended one-shot, with an increased focus on Batman, there might have been potential. Instead, what we have is a fairly uneventful first issue with a terrible new villain. I can't imagine this dragging on for another four issues. And unless Moench has a serious ace up his sleeve, I doubt I'll be sticking around that long anyway.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: The Widening Gyre #1 |
Aug 26, 2009
show
|
|
Widening Gyre is not going to be high art. The first issue makes that abundantly clear. What it doesn't make clear is what the overall story is truly about. But despite all this and some rather serious storytelling flaws, I'm willing to keep an open mind about the series. Smith and Flanagan display just enough flashes of brilliance that I'm willing to hold out hope for something better.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: White Knight |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Batman: White Knight #1
October 4, 2017
|
|
In terms of story, Batman: White Knight has a few hurdles to clear before it can live up to its full potential. This first issue has some dialogue problems and dwells too long on setting the stage for Joker's personality change. But it's a promising start all the same, and the gorgeous artwork is worth the price of admission all on its own. Murphy's dynamic, gritty style is perfect for bringing Gotham City and its inhabitants to life.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman: Who Laughs #1 |
Nov 15, 2017
show
|
|
While the standalone format limits what can be accomplished in this issue, The Batman Who Laughs #1 nonetheless offers a welcome look at one of the more memorable characters introduced in this crossover. James Tynion and Riley Rossmo offer a suitably twisted, bleak look at a world where Batman becomes the thing he hates most. In the process, they manage to elevate the Batman Who Laughs into an even bigger and more imposing threat than he already was. Metal #4 can't come soon enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batman's Grave #1 |
Oct 09, 2019
show
|
|
The Batman's Grave manages to find fresh new material with the most familiar hero in comics.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batwing |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Batwing #0
September 5, 2012
|
|
Marcus To provides the visuals for this issue. Much like Winick's script, the result is structurally sound, if not particularly flashy. To's facial work isn't particularly detailed or varied. However, his action sequences have a strong vitality to them, and the general mood of the issue is suitably dark and dreary. I doubt Batwing #0 will win many new readers over, but it is a solid addition to Winick's run.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batwing #1
September 7, 2011
|
|
Ben Oliver practically steals the show, however. This is some of the most refined and cinematic art we've seen from Oliver yet. Oliver delivers plenty of wide shots, but the use of diagonal borders brings an extra dose of energy to most pages. And though I feared the final product might not live up to the quality of the black and white preview art, I'm happy to report that Brian Reber's colors do nothing but accentuate the visuals. Yes, Oliver could stand to focus more attention on his backgrounds, but otherwise this is one of the best-looking books DC put out this week. Again, Batwing is an unexpected but very welcome surprise among the New 52.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batwing #8
April 4, 2012
|
|
By this point Winick has done everything he needs to as far as establishing the New 52 version of Batwing and what drives the character. Following next month's crossover issue, the next test is to see how well the book can grow and evolve from this strong foundation.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batwing #10
June 6, 2012
|
|
Marcus To illustrates this issue. His work is very clean and presentable, if a bit lacking in some of the gritty texture and finer details other artists have brought to this series. Batwing occupies a harsher landscape even than Gotham City, but it never really comes across visually.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batwoman (2010) |
8 issues
show
|
|
|
Batwoman Annual #1
May 1, 2014
|
|
The art is also disappointing in that Trevor McCarthy only handles portions of the issue. The rest is tackled by Moritat, whose work is very spartan and straightforward compared to McCarthy's heavy shadows and more ambitious page layouts. It's just a shame, because such a great run deserved a stronger, more consistent finale. At least Andreyko can get back to his own story next month.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batwoman Annual #2
April 2, 2015
|
|
Andreyko does the best he can with the limited space available here, and to an extent this issue leaves Kate in a better place than she has been in recent months. The best thing to do now is let the character rest for a while and come back stronger.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batwoman #25
November 20, 2013
|
|
This issue features four pencillers, which isn't necessarily surprising given how quickly the transition from Williams and Blackman to Andreyko happened. Series veteran Trevor McCarthy is joined by Andrea Mutti, Pat Olliffe, and Jim Fern. The overall style is fairly uniform despite this, though there are some odd visual inconsistencies in terms of environmental details and Kate's impromptu makeup disguise. Williams' departure has its impact in terms of the page layouts, which are noticeably more geometric and simple. But there's still a certain outsider quality and spark of life to the art that marks this as a Batwoman comic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batwoman #32
June 18, 2014
|
|
But it's Kate's civilian struggles that are the focus in this opening chapter. Andreyko's decision to pull Maggie out of Gotham and force her to deal with a heated child custody battle is definitely an interesting wrinkle in her relationship with Kate. As such, I found it a little disappointing that Andreyko also chooses to introduce an old flame of Kate's from her military academy days. It's a pretty stereotypical development for an engagement to be tested by the sudden appearance of an ex-lover. Still, this new character does have potential as far as bringing Kate's military background into the forefront for a while. Hopefully this arc justifies her inclusion.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batwoman #33
July 17, 2014
|
|
Batwoman has more villains than she can properly handle in this story arc. As fun as it is to see her clash with an honest-to-goodness vampire queen, the addition of a third party and multiple costumed villains makes this portion of the story a little too crowded.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batwoman #37
December 17, 2014
|
|
Georges Jeanty's work isn't flashy or angular enough, and the two inkers on this issue lead to highly inconsistent detail and an overall underwhelming look.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batwoman #40
March 19, 2015
|
|
Georges Jeanty's pencils are generally effective in this issue, especially when it comes to facial work and emotion. Some of the more esoteric monster characters suffer a bit, though, especially when Jeanty chooses to pull back from his subjects and leave them small and diminished.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Batwoman: Futures End #1
September 18, 2014
|
|
This is a comic that makes me hope Futures End isn't actually the eventual future of the DCU. It has its charms as a superhero horror romp, but it does too much damage to Kate as a character fr it to be a worthy continuation of her journey.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Batwoman #1 |
Mar 16, 2017
show
|
|
This issue doesn't necessarily cover a lot of ground in terms of plot (the frequent flashbacks tend to get in the way of that), but plot is rarely as crucial as characterization when it comes to Batwoman.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Comedian |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Comedian #3
September 12, 2012
|
|
J.G. Jones' artwork is solid enough. The sense of mood and general level of detail are stronger than they were in issue #2. On the other hand, the page layouts are fairly bland compared to many of the other Before Watchmen books. This is one case where the decision to distance the book from the nine-panel grid format didn't exactly pay off.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Comedian #4
December 5, 2012
|
|
The artwork on this series is a bit of a mixed bag compared to other Before Watchmen books. J.G. Jones brings a grittier, more refined realism to his work that suits the tone of Comedian's adventures. However, compared to the clever page construction of books like Silk Spectre and Minutemen, the straightforward framing in this issue is disappointing. The real standout element is Alex Sinclair's color. The hues are varied throughout, with Sinclair making liberal use of yellows, reds, and purples to convey the surreal and gruesome nature of the Vietnam War.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Comedian #5
February 14, 2013
|
|
Artistically, issue #5 is a bit strange. J.G. Jones' pencils and inks have remained more detailed and precise than I would have expected. The drop-off in quality that occurred during his issues of Final Crisis is really apparent here. The colors are more problematic, however. I've praised Alex Sinclair's surreal, haunting hues in past reviews (the only aspect of the series that really does feel Apocalypse Now-esque). But here, numerous panels have very rigid, segmented gradient bars in the background and sky areas that make it look as though the printers were running out of ink when this issue was in production. This occurs in both the print and digital versions, so I'm honestly not sure if this was some sort of surrealist design choice or a flaw in DC's source files.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Comedian #6
April 24, 2013
|
|
Before Watchmen as a whole might just be a textbook case of a mixed bag. But if we're never going to see that epilogue issue, DC could certainly have picked a far worse finale issue to cap off this lengthy experiment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Dr. Manhattan |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Dr. Manhattan #1
August 22, 2012
|
|
As mentioned, what Straczynski does in this issue is keep his cards close to his chest, only revealing in the final pages what he really has planned for the remainder of the book. Throughout the issue he explores the notion of quantum mechanics and the way specific actions can determine what course the future takes. That comes to a head at the end, where it finally becomes clear that Straczynski has something far more ambitious in mind than simply paying homage to a great character. Maybe it was a bad idea to wait so long before getting to the point in a four-issue series. Even so, I'm far more excited at the prospect of issue #2 than I was issue #1.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Dr. Manhattan #2
October 10, 2012
|
|
Adam Hughes' art really shines in this second issue. The retro, throwback quality to his character designs really suits the flashback setting. Hughes doesn't tend to adhere to the rigid Watchmen panel grid, but instead breaks his pages apart to convey the chaos of the unraveling timestream. The final pages in particular are very striking as Hughes even works Manhattan's familiar logo into the design. After so many years of seeing Hughes deliver mostly covers, it's really nice to see him tackle something meatier again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Dr. Manhattan #3
December 12, 2012
|
|
Adam Hughes' artwork doesn't excel as much as some other Before Watchmen artists when it comes to inventive page layouts. However, he does provide plenty of striking imagery and emotive characters to make up for that. And as is so often the case, Laura Martin's colors are the star of the show. Whether it's the ethereal blue glow of a winter forest of the faded yellow Jon's childhood home, the colors are rich and perfectly suited to the tone of each scene.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Minutemen |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Minutemen #3
August 29, 2012
|
|
Minutemen remains one of the stronger Before Watchmen books. It looks great, and it's doing a better job of realizing its potential and expanding upon these characters in tangible ways.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Minutemen #4
October 17, 2012
|
|
If not as focused as it could be, Minutemen #4 is nonetheless proof that there are interesting stories to explore in the shadow of Watchmen, as well as creators talented enough to bring them to life.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Minutemen #5
December 5, 2012
|
|
Cooke's artwork is impressive, as usual. The first page in particular stands out as a really clever use of panel structure and familiar Watchmen imagery. There are instances in the big action sequence where the panels are simply too small to convey all the necessary information, but aside from that, Cooke delivers yet another chapter that respects the Watchmen aesthetic while also making full use of his particular talents and artistic strengths.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Minutemen #6
January 23, 2013
|
|
And the artwork is as gorgeous as ever. Cooke works a lot with contrasts in this issue, offsetting dark, shadowy scenes in the old Minutemen headquarters with bright shots of new heroes emerging and Hollis bonding with his "niece," Laurie. Cooke adheres to the traditional nine-panel grid more than usual, but he still finds opportunity for striking page design within that structure.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Moloch |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Moloch #1
November 7, 2012
|
|
Given where Straczynski chooses to leave off in this issue, I'm not even sure where the second chapter is going to move from here. That could be a bad sign, or it could signal the beginning of a more interesting and less predictable avenue in Moloch's story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Moloch #2
December 19, 2012
|
|
That said, J. Michael Straczynski does deliver a few points of interest in this finale. For one, it's fun to see Ozymandias portrayed in a wholly sinister light, as neither the original series nor Ozy's own book really harp on the terrible lack of humanity someone must have to carry out a master plan like his. And though most of the script is dull and emotionless, the final few pages bring the series full circle and make the reader sympathize with Moloch. He wasn't such a bad guy, after all. If the entirety of these two issues had been able to reflect as much, this series would have been a lot more enjoyable.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Nite Owl |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Nite Owl #3
September 19, 2012
|
|
The series' presentation takes a hit in this issue thanks to the unfortunate passing of Joe Kubert. Those pages Kubert wasn't able to finish inking are instead handled by Bill Sienkiewicz. There's arguably no artist in the industry more renowned for his bold, striking inks. Unfortunately, the limited timetable and the need to adhere to Kubert's style dilutes Sienkiewicz's work to a degree. His pages stand out only because there a bit more rough and haphazard than Kubert's. This issue still captures the Watchmen aesthetic well, as the previous two have, but some of the finer details are a bit dampened .
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Ozymandias |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Ozymandias #2
August 8, 2012
|
|
I'll continue picking up this book until the end solely because of the art. That said, it's really disappointing that Wein hasn't found anything new or interesting to say about Veidt so far. I can only hope the final page reveal will shake up the formula a bit.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Ozymandias #3
September 26, 2012
|
|
As before, Jae Lee's art is what distinguishes this series. Though perhaps the book least in line with the original Watchmen aesthetic, Ozymandias is a showcase of striking visual design. There's a haunting, slightly surreal quality to the figures and their world. Lee's page composition is very eye-catching, if not always geared towards narrative flow. This is a series that manages to outdo even the best of Lee's Dark Tower work in terms of mood and detail, and the book is worth a purchase solely because of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Ozymandias #4
November 28, 2012
|
|
But again, the art makes this all worthwhile to an extent. Every one of Jae Lee's pages ooze with striking design work and a palpable sense of mood. Even if nothing terribly important is actually unfolding in the script, Lee's moody pencils and inks lend everything a sense of gravitas. Even compared to his various Dark Tower minis, this is career-defining work for Lee. It's a shame the visuals aren't backed up by a more compelling story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Rorschach |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Rorschach #1
August 15, 2012
|
|
Before Watchmen: Rorschach delivers exactly what you'd expect when this creative team pairs up for this particular character. It doesn't break new storytelling ground, but it offers an enjoyable read that doesn't rely overly much on material we've read before. If any Before Watchmen book could be read and enjoyed with no knowledge of the original Watchmen, it's probably this one.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Rorschach #2
October 3, 2012
|
|
Fortunately, Azzarello has Lee Bermejo to help establish that atmosphere. Bermejo's pages are crammed with striking imagery here. The sheer amount of detail crammed into each panel is impressive enough. But the way Bermejo frames his panels is equally impressive. Even the cover image manages to seamlessly transition right into the first page. In terms of sequential flow, the story is a little more stiff than something like Amanda Conner's Silk Spectre. Perhaps the worst that can be said about the art is that the individual panels don't always contribute to the greater flow of the page as well as they could.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Rorschach #3
December 12, 2012
|
|
With only one issue left, there's little hope that this series will overcome its recurring flaws. But the good news is that, at a mere four issues, Rorschach isn't in danger of overstaying his welcome.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Silk Spectre |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Silk Spectre #3
September 5, 2012
|
|
Besides the typically bland Crimson Corsair feature, there's really nothing to complain about with Silk Spectre #3. This may be the only Before Watchmen book that leaves me immediately wanting more once it wraps up.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Before Watchmen: Silk Spectre #4
November 28, 2012
|
|
Conner rounds out the series with another fantastic set of pages. More so than the previous three chapters, she largely adheres to the familiar Watchmen grid layouts. Maybe that's intended to be a visual sign of the timeline marching inexorably forward. The facial work is as varied and expressive as ever, and various visual flourishes like the daydream exaggerations further spice up the pages. This book doesn't necessarily leave me wanting more of Silk Spectre's adventures, but it does have me craving the next Amanda Conner book, whatever that might be.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ben Reilly: The Scarlet Spider #1 |
Apr 26, 2017
show
|
|
Ben Reilly: The Scarlet Spider #1 is a fairly enjoyable debut. Peter David's sense of humor shines through, as always, and it's always great seeing Mark Bagley playing in this corner of the Marvel U. That said, this issue does little to establish Ben as a sympathetic or even understandable protagonist. The character's new mean streak is both a blessing and a curse as this series tries to establish itself.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Berserker Unbound #1 |
Aug 07, 2019
show
|
|
Berserker Unbound #1 is a solid barbarian comic undone by its numerous similarities to Marvel's Conan books.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bill & Ted Go to Hell #1 |
Feb 18, 2016
show
|
|
If this latest adventure is going to succeed, it's going to have to rely on more than nostalgia to do so.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bill & Ted's Most Triumphant Return #1 |
Mar 12, 2015
show
|
|
It remains to be seen if we'll ever actually get that third Bill and Ted movie Hollywood keeps promising. But at the very least, this comic does a most competent job of continuing the adventures of Ted "Theodore Logan" and Bill S. Preston, Esq.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Billy Batson and the Magic of Shazam! #1 |
Jul 02, 2008
show
|
|
The simple fact that this issue ends on a cliffhanger is proof enough that Kunkel and DC are taking this book seriously. It may be family-friendly and set apart from normal continuity, but in this case that's a very good thing. For the first time in a while, Captain Marvel fans have something to get excited about.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Billy the Kid's Old Timey Oddities and the Ghastly Fiend of London #1 |
Sep 09, 2010
show
|
|
Kyle Hotz also returns for this sequel. I find Hotz to be a much better fit for this wacky brand of storytelling than his more grounded Marvel work. Here, Hotz is given full clearance to be expressive and colorful in his approach, and the difference is clear. In addition to the main tale, Powell writes and draws a Goon segment wherein Frankie and The Goon attempt to have a relaxing day on the "beach". This tale should tide hungry Goon fans over for a bit longer, though I'm curious to see if it has the legs to stay amusing and peppy over multiple issues. But even if not, the main story is well worth the price of admission for anyone craving a few laughs and some oddball characters.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Birds Of Prey (2011) |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Birds Of Prey #0
September 19, 2012
|
|
Romano Molenaar makes his debut as the new regular artist for the series, and he looks to be an apt fit. Molenaar's style falls somewhere between the sleek, sexy lines of Ed Benes on the classic BoP books and Jesus Saiz's recent, grittier style. There's a bit of cheesecake on display, but also some fun action scenes and just the right touch of grit and grime to the surroundings. Hopefully Molenaar will remain on the book longer than Saiz did.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Birds Of Prey #1
September 21, 2011
|
|
If nothing else, Birds of Prey #1 should reassure readers that the franchise has plenty of life left after the relaunch. The series merely needs its full cast and less reliance on structural tomfoolery.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Birds Of Prey #7
March 21, 2012
|
|
This issue receives a nice visual boost thanks to the return of Jesus Saiz. Javier Pina was a solid fill-in artist, but Saiz brings an extra level of mood, shadow, and more fully realized character renderings to the table. The book is fairly understated compared to many New 52 titles, but as far as pure storytelling goes it's one of the best. It's a shame Saiz will soon be shifting over to Resurrection Man, though I'm eager to see what Travel Foreman can accomplish in his place.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Birds Of Prey #13
October 17, 2012
|
|
Romano Molenaar enjoys another solid month following his debut on issue #0. He continues to capture the darker style of Jesus Saiz while simultaneously lending a more freewheeling, energetic touch to his pages. With the scripts growing less satisfying all the time, at least the series still has some selling point to fall back on.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Canary #2 |
Jul 16, 2015
show
|
|
Much like the current Batgirl run, this take on Black Canary is so dramatically different from what's come before that she could just as easily be a new character with the same name. But Black Canary needed a shake-up, and this series more than delivers in that regard
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Cloud #2 |
May 11, 2017
show
|
|
|
|
|
Black Hammer |
10 issues
show
|
|
|
Black Hammer Annual #1
January 19, 2017
|
|
Maybe labeling this issue "giant-sized" is a bit of a stretch, but it does offer a nice, satisfying standalone story that expands on the cast of the main series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer #1
July 20, 2016
|
|
If you think there's no room left in your life for another superhero comic, Black Hammer #1 might just prove you wrong. This series races right out of the gate, focusing on fleshing out its strong cast rather than becoming fixated on the background and history of the universe. The gloomy art style further establishes this as a very different breed of superhero book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer #2
August 18, 2016
|
|
This series is quickly proving that it's always possible to find a worthy new angle on the superhero genre. Black Hammer succeeds mainly because Jeff Lemire and Dean Ormston are far more concerned with exploring their characters and their respective foibles than trying to shine a spotlight on the larger universe.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer #3
September 22, 2016
|
|
Jeff Lemire and Dean Ormston deserve a huge amount of credit for not only finding a compelling new take on the superhero genre, but crafting what has quickly become one of the best superhero books on the stands.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer #6
December 22, 2016
|
|
Black Hammer #6 caps off the book's first story arc with new story wrinkles and complications that serve to make these heroes' extended "vacation" that much more unpredictable.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer #7
March 23, 2017
|
|
Jeff Lemire and Dean Ormston devote the majority of this issue to fleshing out the background of the fallen Black Hammer and the bond he shared with his daughter. The story is executed well, as usual, with the creators doing an excellent job of making readers care for a hero who had little direct role in the series before now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer #8
April 20, 2017
|
|
Eight issues in, Ormston and Jeff Lemire have allowed readers to care about these fallen heroes as if they're lifelong friends. That, above everything else, is what makes this the best superhero comic on the stands.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer #9
May 25, 2017
|
|
This issue takes a step back to explore the original meeting of Colonel Weird and Talky-Walky. That origin story is extremely entertaining, making the most of Jeff Lemire's talent for evoking the feel of classic Silver Age storytelling with a modern, self-aware twist.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer #10
June 22, 2017
|
|
This series has both spoofed and paid loving having homage to many eras of the comic book industry. It was only a matter of time before Jeff Lemire and Dean Ormston got around to lampooning the excesses of '90s superhero comics.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Hammer #11
July 27, 2017
|
|
It's a satisfying feeling knowing that Black Hammer can now be officially referred to as "The Eisner-winning Black Hammer." And this issue is a good showcase for why the series won that award.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Knight #1 |
Nov 18, 2009
show
|
|
Maybe it isn't fair to complain too much about this book. It's a simple throwback story, and it knows it. And if you choose to read The Black Knight #1 as one of the perks of Marvel's digital comics service, then that's all it needs to be. But those who actually pick this issue up in the store and plunk down their $3 may be less satisfied.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Knight (2015) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Black Knight #1
November 19, 2015
|
|
There's plenty of potential for this book to develop into something special, but there are some fundamental problems in need of addressing first.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Knight #2
December 10, 2015
|
|
With too much emphasis on the Avengers and not enough on the core cast, there's little sense that the plot has advanced much since the first issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Lightning: Cold Dead Hands #1 |
Nov 02, 2017
show
|
|
|
|
|
Black Magick |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Black Magick #6
June 29, 2017
|
|
This series enjoyed a strong debut in 2015, though its long absence was an unfortunate momentum killer. Luckily, Rucka and artist Nicola Scott hit the ground running with this issue, which is easily their strongest to date.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Magick #7
August 31, 2017
|
|
While not quite as strong as issue #6, Black Magick #7 is an enjoyable read that serves as yet another reminder of how strong the Greg Rucka/Nicola Scott partnership is.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Panther (2005) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Black Panther #31
October 24, 2007
|
|
At least I don't need to complain about the art for once. Francis Portella takes over as the regular series artist with this issue. Portella has started to really impress me with Super-Villain Team-Up. His work here isn't as refined, but it more than does the job. Truth be told, I'd feel bad for Portella if he put in anymore work than necessary with this series. It just isn't worth bothering.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Panther #32
November 28, 2007
|
|
Make no mistake, the only reason this issue didn't score much lower is that the art is surprisingly good. I don't know how Marvel convinced Andrea di Vito it would be a constructive use of his time to assist regular artist Francis Portella this month. The end result is nice, but surely the two artists could find something better to do. I really feel bad for everyone who put in time on this issue, even Hudlin himself. If ever a series cried out to be canceled, it's this one.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Panther #35
March 26, 2008
|
|
It's a sad, sad time when I find myself wishing one of my favorite comic book characters would just die already. Obviously Priest had the right idea by giving Panther an incurable aneurysm. In all honestly I would rather have Panther die or turn Skrull so some other character could take up the mantle. It wouldn't excuse the many problems this book faces each month, but at least I could stop caring so much.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Panther #40
August 27, 2008
|
|
Unfortunately, as much as I'm enjoying this story, I do have to question its importance. This arc is similar to Secret Invasion: X-Men in that it really doesn't need more than a single, oversized issue to tell its story. Both books are extremely well-crafted, but neither really amounts to anything more than entertaining fluff in the end. However, the sheer novelty of having a decent Panther arc should be incentive enough for most readers.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Panther #41
September 24, 2008
|
|
Whatever the ultimate fate of this book, I'm pleased to have finally encountered a Black Panther story that recalls some of the glory of the Christopher Priest days. If the book is gone, then at least I know it died much better than it lived.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Panther (2009) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Black Panther #1
February 4, 2009
|
|
Not that this should come as much of a surprise, but Black Panther has changed very little in its latest transition. The series is still plagued by an overly simplistic and often aggravating portrayal of its characters. With a less than compelling mystery that will likely persist for many months to come, I see no reason to get excited at the prospect of more Black Panther. This long-term fan continues to pine for the good old days.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Panther #2
March 4, 2009
|
|
It's pretty clear to me the new volume of Black Panther could easily be a solid read. The potential is there. Between the bubbling conflict with America and the imminent arrival of a certain vampiric Spider-Man foe, there's no reason I shouldn't be foaming at the mouth for the next issue. But the continual poor writing, odd structuring choices, and uninspired art conspire to keep this series well behind the rest of the pack. But hey, what else is new?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Panther #8
September 2, 2009
|
|
Black Panther remains on the lower end of the Marvel spectrum, but it admittedly shows some level of improvement with the new creative team. I'd like to think that Maberry will eventually settle into his new gig, and that once the series escapes from under the shadow of past Panther storylines, it will become something I can truly recommend.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Panther #12
January 13, 2010
|
|
With this issue done, Black Panther as we know it is ending. I don't know whether the series will return after Doomwar, but even if it does I imagine the changes will be significant. This issue has gotten me reasonably interested in Doomwar, so in that sense at least it was successful. Still, seeing how many problems remain in the overall execution, I plan on keeping my expectations in check over these next few months.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Panther (2016) |
12 issues
show
|
|
|
Black Panther Annual #1
February 21, 2018
|
|
How much Black Panther Annual #1 appeals to you as a reader may depend on how familiar you are with the different eras being referenced. Priest and Perkins' story is a great coda to a classic run, but not one that does much to stand on its own. Of the three, McGregor and Acuna's story does the best job of standing on its won two feet, while Hudlin and Lashley's tale reads like it needed a much larger platform to really breathe.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Panther #1
April 4, 2016
|
|
After several years of ups and downs, Black Panther finally has the solo comic he deserves again. Coates and Stelfreeze build on the many stories that have come before to weave a tale about Wakanda in its darkest hour and a king who may not be up to the task of saving it. Whether you're a hardcore fan of the character or Captain America: Civil War has you interested in learning more about T'Challa, this comic has plenty to offer.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Panther #2
May 12, 2016
|
|
Brian Stelfreeze's lithe, burly interpretation of Black Panther and his captivating use of light and shadow make for one of the most visually distinctive Black Panther comics ever published.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Panther #4
July 28, 2016
|
|
It's clear from reading these first four issues that Ta-Nehisi Coates and Brian Stelfreeze are every bit as passionate about their supporting cast as they are Black Panther himself.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Panther #6
September 14, 2016
|
|
The latest chapter of Black Panther is another winner. While the focus of the series is becoming a little choppy, issue #6 offers an engrossing look at a reluctant king fighting to hold his nation together. The combination of Coates' intelligent prose, Sprouse's elegant line-work and Martin's vivid colors results in a truly engaging reading experience.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Panther #13
April 27, 2017
|
|
This issue kicks off the second season of Ta-Nehisi Cates' Black Panther run, and there's an immediate and palpable stylistic shift. The emphasis is less on politics and high-minded ideals and more on the supernatural side of Wakandan culture.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Panther #14
May 25, 2017
|
|
For a series that ranked among Marvel's best in 2016, Black Panther is having a surprisingly difficult time finding its footing in its second story arc.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Panther #18
September 28, 2017
|
|
It's impossible not to feel excited for the future of this series given certain developments in Marvel Legacy #1, but the current conflict is starting to seem like a bland appetizer before than enticing meal.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Panther #166
October 26, 2017
|
|
This issue doesn't offer the bold, inviting jumping-on point readers might have been hoping for with Marvel Legacy. The book's numbering may have changed, but Ta-Nehisi Coates is still very much in the middle of telling his second major Black Panther story. And unfortunately, that story still struggles to measure up to "A Nation Under Our Feet."
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Panther #169
January 25, 2018
|
|
This series has struggled quite a bit since the initial high of the "A Nation Under Our Feet" arc, and throwing a silent interlude tale into the mix only further dampens the book's momentum.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Panther #170
March 1, 2018
|
|
In general, things seem to be picking up for the series again, though I'm still very much looking forward to the new status quo that comes with the impending relaunch.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Panther #1 |
May 23, 2018
show
|
|
Black Panther #1 delivers a wildly different and compelling new status quo for T'Challa.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Panther & the Crew #1 |
Apr 13, 2017
show
|
|
This first issue reads more like a grounded cop drama starring Misty Knight. Most of the characters on the cover don't even put in an appearance. But despite the weird branding and the sometimes agonizingly slow pace, this first issue does succeed in exploring a different side of the Marvel U.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Panther: The Sound And The Fury #1 |
Feb 08, 2018
show
|
|
The inclusion of a classic Stan Lee/Jack Kirby story helps add a bit of value, but new readers interested in learning more about T'Challa are better off looking elsewhere.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Road #1 |
Apr 14, 2016
show
|
|
Brian Wood is returning to familiar territory with this new series. Luckily, Black Road recalls the appeal of Northlanders while offering just enough of a new approach to exploring Viking life that it doesn't read like a simple rehash.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Science |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Black Science #4
February 26, 2014
|
|
Issue #4 closes out the series' first story arc. Our heroes make a last, desperate stand as they wait for the Pillar to activate. Sacrifices are made, and it's a testament to how quickly and capably Remender has fleshed out his cast that the consequences hit home. By the end of this issue, the overarching conflict of the series becomes more clear. We have our cast of heroes (and sleazeballs), we have our stakes, and the only question is just how strange and surreal the journey will become from here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Science #5
April 2, 2014
|
|
Regardless of setting, Matteo Scalera and Dean White keep this book looking awesome. Scalera's work is endlessly dynamic and expressive, offering a grungy sci-fi aesthetic with the hints of darkness and horror inherent to his work. And White seals the deal with his colors, giving every panel a sense of life and vitality amid the grunge and heavy texture of Scalera's pencils. These two are fast becoming one of the more effective art teams in the industry.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Widow #6 |
Sep 22, 2010
show
|
|
Swiercynski introduces a number of minor complications throughout the issue that spice up the proceedings further. It's enjoyable, but even at three issues I'm worried this arc doesn't have enough steam to last to the end. It's also disappointing to see Swiercynski rely on one of the most overplayed cliffhangers in the industry for his first issue. This run could easily develop into something worthwhile for Widow fans. For now, though, it still has a ways to go towards establishing itself.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Widow (2014) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Black Widow #7
June 5, 2014
|
|
The latest issue of Black Widow pays homage to the good old days of Natasha Romanov and Matt Murdock hanging out in sunny San Francisco. Unfortunately, neither the change in scenery nor the guest appearance by Daredevil do much to shake up what is increasingly becoming a formulaic series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Widow #13
December 17, 2014
|
|
This is easily one of the series' most gorgeous installments. Noto's economical, expressive line-work merges with his lush colors for a breathtaking end result. As for the story? It's fine? This has always been a series whose primary selling point is the art.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Black Widow (2016) |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Black Widow #1
March 2, 2016
|
|
Those hoping for a deep, complex narrative may be disappointed with the first issue of Black Widow. But when a comic looks this good and takes such full advantage of the medium's storytelling possibilities, who needs pesky words? This issue will almost certainly be looked to as a teaching tool for up-and-coming comic artists. Not a bad start to this new series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Widow #4
June 16, 2016
|
|
If it wasn't obvious that Mark Waid and Chris Samnee are one of the best creative teams working in comics today, this series serves as undeniable proof. Black Widow #4 is yet another showcase for what's possible when two talented creators with a close working relationship join forces.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Widow #5
July 21, 2016
|
|
Every issue to date has been a terrific showcase for Samnee's artistic talents and the finely honed collaboration between he and Mark Waid. Issue #5 is no exception.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Widow #6
August 18, 2016
|
|
Best of all, this issue makes a very substantial leap forward in Nat's ongoing quest to clear her name. Under a lesser creative team, that sudden leap forward might have seemed abrupt and unsatisfying, but Mark Waid and Chris Samnee remain in total control of their story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Black Widow #12
March 30, 2017
|
|
Perhaps everything wraps up a little too neatly and quickly in the end, but this issue still offers a satisfying look at a deadly agent trying to atone for the sins of her past.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Blackest Night |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Blackest Night #1
July 15, 2009
|
|
All in all, it's hard to find fault with Blackest Night #1 itself. Most of my problems stem from being too bombarded with pre-release information, and all that eventually melts away in favor of the actual joy of reading. The Sinestro Corps War Special left a slightly bigger impression on me in the end, but there's something else worth noting. That storyline hit its high mark with the opening installment. With Blackest Night #1, I feel Johns and company are only scratching the surface with this issue. This event has nowhere to go but up from here, and that's quite a rosy thought to last me through the rest of the year.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blackest Night #6
December 30, 2009
|
|
In many ways this is the weakest issue of Blackest Night yet. It's simultaneously overly serious and too goofy for its own good in points. It also fails to push the storyline as far as I would like. But despite these complaints, the core of what has made the Johns/Reis collaboration so great remains. I have a feeling things will quickly pick back up once issue #7 hits and Johns' endgame begins. Its just a shame we have to wait a full two months to get to that point.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blackest Night #8
March 31, 2010
|
|
Ultimately what disappoints me about Blackest Night #8 is that it doesn't provide the satisfying, conclusive finale I hoped for. The story is surprisingly open-ended for what was billed as the culmination of all of Johns' Green Lantern work since Rebirth. Clearly, plans changed along the way, and I'd be interested to see how the series would have turned out if Johns didn't change his mind about leaving Green Lantern. The events and revelations in this issue are certainly interesting. The emotional payoffs for many characters are wonderful. But Blackest Night feels less like an epic finish to Johns' Lantern trilogy than it does a means to the end that is Brightest Day. I'm more pumped for Brightest Day than I've ever been. I won't deny that. But did it have to come at the expense of this story? Like so many events before it, Blackest Night is a flawed endeavor. Though certainly better than most, it ultimately failed to reach the bar set so high by The Sinestro Corps War three years ago.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Blackest Night: Batman #3 |
Oct 14, 2009
show
|
|
So, in the end, what was the point of this? Like too many Blackest Night books, the story behind Blackest Night: Batman comes up sorely lacking. The Black Lantern reveals were fun, but it's become painfully clear at this point that these reveals are a poor substitute for true substance and conflict. The most Blackest Night: Batman has to offer is the art of Adrian Syaf. Syaf is a solid addition to the Andy Kubert/Tony Daniel school of Batman art, and I have little doubt we'll see him return to Gotham soon. That said, Syaf's art could just as easily been showcased in a one-shot special. This mini-series offered about enough content for one solid issue. I can only hope at this point that the next round of character-specific mini-series will be able to claim more than that.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Blackest Night: Tales of the Corps |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Blackest Night: Tales of the Corps #1
July 15, 2009
|
|
If these stories were inserted as back-up material in the other Lantern books, I would be able to overlook their flaws. But the fact that DC are charging $3.99 for three short, lackluster stories and some reprinted bonus material makes it more problematic. The most I can hope for is that the remaining two issues have more to offer from a storytelling standpoint.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Blackest Night: Wonder Woman #2 |
Jan 06, 2010
show
|
|
Ultimately, this issue suffers from a slightly fractured sensation as Rucka drags Diana from scene to scene and battle to battle in rapid succession. But that does little to dampen the overall impact of this series. Between Wonder Woman and Flash, we finally have Blackest Night minis that are living up to their potential.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Blackhawks (2011) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Blackhawks #1
September 28, 2011
|
|
In more ways than one, this book is still in need of a firm identity. It's a reasonably competent debut, but one that doesn't do nearly enough to distinguish itself among the New 52 or provide incentive to stick around for more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blackhawks #2
October 26, 2011
|
|
In terms of plotting and pacing Costa is handling the series well. There isn't much about the series that feels terribly original, but the conflict is engaging thus far. Where Costa needs to focus is characterization. The various members of the Blackhawks are mostly interchangeable soldier types. There's a character named Lady Blackhawk, but she neither resembles nor looks anything like the one made popular in books like Birds of Prey. Without a stronger, more identifiable cast, this series will never become greater than the sum of its parts.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bloodshot: Salvation |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Bloodshot: Salvation #1
September 20, 2017
|
|
Valiant continues to make it both easy and attractive to dive into their superhero universe in 2017. Bloodshoot Salvation #1 serves as a great starting point, even though it serves as the latest act in Jeff Lemire's ongoing saga. With strong characterization and a compelling balance between present-day and flash-forward conflicts, there's plenty of reason to become invested in this new chapter in Bloodshot's ongoing struggles.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bloodshot: Salvation #5
January 11, 2018
|
|
This issue caps off the series' first story arc in especially brutal fashion, as Bloodshot finds himself transformed back into ordinary, human form at the worst possible moment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bloodstrike #1 |
Jul 09, 2015
show
|
|
The book reads like a bad parody of early '90s superhero excess. The characters are all (extremely) thinly veiled riffs of familiar heroes like Deadpool and Cable. The violence, sexual humor and profanity give the book a very juvenile quality, and that's to say nothing of the grotesquely exaggerated, implausible anatomy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Blue Beetle (2011) |
7 issues
show
|
|
|
Blue Beetle #0
September 19, 2012
|
|
The script does tend to drag towards the end when the scarab's narration starts to feel more like exposition directed at new readers. But on the whole, it enriches the Blue Beetle mythology and sets the stage for some fun conflicts coming up as the series continues shifting away from Earthly matters.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blue Beetle #1
September 21, 2011
|
|
This isn't a perfect debut for the series. Bedard does seem to go a bit overboard in emphasizing Hispanic characters and culture. The Spanglish-ridden dialogue can be slightly annoying
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blue Beetle #2
October 19, 2011
|
|
This series could stand to pick up the pace somewhat, but it's doing a competent job of shining the spotlight back on this particular teen hero.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blue Beetle #4
December 21, 2011
|
|
What really sets this fourth issue apart is the surprise ending. It could either provide the series that extra little boost it needs or unnecessarily drag it down into melodrama. We'll find out one way or the other next month.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blue Beetle #6
February 15, 2012
|
|
Bedard continues to push Jaime into new territory with the conclusion. Though annoyingly rushed, the final pages promise to shunt the character into new locales and story directions. For a book that was a little slow to get moving and find an identity at first, this can only be a good thing. But hopefully the more familiar cast members will still have some part to play in this new direction.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blue Beetle #7
March 21, 2012
|
|
Ig Guara is missing this month, unfortunately. Marcio Takara replaces him, and the results are pretty similar to what Guara was delivering. Takara's work is a bit more loose and scratchy, but it's still reasonably expressive and very much in line with what one would expect from a teen superhero series with slight sci-fi influences.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Blue Beetle #8
April 18, 2012
|
|
Marcio Takara fills in for Ig Guara this month. His style isn't radically different, merely more angular and a little less detailed than Guara's. Takara's pencils are nothing spectacular or flashy, but they get the job done well enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Blue Beetle #1 |
Sep 29, 2016
show
|
|
This series can do better, and it needs to if it's going to stand out in DC's new lineup.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Blue Beetle: Rebirth #1 |
Aug 25, 2016
show
|
|
Writer Keith Giffen is hardly any stranger to either incarnation of Blue Beetle, but there's something fresh and exciting about the idea of a book that pairs Ted and Jaime in a mentor/pupil relationship. The result is a book that entertains as both a teen superhero drama and an exploration of the mystical nature of the Scarab.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Books of Magic #1 |
Oct 24, 2018
show
|
|
Books of Magic #1 works with too many familiar tropes, but at least it does them well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Borderlands |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Borderlands #1
July 17, 2014
|
|
Agustin Padilla's tenure with the G.I. Joe franchise made him a natural fit for such a wacky, violent, gun and gadget--filled comic. Padilla is able to capture the general look and feel of the Borderlands universe. However, while the art is certainly gritty and grimy enough, the colors and inking don't do enough to replicate the distinctive bright, cel-shaded style of the games. It's a simple element that would have gone a long way towards making this comic feel more authentic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Borderlands #2
August 28, 2014
|
|
IDW's Borderlands comics would be better off focusing more on the visual presentation and on telling stories unique to this medium.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Borderlands #3
October 23, 2014
|
|
Between the dull, muted colors, the scratchy figure work, and the vehicle designs that look nothing like those of the game, none of Borderlands' distinctive aesthetic is replicated here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Borderlands #4
November 13, 2014
|
|
The result is an almost meta approach to characterizing the villain and his clash with the Vault Hunters as Nine-Toes muses on the nature of climaxes in fiction. An interesting approach, but one that downplays the action almost too much in the end.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Borderlands #6
January 21, 2015
|
|
The result is a comic that's funny and sad in equal measure. Unfortunately, this books visual woes continue unabated. This simply isn't how a Borderlands comic should look, either in terms of character design and architecture or in terms of coloring.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Brightest Day |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Brightest Day #13
November 3, 2010
|
|
Johns and Tomasi do make some inroads this month, revealing exactly what Hath-Set and Khea want and how it plays into the larger picture. The journey to that point is bumpy, however, particularly during a drawn out exposition sequence towards the middle of the issue. Overall, though, this issue wasn't as underwhelming as I would have expected given the subject matter. One benefit to the near-exclusive focus is that the team of artists are able to break from their usual assignments and tackle the war on Hawkworld. It's refreshing to see Joe Prado and Ivan Reis tackle Hawkman now. And fortunately, the various styles mesh fairly well together over the course of 22 pages. Brightest Day is now at the halfway mark. While this issue wasn't the finest method of ringing in the occasion, improvements made to the Hawkworld conflict suggest the series as a whole could be headed for an upswing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Brightest Day #14
November 17, 2010
|
|
Naturally, the newly returned Bruce Wayne factors heavily into the issue. Luckily, his inclusion wasn't as random or pointless as might have been feared. Granted, scenes of Bruce becoming the unwilling host for a Lantern ring are becoming played out, but otherwise his involvement furthers the story. Another benefit to the current structure is that Ivan Reis steps in front and center. Easily the strongest of the Brightest Day artists, Reis captures all the acrobatic grace of Deadman's antics and his tortured emotions. There's even a nice homage to Neal Adams original cover to Strange Adventures #205. This is easily one of the best issues of Brightest Day. Whether it can be taken as a sign of continued improvement is unclear, unfortunately.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Brightest Day #15
December 2, 2010
|
|
Another benefit to this issue is that all but two pages are attractively pencilled by Patrick Gleason, with the remainder being handled by Scott Clark as the series prepares for a Firestorm-heavy installment. Granted, Gleason's art is inked by seven different collaborators, but the visuals are surprisingly cohesive despite that. In general, this shift of focus to more character-specific issues is for the benefit of the series. Hopefully issue #16 makes better use of that approach with Firestorm.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Brightest Day Aftermath: The Search for Swamp Thing |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Brightest Day Aftermath: The Search for Swamp Thing #1
June 23, 2011
|
|
The saving grace of this issue is the interaction between Constantine and a pair of JLA-ers. Batman tossing Constantine on his ass is one of the more memorable comic book moments of the year. It's also a treat to see Zatanna bickering with her old boyfriend again. If the series is to improve over the next two issues, Vankin will need to focus heavily on this sort of banter as well as bring Swamp Thing more fully into the spotlight. Constantine alone clearly isn't going to carry the book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Britannia: We Who Are About to Die #1 |
Apr 27, 2017
show
|
|
Britannia: We Who Are About to Die is more than just a hard-boiled detective mystery set in the Roman Empire. It's also an examination of the debauchery of late-stage civilization and the contradiction of a man of reason and deduction being tormented by visions from the gods.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bruce Wayne: The Road Home |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Bruce Wayne: The Road Home: Batgirl #1
October 13, 2010
|
|
It's unfortunate this issue had to come out in the same week as The Return of Bruce Wayne #5, though. Perez truly outdid himself there, despite only acting as fill-in artist for Ryan Sook. The level of detail and sense of style isn't as pronounced here. The script isn't perfect, either. Stephanie's dialogue comes across as needlessly annoying in several spots, particularly early on as she believes herself to be battling Amazo. The point of the current Batgirl series may be to showcase a happier, more bubbly sort of crimefighter in Gotham, but too often Miller takes Steph's personality to the extreme of ditziness. Still, this issue goes a long way toward cementing her place among the Bat family. Consider this payoff to the past year of Batgirl stories.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bruce Wayne: The Road Home: Batman and Robin #1
October 13, 2010
|
|
Unfortunately, Fabian Nicieza doesn't shed much light on how Bruce's return impacts Dick and Damian. It's not even clear if they're aware of his return. Too much of the issue is devoted to other threads, such as Vicki Vale's exposé and Bruce's mission with Tim. However, Nicieza does handle the Dynamic Duo well, with plenty of playful banter to break up the butt-kicking. This issue reminds readers why it's so important these two remain partners. So this issue is hardly a total loss. It's just unfortunate that these various one-shots aren't one-shots at all, but pieces of a larger story. Those truly curious about how Dick and Damian will handle the return of Bruce Wayne might as well just wait until Grant Morrison tells that story next month.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bruce Wayne: The Road Home: Outsiders #1
October 13, 2010
|
|
As with the preceding issue of Red Robin, the core appeal for many readers might lie in seeing Bruce put his new suit to the test. It seems he's packing the entire JLA armory inside that thing, which is simultaneously awesome and a little weird. Unfortunately, this issue also suffers from some seriously lackluster art. Javier Saltares delivers some uncharacteristically loose and haphazard pencils. The fact that this issue was originally solicited without a designated artist may explain the rushed quality of the visuals. In short, if there is any chapter of The Road Home that can be safely skipped, it would be this one.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Bruce Wayne: The Road Home: Red Robin #1
October 13, 2010
|
|
This issue should mostly appeal to long-term fans of the Red Robin ongoing. It has the same writer and a similar focus. Those tuning in specifically for Bruce will find little of interest aside from a showcase of just how technologically advanced the new Batsuit will be. Oddly, Nicieza's narration, which read perfectly fine in the Batman and Robin issue, feels more awkward and stilted here. The Vicki Vale subplot is somewhat interesting, but also comes across as a forced attempt to build continuity between these issues. Also unfortunate is that Marcus To isn't present to continue rendering Tim's escapades. Instead, original Red Robin Ramon Bachs delivers a comparatively bland set of pencils. Though less scratchy and more attractive than his recent work on Azrael, Bachs' work is a definite step down from the previous Batman and Robin issue. Future installments will need to ramp up considerably if I'm going to be able to maintain interest for the latter two thirds of Bruce Wayne: The Roa
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
BubbleGun #1 |
Jun 20, 2013
show
|
|
BubbleGun is a series that wears its influences on its sleeve to a certain degree. But I have hope that the book will eventually carve its own path, and there's enough entertainment value in this first issue to suggest that BubbleGun will be worth a shot even at full price.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bucky Barnes: The Winter Soldier |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Bucky Barnes: The Winter Soldier #1
October 2, 2014
|
|
Marco Rudy's vibrant, surreal art style is a perfect fit for such a trippy book. Rudy delivers page after page of mind-bending imagery and intricate panel layouts. It's the sort of style that requires a more methodical read in order to follow the flow of the story, but it's a rewarding read. Only towards the end of the issue does Rudy's work begin to falter. The final couple pages are a little confusing in terms of what Kot and Rudy are trying to convey. But hopefully this is a partnership that will only grow and thrive with time.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Buffy the Vampire Slayer #1 |
Jan 23, 2019
show
|
|
Buffy the Vampire Slayer #1 manages to reboot a long-running franchise without losing its core appeal.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 8 |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 8 #36
September 1, 2010
|
|
If anything needs to be addressed in this arc, it's the pacing and framing of the story. Whedon is cutting back and forth between characters very rapidly. The frantic focus is justified to an extent, but it could still be toned down somewhat. The final few pages leave me hopeful this will be the case in later issues. Whedon had the chance to cut loose and go wild in this issue, but the arc shows signs of narrowing its focus a bit from here on out. There's plenty more to do and explore in these final issues. I just hope Whedon has room to explore it all while not ignoring the character relationships that have always been the backbone of Buffy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 8 #38
November 3, 2010
|
|
Georges Jeanty also seems to be weakening under the strain of putting "Last Gleaming" to rest. The quality of draftsmanship is weaker than in previous issues, and the level of detail fluctuates from page to page. "Last Gleaming" is still poised for a great finish if the team can ever push this exposition out of the way. This arc is proving that even Whedon isn't infallible on the series. Hopefully it will offer some lessons that can be applied to the pacing, structure, and presentation of Season 9.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #1
September 14, 2011
|
|
It'll be interesting to see how well that quality holds over the long-term. Whedon is credited as the sole writer for this issue, but he'll generally be co-writing the series with Andrew Chambliss. Will the quality of the writing hold steady once this new arrangement begins? That's the $64,000 question right now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #2
October 12, 2011
|
|
Georges Jeanty's pencils, meanwhile, are fairly variable in quality. Jeanty's close-up shots look good, offering clean, recognizable takes on the familiar characters without resorting to blatant photo-referencing. On the other hand, there are too many medium to wide-range shots that lose detail and feature characters that are stark almost to the point of abstraction. Jeanty's work needs a more unified, consistent feel.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bug: The Adventures of Forager #1 |
May 11, 2017
show
|
|
The Allreds deliver a surreal, enjoyable script, but one that doesn't fully tap into the psychological weight of Forager's constant cycle of sleep and wake and death and resurrection. Hopefully that'll change soon enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bullseye #1 |
Feb 01, 2017
show
|
|
Bullseye #1 won't change the way you look at this bloodthirsty assassin, but it does make the most of having Daredevil's nemesis in the driver's seat. It's fun, violent and brought to life in a very creative and energetic way thanks to artist Guillermo Sanna. Bullseye lovers won't want to pass up this book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Burn The Orphanage: Reign of Terror |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Burn The Orphanage: Reign of Terror #1
May 7, 2014
|
|
The potential downside to all of this is that Reign of Terror doesn't welcome new readers as much as you might expect from a #1 issue. Granted, this isn't exactly the most deep or labyrinthine storyline on the stands. But readers are better off starting from the beginning to get a sense for the character relationships and the scope of the franchise in tone and setting. Grace and Freedman continue pushing their characters forward and exploring relationships built in the preceding three issues. There's a depth to the characters that isn't immediately apparent from the '90s video game aesthetic and giant robots. Meanwhile, Grace's art and storytelling keeps improving with each new issue, suggesting that Reign of Terror will only get better as it goes along.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Burn The Orphanage: Reign of Terror #2
June 5, 2014
|
|
Burn the Orphanage has changed for the better with the shift to a more traditional mini-series structure. However, issue #2 loses a bit of the drive and focus from the first as the characters rest up and plan for their next assault on Mann-Corp.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Burn The Orphanage: Reign of Terror #5
October 2, 2014
|
|
Sina Grace and Daniel Freedman deliver the goods as they explore the final clash between Rock's gang and Mannheim's robots. Even as the drama mounts and the body count rises, the duo find time for the sort of silly humor and pop culture homages the series is known for.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Bushido #1 |
Oct 02, 2013
show
|
|
Bushido is a story with potential, but it really needs to slow down and allow the characters to develop rather than race through one confrontation after another.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cable (2008) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Cable #1
March 5, 2008
|
|
Though not without its problems, Cable #1 is a very enjoyable spinoff from an equally enjoyable crossover. Cable fans of all sorts should be pleased. Even the die hard Rob Liefeld supporters have been blessed (is that the right word?) with an alternate cover. Aside from X-Men: Legacy, this series could quite possibly be the most important X-book on the market for a while, so there's no real reason to avoid it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cable #15
June 17, 2009
|
|
Messiah War has proved a disappointment through these past weeks. I'm really hoping Kyle and Yost have a huge payoff waiting in the wings for the finale issue. Messiah Complex fell apart in its home stretch. It would be nice if this sequel could at least break the mold in that respect.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cable #24
March 10, 2010
|
|
Cable is a series that has accomplished little in its time. With issue #24 paving the way for Second Coming to begin, all I can do is breathe a serious sigh of relief. Should Cable live long enough to star in another ongoing book, I hope the shackles will be lifted and the creative team will be able to do something more with the character.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cable (2017) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Cable #1
May 31, 2017
|
|
Cable immediately establishes itself as one of the stronger additions to Marvel's ResurrXion lineup. This first issue offers a tightly paced, attractive romp as the cyborg hero hunts a mysterious enemy across time. And fortunately, the book is able to add just enough depth and complexity to its main character to balance out the light, breezy storytelling approach.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cable #150
October 18, 2017
|
|
Cable seems to have taken one step forward and several steps back as it joins the Marvel Legacy. The new team writer Ed Brisson begins assembling in this issue shows plenty of potential. And group with Doop as a member is a group worth following. But while the team dynamic is great, the conflict is somewhat less memorable. And with the book now struggling so much in the visual department, this series flaws are outweighing its strengths.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cable and X-Force |
11 issues
show
|
|
|
Cable and X-Force #2
December 19, 2012
|
|
I'm not ready to write this series off yet. However, I don't want to have to wade through an entire story arc full of jumbled storytelling before getting a clear sense of what place Cable and X-Force will occupy in the X-Men franchise. With Uncanny X-Force's relaunch imminent, this series really needs to make a stronger case for itself immediately.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cable and X-Force #3
January 9, 2013
|
|
So basically, the series wouldn't be half bad if it were just "X-Force" and not "Cable and X-Force." At the very least, I'm hoping that the series will even out a bit and ditch the nonlinear format after this debut arc.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cable and X-Force #4
February 14, 2013
|
|
Salvador Larroca is right at home with this book, at least. The blend of weird tech, frequent gunplay, and grotesque monsters plays to his storytelling strengths. Additionally , Frank D'Armata's surreal colors seem to be a better fit for this series than they were on Invincible Iron Man. The costume designs in this series leave something to be desired, but in general Larroca does a great job of matching the tone of Hopeless' script and establishing this seedy little corner of the X-Men universe.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cable and X-Force #6
March 20, 2013
|
|
The other half of the issue is a bit more dull by comparison, as Cable leads his team on a spaceship heist. But as the team dynamic begins to solidify, Hopeless is able to deliver some fun banter helps prevent the book from feeling overly grim and dark. Meltdown (or Boom-Boom or whatever codename she goes by these days) shows up for that extra bit of 90s nostalgia. Hopeless generally handles her well, though the use of slang like "totes" and "whatevs" is a bit grating. None of this material feels as vital as the Colossus portions, but the appearance of another major character at the end suggests that will soon be changing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cable and X-Force #7
April 17, 2013
|
|
The more deep emotional material comes in the interaction between Colossus and Domino. Hopeless has managed to build up a solid relationship and rapport between the two characters in a short time, and it's already paying off. More than any other character right now, Colossus seems to be the emotional center of the book. Sadly, the Cable/Cyclops pairing didn't have as much emotional resonance as I was hoping. Hopeless writes some nice father/son dialogue, but ultimately Cyclops' presence just felt unnecessary and poorly timed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cable and X-Force #9
June 6, 2013
|
|
Though it features some fun conflict and solid characterization, this is largely a forgettable installment of Cable and X-Force. The book developed a strong sense of direction and pacing in recent months, but it did seem to languish quite a bit in its first arc. Now isn't really an ideal time to be dealing with filler stories.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cable and X-Force #10
June 19, 2013
|
|
With this issue, Hopeless gets his team up and running and lays the framework for his next big arc on the series. If recent installments are any indication, that arc should be a lot of fun.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cable and X-Force #13
August 21, 2013
|
|
But aside from that, this proves to be another enjoyable chapter in the Cable and X-Force saga. Bunn delivers some fun banter between Forge and Doctor Nemesis, as well as some deeper interaction between Havok and his nephew Cable. Many questions are answered regarding the overall direction of the series and the source of Cable's precognitive visions. That said, maybe we don't need two issues of this series every single month, Marvel.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cable and X-Force #14
September 18, 2013
|
|
This issue also suffers from uncharacteristically weak art. Salvador Larroca's pencils are about as rushed and haphazard as I've ever seen. Working with colorist Frank D'Armata, Larroca has always had a tendency to leave it up to the colors to fill in the finer details on his figures. But that approach is far more pronounced here, as many figures are little more than loose outlines of uniform line weight and colored in. This artistic duo has long ranked among the fastest in the industry, but maybe even they need a breather from time to time.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cable and X-Force #15
October 16, 2013
|
|
This issue also sees regular artist Salvador Larroca step down in favor of Gerardo Sandoval. Considering how much the quality of Larroca's pencils had tapered off in recent weeks, a temporary change was probably for the best. Those who crave a slightly more '90s-influenced X-Force aesthetic will appreciate the exaggerated figures and facial expressions. It's not a style that meshes well with Larroca's techno-infused work, and the action framing and general storytelling aren't very exciting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cable and X-Force #16
November 21, 2013
|
|
Unfortunately, the art quality continues to suffer now that Salvador Larroca has been replaced by Gerrardo Sandoval. The visuals are too '90s-inspired in how they emphasize gritted teeth and hyper-exaggerated muscles over all else. The storytelling is sometimes frustratingly unclear during the battle with the Reavers, even as it functions much better during the Sentinel fight.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cage #1 |
Oct 05, 2016
show
|
|
It's been a long time coming, but now that Cage! is finally here, the series doesn't disappoint. Tartakovsky offers a fun, goofy and very self-aware romp through the '70s-era Marvel Universe. His distinctive art style lends itself very well to that setting and ensures that Luke really earns the title of "Power Man."
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cairo #1 |
Nov 28, 2007
show
|
|
Cairo is a story that may not appeal to everyone. Certainly, it seems to invoke different responses in each reader. I've already read one review that praised Perker's art but was fairly unimpressed with the execution of the story. Regardless of the difference in opinions, I think one thing all readers and reviewers can agree on is that Cairo is a provocative and heartfelt look at Eastern culture. Surely that's at least worth a quick glance.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Caliber: First Canon of Justice |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Caliber: First Canon of Justice #1
April 30, 2008
|
|
At only a buck, there's really no reason not to give this issue a shot. Unlike Hercules #1, though, I found myself enjoying the contents enough that I'm perfectly willing to pick up the next one even at full price. If this issue is indicative of what we can expect from Radical Comics in the future, then I'm more than a little excited.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Caliber: First Canon of Justice #2
May 28, 2008
|
|
Luckily the art holds up well from last month. At times Garrie Gastonny's paintings remind me of Marko Djurdjevic's work, if not quite as stylized or detailed. The lush paintings do the issue a world of good when the script fails to pick up its end of the slack. The story still has plenty of potential, but Sarkar is going to need to slow things down and let the tale unfold more organically. The good King Arthur deserves no less.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Call of Duty: Black Ops III |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Call of Duty: Black Ops III #1
November 5, 2015
|
|
The characters are pretty generic and forgettable outside their witty banter and one-liners. This really hinders the book when the body count starts rising and the book struggles to elicit an emotional response.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Call of Duty: Black Ops III #2
December 3, 2015
|
|
Aside from the gunplay, very little about the comic actually suggests that it's a Call of Duty story. It certainly doesn't look like the games. Instead of emphasizing gritty futurism of the game, Black Ops III opts for a more exaggerated art style that feels more '90s throwback than futuristic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Call of Duty: Zombies #1 |
Oct 26, 2016
show
|
|
Call of Duty: Zombies doesn't have much new to bring to the table when it comes to the zombie genre. But as straightforward as this first issue is, the execution is thoroughly solid. The art alone is enough to warrant a look for anyone who hasn't gotten their fill of the undead.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain America (2004) |
16 issues
show
|
|
|
Captain America #31
October 17, 2007
|
|
Now that we've seen Brubaker is able to maintain a consistent quality over the long run and without the series' main character, there is absolutely no reason not to be reading this book. Do it for Cap, if not for yourself.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America #32
November 19, 2007
|
|
If this issue doesn't rank quite as highly as recent ones, it's only because the focus on action makes it stand out from the crowd a little less. As the issue wears on Brubaker's story feels more and more like it could have been cribbed from any number of James Bond movies. It's hard not to make the comparison when Dr. Faustus makes his escape from his secret underground lair by blasting off in his spy plane while the heroes do battle with a legion of faceless, uniformed henchmen. Maybe I'm just cranky because I was hoping the storyline would have progressed a little farther in the past seven months. The new Cap is due to make his first appearance in a mere two issues, and I worry Brubaker will have to rush the rest of this storyline to get there. Still, it would be wrong of me not to have faith in the writer. He didn't turn this series into an absolute gem by his disappointing readers.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America #33
December 26, 2007
|
|
I think some readers will come into this issue with a slight amount of unconscious resentment. We've all been waiting for issue #34 and its big reveal of the new Captain America's identity. I know that's how I felt. I want to know already, darn it! Well, don't be surprised if you come out of this issue knowing more than you expected. All I can say is that 2007 was a truly great year for Captain America, and I'm sure 2008 will only be better.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America #35
February 27, 2008
|
|
If this issue has a flaw, it's the slightly weak ending. This isn't the first time in recent months Brubaker has relied on a slightly forced ending to cap off an issue. I sympathize that ending issue after issue on a satisfying cliffhanger is one of the more difficult aspects of writing comics. However, when a series is as good as this, lone flaws stand out all the more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America #38
May 21, 2008
|
|
If recent covers of Captain America had you feeling ill at ease, cast those feelings aside. Brubaker once again proves he's not a man to take the obvious routes, and his story continues to thrive because of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America #39
June 25, 2008
|
|
While the script is strong, the art unfortunately lags behind. I'm continuously amazed at how well the Cap crew has managed to achieve a consistent visual tone amidst multiple artists. If Steve Epting needs assistance in any given month, he tends to share pages with his collaborators. That approach worked well in the past, so it's bewildering to see it change this month. Roberto de la Torre steps into the driver's seat and handles the entire issue to less than pleasing results. It's strange to think I recently praised de la Torre for making Iron Man such a visual stunner. Little of that talent shines through here. Given that the original solicitation listed Epting as the artist for this issue, I'm inclined to blame it on a rush job. Last month proved that de la Torre can be better integrated into the book than this.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America #605
April 28, 2010
|
|
I certainly didn't dislike this arc. It had some interesting things to say about the Grand Director and the state of the country as a whole. But ultimately, it lacked the sense of immediacy and the engrossing struggle of Brubaker's better Cap arcs. I'm hoping the return of Baron Zemo next month will signal a true return to form for this series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America #618
May 25, 2011
|
|
It's tough to say where "Gulag" will leave the main cast when all is said and done, but there's no question this is one of Brubaker's strongest story arcs to date.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America #619
June 22, 2011
|
|
Judged by its own strengths, this issue is another winner from Brubaker. If anything, it only emphasizes how much potential Bucky had left and highlights the disappointment regarding his fate in Fear Itself.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America & Bucky #620
July 27, 2011
|
|
It's hard to imagine Cap fans being disappointed with any aspect of this book. Conversely, the series has yet to prove it truly needs to exist. Yes, it's good to see Bucky still being shown some love and attention. But can this book both complement the main Cap series and thrive on its own merits in the same way Journey Into Mystery does for the Thor franchise? That's what upcoming issues will have to prove.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America & Hawkeye #630
May 9, 2012
|
|
It's probably too much to hope that this arc will spontaneously improve in the second half. Hardcore fans of Hawkeye who somehow still haven't gotten enough of the character may find these issues well worth the price, but personally, I'm waiting for the next "Captain America and..." team-up to hopefully breathe new life into the series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America & Hawkeye #631
May 23, 2012
|
|
With no real dramatic pull and too little focus on the simple joy of superheroes punching dinosaurs, Captain America and Hawkeye has nothing to offer readers. The next Cap team-up can't come soon enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America & Hawkeye #632
June 13, 2012
|
|
This issue wraps up the Captain America and Hawkeye phase of the series and paves the way for Captain America and Iron Man next. Cullen Bunn does offer a glimpse of a larger, overarching plot tying these various phases of the series together. But given how dull these four issues were, is that even a positive sign?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America & Iron Man #635
August 8, 2012
|
|
The upcoming .1 issue turns back the clock to deliver a team-up between Cap and Namor. Here finally is a pairing we don't see in half a dozen Marvel books every month. Maybe the series will finally acquire a voice and life of its own again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain America (2011) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Captain America #8
February 8, 2012
|
|
Alan Davis' art is a major part of the reason for the classic, old-school feel of the arc. But in this case, "old-school" is anything but a derogatory term. Davis is still a master draftsman and storyteller, qualities that far outweigh little niggling concerns like the dated hairstyles some characters sport. If nothing else, Captain America Vol. 6 has been a pretty book from the start.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America #9
March 14, 2012
|
|
This issue may sport the best work from Alan Davis so far. Davis really nails the extended fight between Sharon and Machinesmith, with plenty of dynamic motion and some amusing robot designs. And as always, his character work is every bit as refined as his action. This arc may have been slightly underwhelming at first, but it's definitely picking up as the conclusion draws near.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America #17
September 12, 2012
|
|
The one element this arc has going for it is Scot Eaton's artwork. Eaton's work makes up for its lack of flashy style with a solid storytelling foundation and powerful, detailed figures. Eaton is a worthy follow-up to the likes of Steve McNiven and Alan Davis.He proves himself equally adept at massive riot scenes or outlandish shootouts on the moon. It's just a shame that this arc isn't half as interesting as that last sentence makes it sound.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain America (2012) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Captain America #22
July 2, 2014
|
|
Again, Remender seems to be building the foundation of an interesting story here. But the execution in this issue is underwhelming, and we need to see why this instance of Steve Rogers losing his powers is different from the others.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America #24
September 4, 2014
|
|
This is the last issue of Rick Remender's Cap run before the big shake-up. And it's likely that the final page cliffhanger will annoy a lot of readers given what Marvel has revealed about issue #25. But I actually appreciated what Remender did with the cliffhanger and this issue in general.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America #25
October 2, 2014
|
|
With some great Zola moments and strong visuals, this series ends in a way that builds excitement for what comes next. However, due to a heavy-handed transition and little focus on the man who will be the new Captain America, this issue is just good instead of great.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain America (2017) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Captain America #695
November 1, 2017
|
|
Whether you're eager to follow the fallout of Secret Empire or are just ready for Captain America to move on, there's plenty to like in the first chapter of Mar Waid and Chris Samnee's new run. Waid is a seasoned Cap veteran at this point, and he proves that he hasn't lost his touch with the character. Samnee, meanwhile, shows that he's perfectly at home in any corner of the Marvel Universe. This run isn't shaping up to be a particularly groundbreaking, but it tells a good story and tells it well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America #696
December 7, 2017
|
|
This issue offers more insight into what Steve is actually trying to accomplish in his cross-country travels, but for the most part it tells a pretty straightforward story. For now, that's enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America #697
January 4, 2018
|
|
Artist Chris Samnee makes the most of the premise, creating a dense, unsettling jungle environment and really capturing the scope of Cap's predicament. And while this issue maintains the done-in-one format of Waid and Samnee's issues so far, it does play its part in terms of advancing the overarching narrative
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America #698
February 15, 2018
|
|
The action and storytelling are as dynamic as ever, but the unusual character designs and world-building result in an issue that stands out in stark contrast to its predecessors. Let;'s hope Waid and Samnee keep taking risks like this.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America #700
April 11, 2018
|
|
Most anniversary issues like this are devoted to introducing earth-shattering plot twists and setting the tone for a series going forward. Cap #700 takes a more character-driven approach, using its futuristic setting to test Steve Rogers in compelling new ways and explore the enduring appeal of this character. It serves as a fitting conclusion to Waid and Samnee's latest collaboration.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain America #1 |
Jul 04, 2018
show
|
|
Marvel's latest Captain America relaunch shows plenty of promise, but the series has some growing to do.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain America / Black Panther: Flags of our Fathers #1 |
Apr 07, 2010
show
|
|
Hudlin seems to be much more in his element with this version of Black Panther, and the story greatly benefits as a result. Sadly, whereas the art was usually the saving grace of Hudlin's past Panther stories, here it proves to be the book's worst enemy. I think Panther fans will be pleased with this take on the first meeting of two Marvel icons, but the series can still do better for itself.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain America 70th Anniversary Special #1 |
Apr 01, 2009
show
|
|
Sorry, Marvel. I enjoyed the 65th Anniversary Special much more. Better luck in five years.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain America and Batroc the Leaper #1 |
Mar 23, 2011
show
|
|
If Marvel hopes to end these weekly specials on a high note, they had better have something mighty good in store for Captain America and the Secret Avengers next week.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain America and the First Thirteen #1 |
Mar 09, 2011
show
|
|
Though hardly a necessary read by any stretch of the imagination, this one-shot will hit the spot for any readers hungry for more Peggy Carter tales after reading Ed Brubaker's Cap run or watching the movie.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain America And The Mighty Avengers #1 |
Nov 12, 2014
show
|
|
Luke Ross immediately proves himself to be a great fit for the tone of this Avengers book. Ross is able to channel the more grounded, street-level sensibility of Ewing's writing without losing sight of the larger-than-life elements of these characters. If most elements with the relaunch are business as usual, the visuals certainly seem to be on stronger footing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain America Corps #1 |
Jun 15, 2011
show
|
|
There's nothing terribly compelling about the plot to the series, as Captain America and the multiverse don't easily mix. And while Stern effectively commented on contemporary American politics in "War and Remembrance," this series seems a bit more lacking in subtlety. Perhaps that will change as he reveals more of the strange new reality our heroes find themselves in. What Cap Corps manages, however, is allowing Stern to explore various iterations of the hero not in use any longer. American Dream has pretty much been collecting dust these past few years. The current incarnation of John Walker is clearly in less than fighting shape. And Bucky? Yeah. Rather than feeling out of place, these time-displaced heroes combine for a fitting and enjoyable celebration of the Cap legacy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain America: Living Legend |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Captain America: Living Legend #1
October 2, 2013
|
|
It's rare to see Adi Granov illustrating a full issue anymore. His work exhibits the typical strengths and flaws of most painters working in comics. He brings a wonderful sense of detail and texture to Cap's world, including giving the character a slick, functional costume redesign that runs circles around his over-produced Marvel NOW! suit. But Granov's figures can be stiff and lifeless at times, with action scenes not always flowing as well as they should. It may be just as well that Granov is being replaced by Augustin Alessio on the remaining three issues. Alessio is a painter who has proven himself capable of avoiding these sorts of storytelling flaws with his work.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America: Living Legend #2
October 30, 2013
|
|
As with the first issue, the plot is nothing too terribly remarkable, and Andy Diggle doesn't really add any new wrinkles in this second issue. Cap is able to show off his unbreakable cool in a cool scene involving a HALO jump from suborbital heights, but otherwise he's a pretty bland and emotionless lead. Nor does his scientist sidekick add much to the equation. Diggle finds a bit more dramatic weight with Volkov, the mutated cosmonaut character. The flashbacks showcasing his transformation are easily the highlight of the issue, and hopefully the series will pick up steam as he and Cap finally meet face to face.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain America: Peggy Carter, Agent of S.H.I.E.L.D. #1 |
Dec 04, 2014
show
|
|
All in all, there's plenty of value for the $8 cover price, and this issue serves as a perfectly decent primer for the upcoming TV series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain America: Sam Wilson |
10 issues
show
|
|
|
Captain America: Sam Wilson #2
October 29, 2015
|
|
The scope of this book is far more down to Earth than Acuna's recent Marvel work. And while that approach doesn't necessarily suit his style as well, Acuna is able to deftly move between big action scenes and quiet character moments without missing a beat.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America: Sam Wilson #5
January 14, 2016
|
|
Nick Spencer has a special talent for writing emotionally troubled, down-on-their-luck supervillains. While this issue is ostensibly focused on the introduction of the new Falcon, that element is quickly overshadowed by Spencer's efforts to flesh out certain members of the new Serpent Society.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America: Sam Wilson #6
February 4, 2016
|
|
The most obvious improvement with this new Captain America comic over previous incarnations is the stronger emphasis on humor. Sam Wilson might be dealing with some pretty shady characters, but that doesn't mean there isn't room for social satire or some moments of pure silliness.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America: Sam Wilson #11
July 7, 2016
|
|
The simple fact that Daniel Acuna is back on board with this issue is cause enough for celebration. Acuna helps kick off the series' Civil War II tie-in arc in style, balancing the high-flying heroics of the Avengers with the all-too real pain and bloodshed of the war against the Americops.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America: Sam Wilson #19
February 16, 2017
|
|
I wish this series were a little more subtle in the way it mixes superheroes and contemporary American politics, but there's no denying that this issue packs a punch as it explores the racial inequities of the criminal justice system and (most powerfully) the perpetual cycle of violence that builds from one generation to the next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America: Sam Wilson #20
March 16, 2017
|
|
Nick Spencer's greatest strength with this series is that he uses Sam Wilson to showcase a different sort of Captain America, one who struggles to do the right thing and even wrap his mind around what the right thing actually is.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America: Sam Wilson #21
April 13, 2017
|
|
Sam is at his lowest ebb since taking up the mantle of Captain America. And while a great deal of energy is spent rehashing his journey so far, the book carries enough emotionally weight that it doesn't read like a simple recap.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America: Sam Wilson #22
June 1, 2017
|
|
This issue basically serves as a character study for Sam, exploring his reaction to Hydra's takeover of America and the internal conflict between his weary resignation and innate need to help others. Nothing earth-shattering, in other words, but enjoyable enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America: Sam Wilson #23
June 15, 2017
|
|
Captain America: Sam Wilson #23 does its part to flesh out Sam's head-space and the character's role in this massive conflict, but it doesn't necessarily add anything critical to the larger crossover. But for long-term fans of the series, it's worth it mainly just to see Nick Spencer explore what happens when Sam no longer has the will to be Captain America.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain America: Steve Rogers |
12 issues
show
|
|
|
Captain America: Steve Rogers #1
May 25, 2016
|
|
Captain America: Steve Rogers #1 doesn't offer the most exciting start for this new series (at least, not until the final sequence), but it does feature a talented creative team digging in with some of Marvel's most iconic characters. Spencer's depiction of the new Hydra alone is proof that this isn't just any old Cap comic. Saiz's artwork only furthers that impression. Hopefully there's nowhere to go but up as this new series moves beyond the setup phase and continues building new challenges for Captain America.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America: Steve Rogers #2
June 29, 2016
|
|
If you needed reassurance that Captain America: Steve Rogers #1's big twist wasn't included merely for shock value, this follow-up issue should do the trick. It offers a comprehensive look at Steve's new status quo and how the Hydra reveal ties into Red Skull's ongoing plans. Between the strong characterization and the vibrant art, there's no reason to fear for the future of this iconic Marvel hero.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America: Steve Rogers #3
July 27, 2016
|
|
This new Cap series is taking the slow burn approach, and so far it's paying off handsomely. Cap's current status quo only grows more intriguing in this issue as new twists emerge and our hero finds himself torn between his friends and his new Hydra allies. It certainly doesn't hurt that artist Jesus Saiz is crafting one of marvel's most gorgeous comics every month.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America: Steve Rogers #5
September 28, 2016
|
|
In terms of plot and characterization, this series is one of the best Marvel has to offer right now. Each new issues brings with it a new wave of engrossing twists and a fascinating look at a hero torn between his inner goodness and the twisted assassin Hydra would make of him. Unfortunately, the first three issues set a high standard when it came to the art, and this story arc isn't measuring up in that regard.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America: Steve Rogers #12
February 23, 2017
|
|
This series always takes a noticeable plunge in visual quality whenever Jesus Saiz is absent, and that's very much the case here. Javier Pina continues his valiant effort to echo Saiz's approach, but his work lacks the smooth, refined quality that makes Saiz's work such a joy to view
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America: Steve Rogers #13
March 9, 2017
|
|
This particular chapter sheds more light on the revised history of Cap/Zemo and how the latter figures into the rapid build-up to Secret Empire. But at this point it's regrettable that said build-up has to be so relentless and fast-paced.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America: Steve Rogers #15
April 5, 2017
|
|
Captain America: Steve Rogers #15 is an especially eventful new chapter of the series as Marvel gears up for Secret Empire. While the opening pages offer a jarring transition from Uncanny Avengers #22, the remainder of the issue delivers a compelling look at the new state of the Cap/Red Skull dynamic. The book's real problem ,as usual, is its wonky, inconsistent art style.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America: Steve Rogers #17
May 24, 2017
|
|
In terms of its contribution to the larger Secret Empire narrative, Captain America: Steve Rogers #17 is a winner. It offers crucial context for the story and how Hydra's rise impacts both the superhuman community and ordinary Americans. But as with so many issues of this series, the art is disappointingly rushed and haphazard.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America: Steve Rogers #18
June 21, 2017
|
|
This series hasn't turned out to be the critical companion to Secret empire readers might have expected. This issue in particular suffers from a seeming inability to fixate on any one plot point, instead bouncing around the landscape of Secret Empire. But there are at least some memorable moments along the way, not to mention that the art is far more cohesive than is usually the case with this book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain America: The Chosen (2007) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Captain America: The Chosen #2
September 26, 2007
|
|
Mind you, the art is good. That's one thing every Marvel Knights series has had in common so far. I have to give it up for ay artist who takes the time to draw out every single link in Cap's chain mail armor. Mitch Breitweiser is equally adept at rendering the various military equipment and soldiers that take up most panels. I just wish the story could back up the art. I still don't know quite what to make of it. I thought this mini-series would follow a real-world soldier who begins to have hallucinatory visions of Captain America on the battlefield. Simple enough, but apparently there's a real Captain America in all this, and he's basically jacked into the Matrix so as to communicate with said soldier for whatever reason. I'm not entirely sure if Cap is real, or the soldier, or both. I feel more confused than I should be with a comic of this nature, and it bugs me. Two issues are more than enough to explain the premise behind a story. I can only stomach so many scenes of a ghostly Ca
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America: The Chosen #3
October 17, 2007
|
|
Thank goodness for Mitch Breitweiser. Even if the majority of the new Marvel Knights books can't live up to Silver Surfer: Requiem in terms of overall quality, at least they can all look good not doing it. Short of Esad Ribic's paintings in Requiem, Breitweiser's art is the best to come out of the line. I'm prepared to say he might be the best Cap artist of the modern age after John Cassaday. Even compared to the first two issues his work here is mind-blowing. Chosen may have no lasting effect on the Marvel Universe, but I hope it at least gives Breitweiser the recognition and future work he deserves.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain America: White |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Captain America: White #0
July 9, 2008
|
|
So, really, my only complaint is that this issue doesn't offer enough. Given my general opinion of Loeb's work output lately, that's a nice complaint to have. By all indications Captain America: White is another destined classic. I hope the creators don't let me down now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain America: White #1
September 17, 2015
|
|
Captain America: White doesn't offer a dramatic reinvention of the character or his mythology. This series is more about paying homage to an older, simpler time in Cap's career and exploring the brotherly bond between Steve and Bucky. If you enjoyed Loeb and Sale's previous Marvel projects, you'll find a lot to like with this collaboration.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain Britain and MI:13 (2008) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Captain Britain and MI:13 #11
March 11, 2009
|
|
The one real problem stems from the art, as Leonard Kirk is joined by fill-in artist Mike Collins. Collins' scenes are pretty obvious. He's relegated mainly to the slower, more dialogue-centric scenes, but the downgrade in visual quality is still very noticeable. Kirk, for his part, continues to put out solid work. Seeing that this series has already offered 11 issues since its launch last summer, I wouldn't mind it if Marvel chose to slow down a bit. As with many books, I would prefer a less-than-monthly schedule if it meant fill-in artists could be avoided. Captain Britain and the MI:13 remains one of Marvel's top books after all this time, and I see no reason to mess with a winning formula.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain Britain and MI:13 #12
April 8, 2009
|
|
Leonard Kirk continues to hold his own as well. Especially impressive are Kirk's renderings of Castle Dracula and its dank hallways. His Earth settings are a bit dull by comparison, but in general the book is quite pleasing to the eye. Once again, I'm convinced this is Marvel's best team book on the market, and you're doing yourself a serious disservice if you pass it over in favor of another.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain Britain and MI:13 #14
June 17, 2009
|
|
With any luck, we'll get a stronger show on the art side of things as well. Leonard Kirk continues to impress as always, but it's been quite a while since we've seen him pencil an entire issue. Adrian Syaf helps fill in the gaps. Syaf is very competent at replicating Kirk's style, but a certain special magic is absent from his pages. Kirk generally shows up whenever the action gets hot and heavy, which is wise, but that only accentuates the gap further. At this rate we've only got a few months left before the series dies an unjust death. I hope Cornell and end this wildly entertaining but slightly flawed arc on a high note.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain Marvel (2007) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Captain Marvel #1
November 14, 2007
|
|
Brian Reed and Lee Weeks wouldn't have topped my list for a killer Captain Marvel team (no pun intended), but they certainly make a case for themselves. Reed is increasingly proving that he can easily survive without his frequent writing partner Brian Michael Bendis. Reed's own voice shines through in this issue, particularly with some well-written narration by Mar-Vell. Weeks, despite not qualifying as a very traditional superhero artist, is a near-perfect fit for this mini-series. In many ways Weeks evokes memories of Jim Starlin's work on The Death of Captain Marvel. If this series is eliciting favorable comparisons to that classic story already, I think we're in for a marvelously good time (har har).
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain Marvel #2
December 26, 2007
|
|
Lee Weeks is a name that hasn't graced many Marvel covers lately, but I hope that will change after this mini-series. Weeks is one of many similarly-accomplished noir artists at Marvel. His stark, realistic pencils aren't what I would have initially expected from this book, but his style wound up being a perfect fit. I highly recommend giving this series a look if you're still on the fence. I just don't think any supposed connection to Secret Invasion should be a motivating factor.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain Marvel #3
February 13, 2008
|
|
Captain Marvel #3 took a noticeably long time to hit stands, and it's probably safe to assume the art played a role in the delay. Even if that isn't the case, Lee Week's pencils seem a little rougher and less refined than the first two issues. I still love his work, and his style fits the book a lot better than I would have expected, but issue #3 is a bit of a disappointment. That goes for the issue as a whole. While some mini-series like Sub-Mariner have benefited from their connection to major event storylines, I can't help but feel Captain Marvel would work better if it were a little more removed from the hustle and bustle of Secret Invasion.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Captain Marvel #4
March 19, 2008
|
|
One area I feel no conflict with is Lee Weeks' art. This is some good stuff. Detailed, consistent, moody, and perfectly suited to the subdued nature of the story. I sincerely hope marvel will continue to make better use of Weeks in the future. Even if I don't approve of the overall story direction, both creators are turning in some of the best work of their respective careers.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain Marvel #15 |
May 14, 2015
show
|
|
Among the many series finales at Marvel these past few weeks, this easily ranks among the best.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain Marvel #1 |
Jan 20, 2016
show
|
|
Captain Marvel is in good form as she kicks off her latest solo series. The new status quo is a logical extension of what's come before, and the ensemble cast injects new color into the mix. The creative team work seamlessly together to provide a clean, accessible and entertaining gateway into her world.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Captain Marvel #1 |
Jan 09, 2019
show
|
|
Despite its strong suits, Captain Marvel #1 serves as a muddled and unfocused debut for the new series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Carnage #1 |
Oct 20, 2010
show
|
|
Carnage #1 is neither quite as accessible nor as straightforward as it should be. Still, it makes for a decent read, and all signs point to Wells being able to provide Carnage a proper reintroduction into the Marvel U.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Carnage USA #1 |
Dec 14, 2011
show
|
|
Not all books appeal to all readers, and to some extent I can accept that Carnage U.S.A. just isn't for me. However, the book has problems by any standard, and there's no telling if those problems will get better or worse over time.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cartoon Network Super Secret Crisis War #2 |
Jul 31, 2014
show
|
|
Super-Secret Crisis Wars is proving to be every bit as entertaining as you'd expect from a mash-up of all the big Cartoon Network franchises.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Casanova (2006) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Casanova #10
October 24, 2007
|
|
Between the evil people running rampant and the surprising amount of nudity on each page, it's no wonder Fraction turned to Image for a publishing outlet. Even Vertigo or MAX might have issues with the book's content. That said, Casanova is nothing if not a silly, almost light-hearted series. It may not be everyone's cup of tea, but those that push through the burn will find a lot to love.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Casanova #11
November 28, 2007
|
|
It's unfortunate that the remaining few pages ruin the effect a bit. I'll admit it's hard to follow along with the ongoing plot at times, and every time Casanova's father appears and Fraction starts throwing acronyms around like party favors my enjoyment starts to lessen. Sometimes Casanova is just more complicated than it needs to be. It's hard to complain too much, though. Fraction is very obviously telling exactly the story he wants to, and, for the most part, it's exactly the kind of story I want to read.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Casanova #12
March 5, 2008
|
|
The only trouble with the sparse dialogue and heavy action is that the issue blows by even more quickly than normal. Each issue of Casanova is a mere 16 pages long. Between the low price tag and dense storyline, usually that's plenty. This month... not so much. I just love my Casanova too much to be entirely satisfied with 16 pages of shooting and eye gouging. Hopefully the next issue will have more of a timely arrival.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Casanova #13
April 2, 2008
|
|
However, Fraction also layers this issue with a surprisingly profound look at death in a universe where super-science and trans-dimensional travel can render one functionally immortal. This is partially accomplished through a series of poignant flashbacks. It's here that artist Fabio Moon stands out even more than usual. Moon brings back the olive-green tone of the previous arc, Luxuria, and deftly bridges the gap between storylines. As much as I love Fraction's quirky writing, I'd gladly buy a wordless issue of Casanova as long as I could continue to admire Moon's gorgeous drawings. Together, Fraction and Moon make for the sort of indy comics dream team I never knew I wanted but can't imagine going without again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Casanova #14
May 14, 2008
|
|
But Ba will tide me over well enough. I'll miss Casanova while he's gone. I just hope I won't be kept waiting too long before Cass' next adventure. When it comes to Matt Fraction comics, I just can't seem to get enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Casanova Vol. 2 #1 |
Jul 08, 2010
show
|
|
As much as I adored the original Image series' two-tone color scheme, I have to admit the new colors are a boon to Casanova. They lend more depth and vibrancy to Gabriel Ba's pencils. The scene of Casanova falling back into his original timeline alone shows how much the new color treatment can aid the series. Ba's work is clearly more rough around the edges than his more recent material, but the same core level of craft is still there. The backup feature is even more visually dynamic and a very welcome bonus. Only the new lettering leaves me a bit cold, as it often appears squished and out of place atop the original art and word balloons. Though occasionally a little obtuse and confusing, Casanova is a delightfully crazy sci-fi romp and a great addition to the Icon line. Don't make the mistake of passing it up a second time.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Casanova: Acedia |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Casanova: Acedia #3
July 30, 2015
|
|
There's a sense of the surreal and otherworldly to this story that very much works in its favor. Alongside his penchant for big, weird ideas, Matt Fraction writing stands out because of its economy. Fraction never includes a word balloon or caption that doesn't serve the story in some way. It's a refreshing change of pace after some of the comics I've read this week.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Casanova: Acedia #5
June 2, 2016
|
|
Matt Fraction and Fabio Moon generate plenty of weird, trippy sci-fi goodness in this issue, along with an unexpected but very welcome dose of horror for good measure. If anything, the Lovecraftian hospital sequence suggests that Fraction needs to turn his attention to a creator-owned horror series at some point in the near future.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Casanova: Avaritia |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Casanova: Avaritia #1
September 5, 2011
|
|
The wait was long, but it was worth it. Gula built up to be something very special over the course of its life, but Avaritia shows plenty of potential to surpass it. If Fraction can conjure up a surprise ending to top that one, I would very much like to see it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Casanova: Avaritia #2
October 4, 2011
|
|
Until now, Casanova: Gula #4 ranked as my favorite issue of the series. Though Avaritia #2 can't rival that one in terms of the twist ending, all of the elements come together to form a superb comic. Any fan of Fraction's mainstream Marvel work who isn't also picking up this series is doing themselves an incredible disservice.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Casanova: Avaritia #3
April 4, 2012
|
|
Gabriel Ba is also in fine form with this issue. The imagery is getting progressively more surreal with each new chapter, and that says something coming off of an issue with samurai panda warriors. Cris Peter's colors also bring a lot to the table. Peter frequently shifts from full color to a more old-school Casanova, monotone approach to highlight certain panels. It's no surprise that Peter's work earned the series an Eisner nomination today, although it really deserved more than one.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cataclysm: The Ultimates Last Stand |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Cataclysm: The Ultimates Last Stand #0.1
October 30, 2013
|
|
Three artists collaborate on this issue - Mico Suayan, Mirco Pierfederici, and Leonard Kirk. But impressively, it's actually very hard to detect when the book shifts from one to the next. Suayan's extreme musculature does stand out at times, but these three seemingly disparate pencillers do a great job of giving the book a cohesive feel that fits in well with Hunger;'s aesthetic and the current tone of the Ultimate Universe.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cataclysm: The Ultimates Last Stand #4
January 29, 2014
|
|
All that being said, this issue does improve on the previous three in one key area. Galactus has been far too much a silent, almost faceless threat throughout Cataclysm. For all his phenomenal cosmic powers, Galactus is still a creature with thoughts and motivations and desires. Bendis reflects that here as Jean Grey delves into Galactus' mind and readers get a sense of Galactus' desperation and confusion at his current predicament. There'a kernel of drama there that could finally give this story the emotional resonance it sorely needs in the final issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cataclysm: The Ultimates Last Stand #5
February 26, 2014
|
|
Worst of all, this issue doesn't even offer a satisfying conclusion to the conflict. No sooner does the battle wrap up and the survivors dust themselves off than the conclusion is at hand. The best we can hope is that the Survive epilogue one-shot can cap off Cataclysm in a more satisfying way, and maybe channel more of the emotion and drama that was so apparent in the tie-ins but in short supply here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cataclysm: Ultimate Spider-Man #1 |
Nov 14, 2013
show
|
|
Back during Ultimatum, Ultimate Spider-Man was far superior to the actual event. While the gulf isn't quite as wide with Cataclysm, there's still a huge difference in quality between Cataclysm #1 and this issue. This issue packs in all key character moments that make readers care about the idea of an impending Ultimate meltdown in the first place.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cataclysm: Ultimates #1 |
Nov 21, 2013
show
|
|
Carmine Di Giandomenico also sticks around to illustrate the book. He gives the conflict a nice sense of grit and harshness, but his work is a little looser and less defined than I'd like. And particularly with Fury, Di Giandomenico seems to reuse similar poses and facial expressions too often.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Catwoman #76 |
Feb 20, 2008
show
|
|
Every month Dan makes it clear you should be reading this series. This time it's my turn, and I can only hope I converted a few new readers. The book certainly deserves them.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Catwoman (2011) |
17 issues
show
|
|
|
Catwoman #0
September 19, 2012
|
|
Nocenti's new take on Catwoman's origin is far too convoluted and confusingly presented for its own good. Let's hope this isn't an indication of how the rest of her run will play out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Catwoman #2
October 19, 2011
|
|
But ultimately, in a time when I'm struggling to keep track of the plot points of 52 assorted new DC books, I'm never in danger of forgetting Catwoman. That has to count for something.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Catwoman #6
February 15, 2012
|
|
After this dramatic showdown, Winick ramps up the issue even further when Batman enters the fray. The Selina/Bruce dynamic plays out much differently this time, and more satisfactorily to boot. Winick starts to show his hand as far as what his fundamental take on Selina is. With the foundation laid as far as character work and a new supporting cast, the series has plenty of room to grow in the coming months.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Catwoman #7
March 21, 2012
|
|
It's still unclear whether this book can really hold its own over the long term. The building blocks are in place, but Winick needs to do more to push the characters and conflicts along.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Catwoman #8
April 18, 2012
|
|
As I mentioned last month, the series is improving of late because Winick is showing a clearer sense of purpose and direction in his plotting. Even the build-up towards "Night of the Owls" seems to benefit the series rather than constrict it. Winick's next goal should be to better flesh out Spark, assuming the character is destined for more than a transient role in the book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Catwoman #9
May 16, 2012
|
|
While this issue offers a decently fun and action-packed adventure, it's not one of the more memorable Night of the Owls tie-ins.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Catwoman #10
June 20, 2012
|
|
Issue #10 stumbles fairy significantly during the big action sequence and its immediate aftermath, but on the whole this new storyline seems a promising one. The main challenge for Winick will be to more elegantly work in Selina's personal turmoil with the conflict at hand.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Catwoman #11
July 18, 2012
|
|
Winick's Catwoman left a bad taste in many readers' mouths with its first issue. And as much as the series has been able to prove it has substance beneath all the sex appeal, issues like this frustrate in their unwillingness to fully explore the characters and push the plot forward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Catwoman #12
August 15, 2012
|
|
This book needs more -- stronger character dynamics, a greater sense of purpose, and a more emotionally resonant conflict for Selina to contend with.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Catwoman #13
October 17, 2012
|
|
Rafa Sandoval makes his debut as new series artist. On one hand, it seems unwise to assign Sandoval such a female-centric book when he has so many problems rendering hair. And the lousy hair does prove distracting in some panels, as it has a spiraling effect on the facial work in general. But on the plus side, Sandoval is able to recapture some of the book's visual energy that was lost when Guillem March departed. Sandoval delivers some nicely framed shots and cool action sequences, so in the end the trade-off is worth it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Catwoman #16
January 23, 2013
|
|
Catwoman has been in a slump for months. The real problem facing this series now is that Selina will soon be joining the JLA, a fact which offers even less incentive to keep reading this book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Catwoman #17
February 20, 2013
|
|
With Catwoman joining the Justice League of America, the time has come for this series to finally step up and deliver on its potential. Issue #17 makes some significant strides, but it remains to be seen if this will develop into a trend.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Catwoman #40
March 26, 2015
|
|
This series has vastly improved under new writer Genevieve Valentine. Sure, it's a bit dry at times with its constant references to historical figures and the way it describes the unfolding gang war in Gotham more than it actually showcases said war. But this book has been great about exploring Selina Kyle's delicate new position in Gotham's underworld and the many challenges and sacrifices she's forced to make as she wars with Black Mask.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Catwoman #41
June 11, 2015
|
|
This issue won't be especially welcoming to newcomers, what with its vast web of criminal conspiracies and the fact that Selina KYle is semi-retired as Catwoman. However, for those who have been following the book since Genevieve Valentine's run began last fall, you'll find the book hasn't lost its appeal during the two-month hiatus.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Catwoman #42
July 9, 2015
|
|
This series works as the most cerebral and subdued member of the Batman family. David Messina's art helps offset that subdued quality with dynamic fight scenes and an overall high sense of energy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Catwoman #44
September 10, 2015
|
|
As if all the historical quotes and allusions to ancient Rome didn't make it clear, Genevieve Valentine's Catwoman run is a real Shakespearean tragedy in the works.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Catwoman: Futures End #1
September 25, 2014
|
|
This issue offers a glimpse of Selina Kyle's new status quo ahead of the imminent revamp of the main Catwoman series. While it's certainly interesting to see Selina trading in her catsuit for business attire and rule the Gotham underworld, the execution leaves a lot to be desired.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Catwoman #1 |
Jul 04, 2018
show
|
|
Catwoman #1 looks fantastic, but there's not much beneath the surface of this new series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Catwoman: Election Night #1 |
Nov 02, 2016
show
|
|
This issue is nothing if not a study in contrasts and an example of both the right and wrong way to handle political satire in comics. The main Catwoman feature is a dull, lifeless, painfully unsubtle slog, while the Prez backup is a great throwback to a series that deserved much more love. Unfortunately, that backup alone can't justify the price of admission here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cave Carson Has A Cybernetic Eye |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Cave Carson Has A Cybernetic Eye #1
October 20, 2016
|
|
This issue manages to tell a very simple, genuine tale of a grieving family man even as it works in all manner of strange sights and situations. Those turned off by the psychedelic, stream-of-consciousness approach to Doom Patrol and Shade: The Changing Girl may find this issue a bit more approachable.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Champions (2016) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Champions #1
October 4, 2016
|
|
Champions is exactly the sort of book Marvel needs in the wake of Civil War II. Champions speaks to the need for heroes who cut through the nonsense and infighting and simply strive to make the world a better place. This first issue serves as a charming debut and showcases a strong team dynamic. It's unfortunate, though, the the artwork doesn't always hold its end of the bargain.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Champions #3
December 8, 2016
|
|
Forced romantic drama aside, the general tone and direction series is shaping up nicely. However, Ramos' art style seems even more out of place than usual in this more real-world setting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Champions #4
January 5, 2017
|
|
This issue offers deep insight into many of the Champions, but always in a way that feels natural and organic rather than forced. And Waid always maintains a balance between lighthearted banter and bickering and deeper, darker drama (much of it surrounding Viv's tragic background).
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Champions #6
March 2, 2017
|
|
Ramos' normally distorted figure work becomes even more so here, which really messes with the sense of perspective during the extended paintball battle and makes it difficult to follow the flow of the action.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Champions #8
May 4, 2017
|
|
In some ways, the "Champions vs. Freelancers" storyline has been a disappointment, as the series has done little to flesh out the latter group or make them feel like a compelling bunch of characters in their own right. But they have, at least, had a profound effect on the Champions as they struggle to establish their place in the ever-changing Marvel U.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Chaos War |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Chaos War #3
November 3, 2010
|
|
Visually, this may be Khoi Pham's strongest issue so far. Pham often struggles with clarity and consistency. While there are cases where characters sport unusual or unclear expressions, on the whole that consistency is much stronger this time. All the pieces seem to be falling into place for Chaos War now. Now as the conflict explodes wide open and the onslaught of tie-ins is about to begin, readers will be able to judge if this is the swan song the Incredible Hercules saga truly deserves.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Chaos War #4
December 15, 2010
|
|
There is some fun to be had, at least. Amadeus Cho displays the evolution of character Herc isn't, and his scenes are among the highlights of the issue. The Chaos King's dialogue is also enjoyable. It's surprising how much can be communicated via haiku when the story calls for it. The art is also strong despite the fairly quiet nature of the issue. Khoi Pham's pencils are more clean and restrained than they have been on past projects. However, Pham falters when depicting a certain character's transformation late in the story. Visually, the character shows no sign of having changed, and it hinders the effect somewhat. Thematically, Greg Pak and Fred Van Lente are on the right track with this story. They just can't seem to execute in terms of pacing or characters.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Chin Music |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Chin Music #1
May 8, 2013
|
|
Luckily, the tone of the story is enough to build interest. And Tony Harris art really shines throughout. This is exactly the sort of Harris I like to see. There's less emphasis on photo-reference and photo-realism than books like Ex Machina, even though several characters in this issue are based on historical figures. Harris opts for a more stylized approach to his figure work, one that emphasizes the noir-infused visuals and the dynamic action of the Egypt flashbacks. His page layouts are also a feast for the eyes. The issue is easily worth a purchase for the art alone. But from what little Niles' writing reveals and the big twist ending, there's more than just the art convincing me to return for issue #2.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Chin Music #2
August 21, 2013
|
|
The first issue offered up a strong premise that didn't completely come to life by the end. If the phrase "chin music" translates to "too much talk, not enough action" then issue #1 had the opposite problem. Issue #2 makes some inroads as far as reconciling that problem. Art begins to diverge wildly from history as Elliot Ness is faced with the brutal and apparently superhuman murder of Al Capone, as well as a person of interest with amazing regenerative powers. There's the sense that writer Steve Niles has still barely started to pull back the curtain of what this book has to offer, but as with the first issue, there's enough here to hold my interest for the time being. Even if it takes another three or four months for the next issue to arrive.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Chrononauts #3 |
May 14, 2015
show
|
|
Leave it to Mark Millar and Sean Murphy to make time travel fun and exciting again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cinderella: From Fabletown With Love |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Cinderella: From Fabletown With Love #2
December 3, 2009
|
|
So far, Cinderella is a bit more shallow and familiar than I would have liked, but I'm still having a good time. And luckily, Roberson still has plenty of time to veer in unfamiliar directions and give Cindy the wild, fantastical romp she truly deserves.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cinderella: From Fabletown With Love #3
January 6, 2010
|
|
I'm coming to like Shawn McManus' artwork more and more as the series progresses. McManus' art has an energy that suits the adventure and intrigue of Cindy's world. Issue #3 is probably the best we've seen from McManus so far. In all areas, this series only seems to be getting better. I just hope that the disparate threads of Cindy and Mr. Cordwainer begin to intertwine as the book moves towards its conclusion.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cinderella: From Fabletown With Love #6
April 7, 2010
|
|
In the end, Cinderella: From Fabletown With Love does exactly what it set out to do. It entertained me and left me wishing for more Cinderella stories. If a butthead like Jack can support an ongoing series for so long, why is Cindy left to slim pickings like this? Given the challenges the Fables face in the main series now, I sincerely hope we'll see her doing what she does best soon.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Civil War #2 |
Aug 06, 2015
show
|
|
Like the original story, Civil War is a great idea that isn't entirely successful in its execution. The new series doesn't do nearly enough to flesh out its world or move the plot forward. Even so, the appeal of seeing the Avengers split by a philosophical divide is as strong as ever.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Civil War II |
10 issues
show
|
|
|
Civil War II #0
May 18, 2016
|
|
Between the lackluster FCBD Special and Marvel's general track record with major crossovers, there's plenty of reason to worry about Civil War II. But the good news is that this prologue issue makes a strong case for the upcoming event. It clearly lays out the brewing conflict and makes a strong case for both viewpoints. It also looks great, offering a brief but enjoyable reunion between Brian Bendis and Olivier Coipel. Hopefully this issue, more than the FCBD Special, is a sign of what to expect from Civil War II as a whole.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Civil War II #1
June 1, 2016
|
|
As far as Marvel events go, Civil War II is shaping up to be neither the publisher's worst nor its most impressive effort. This first issue cleanly establishes the conflict and delivers a nonstop stream of gorgeous artwork. However, it offers few surprises for those not already familiar with the basics of this crossover, and it often fails to elicit a strong emotional response in the way the first issue of Civil War did ten years ago. The excitement factor simply isn't there right now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Civil War II #2
June 16, 2016
|
|
Given that this is technically the fourth Civil War II comic Bendis has written now, it's disappointing that the story is still in such a nascent stage. This isn't a civil war so much as "Everybody is mad at Tony Stark." Tony's characterization is sound, and the visuals in this book are downright fantastic, but those qualities aren't enough to give this Civil War sequel the spark it needs.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Civil War II #3
July 13, 2016
|
|
Civil War II looks every bit as good as you'd expect from Marvel's flagship event comic. Unfortunately, this series doesn't have nearly enough to offer beneath that gorgeous exterior. There's too much dialogue and exposition and not enough progress or dramatic weight to the story. Civil War II is exploring some interesting ideas, but it's going to have to do more than that over the remaining four chapters.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Civil War II #4
July 27, 2016
|
|
Civil War II #4 makes some clear improvements to a very flawed mini-series. The pacing is quicker in this chapter, and the dialogue problems that hindered issue #3 are mostly eliminated. And it goes without saying that the series continues to look gorgeous. Unfortunately, the series is still struggling when it comes to characterization. Civil War II is reminiscent of its predecessor in the sense that too much character development is happening in the tie-in books rather than the main series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Civil War II #5
September 21, 2016
|
|
Civil War II has had its moments over the past few months. And at the very least, the series has always had its gorgeous visuals to rely upon. But at this point, that's not enough. This issue fixates on an extended superhero brawl that lacks dramatic weight (or even narrative logic) before transitioning into a very disappointing twist that threatens to derail the series for good. It may be too late in the game to hope for things to turn around now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Civil War II #6
October 26, 2016
|
|
Civil War II has had trouble building momentum from the beginning, and this issue does nothing to address that problem. There are some strong emotional moments here, and plenty of stunning artwork from Marquez and Ponsor, but the sluggish pace and generally listless nature of the conflict continue to frustrate.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Civil War II #7
November 23, 2016
|
|
Issue #7 is easily one of the stronger chapters of Civil War II. That doesn't say a great deal at this point, but it is still nice to see Bendis focusing on a smaller, more intimate cast here. The complications in terms of Ulysses' role in the conflict are also welcome. And it's hard to say no to a comic featuring both David Marquez and Andrea Sorrentino on art. There's hope that Civil War II can at least end on a solid note.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Civil War II #8
December 28, 2016
|
|
Civil War II ends with what is easily one of the weakest chapters of the entire crossover. This issue is anticlimactic and fails to wring much emotion from the final battle between Captain Marvel and Iron Man. Nor does it justify the decision to expand the series. David Marquez's art helps make the book a little more palatable, but there's only so much great art can do to salvage a poorly conceived comic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Civil War II: The Oath #1
January 25, 2017
|
|
Civil War II: The Oath isn't quite as strong as its predecessor, mainly because it focuses too much attention on setting wheels in motion. Still, it succeeds for the same reasons. It offers an emotionally charged, character-focused epilogue to an event that could have used more of both qualities.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Civil War II: Amazing Spider-Man |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Civil War II: Amazing Spider-Man #1
June 8, 2016
|
|
Regardless of how the main Civil War II series fares, it seems we can expect some solid tie-ins from Marvel's latest big crossover. Civil War II: Amazing Spider-Man #1 looks and reads like a logical extension of both Civil War II and the ongoing Amazing Spider-Man comic. Best of all, it works as an enjoyable Spider-Man adventure even if you have no interest in Civil War II.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Civil War II: Choosing Sides #1 |
Jun 23, 2016
show
|
|
Marvel fans could certainly do worse if they crave an anthology adventure, but hopefully future chapters will delve a little deeper into the main conflict.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Civil War II: Kingpin #1 |
Jul 07, 2016
show
|
|
Matthew Rosenberg paints a compelling portrait of Wilson Fisk as he settles back into New York and finds a way to take advantage of the city's power vacuum while evading the all-seeing eye of Ulysses.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Civil War II: X-Men |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Civil War II: X-Men #1
June 15, 2016
|
|
On paper, this mini-series sounded the most promising of all the Civil War II tie-ins. Unfortunately, this opening chapter does little to realize the potential of this conflict between mutants and Inhumans. And with only three issues remaining, it's not clear if there's going to be enough room to do the conflict justice.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Civil War II: X-Men #2
July 7, 2016
|
|
With this mini-series now half over, it's becoming clear that Civil War II: X-Men isn't actually going to deliver the massive X-Men/Inhumans conflict that readers have been waiting for. It reads more like a prelude to something bigger, with a surprisingly sluggish sense of pacing for a book that numbers only four issues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Civil War: House of M |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Civil War: House of M #1
September 10, 2008
|
|
Ultimately, the very title of this series seems to betray Marvel's own lack of faith in it. House of M is supposed to be the main title, not the subtitle. Perhaps Civil War has more brand recognition, but if the House of M name can't sell books any longer, then maybe this project was ill-advised from the start.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Civil War: House of M #2
October 1, 2008
|
|
An extra benefit of a quick end to Civil War: House of M would be the freedom for Andrea Di Vito to move onto other projects. I enjoy his work a great deal. Di Vito is an expert at laying out action sequences and all the hallmarks of the traditional superhero comic. Unfortunately, this book doesn't really call for that traditional look. Though I had problems with the execution of Mike Perkins' art in the previous House spinoff, that darker, grittier tone is really what this series needs. Civil War: House of M needs something to set it apart, in any case. So far, it's a passable but uninteresting return to a universe that would be better off left alone for a while.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Civil War: House of M #3
November 5, 2008
|
|
The art is similarly torn between the good and the bad. At times Andrea Di Vito's work is almost maddeningly bright and cheerful. It conflicts with the tone of the book, and I truly wish Mike Perkins were available to continue his work from last year's House of M: Avengers. Di Vito moves from being a liability to an asset during the many battle sequences. In the sense that both are weighed down by some pretty serious flaws, the writing and art are two peas in a pod. This series will likely never break from mediocrity, but even mediocre books can have something to offer readers who are willing to put up with the lousier aspects for a while.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Clandestine |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Clandestine #1
February 6, 2008
|
|
Given that this is a fairly slow week for Marvel, there is little excuse for not throwing this issue onto your weekly pile. If you're anything like me, you could always use another pleasant surprise in your reading list.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Clandestine #2
March 5, 2008
|
|
There's little point in me even reviewing this book going forward. If you've started reading Clandestine, you should know by the end of this issue whether you want to keep reading. If you haven't started yet, don't even bother.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Clive Barker's Seduth 3D Review #1 |
Oct 14, 2009
show
|
|
Seduth 3D is a largely nonsensical story bolstered by some captivating imagery. I simply don't feel there needed to have been such a large trade-off. This issue may be worth a look for curious readers and 3D fans, but keep in mind that this issue costs a full $5.99. Considering its standard length and the fact that Superman Beyond offered more content for less money, that's a hard pill to swallow. Still, I'll be interested to see if lessons are learned and improvements made for Barker's next 3D endeavor.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Clue #1 |
Jun 29, 2017
show
|
|
Clue is a comedic, character-driven and very self-aware series that should appeal to anyone who adores the cult classic 1985 film.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Colder: Toss The Bones #1 |
Sep 30, 2015
show
|
|
This issue is a disturbing, violent but darkly entertaining look at Nimble Jack as he bounces between worlds and wreaks all manner of havoc on innocent civilians.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Conan the Barbarian |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Conan the Barbarian #1
February 8, 2012
|
|
The book deftly straddles the lien between adhering to the tone of previous comics but also reflecting Wood's own voice and storytelling sensibilities. Wood lends the story a surreal, dreamlike quality as Conan becomes enraptured with the legend of Blit. So even if the characters have yet to meet face to face yet, it's already abundantly clear that Wood and Cloonan are building a quality adaptation of a landmark tale.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Conan the Barbarian #2
March 14, 2012
|
|
It's abundantly clear now that a new team and new series were just what the Conan franchise needed. Wood and Cloonan are offering a different sort of Conan that should appeal to fans and newcomers equally well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Conan the Barbarian #3
April 11, 2012
|
|
The creative team have done a fantastic job so far. The question is whether Conan the Barbarian will lose any momentum as it takes on a new artist and begins exploring less familiar territory and expanding the original story. So far, Wood has given no reason to doubt him.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Conan the Barbarian #4
May 16, 2012
|
|
More worrisome than the new story material was the departure of artist Becky Cloonan. Luckily, James Harren proves to be a very capable replacement. Harren's style falls in line with Cloonan's in terms of offering a more down-to-earth, organic take on the Hyborian Age. However, his figures are more rough-hewn and textured, creating a more sinister tone that suits the growing conflict in Argos. Picture Conan by way of BPRD. What's not to love about that?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Conan the Barbarian #5
June 13, 2012
|
|
This new series is managing to deliver on every level a proper Conan book needs to. It faithfully replicates the tone and style of what is arguably Howard's greatest tale of the Hyborian Age while also boldly charting new territory and daring to push Conan in new and unfamiliar directions. And regardless of whether Cloonan or Harren are at the helm, this might just be the best-looking Conan series Dark Horse has published.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Conan The Barbarian #1 |
Jan 02, 2019
show
|
|
Conan the Barbarian #1 swerves as a mighty debut for the character as he returns to Marvel Comics.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Conan the Cimmerian |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Conan the Cimmerian #1
July 16, 2008
|
|
It's not off to the greatest start, but Conan the Cimmerian succeeds on the same strengths all recent Conan comics have. It may not draw in many new readers, but long time fans won't be too disappointed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Conan the Cimmerian #2
August 20, 2008
|
|
I also wish I could have seen more of Tomas Giorello in these past issues. Giorello has filled in for former headliner Cary Nord better than I could have expected. I hate to see him relegated to a few pages a month. Hopefully future issues will change that. This story has cemented a new direction for Conan, and I'm eager to see where the creative team takes our favorite Cimmerian next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Conan the Cimmerian #4
October 15, 2008
|
|
It's hard to deny the core appeal of Conan, no matter what the pace of his stories may be. Even with relatively disappointing issues like this, Truman proves himself a more than capable Conan writer. I'm just feeling let down because the book is beginning to lag just as it should be firing on all cylinders. The creative team has the potential to make Conan the Cimmerian the crown jewel of dark Horse's lineup. All the book needs is a quick kick in the loincloth.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Conan: Road of Kings #1 |
Dec 31, 1969
show
|
|
Road of Kings is a worthy read for Conan fans so far, but it needs to try a little harder to distinguish itself in the future.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Conan: The Avenger #1 |
Apr 24, 2014
show
|
|
Long-term readers should have little trouble transitioning into the new series, while newcomers will find this an easy gateway into Conan's world.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Conan: The Slayer #1 |
Jul 14, 2016
show
|
|
|
|
|
Constantine (2013) |
8 issues
show
|
|
|
Constantine #3
May 8, 2013
|
|
Renato Guedes enjoys his strongest issue yet, thanks largely to the hellish setting and the various opportunities to explore the DCU's magical trappings. The storytelling is generally solid, though Guedes' continued insistence on exaggerated, titled perspective in many panels often proves distracting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Constantine #5
July 24, 2013
|
|
By the end of this brief tie-in, the battle wraps up and the two characters go their separate ways. Ray Fawkes sets up the next storyline for this series, certainly, but there's little tangible impact on Trinity War. What was the point of even pairing these two together in the first place? As such, it's hard to recommend this issue to readers who aren't already following the series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Constantine #6
August 14, 2013
|
|
Renato Guedes' art is eye-catching enough, if not always as consistent as it could be. Again, the barroom scenes tend to stand out the most thanks to the way Guedes frames each panel and his dynamic angles. Disappointingly, the astral plane material is comparatively flat and dull. But colorist Marcelo Maiolo deserves credit for lending a vibrant, eerie shine to every scene.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Constantine #11
February 12, 2014
|
|
As with the previous tie-ins to Blight, Aco illustrates this issue. In some ways, Aco's style is very reminiscent of Mikel Janin's on Justice League Dark. The thick blacks and twisted designs paint this as very much a supernatural book in addition to a superhero one. But the line-work lacks some of Janin's careful confidence, and the facial expressions can be wonky at times. Luckily, Brad Anderson's colors do a fine job of capturing all the mystical energies and hallucinations being tossed about.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Constantine #14
May 15, 2014
|
|
The issue has a cool, creepy vibe to it, though the art isn't always 100% successful at channeling it. Ray Fawkes also takes the opportunity to flesh out John's New 52 origin a bit more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Constantine #21
January 15, 2015
|
|
Jeremy Haun's art helps in this regard as well. Haun brings an angular, gritty vibe to the series that emphasizes the seedy, supernatural side of Constantine's struggles.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Constantine #22
February 12, 2015
|
|
Haun's work is fairly loose and haphazard compared to recent DC efforts, though the way he visualizes Constantine and Darkseid's war of wills is very effective.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Constantine: The Hellblazer |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Constantine: The Hellblazer #10
March 10, 2016
|
|
This issue amps up the drama as more of Constantine's mistakes come back to haunt him and the tension builds. Unfortunately, the book isn't quite the same without Riley Rossmo's distinctive style.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Constantine: The Hellblazer #12
May 12, 2016
|
|
This series is just one more victim of the game of artistic musical chairs that's been going on at DC leading into Rebirth. Constantine: The Hellblazer has largely succeeded in marrying the gritty tone of the classic Hellblazer comic with the New 52 take on John Constantine, and much of that balance was due to the surreal art style and impeccably rendered page layouts of artists like Riley Rossmo. But as the series reaches its climax, it's sadly lost a great deal of that distinctive visual flavor.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Convergence |
9 issues
show
|
|
|
Convergence #0
April 2, 2015
|
|
Convergence #0 isn't quite the epic start this event needed. Visually, this issue definitely does the trick, allowing Van Sciver to tackle classical DC heroes and settings for a change. But apart from the neat depiction of Brainiac, the story in this issue simply isn't that engaging. Superman stands out like a sore thumb, and the script doesn't even establish the premise as well as DC's various marketing materials did. Hopefully this issue isn't too indicative of what to expect from the main series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Convergence #1
April 9, 2015
|
|
Two weeks in, and Convergence is still struggling to move past the setup phase and develop a compelling conflict. This is a story where the characters and the combinations of alternate worlds are the driving force rather than plot. The early scenes in this issue are proof enough of that. Hopefully this event will capitalize more on that quality as it moves forward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Convergence #2
April 15, 2015
|
|
Convergence is finally picking up some steam in its third chapter, but this event still has a ways to go before it truly satisfies. Despite Pagulayan's eye-pleasing visuals and the generally improved pacing, this issue stumbles through a lot of pointless narration and an underwhelming first battle with Telos. King really needs to take a "less is more" approach if this book is going to live up to its potential.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Convergence #3
April 23, 2015
|
|
Convergence is getting worse, not better, as it continues trudging along. There's ample potential in this story, particularly in its focus on the Thomas Wayne/Dick Grayson dynamic, but that potential is rarely fulfilled. The series suffers from both clunky dialogue and a general lack of excitement. Now even the art quality isn't a strength. Is there any hope at this point that this series can rebound?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Convergence #4
April 29, 2015
|
|
Convergence isn't seeing much in the way of net gain as it reaches the halfway mark. This issue picks up the pace and fleshes out the lead villain, but the series is still mired in poor dialogue and characterization. Meanwhile, the visual quality only worsens with so many inkers handling one issue. Things aren't looking bright for the series in Month 2.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Convergence #5
May 6, 2015
|
|
Convergence continues to suffer from the same flaws that have dogged the series from the beginning. And while the art boost is appreciated and the ending holds new potential, there's little hope that things will truly improve in the final few weeks of this event.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Convergence #6
May 14, 2015
|
|
Convergence #6 finally shows the series living up to its potential in terms of offering a big, loud, superhero epic. The inconsistent artwork is a drag at times, but now there's hope this book can at least finish strong after a weak first half.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Convergence #7
May 21, 2015
|
|
It's nice to see Convergence actually picking up steam this late in the game. The lack of a good villain is dampening the book's appeal, but at least the scale of the conflict and the cast of characters is where it needed to be all along. Lopresti also delivers a solid set of pages for this issue, albeit some riddled with art and continuity errors.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Convergence #8
May 27, 2015
|
|
Convergence had been picking up steam in recent issues, so it's disappointing to see the series stumble again at the finish line. This issue wastes too much energy on dialogue and exposition and neglects to actually show readers the imminent danger threatening the multiverse. The good news is that it does offer a happy ending for the various characters involved, while leaving the door open for what will hopefully be a more varied and cohesive DC Universe.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Convergence: Action Comics #2 |
May 27, 2015
show
|
|
This issue also suffers from the fact that it doesn't reach a satisfying conclusion. It merely sets the stage for the characters to appear in the core Convergence mini-series and ends abruptly. Had this book maintained a clearer focus and a more standalone storyline, it could have been something special.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Convergence: Batman and the Outsiders #1 |
Apr 23, 2015
show
|
|
Carlos D'Anda was a bit of a strange choice to illustrate this comic. It's not that he does a bad job by any means. His bombastic style brings a palpable sense of energy to what ends up being one of the quieter Convergence tie-ins. It's just that nothing about this issue's art style recalls the Outsiders in their pre-Crisis era (wacky costumes notwithstanding). Visually, this could just as easily be set in the contemporary DCU.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Convergence: Blue Beetle |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Convergence: Blue Beetle #1
April 30, 2015
|
|
Like most Convergence tie-ins, this issue suffers from the need to tie into the main event and all the formulaic drudgery that results, but fans of these characters should still seek out this issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Convergence: Blue Beetle #2
May 28, 2015
|
|
This series has proven to be one of the more pleasant surprises of the Convergence lineup. If anything, Blue Beetle only gets better in its second issue now that Scott Lobdell has moved past the formulaic setup phase and can focus on the battle for the fate of Hub City.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Convergence: Booster Gold #2 |
May 28, 2015
show
|
|
Convergence: Booster Gold isn't a bad story when it focuses on the title character and his relationship with Blue Beetle. Unfortunately, that isn't always the case. Too often Dan Jurgens busies himself with tying this issue into previous Booster-centric material or setting the stage for certain events in Convergence #8.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Convergence: Crime Syndicate #2 |
May 28, 2015
show
|
|
Though this series features one of the more promising creative teams among the Convergence lineup, it hasn't really lived up to its potential.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Convergence: Harley Quinn |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Convergence: Harley Quinn #1
April 8, 2015
|
|
The good news is that Phil Winslade's art is a good match for the story. Winslade channels the zany energy of Harley's antics and the various colorful hallucinations that plague her troubled mind. At the same time, there's a very down-to-earth, subdued quality to these pages that plays well with the more low-key approach to story. However, the action becomes a little stiff once Catwoman and Ivy enter the fray, and that does nothing to help the disappointment that comes when the story shifts gears.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Convergence: Harley Quinn #2
May 6, 2015
|
|
It's just unfortunate that the issue can't transition back into Harley's personal life more smoothly. By the time Harley's battle with Captain Carrot is over, there's precious little time to wrap up her doomed romance and tie up loose ends. The transition is awkward and the ending abrupt. Even so, there's a sense of tragedy to the way things play out that is appreciated. And even if the script can't quite blend these two elements together, artist Phil Winslade offers a sense of unity. He channels all the hyper-kinetic vibe of Harley's fight while also nailing the more subtle emotions at work in the quieter scenes. Had this series been given more than two meager issues to grow and flourish, it really could have been something.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Convergence: Hawkman #1 |
Apr 23, 2015
show
|
|
Hawkman #1 is a gem among this week's decidedly mixed crop of Convergence comics. Parker is able to capture all the charm and adventure of the hero's pre-Crisis past
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Convergence: Justice League #1 |
Apr 08, 2015
show
|
|
Vicente Cifuentes' art is solid as well. Certain smaller panels and background figures are a bit lacking in detail, but for the most part Cifuentes brings a vibrant and expressive look to the heroines and their surroundings. The fact that the characters spend most of this issue in civilian attire does nothing to diminish the book's energy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Convergence: Justice League Of America #1 |
Apr 23, 2015
show
|
|
It's pretty rare to see ChrisCross tackle a new DC project, so his art is also a selling point in this issue. Between his bold, detailed figures and dynamic angles, he brings a very slick look to this series. The fight scene with the Secret Six really pops. And unlike Carlos D'Anda's work in Batman and the Outsiders, it's not a style that works against the retro throwback era. That said, some of ChrisCross' facial work can get pretty wonky, especially when the use of photo-reference becomes more noticeable. Zatanna's "I just swallowed a lemon" face is an especially blatant example.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Convergence: Shazam #2 |
May 28, 2015
show
|
|
Jeff Parker offers a fun battle between Captain Marvel and Gotham by Gaslight's Batman, one that quickly turns into an unlikely team-up as the two heroes confront their true foe. This pairing works well precisely because the two characters and their cities contrast so deeply.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Convergence: Swamp Thing #1 |
Apr 23, 2015
show
|
|
But again, Jones' art is a real treat. As always, he brings a real Gothic horror vibe to every page, with exaggerated, almost grotesque figures and heavy shadows blanketing everything. He proves he still has the right touch when it comes to offering vampirized renditions of Batman's villains as well. Issue 32 is shaping up to be even better as the battle really gets underway.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Convergence: Wonder Woman #1 |
Apr 23, 2015
show
|
|
This issue showcases Wonder Woman from one of the more unusual stages of her career, when she was a powerless secret agent in a slick white jumpsuit. Unfortunately, it does little to really capitalize on that era and its trappings.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cosmo #1 |
Jan 04, 2018
show
|
|
There's nothing groundbreaking or remarkable about Cosmo #1. It's just a fun, silly, low-stakes book about a group of Martian heroes taking a bumbling human astronaut under their wing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Countdown to Final Crisis |
16 issues
show
|
|
|
Countdown to Final Crisis #1
April 23, 2008
|
|
At this point, I'm very glad Grant Morrison is doing such a stellar job of pitching Final Crisis to his readers. This botched weekly series has failed over and over to do anything of the sort. Here at the end, it gives almost no indication that a Crisis is brewing in the first place. With 12 months of boredom leading up to a fizzling payoff and no tangible connection to what will likely be DC's biggest book in many years, I can only say that Countdown has proved itself a failure on nearly every front. I hate to say it, but I'm glad I won't have a weekly DC book to look forward to over the next couple months. I need a break.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Countdown to Final Crisis #2
April 16, 2008
|
|
Praise Darkseid this bloated whale of a book is almost done. I still don't know precisely what Countdown is actually counting down towards, and I really, truly don't care. The end of this book means the beginning of far more interesting projects at DC. Hopefully once Final Crisis and Trinity kick off I can look back on this series and chuckle. Maybe while I use every issue to fuel a bonfire and dance around it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Countdown to Final Crisis #3
April 9, 2008
|
|
I was somewhat impressed by the art, at least. On the whole, Countdown has managed to outdo 52 in the art category on a semi-consistent basis. At his best Freddie Williams II manages to evoke Ed McGuinness' bombastic work. The rest of the time, characters randomly develop over-sized heads and clench their teeth far too much. I guess I'd clench my teeth constantly if I were trapped in a book as bad as this. When you consider that just one year ago 52 was delivering the big World War III climax, this is just pathetic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Countdown to Final Crisis #11
February 13, 2008
|
|
Like most issues in recent months, I can find neither anything to commend or to complain about as far as the art is concerned. The overall look of the series is vastly improved over the early months, and I think it's jst one more sign that DC has finally decided to give Countdown the editorial and artistic attention it deserves. Bring on the next issue, guys. I want to know what happens next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Countdown to Final Crisis #13
January 30, 2008
|
|
The rest of the issue is well worth the price of admission. Jason Todd is quickly becoming an interesting character after his recent metamorphosis, and I'm left wondering just what the DC higher-ups have planned for him after Countdown. We also enjoy another glimpse of Darkseid's grand scheme, followed by the promise that future issues will deliver much more in the way of answers. Once again, at no point do the more boring elements and characters of the series rear their heads. These other plotlines haven't all been resolved yet, but I'd gladly have them fall by the wayside if it means the remaining three months of Countdown can be as good as these past two weeks.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Countdown to Final Crisis #14
January 23, 2008
|
|
Can future weeks get even better? It's quite possible, but I won't get my hopes up too high. As I said before, the optimism I felt way back at the beginning has long since drained away, and even a huge improvement like Week 14 won't earn the Countdown writers and extra slack.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Countdown to Final Crisis #15
January 16, 2008
|
|
Countdown only moves in one direction for so long before an errant storyline returns from the depths of obscurity again. This week, we're reminded that Karate Kid, Una, and the original OMAC still have a mission to accomplish in Bludhaven. How long is it going to take them exactly? This particular storyline isn't necessarily uninteresting either. I just hope the writers wrap it up before it manages to bleed into Final Crisis. It's becoming obvious now that the various Countdown storylines are shaping up to converge in something very derivative of Infinite Crisis. For whatever amount of quality I've come to expect from Countdown, I'd still rather have as little of it touch Grant Morrison's upcoming story as possible.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Countdown to Final Crisis #18
December 26, 2007
|
|
As is increasingly common in recent weeks, the art manages to impress. Scott Kolins stops in for a guest stint, and his new, improved style works quite well with the overall story. I'm starting to believe that Countdown's one, true advantage over 52 when both completed series are held together will be its generally superior art. I miss the older weekly series, but it was kind of a fugly book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Countdown to Final Crisis #21
December 5, 2007
|
|
The issue gets much worse once the focus shifts to the Holly/Harley and Karate Kid threads. The former has always been among Countdown's worst, and there's no saving it this late in the game. The latter hasn't been that bad, though it was a little off-putting that the writers resumed the story from the exact point where they left off a month ago. There's something to be said for 52's strict timeline. My real problem, though, was a cliffhanger that manages to push Countdown into even more directions I wish it wouldn't go. If this is what happens when the plan starts to come together, I don't want any part of it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Countdown to Final Crisis #22
November 28, 2007
|
|
I don't even feel like delving into the rest of the issue. It'll only make you depressed, particularly if you're a Flash fan. Or a Superman fan. Or a Fourth World fan. Heck, if you like good stories in general you'll more than likely find this series increasingly offensive. With Grant Morrison recently stating in no uncertain terms that Final Crisis can be read and enjoyed with no Countdown experience, I see little reason to keep trudging through it every week. I only do it because it's my job, and one of these weeks it might just force me to quit.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Countdown to Final Crisis #24
November 14, 2007
|
|
Little room is left for any other threads this week, and it's not surprising that there are few new or interesting developments in the respective journeys of Karate Kid et al. or the Challengers. This issue offers very little apart from an insipidly annoying Superman and a fairly major spoiler for The Sinestro Corps War. Even if you've followed Countdown from the beginning, I have to urge you to stay far, far away this week.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Countdown to Final Crisis #25
November 7, 2007
|
|
And hey, the book doesn't offend the eyes this week! Coming off a relative high point thanks to Scott Kolins last week, the trend continues with Ron Lim's pencils. Lim won't blow your mind with epic page layouts or intricately detailed figures, but his characters are surprisingly expressive, especially during the requisite goofball sequence featuring Trickster and Pied Piper. Every so often it's nice to have a reminder that the Countdown crew is capable of firing on more than a few cylinders and delivering a reasonably enjoyable reading experience.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Countdown to Final Crisis #26
October 31, 2007
|
|
If the writing is only marginally improved this week, at least the art takes a massive leap forward. I never thought I'd champion the arrival of Scott Kolins on a series, but I am. Besides, his style has improved immensely in the last six months or so. The bright, flashy colors and thick, black lines are well-suited for a book that would never be mistaken for taking place in a realistic universe. I just have a feeling I'll be missing Kolins next week. We probably won't have someone of his caliber on art duties until DC decides to change the name of the series to Countdown Until Our Fans Give a Damn or something.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Countdown #27
October 24, 2007
|
|
And DC, please reconsider giving Carlos Magno more work on this series. It's entirely possible Magno is capable of good work when not forced to draw at a frantic pace, but when he shows up every four weeks like clockwork my eyes just can't stand it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Countdown #29
October 10, 2007
|
|
Manuel Garcia returns to pencil this issue. Outside of the random contribution from bigger names like Dennis Calero, I've never much cared for art quality in Countdown. This isn't the worst product we've seen from Garcia in the past couple months, so I guess that's enough to leave me relatively satisfied. Emphasis on relatively.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cover #1 |
Sep 05, 2018
show
|
|
Brian Bendis' strong track record at DC Comics continues with the debut of Cover. The premise of this new series is fun, but it' really the strong visual presentation and finely rendered characters that gives the book its flavor. This comic doesn't read like anything else Bendis is currently writing, and that's a good thing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cowboy Ninja Viking #4 |
Feb 24, 2010
show
|
|
Riley Rossmo's art seems to have improved, at least. Rossmo hasn't necessarily stuck to a rigid style anyway, but here he seems to have a greater stylistic shift than usual. The rough, sketchy quality is diminished. In its place are bolder lines and a more refined sense of page design. Even the color washes are richer and more pronounced. These changes are all for the better, as far as I'm concerned. Cowboy Ninja Viking manages to retain its subversive tone while also telling a more coherent visual story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Criminal: The Last of the Innocent |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Criminal: The Last of the Innocent #1
May 31, 2011
|
|
It's too early to tell how The Last of the Innocent will compare to past Criminal stories, but it is clear this tale has potential to outshine them all. Criminal was sometimes guilty of wearing its influences on its sleeve early on. But with this new series, Brubaker and his team are showing themselves to be highly inventive crime storytellers. The least readers can do is make a point of giving The Last of the Innocent a chance in a week when Flashpoint and Fear Itself threaten to bury everything else on the shelves.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Criminal: The Last of the Innocent #2
July 27, 2011
|
|
Brubaker and Phillips are pushing themselves to tell a very different type of Criminal story arc here, and the results are excellent. Whether you've been following the series from the beginning or have never picked up a Criminal book, make a point of adding Last of the Innocent to your stack.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Crosswind |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Crosswind #1
June 22, 2017
|
|
This is definitely an issue that demands multiple readings to be fully appreciated. The first time around, the narrative feels a bit jumbled, as it's not at all clear how the two plot threads and their respective protagonists are connected. But once this issue establishes its Freaky Friday-esque twist, the pieces click into place.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Crosswind #2
July 27, 2017
|
|
At its core, the Freaky Friday-esque premise of this series is pretty straightforward. It's really the execution where Crosswind stands out and finds its voice.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cry Havoc #1 |
Jan 28, 2016
show
|
|
If you're a fan of Spurrier's distinctive voice and Kelly's artwork, this issue will hook you almost immediately.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cryptocracy #1 |
Jun 29, 2016
show
|
|
Cryptocracy is hardly the first comic to make the mistake of prioritizing world-building and exposition over providing a clean, easy gateway for readers. Even so, this issue showcases an interesting, complex new sci-i universe, one that clearly won't be guilty of taking itself too seriously. That certainly warrants sticking with the book for now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cuba: My Revolution - HC Review #1 |
Sep 09, 2010
show
|
|
One disappointing flaw with this graphic novel is in how Lockpez chose to frame her story. Cuba: My Revolution essentially lacks a final act. The book ends with Sonya's exodus to America. The author bio in the dust jacket references Lockpez's career as an artist, feminist, and political protester after her arrival in America. I would have liked to see some of this career reflected in Sonya's story. Moreover, I would have liked the final pages of the book to offer some sort of reflection on Sonya's life. What did Sonya learn? How does the author/main character look back on these events 40 years later? I couldn't escape the nagging feeling that Sonya's story wasn't quite finished after turning the last page. Cuba: My Revolution is one of the more gripping stories I've read from Vertigo. I only wish it could have been a bit more fully realized in its climax.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cutter #1 |
Oct 02, 2014
show
|
|
Cutter features a lot of trappings of the slasher genre in general and movies like I Know What You Did Last Summer in particular. Unfortunately, there's not a lot of depth to the story beyond that.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cyborg |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Cyborg #1
July 22, 2015
|
|
Cyborg was long overdue for a solo series, but at least DC assembled the right creative team for this book. With some of DC's top artists bringing Cyborg to life and a promising writer delving into both Cyborg's superhero exploits and his search for his own lingering humanity, this first issue is a satisfying read that showcases plenty of potential ahead.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cyborg #2
August 27, 2015
|
|
Cyborg not only has the solo series he's long deserved, but a creative team able to do his story justice. The book is well worth reading solely for Ivan Reis' art.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cyborg #4
October 29, 2015
|
|
The series' visual quality takes an unfortunate hit. Ivan Reis only provides layouts this month, with Felipe Watanabe handling finishes. This at least helps the issue maintain cohesion in terms of page construction and general style. However, many of the finer details that characterize Reis' work - the intricate line-work, the subtle use of emotional and facial work - are greatly diminished.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cyborg #7
January 28, 2016
|
|
The latest issue of Cyborg comes across as pretty standard epilogue fare in the aftermath of David Walker's big Technosapiens storyline.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cyborg #8
February 25, 2016
|
|
The series also continues to thrive on the strength of David Walker's characterization. He's especially adept at capturing the playful banter between Cyborg and Shazam, to the point where this issue left me craving a team-up book featuring the duo.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cyborg (2016) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Cyborg #1
September 21, 2016
|
|
Any hope that Cyborg Rebirth #1 was a poor indicator of what to expect from the main series has been dashed. This new series bucks the familiar DC Rebirth trend by aiming darker instead of lighter, and it suffers as a result. The series needs an infusion of fun and a less heavy-handed approach to scripting if it's going to do justice to the character.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cyborg #3
October 20, 2016
|
|
This series is still struggling to deliver a compelling take on Vic Stone. The question of whether Vic is truly human or merely a digitized copy isn't as intriguing as it should be, with the book offering precious little reason to doubt what readers have long known to be true.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cyborg #6
December 8, 2016
|
|
In addition to the familiar problems involving wooden dialogue and characterization, this issue suffers from the forced nature of the Cyborg/Variant relationship. She's too similar to Cyborg, and the deep, immediate bond that forms between them is very sudden and unnatural. She simply doesn't come across as a natural character.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Cyborg #11
April 6, 2017
|
|
It's the execution that really drags the book down. John Semper bombards readers with an onslaught of expository narrative captions, all of which seek to chronicle exactly how Vic is thinking and feeling at any given moment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cyborg: Rebirth #1 |
Sep 07, 2016
show
|
|
Cyborg Rebirth #1 serves as a disappointing start for the new series. This bland issue focuses more on recapping the character's history than doing anything new with Vic Stone. And even the new elements feel a bit out of sync. Hopefully this is one of those cases where the Rebirth special is a poor indicator of the ongoing series' quality.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Cyclops #6 |
Oct 23, 2014
show
|
|
Losing Greg Rucka and Russell Dautermann is a blow, but John Layman and Javier Garron do a perfectly decent job of picking up where they left off.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Daken: Dark Wolverine (2010) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Daken: Dark Wolverine #1
September 9, 2010
|
|
It's difficult to judge whether Daken: Dark Wolverine will successfully address the flaws of its predecessor. For now, it does seem that this series carries the sense of purpose and importance Dark Wolverine lacked. Daken could be in store for a brighter future in the Heroic Age, even if he's no more heroic now than he ever was.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Daken: Dark Wolverine #2
October 13, 2010
|
|
Even Giuseppe Camuncoli shines brighter on this series. While we don't get to see Daken's new duds in action, Camuncoli does provide a great deal of eye-catching imagery, from a battle with a flame-spewing Wolverine to a sexually charged rendezvous with Mystique. Daken's adventures have never looked better. The Mystique/Daken pairing is an interesting one, and hopefully one that will continue to be explored beyond the confines of this arc. And even if the series remains a little too preoccupied with Daken's monologues and manipulations, it's still a very enjoyable read. Wolverine might not be having much fun in Hell these days, but his readers have plenty of reasons to celebrate.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Damage #1 |
Jan 17, 2018
show
|
|
Damage #1 is a less than auspicious way of launching "The New Age of DC Heroes." This issue tells a very straightforward tale that does nothing to set its title character apart from the classic Hulk or the many other character's he's inspired over the years. Fans of Daniel's art may be won over regardless, but there's little about this series that feels genuinely new or different right now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Damian: Son of Batman #1 |
Oct 30, 2013
show
|
|
But with Kubert drawing this book as well as writing, surely the art has to justify the purchase, right? Maybe, depending on how much you enjoy Kubert's style. This issue falls very closely in line with the tone and texture of his work on Morrison and Gaiman's Batman. That means sleek, angular figures, a seedy Gotham, and a strong focus on color and lighting. The best pages are those like the early double-page spread and the funeral sequence, where the figures are almost overpowered by the oppressive, textured environment of Gotham. But Kubert's pages too often suffer from wonky facial expressions, most notably the very first page of Damian staring agape. Less obtrusive but still annoying is the way that Batman is drawn in his 2006-era costume but colored in a halfhearted attempt to resemble the New 52 version. I don't know why anyone is bothering trying to convince readers that this story is unfolding in the New 52.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dante's Inferno |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Dante's Inferno #2
January 13, 2010
|
|
Still, I'm pleasantly surprised with how Dante's Inferno the comic is turning out. Gage manages as much as can be expected with some tricky source material. Were the art a little more structured and a little less abstract, this project could even rival Marvel's Halo comics for entertainment value.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Daredevil (1998) |
8 issues
show
|
|
|
Daredevil Annual #1
October 30, 2007
|
|
It's always nice to catch a glimpse of the quieter days in Matt Murdock's life, especially because even they aren't all that quiet. Like most of Marvel's annual issues, this book likely won't have any impact on the ongoing series, but fans of the character will be reasonably pleased with the result.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Daredevil #102
November 28, 2007
|
|
One area I never have any complaints about, however, is the art. Michael Lark is one of the best in the biz when it comes to blending superheroes and crime noir. It's nice to know that, even if Brubaker's writing goes completely off the deep end, I can cover up the word balloons and admire the pretty pictures. I don't think that will be a problem, though. I don't know if Daredevil will ever return to the level of quality we saw in 2002-06, but even at its worst the series is one of Marvel's better monthly books.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Daredevil #104
January 30, 2008
|
|
I can't complain too much in the end. Even if Daredevil isn't Brubaker's best work, it still blows the majority of current superhero series out of the water. One scene in particular - the confrontation between Daredevil and Ox - proves that Brubaker understands our hero and is willing to push him just as far as necessary to serve the story. I only wish I could stop waiting for the series to improve and just enjoy a quality DD yarn to rival Brubaker's Captain America work or Brian Michael Bendis' Daredevil stories. I know it's possible, and I feel like we're on the verge of something truly satisfying again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Daredevil #116
March 3, 2009
|
|
I haven't always loved Brubaker's DD run, but I think he's hit on something very special here. "Return of the King" is off to a rousing start. If this issue is any indication, we may be in for one of the finest Daredevil stories since the Frank Miller days.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Daredevil #119
June 24, 2009
|
|
This is just one more book where trade-waiters may have more fun than monthly readers. Having waited several weeks for this issue, and faced with the prospect of waiting several more for issue #500, I just don't feel totally satisfied with the penultimate chapter of "Return of the King". It was a solid story, but strangely subdued given how close to the end we are now. I just hope that, as a complete package, "Return of the King" will become the classic DD epic I know it can be.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Daredevil #509
August 11, 2010
|
|
The actual continuity sync with Shadowland is a bit dubious, but it's nice to see more from Foggy and Dakota, Luke Cage and Iron Fist, and some of the more neglected women in Matt's life. The writers pack in more of the Hand conspiracy as well, but that only reinforces my fears that Shadowland is headed for a lousy end. In better news, Roberto De La Torre continues his welcome return to the book with some effectively moody artwork. This arc reads as if it's making the best of a bad situation. In an ideal world, Shadowland will improve to the point where that's no longer necessary. We'll see what actually happens over these next few months.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Daredevil #512
December 2, 2010
|
|
The greatest attraction remains Marco Checchetto's artwork. Roberto de la Torre's absence is no longer felt, as Checchetto more than capably handles the same dark, noir-influenced style with a greater level of consistency. This isn't a bad issue by any means, but it suffers from the familiar and uneventful nature of most post-event epilogue books, and also from a series of hits and misses in terms of characterization. It's enough to make one wonder why we need both this issue and next week's Shadowland: After the Fall.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Daredevil (2014) |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Daredevil #5
July 10, 2014
|
|
It's a testament to Mark Waid and Chris Samnee's storytelling abilities that a comic involving Ant-Man zapping cancer cells and D-List villains chasing our heroes in giant, armored suits never loses sight of the simple, enduring friendship between Matt and Foggy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Daredevil #9
October 16, 2014
|
|
Waid's revamped take on Purple Man and his family is great too. But the real stars of the show, as usual, are artist Chris Samnee and colorist Matthew Wilson.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Daredevil #13
February 26, 2015
|
|
This issue is actually pretty charming in its exploration of the Matt Murdock/Kirsten McDuffie romance and the latter's insistence on living her own life and not being pegged simply as "Daredevil's Girlfriend."
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Daredevil #14
March 26, 2015
|
|
Even with all the good will Mark Waid has engendered with his Daredevil run, this issue might draw the ire of some readers. Matt's quest to be true to himself and live a life without secrecy is taken to a new extreme here as he dresses in a flamboyant red business suit and begins merging his activities as vigilante and lawyer.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Daredevil #15.1
May 21, 2015
|
|
This story starts off well enough but loses steam as it reaches a murky conclusion. At the very least, I would have liked to see a little more from the framing story - something that could have tied the whole issue together a little more. Still, this issue is well worth a read for fans of the current volume or more classic DD adventures.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Daredevil #18
September 2, 2015
|
|
This final issue has a few too many villains for its own good, which calls into question whether Kingpin should have been brought into the picture in the first place. But all that really matters is whether Waid and Samnee are able to wrap up the long, sad saga of Matt Murdock in a way that does justice to the character and remains true to the core of their run. And this issue doesn't disappoint in that regard.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Daredevil (2015) |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Daredevil #1
December 1, 2015
|
|
Daredevil remains in good hands as he finally passes from the previous creative team to Charles Soule and Ron Garney. The new series makes a strong first impression thanks to Garney's stylish visuals and some strong characterization from Soule. Certain elements of Matt Murdock's new status quo are a little disappointing, but it's also far too early to tell where this book is heading.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Daredevil #2
December 23, 2015
|
|
One of the many early successes of Charles Soule and Ron Garney's new Daredevil run is that they're building up a villain who shows strong potential to run with the greats. This issue is a proper showcase for Tenfingers, both in terms of the threat he poses to New York and the charisma he possesses that enables him to draw so many into his fold.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Daredevil #7
May 26, 2016
|
|
While now is the logical time to bring Elektra back into Daredevil's world, this current story arc is hardly guilty of regurgitating the same old tropes. Between the fact that Elektra no longer knows Daredevil's identity and the revelation that she may apparently has a daughter somewhere in the wide world, there's a lot of compelling material to chew on in this issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Daredevil #595
November 9, 2017
|
|
As far as new status quos go, having Daredevil confront a world where New Yorkers have just elected Wilson Fisk their mayor is pretty swell. It's essentially Dark Reign in microcosm. Unfortunately, this series doesn't immediately make the most of that premise as it enters Marvel legacy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Daredevil #1 |
Feb 06, 2019
show
|
|
Marvel's latest Daredevil comic is a must-read for anyone who likes their stories dark, beautiful and brooding.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Daredevil / Punisher #1 |
May 04, 2016
show
|
|
Fans of the Daredevil/Punisher rivalry will likely be entertained by this new series. It starts with a bang and doesn't let up as the two characters go to war over a hapless prisoner. But whether this series will explore their dynamic in greater depth or can add something new to the saga of Matt Murdock and Frank castle, that remains to be seen.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Daredevil: Season One #1 |
Apr 16, 2012
show
|
|
If a new reader wants to dive into Daredevil, it's difficult to recommend Season One as a starting point. Both Daredevil: Yellow and Daredevil: The Man Without Fear offer far superior takes on Matt Murdock's formative years within the span of a single trade paperback. Meanwhile, Mark Waid's current DD series (of which the first issue is included in this hardcover) is all most readers will need to fall in love with the character. That leaves Season One very low on the priority list.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dark Avengers |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Dark Avengers Annual #1
December 3, 2009
|
|
It can be difficult to accept how Marvel Boy has evolved in recent years. With the events of this issue, Bendis may have finally given the character the edge he needs to stand out from the pack. Unfortunately, the real benefits of that change won't be felt yet. This annual is ultimately a divisive, but not unenjoyable, look at an evolving hero.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Avengers #4
April 29, 2009
|
|
It's been a bit of a rough start for Dark Avengers. I'm still not convinced Bendis has a great handle on his cast of characters aside from Osborn and one or two others. But I can't deny I'm excited to see where the series moves from here. Bendis has plenty of potential to work with with these villains-turned-heroes. As long as he keeps Morgana Le Fay out of the picture, he just might do alright for himself.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Avengers #5
June 3, 2009
|
|
Dark Avengers is already quickly improving in its second storyline. Next month looks to ramp up the action again and hopefully shed some more light on the Sentry situation, both of which should hopefully bring about more improvement. I'm confident Bendis can close his first six issues with a bang rather than a fizzle, leaving the team in a solid spot when it comes time to call on the X-Men.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Avengers #10
October 21, 2009
|
|
The ending of this issue is especially interesting. It could either spell very intriguing possibilities for the future of Norman Osborn, or mean absolutely nothing at all. Whatever comes of this new development, I just hope we won't see Dark Avengers treading water for the final few months until Siege begins. The series is strong, but there is still room for improvement and expansion.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Avengers #14
February 17, 2010
|
|
While the story may have a plot hole or two, and while Deodato may prove to be his own worst enemy at times, I'm still enjoying Dark Avengers quite a bit right now. The book has come a long way in the past year. And whether or not this final story arc begins to tackle Siege more directly, I have no doubt Bendis and Deodato will finish on a high note.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dark Avengers/Uncanny X-Men: Exodus #1 |
Sep 10, 2009
show
|
|
In the end, Exodus brings the battle to a close and sets the stage for both "Nation X" and Dark Reign: The List. As I said, there aren't a whole lot of surprises to be had on either front. It remains to be seen how Fraction steers Uncanny from this point and whether he can truly make good on his promise to take the team in a direction they've never been before. But, if nothing else, Dark Avengers/Uncanny X-Men was a good start to what could be better times for the oldest and most uneven of X-books.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dark Corridor #1 |
Aug 06, 2015
show
|
|
Crime comics aren't hard to come by at Image these days. What sets Dark Corridor apart is the fact that it features two running stories and blends the structure and ensemble cast of a Tarantino film with a more down-to-earth, even whimsical storytelling sensibility. For the most part it works.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dark Days |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Dark Days: The Casting #1
July 12, 2017
|
|
While the abrupt visual transitions in this issue can be a little annoying, that's a minor concern compared to everything else Dark Days: The Casting does so well. This issue ably picks up where The Forge left off last month, further building excitement for DC's upcoming Batman event and creating all sorts of fascinating new connections in the DCU. This is exactly the sort of ambitious, epic conflict that makes a great event comic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Days: The Forge #1
June 14, 2017
|
|
Dark Nights: Metal just became the event comic to watch thanks to this prologue issue. Scott Snyder and James Tynion weave an engrossing story that manages to feel both adventurous and darkly foreboding. And while the visual tone of the issue isn't as consistent as it could be, it does feature memorable visuals from three of the biggest artists in DC's lineup. It's impossible not to be excited for Metal after this.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dark Gods #1 |
Oct 29, 2014
show
|
|
The one benefit of the Genesis sequences is that they bring a lush, mythical quality to the book that stands out far more than the plain, unremarkable style employed for the real-world scenes. It enhances the sensation of the mundane colliding with the larger-than-life, and this juxtaposition could be key in helping this series to find its voice.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dark Horse Presents #8 |
Feb 02, 2012
show
|
|
At $7.99, it's really hard to recommend this issue on the strength of The Massive alone, but there are just enough other solid works contained within to justify the price of entry.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dark Knight III: The Master Race |
7 issues
show
|
|
|
Dark Knight III: The Master Race #2
December 21, 2015
|
|
In some ways, The Dark Knight III doesn't quite capture the feel of its predecessors. It's less dense and frantic, losing some of Frank miller's angry passion and opting for a more controlled pace and precise visual style. But often it's the spots where this issue breaks the mold that it stands the most. The introspective look at the relationship between Carrie Kelly and her boss is a highlight, and both the main story and the mini-comic have moments of sheer visual delight.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Knight III: The Master Race #3
February 24, 2016
|
|
For whatever else can be said about The Dark Knight III: The Master Race #3, it's not a boring comic. This issue has its highs as it explores the bond between Bruce Wayne and Carrie Kelly and builds towards Batman's defiant stand against the Kandorians. But it also has its lows thanks to an unfocused narrative and the one-dimensional portrayal of its villains. At times The Dark Knight III doesn't even read much like a Batman story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Knight III: The Master Race #4
April 27, 2016
|
|
The fact that The Dark Knight III is slowly falling behind schedule doesn't do anything to help the series' sluggish pacing. And it's disappointing to see what began as a story about a new generation of heroes morphing into another tale about an aging Bruce Wayne. But that's not to say that there isn't promise with this book, or that it doesn't improve on its predecessors in certain key ways. But as it reaches the halfway point, this book isn't exploring its characters to their full potential.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Knight III: The Master Race #5
June 29, 2016
|
|
The Dark Knight III is losing steam as the series begins moving towards its climax. While there's a certain appeal in seeing Batman fight back against a seemingly unstoppable foe, the story is only feeling more empty as it moves along. And with the visual quality taking a noticeable dive compared to previous chapters, the future isn't looking good for this Dark Knight Returns sequel.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Knight III: The Master Race #6
October 19, 2016
|
|
At this point it's tough to recommend reading The Dark Knight III in single issue form. Between the shipping delays, the generally spartan plot and the uncertainty regarding where this story is actually heading, fans may be better off waiting until the whole series is finally released in 2017. But for hardcore Dark Knight fans, the series is recapturing much of the original's unique visual flavor.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Knight III: The Master Race #8
March 29, 2017
|
|
The Dark Knight III has plenty of spectacle and visual excitement to offer in its penultimate chapter. Andy Kubert directly channels Frank Miller's work on 300 as he chronicles the ultimate battle between Amazons and Kryptonians. But the story feels more spartan than ever in this issue, which calls into question whether a an extra ninth chapter was truly necessary.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Knight III: The Master Race #9
June 7, 2017
|
|
As a whole, The Dark Knight III is a flawed story at best, and one that hasn't always captured the greatness of the original mini-series. But the final issue stands out in large part because it doesn't try to. Instead, it brings a newfound sense of optimism to this formerly dark and dreary universe. It's a refreshing change for the Dark Knight franchise, and one that leaves the door open for an even bolder and more daring sequel.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dark Knight Returns: The Last Crusade #1 |
Jun 15, 2016
show
|
|
The Dark Knight Returns: The Last Crusade deserved to be a full-length graphic novel. That's both high praise and a testament to its storytelling flaws. This issue offers a fascinating glimpse at a Bruce Wayne entering middle age and confronting his uncertain legacy. Thanks to John Romita's art, it also faithfully captures the look and feel of the original DKR. But there's too little room in this "not oversized enough" special to explore Jason Todd's mindset or the Joker's role in this conflict. That becomes painfully apparent during the abrupt, unsatisfying finale sequence.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dark Knights Rising: The Wild Hunt #1 |
Feb 14, 2018
show
|
|
The Wild Hunt is hardly the most consistent or focused chapter of the Dark Nights: Metal saga, but it is a worthy addition nonetheless. This issue adds much-needed depth to the conflict and some major and minor players. It also conveys the scale of that conflict better than anything else we've seen from Metal. This issue is a reminder that no one does big superhero epics quite like Grant Morrison, even when he's merely a supporting player.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dark Night: A True Batman Story #1 |
Jun 15, 2016
show
|
|
Dark Night might not be the Vertigo-branded Batman book fans have been clamoring for from DC, but it's certainly worth a read for anyone who holds the Caped Crusader near and dear to their heart. It offers a very personal and heartfelt look at how the character helped guide Dini through a terrible time in his life, and it proves all the more that both Dini and Risso are among the most talented storytellers ever to work within Gotham City.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dark Nights: Metal |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Dark Nights: Metal #1
August 16, 2017
|
|
Apart from a surprisingly sluggish middle act, Dark Nights: metal #1 is a terrifically enjoyable read. This issue crams in all the adventure and bombast that was promised, but also makes it clear that Batman is confronting one of the most dire and all-encompassing threats of his career. But for fans of the Snyder/Capullo Batman run, all you really need to know is that the old gang is back together.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Nights: Metal #2
September 13, 2017
|
|
While Metal still has a few kinks to iron out before it can rival the best of Snyder and Capullo's work, the series is delivering plenty of drama and spectacle as it explores the collision between the DCU and the Dark Multiverse. This issue increases the story's pace, focusing both on crazy, dynamic action and highlighting the fear and uncertainty propelling the Caped Crusader as he delves deeper into his biggest case yet.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Nights: Metal #3
October 11, 2017
|
|
You can't fault Dark Nights: Metal for its scope and ambition. This is every bit as epic a story as fans were promised, and the stakes only continue to grow more dire in this issue as the Dark Knights run amok in the DCU. Unfortunately, this issue seems prone to biting off more than it can chew, resorting in a number of exposition-driven sequences that slow down an otherwise exciting storyline.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Nights: Metal #4
December 20, 2017
|
|
Some crossovers are decompressed and drawn-out. Metal is not one of those books. At times it suffers from the exact opposite problem, as it crams in more story and world-building than these individual issues can really handle. Even so, Metal remains a wonderfully ambitious and exciting read, one that only grows bigger and more varied with each new issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Nights: Metal #5
January 31, 2018
|
|
Where some previous chapters of Dark Nights: Metal became overburdened by exposition and setup, the series is able to build a greater sense of momentum in its penultimate issue. Metal #5 stacks the odds even further against the Justice League even as it celebrates the true scope of this shared universe. Perhaps this is one event that will reach its pinnacle at the very end?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Nights: Metal #6
March 28, 2018
|
|
In many ways, Dark Nights: Metal is more flawed than Snyder and Capullo's previous DC work. There are simply too many moving pieces in this final issue, and not enough room to do it all justice. But despite that, there are enough great character moments, dynamic images and emotionally resonant themes at play to make Metal a crossover worth experiencing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dark Rain: A New Orleans Story - HC Review #1 |
Aug 18, 2010
show
|
|
Simon Gane's artwork is more spare than what readers may remember from Velvet Underground, particularly because of the simpler blue-and-black color palette. The art was occasionally too simple for the story - I would have expected a post-storm Katrina to show more damage and debris, for instance. Still, the art is clear and good at conveying emotion. A recurring problem I noticed is that the storytelling tends to stumble during transition sequences, as if some vital panels wound up on the cutting room floor. I don't know whether writer or artist is to blame for that, but it is a bit perplexing. I was looking forward to Dark Rain for quite a while, and I was disappointed to find I didn't enjoy it as much as I expected. Potential readers should consider checking out A.D.: New Orleans After the Deluge for the current definitive Hurricane Katrina-related comic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dark Reign: Hawkeye #5 |
Jan 27, 2010
show
|
|
I simply don't understand why we waited so long for an issue of this caliber. Dark Reign: Hawkeye #5 offers no satisfying story resolution and no justification for why it arrived so late. At this point I would have been happier if I had kept laboring under the misconception the series was already finished.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dark Reign: The List (2009) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Dark Reign: The List: Amazing Spider-Man #1
November 18, 2009
|
|
I won't go so far as to say that Dark Reign: The List - Amazing Spider-Man is the best installment of the series. The Wolverine issue still holds that honor. But that issue also had little impact on anything bigger than itself. As a total package - one that offers a captivating Spider-Man adventure and one that advances the events of Dark Reign - this issue comes out on top. This is a story that perhaps should have come several months ago, but this is one comic that is certainly better off late than never.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Reign: The List: Avengers #1
September 10, 2009
|
|
It's clear already that Dark Reign: The List is just a middle step on the road to Dark Reign's real climax. The lack of any running threads throughout the series other than the core "Osborn's list" premise may end up dragging these books down. On the other hand, this issue features some of the better character work Bendis has done in his long tenure on the Avengers books. Even if I have to wait a few months to see where this issue leads, Bendis has done plenty to pique my interest.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Reign: The List: Wolverine #1
October 28, 2009
|
|
Without a doubt, this is the most successful of the Dark Reign: The List books so far. It also happens to be one of the less important chapters. If major plot twists and developments are your desire, The List: Punisher has you covered this week. If you simply want a fun, slightly twisted adventure in the style of Morrison's New X-Men, this issue won't disappoint.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dark Souls: The Breath of Andolus #1 |
Apr 20, 2016
show
|
|
For all the potential that the Dark Souls franchise has in the comic book medium, this issue doesn't do much to capitalize on it. Dark Souls #1 doesn't look or feel very close to the source material, and despite her tragic background the main protagonist comes across as a generic hero on a prolonged fetch quest, Hopefully future installments can do more with the setting and the characters.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dark Wolverine (2009) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Dark Wolverine #77
August 26, 2009
|
|
There is, in the end, one central flaw with this series that has yet to be addressed in its first three issues. I still don't care about Daken as a character. The appeal so far is all in the situational drama his powers create. I don't have a proper sense of who Daken is or what he wants in this book. Does he actually care about his father's legacy one way or the other? Does he have any goals at all other than screwing with his teammates? There's no emotional connection to be had here. It's actually a similar problem Way has in his Deadpool book, only more pronounced. Deadpool is zany enough that readers don't always need something deeper. Daken is not the same way. Bearing all that in mind, this arc seems to function better as a Dark Avengers story than a solo tale. Hopefully that won't always be the case, otherwise I foresee a short future for the series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Wolverine #85
April 21, 2010
|
|
One issue in, and "Reckoning" isn't terribly concerned with moving things along. I hope this isn't a sign that the crossover is a simple matter of claws versus claws. Romulus is a character who has tortured and manipulated Wolverine's family for generations. As poorly executed a villain as Romulus has been so far, I'd like to think Way and Liu can find a way to bring the conflict to a proper and epic finish.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Wolverine #87
June 16, 2010
|
|
This series desperately needs to find a strong, coherent direction, and fast. Hopefully the impending relaunch will bring with it a new purpose for this wayward mutant. Rarely has a character this well-written simultaneously been so boring.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dark Wolverine #88
July 21, 2010
|
|
When the fight finally begins, the duo spend more time cooing at each other and strutting about than actually making with the stabby and the shooty. Maybe that's just as well, as the art rarely does the action justice, with plenty of awkwardly framed panels and a jarring shift from artist Stephen Segovia to Paco Diaz. The promise of a third party joining the battle and further story complications ahead do nothing to ease my troubled mind. I look forward to improvement in the next issue as Rick Remender takes the reins of FrankenCastle again, but I fear this story has already been irreparably damaged thanks to the crossover.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Darkseid Special #1 |
Aug 30, 2017
show
|
|
DC's Jack Kirby anniversary celebration ends on a high note thanks to this Darkseid one-shot. This issue manages to capture the power and bombast of Kirby's classic Fourth World adventures while crafting a conflict that feels grounded in the here and now. Couple that with a visually impressive OMAC backup and some added Kirby reprints, and this issue offers a lot of bang for the buck.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Day Men |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Day Men #4
July 31, 2014
|
|
It can be tough for a vampire-themed comic to distinguish itself these days, but each new issue of Day Men succeeds a little bit more in establishing a unique tone and approach to the vampire concept.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Day Men #5
November 6, 2014
|
|
At this point the writers have no trouble investing readers in David's plight. The problem is simply that the dialogue and narration can be too clunky and drawn out for their own good.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Days of Hate #1 |
Jan 18, 2018
show
|
|
Ales Kot's pauses only briefly to set the stage and spends even less time establishing the main characters before jumping into their narrative. At times that lack of clarity can be frustrating, but there's also a lot to be said for a book with this much forward momentum in issue #1.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Daytripper |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Daytripper #2
January 13, 2010
|
|
I feel like I say this all the time, but Daytripper is another Vertigo book you should highly consider adding to your pull list. The series captures all the joy, beauty, and uncertainty that come when a young person struggles to find their place in the world.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Daytripper #3
February 10, 2010
|
|
And there's always the gorgeous art to enjoy. Once again, Moon and Ba don't shine quite as much when they tackle simple buildings and apartment rooms rather than rolling hills and sandy beaches. This issue is definitely understated compared to the last one, but the artists do stretch their muscles a bit towards the middle when Bras and Jorge visit a swanky new art exhibition. And if Ba and Moon take a bit of a backseat, it's only so that colorist Dave Stewart can step to the forefront. Stewart cycles between muted blues and greens for depressing scenes and warmer reds and oranges for the more cheerful ones. He very effectively conveys mood and emotion through strategic use of color. As much as Casanova proves the Twins don't need a full color palette to thrive, Stewart's contribution in Daytripper suggests otherwise.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Daytripper #8
July 14, 2010
|
|
Gabriel Ba and Fabio Moon continue to cement their status as master storytellers and artists who have no real need of outside writers. Sorry Matt Fraction and Gerard Way, it's true. Daytripper #8 is beautifully rendered and full of a wide range of emotions. My predominate emotion at this point is sadness - sadness that the series will be over in two mere months.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DC / Hanna-Barbera: Green Lantern/Space Ghost #1 |
Mar 29, 2017
show
|
|
Green Lantern/Space Ghost sounded promising when it was announced, and the finished product doesn't disappoint. This issue forges a strong bond between the two space cop heroes and manages to tell a poignant story that avoids recycling too many of the usual crossover tropes. And for fans of the 2005 Space Ghost mini-series, it's almost like getting a sequel.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DC / Looney Tunes: Batman/Elmer Fudd #1 |
Jun 28, 2017
show
|
|
DC truly saved the best for last with their DCU/Looney Tunes crossover specials. Batman/Elmer Fudd is a gleefully absurd mash-up of the two franchises, one made all the more ridiculous by the fact that it presents itself as a completely serious and gritty noir tale. But as goofy as this comic can be, it also treats its two leads with a huge amount of care and gravitas, resulting in a crossover the delivers on multiple levels and somehow emerges as King's best Batman comic to date.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DC Comics Presents Harley Quinn #1 |
Feb 06, 2014
show
|
|
In the end, this package is mixed at best. It does offer a nice glimpse of who Harley is and why she was a more entertaining character prior to the New 52. But it's by no means a comprehensive look at the character. I would have liked to see some of Dini's later work from his Detective Comics run included where Harley made a go at an honest, Joker-free lifestyle. Or better yet, a reprint of the full, hard-to-find Harley & Ivy mini-series. This issue is a decent, if pricey primer on all things Harley, but newly converted fans will have a lot of other reading to do afterward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells Annual #1
September 1, 2016
|
|
Bennett does a great job of working in many familiar Batgirl characters and elements while also offering a very fresh spin on the character. The mix of WWI action, romance and Haunted Mansion-style supernatural horror is bizarre, but enjoyable
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #2
September 2, 2015
|
|
This series is making the most of its limited source material, crafting a fun, compelling new take on the DCU and its iconic female heroes. It offers a little of the familiar (Wonder Woman's origin) and the new (Supergirl and Starfire). While this issue doesn't quite measure up to the first in terms of its visuals, it still has plenty to offer.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Comics: Bombshells #9
February 11, 2016
|
|
This issue is at least more visually cohesive than most, though neither artist quite captures the distinctive power and energy of the original Bombshells character designs.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DC House of Horror #1 |
Oct 25, 2017
show
|
|
If DC is going to features its most popular heroes and villains in a Halloween-flavored comic, the results should at least be fun. That's not the case with DC House of Horror #1, a pointlessly dark and morbid comic that seeks to drag Superman, Batman, Wonder Woman and the rest through the mud. Perhaps this comic justifies its high cover price sheerly in terms of page count, but that doesn't really matter if the stories moistly aren't worth reading in the first place.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DC Nation #0 |
May 02, 2018
show
|
|
With its low cover price and trio of great stories, DC Nation #0 is a win/win for readers.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DC Rebirth Holiday Special #1 |
Dec 15, 2016
show
|
|
With a $9.99 cover price and clocking in at around 80 pages, this issue is more trade paperback than standard holiday special. And while there's plenty of holiday cheer to be in this book, a leaner, meaner, cheaper experience probably would have been an easier sell.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DC Universe Presents |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
DC Universe Presents #0
September 19, 2012
|
|
Basically, the decision to buy this issue depends largely on how much you love OMAC. None of the other stories do much to suggest that their respective books should have remained on the stands.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Universe Presents #1
September 21, 2011
|
|
This approach to Deadman doesn't necessarily have the legs to support an ongoing series, and that's why it's so well-suited to the transitory format of this series. Those who want a modern Deadman who reflects the changes brought about by Brightest Day can turn to Hawk & Dove. For those who simple desire a streamlined, effective update to his origin, this book will do nicely.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DC Universe vs. The Masters of the Universe |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
DC Universe vs. The Masters of the Universe #1
September 4, 2013
|
|
That last fact may prove a sticking point for readers who are lured in by Ivan Reis' cover. So far, this is not a crossover predicated on heroes punching other heroes. The actual Justice League characters don't even appear. But this nontraditional approach is exactly what makes DCU vs. MotU work so well in the first place.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DC Universe vs. The Masters of the Universe #2
October 23, 2013
|
|
Dexter Soy's art is a little rough at times, with the detail fluctuating and backgrounds dropping in and out. But when he's firing on all cylinders, Soy is a great fit for this story. His powerful figures and gritty textures suit the MotU characters very well, and he even makes Skeletor look threatening despite the massive overcompensation that is his new costume.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DC Universe Zero #1 |
Apr 30, 2008
show
|
|
My problems are two-fold. One - and this is something that doesn't necessarily concern me personally - this issue isn't quite the primer for new readers DC wants to think it is. It's definitely cluttered, and I imagine readers new to the DCU won't even make it past the Legion section before wanting to put the book down in favor of Ex Machina or something. Two - I wasn't a particularly huge fan of the reveal that the Associated Press has already harped on. Frankly, those few pages could have been better devoted to the other characters. Overall though I can't imagine finding a better use for your two quarters this week.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DC Universe: Last Will and Testament #1 |
Aug 27, 2008
show
|
|
|
|
|
DC Universe: Rebirth #1 |
May 20, 2016
show
|
|
For all the great stories that came out of the New 52, there was always something about this version of the DC Universe that didn't sit right. DC Rebirth manages to break the fourth wall and turn that idea into a story. This one-shot is a wonderful showcase for what this universe can be when it's executed properly. It's both a fitting farewell for Johns and a worthy template for DC's new wave of comics to follow. Reading Rebirth feels like coming home again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DCeased #1 |
May 01, 2019
show
|
|
DCeased #1 reads like DC's answer to Marvel Zombies, but it shows the potential to carve its own path.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dead Boy Detectives #2 |
Jan 30, 2014
show
|
|
The general premise of the book is beginning to fall into place after a relatively scatterbrained issue #1. The only real disappointment with issue #2 comes as a result of DC hyping up the appearance of Death. While she's referred to in a fairly oblique sense several times, she only appears in the flesh in a single panel flashback. Hopefully the various references will eventually build towards something more for the character, and we'll learn what consequences our two ghostly heroes will face for remaining on the earthly plane for so long.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dead of Night: Devil-Slayer #2 |
Oct 08, 2008
show
|
|
I will say that the art continues to hold its own for a second month. What Chris Samnee's work lacks in detail it makes up for in tone and choreography. I enjoyed his panel layouts, particularly in the way they display more energy than the usual static, gritty work from many mature books. I just wish the story had more to offer. There's still potential with Devil-Slayer, as evidenced by the first issue, but future installments are going to have to do a much better job of striking a balance between realism and horror. The latter half is far too weak at this stage to have a hope of carrying the book forward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dead of Night: Werewolf By Night #1 |
Jan 07, 2009
show
|
|
I guess you can have originality with these Dead of Night books, or you can have quality, but not both. For my part, I know which one I prefer.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dead Squad #1 |
Oct 08, 2014
show
|
|
This issue offers an enjoyable espionage adventure with ample gunplay and action but only a touch of the larger-than-life premise that distinguishes the book. Hopefully that won't be a problem beyond this first issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadly Hands of Kung Fu |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Deadly Hands of Kung Fu #1
May 14, 2014
|
|
Again, the art is the real sticking point. It's not so much that tan Eng Huat lacks the storytelling ability and choreography necessary for a good martial arts romp. Its that his figure work is wildly inconsistent. At times our the figures will be rendered fairly realistically and in great detail, but at others they become wildly distorted caricatures. Given Huat's past Marvel work, there's little reason to expect the problem to improve over time.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadly Hands of Kung Fu #2
June 12, 2014
|
|
Tan Eng Huat's style is too distorted and inconsistent to do this tale justice. Huat's work deteriorates from issue #1, with a poor use of perspective throughout this chapter.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadman: Dark Mansion of Forbidden Love #1 |
Oct 06, 2016
show
|
|
This isn't really a superhero comic in the traditional sense, which is actually one of its greatest strengths. It's more a Gothic horror and romance story that happens to feature Deadman. Perhaps the highest compliment that can be paid to this book is that it would be appealing even without Deadman in the picture.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadpool (2008) |
10 issues
show
|
|
|
Deadpool #6
January 14, 2009
|
|
Deadpool continues to impress, even if it isn't quite as exciting or relevant as it was in the first arc. I'm sure that will change, temporarily at least, with "Magnum Opus". For now, I can't be too down on one of the few Marvel characters who still remembers how to have fun in the wake of Dark Reign.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #10
May 6, 2009
|
|
This issue is a bit light on action, but there are still a few scenes where both masked goons get to cut loose. And that's where artist Paco Medina shines best. Medina doesn't always paint the most convincing portrait of man when man isn't wearing full-body spandex, but he does have a real knack for colorful, off-the-wall action. As the feud between Deadpool and Bullseye heats up, I expect Medina's art to follow suit. It's a good start to an arc. I just hope Deadpool's shtick of running and gunning with Osborn's goons doesn't grow stale.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #12
July 15, 2009
|
|
Still, this is definitely the best Deadpool book you'll read all month. The art is very solid, and Way gives Paco Medina plenty of room to play thanks to the numerous delusion sequences. In a strange way, this issue actually caps off everything Way has done since the beginning. The book isn't being canceled (Marvel doesn't hate money, after all), but it certainly feels like the end of one era and the start of something stranger and, hopefully, even more wild and fun than before.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #14
August 26, 2009
|
|
If Way's series has had any one fault over the past months, it's that he hasn't attempted to give his lead hero any depth. We love Deadpool because he's crazy, not because follows a classical hero's journey or plumbs the depths of his subconscious. And for the most part, that's always been enough. However, late in this issue there comes a point where Deadpool has a Spider Jerusalem-esque moment of epiphany. He calms down and quits being zany long enough for readers to see the human being underneath. It appears Way will actually be exploring this side of the character in the next arc, and I'm very interested to see where he goes with it. I hardly want to abandon the meat suits and tug boats, but a stronger attempt at characterization might just push this book to the next level.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #15
September 2, 2009
|
|
This could easily be hilarity in the making or just the beginning of another bum story arc. You can never really tell with this book. Way certainly has a lot to live up to in the humor department, but at the same time I hope he's able to raise the bar in terms of characterization.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #17
November 11, 2009
|
|
This isn't Way's crowning achievement with Deadpool, but it's still a fun little romp. If nothing else, issue #17 is worth a read just to see Deadpool's prank. Hopefully the laughs will pick up a bit more and this arc can close out in style next month.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #19
February 17, 2010
|
|
Unfortunately, I wasn't very impressed by Carlo Barberi's artwork. Barberi mimics Paco Medina's energetic style fairly well, but there are enough strange qualities present that I don't enjoy the visuals nearly as much. Barberi has a tendency to draw every character with bulging necks and gangly limbs. Every single person in New York is wearing clothes about four or five sizes too big for them. Barberi also goes overboard when it comes to rendering Spider-Man's uniform. I'm all for allowing artists a bit of creative license when it comes to movement and expression in Spidey's eyes, but Barberi overdoes it. In nearly every panel, Spidey is squinting or glaring despite his supposedly rigid mask structure. Little problems like these combine to kick the visuals down several notches. Like Kelly's Deadpool/Spidey crossover, the art doesn't live up to the quality of the script.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #21
March 24, 2010
|
|
Surprisingly straightforward but very action-packed, Way's latest Deadpool arc comes to a close this month. It's clear Way intends to mine this "Deadpool as a hero" concept for a while longer. Hopefully as Heroic Age approaches we can see a little more humor return to the book even as Deadpool learns more about power, responsibility, and the art of monkey warfare.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #28
October 20, 2010
|
|
Carlo Barberi's art is bright and expressive. His exaggerated figures are none too appealing, with their impossibly broad shoulders, baggy clothes, and Popeye-esque musculature, but for the most part Barberi conveys the script well. The only snag comes when the fake and real Secret Avengers begin appearing simultaneously. Barberi (or Way) could have done more to distinguish the two groups. Deadpool's status as the most consistent of these books might be in danger now thanks to Deadpool MAX, but those who want an enjoyable, comical read won't go wrong here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #51
February 22, 2012
|
|
There needs to be more of a hook to this story, because the idea of this storyline continuing as-is all the way until May is a less than appealing one.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadpool (2012) |
26 issues
show
|
|
|
Deadpool #1
November 6, 2012
|
|
Deadpool #1 is one of those issues that will leave you wishing Marvel had played their cards closer to their chest and not given away so much regarding the conflict of this first arc. It's also a bit subdued in terms of humor. That said, it's a fun and unfettered approach to Deadpool's world, and does just about everything a Marvel NOW! series should in terms of offering readers a fresh start.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool Annual #2
May 22, 2014
|
|
Deadpool Annual #2 offers a completely standalone Deadpool advebture with a completely different creative team from the main book. All you really need to know is that writer Christopher Hastings capitalizes on the comedic potential of the Spider-Man/Deadpool team-up.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #6
March 20, 2013
|
|
And even ignoring the script entirely, Tony Moore delivers some excellent visuals to cap off this storyline. His expressive characters, moody environments, and penchant for grotesque violence and slapstick humor all serve the book extremely well. I can only hope that Moore will be returning to illustrate a future story, as his presence on the book has been the central draw for these past few months.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #8
April 24, 2013
|
|
The humor is the main area where the series continues to struggle. And considering this is a Deadpool comic, that's not a minor problem. Too much of the humor in this book revolves around weak gags and pop culture references. There's too little edge and originality to Deadpool's comedy. What appeal is there in lampooning Tyler Perry or making jokes about female drivers? Issue #7 suggested that the writers have more up their sleeves in that regard, and it's unfortunate that thus far it seems to be the exception to the rule.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #9
May 8, 2013
|
|
But sadly, while this series is doing a lot right and building well from the initial premise of Deadpool vs. Zombie Presidents, the lack of humor remains a sore point. The book is generally fun, but not very funny. It continues to rely too much on limp pop culture references and not enough on genuine, situational comedy. It's not enough that Wade can find a movie to reference in every other panel.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #10
May 22, 2013
|
|
On the plus side, Mike Hawthorne delivers his strongest issue of the series so far. The battle between Spidey, Deadpool, and the "Blandtastic Four" is very bouncy and exciting. Hawthorne shows off some clever design tricks as he continues finding new ways to visualize the internal conversation between Wade and Preston, as well as a neat use of perspective in a scene in Hell. Visually, the series remains on firm ground despite the shift from Tony Moore to Hawthorne.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #11
June 12, 2013
|
|
At this point I'm just ready for this current arc to wrap up so the creative team can get a fresh start on something newer and hopefully more compelling over the long term.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #14
August 14, 2013
|
|
The one strength issue #14 has in its favor is Declan Shalvey's artwork. Shalvey might just be the strongest replacement yet for the departed Tony Moore. He shows a similarly zany, expressive, and violent style that perfectly meshes with Wade Wilson's wacky world. His art alone is enough to pique my interest in the next extended story arc.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #18
October 10, 2013
|
|
Declan Shalvey has proven to be an ideal fit for this more serious arc. He channels some of the cartoonish charm of past storylines, but he couples that quality with a more subdued tone and grittier texture. The action flows well, and the varied unhappy emotions are conveyed well. Shalvey has shown enough versatility with these four issues that he would be a great fit for the series even when it does return to more traditional Deadpool territory.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #23
February 12, 2014
|
|
Mike Hawthorne illustrates this issue with his usual flair. He brings a palpable energy to the book, and he's great at inserting moments of physical comedy into the background of his panels. The main complaint with the visuals is that the coloring is often too flat and washed out. The situations in this issue may pay close homage to Alien, but the orange-tinted colors do anything but.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #27
April 9, 2014
|
|
The remaining three-quarters of the issue are comprised of the backup tales, bringing back everyone from Joe Kelly to Gail Simone to Christopher Priest to write the Merc With a Mouth. Luckily, there's a unifying theme running throughout these tales that ensures that remain at least somewhat relevant to the larger picture. In most cases, the writers and artists deliver a story very much rooted in the style, voice, and character lineup of the projects they worked on previously. So these tales feel like a blast from the past in the best possible way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #28
May 15, 2014
|
|
Issue #28 is a wacky little standalone issue that sees Wade and his new bride venture to Japan as part of their honeymoon.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #29
May 29, 2014
|
|
It's a promising start for this story, though the art leaves something to be desired. The facial work is muddled and often poorly matched to the tone and emotion of the script. Good thing Wade himself doesn't have to worry about that.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #30
June 12, 2014
|
|
There are goofy Deadpool stories and serious Deadpool stories, and with this Original Sin tie-in, Gerry Duggan and Brian Posehn are trying to tell both at once. The resulting blend suits Deadpool better than it would most Marvel heroes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #31
July 9, 2014
|
|
The book continues to suffer from lackluster art, however. It's not that John Lucas' storytelling is at fault, necessarily. His action scenes are fun and violent. But Lucas' facial work is distracting at times. It's needlessly exaggerated and often fails to match the emotion in any given scene. And given how much emotion is becoming a factor in this book again, that's a problem.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #32
July 24, 2014
|
|
I really wish this story arc featured stronger, more consistent visuals, because it's really beginning to tap into that slightly humorous, mostly somber vibe that made 'The Good, the Bad, and the Ugly' so special.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #33
August 14, 2014
|
|
This issue didn't pack in quite as much drama as I was hoping for. The resolution to the conflict is a little too smooth and simple, particularly as a couple of guest stars arrive out of the blue to help Wade with his problems.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #34
September 11, 2014
|
|
The Deadpool team offer up another "lost" issue here, this time set in Marvel's radical '90s era. Everything in the art, from the gimmicky 3D cover to the over-the-top Rob Liefeld-esque stylings, is a pitch-perfect sendup of the period.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #35
September 24, 2014
|
|
Mike Hawthorne returns in this issue, giving the pages that right balance between physical comedy and sad introspection. Hawthorne makes a strong partner with colorist Jordie Bellaire. Given how much the series suffered visually during Original Sin, it's great to see it rebound on that front.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #36
October 22, 2014
|
|
Mike Hawthorne returns to the series for this new storyline. Generally among the stronger artists this series has seen, Hawthorne does a fine job of following the script from location to location and making Wade's adventures as dynamic and visually diverse as possible.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #37
November 20, 2014
|
|
Mike Hawthorne delivers another engaging set of pages with this issue. His work isn't as detailed as some Deadpool artists, but it is energetic, expressive, and cleanly laid out. The writers give Hawthorne plenty of good material to work with, especially as Wade enters the X-Men's Danger Room and waltzes into a Wild West setting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #40
January 14, 2015
|
|
Scott Koblish furthers the illusion that this issue is a kid's coloring book by drawing and coloring it as such. The art features bold lines and relatively simple character designs that are actually colored in with a crude crayon effect. The joke kind of wears out its welcome when it comes to the coloring specifically, but you have to admire the creative team's commitment to their farce. An especially nice touch is the interlude section, which packs in all manner of mazes and puzzles for the kiddies.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #41
January 28, 2015
|
|
It's great to see Salva Espin on board for this story as well. Espin really impressed with his work on various Deadpool mini-series, and he's equally well-suited for the core Deadpool comic. His style is energetic and expressive without being overly cartoonish. That suits both the zany action scenes and the dialogue-driven scenes equally well. Like any good Deadpool artist, Espin doesn't let the fact that Waid wears a mask prevent the character from emoting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #42
February 25, 2015
|
|
If anything drags this issue down, it's the focus on Shiklah and her kingdom. These characters don't really add anything to the story. The marriage plot thread has been so ignored for so long that it's enough to wonder why it was even introduced in the first place.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #45
April 8, 2015
|
|
Duggan and Posehn have done some great work with Deadpool over the past few years. This issue serves as a worthy finale to their long run. In their two stories, the writers showcase Wade Wilson at his most serious and his most comical. This issue doesn't wrap up every loose end, unfortunately, and the high cover price is a bit hard to stomach considering that many of the backup stories are pretty forgettable. Even so, Deadpool fans will want to tune in to see the end of an era.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadpool (2015) |
17 issues
show
|
|
|
Deadpool Annual #1
September 29, 2016
|
|
This issue offers an eclectic assortment of Deadpool vignettes, the meatiest of which pokes fun at the classic Spider-Man and His Amazing Friends cartoon. Your mileage may vary depending on your attachment to that show, but I certainly got a kick out of watching Deadpool join forces with Iceman and Firestar and introducing coldblooded murder to this whimsical cartoon landscape.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #2
November 19, 2015
|
|
Deadpool's unprecedented popularity makes for an entertaining new status quo. The problem right now is that the book is too fixated on his "Mercs for Money" team and not nearly enough on Wade or the usual supporting cast from the previous book
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #3
December 10, 2015
|
|
Gerry Duggan's Deadpool saga has changed quite a bit with this new relaunch. And while the series still seems a little too preoccupied with the Mercs for Money team over Wade Wilson himself, this issue does at least make a significant shift in the right direction
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #5
January 6, 2016
|
|
Once again, Duggan's Deadpool run succeeds by downplaying the humor of Wade Wilson's life and ramping up the character drama. This issue sets up Madcap as a worthy addition to Wade's small but growing rogues gallery and suggests that there's plenty more darkness in store for our hero in the months ahead. Bad for Deadpool, but good for readers.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #6
January 21, 2016
|
|
Once again, Gerry Duggan's Deadpool run thrives by downplaying comedy in favor of drama. What seems at first like a goofy little side-story winds up being a sobering look at the future of Wade Wilson and his loved ones in the year 2099. Bring on more Deadpool 2099!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #9
April 6, 2016
|
|
The current volume of Deadpool is even stronger than its predecessor, thanks to an increased emphasis on blending the insanity of Wade Wilson's world with tragedy and darkness. This issue allows Sabretooth to get in on some of that action, proving that this particular face-off is about much more than just mindless carnage.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #10
April 20, 2016
|
|
This relaunched series has really tapped into that peculiar blend of black comedy and tragedy that makes Gerry Duggan's Deadpool so appealing. That's why it's disappointing that this issue foregoes hat approach for a more humor and action-oriented installment. And while that approach has its merits, the humor falls flat too often in these pages.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #11
May 11, 2016
|
|
After a misstep in the previous issue, the "Deadpool vs. Sabretooth" storyline is able to reach a satisfying conclusion this month. Once again, the series succeeds by blending Wade Wilson's kooky antics with a dark, unflattering look at his tragic past and current misdeeds. And with the way this arc ens, it's clear his troubled life won't be getting any easier.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #13
June 1, 2016
|
|
This issue can easily be skipped for those readers who don't feel like paying $10 for a non-essential crossover. But for those who want to see what happens when Deadpool, Daredevil, Power Man and Iron Fist reluctantly join forces, Deadpool #13 doesn't disappoint. It offers plenty of wacky fun, with a few dramatic moments thrown in for good measure.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #14
June 16, 2016
|
|
If Marvel's various Civil War II tie-ins are going to consist solely of heroes having conversations with Ulysses, this whole event is going to get old quick.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #15
July 13, 2016
|
|
This Civil War II tie-in reads less like a crucial addition to the larger event and more like an amusing diversion. That's hardly the worst direction for the series. This issue looks great and offers ample entertainment. Still, it'll be nice to move beyond Civil War II and back into the mess that is Wade Wilson's life.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #17
August 25, 2016
|
|
The series may have hit a few roadblocks in recent months, but it's clear better days lie ahead. For readers, not for Deadpool. He's screwed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #18
September 15, 2016
|
|
This marks about the third issue in a row where the Civil War II banner is completely unwarranted. Instead, writer Gerry Duggan focuses on capping off this troubled phase in Wade's career and building towards his next inevitable showdown with Madcap. It's a quiet, somber issue, but somber is something Duggan has always done particularly well on this series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #20
October 13, 2016
|
|
Over the course of 2016, this series has seemed intent on testing the limits of just how many standalone interlude issues one series can support. But as much as I'd like Deadpool to move forward into the Marvel NOW era and resume Wade's feud with Madcap, it's tough to complain about an issue with as much heart as this one
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool #25
January 25, 2017
|
|
Deadpool #25 delivers a memorable finish to the ongoing Deadpool 2099 storyline. While longer than strictly necessary, this issue really taps into the kooky yet tragic Wilson family dynamic while celebrating the 2099 setting. As usual, this series tends to be at its best when Gerry Duggan and Scott Koblish are paired together.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadpool #1 |
Nov 20, 2019
show
|
|
Marvel's newest monthly Deadpool series does very little to stand out amid a vast sea of Deadpool content.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadpool & Cable: Split Second |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Deadpool & Cable: Split Second #1
December 31, 2015
|
|
While Deadpool has been well-served these past few years in his ongoing series and various mini-series, some fans will always pine for the days of Cable & Deadpool. Well, that series is back in every way that matters. This mini-series not only reunites the Dynamic Duo, it also brings back writer Fabian Nicieza and artist Reilly Brown.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool & Cable: Split Second #2
January 28, 2016
|
|
Deadpool and Cable's string of failed attempts to fix the timeline only wind up worsening the problem, leading to a wildly entertaining Groundhog Day scenario. And the comic only gets weirder from there.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool & Cable: Split Second #3
February 18, 2016
|
|
This finale offers precious little of the Wade/Nate dynamic until the end. For the most part it focuses on convoluted time-hopping, which only grows more confusing as the conflict progresses. Still, the humor is enough to offset the clunkiness in the script. Moreover, Nicieza is able to celebrate the bond between these two characters even if they rarely share the page.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadpool & The Mercs For Money (2016) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Deadpool & The Mercs For Money #2
August 11, 2016
|
|
It's a little unfortunate that the Mercs for Money are feeling superfluous in their own ongoing series. The conflict Cullen Bunn has cooked up, involving Deadpool being hired to round up various radioactive-powered characters, is compelling enough, but this story could just as easily unfold without the Mercs.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool & The Mercs For Money #3
September 8, 2016
|
|
Unlike the previous issue, at least this one makes better use of the full cast rather than coming across like another chapter of "Deadpool and Those Other Guys." Still, this series is struggling to find its place alongside the core Deadpool comic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadpool Kills Deadpool #1 |
Jul 03, 2013
show
|
|
The art quality also enjoys a nice boost in this book thanks to Salva Espin. Espin previously worked on Daniel Way's Deadpool series, where his bright, energetic renderings and stylistic similarity to Paco Medina made him an asset. He brings a similarly bombastic flair to this series, giving the final part of a trilogy a more traditional Deadpool that's called for now that the setting has switched to the core Marvel Universe.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadpool Kills The Marvel Universe Again #1 |
Jul 05, 2017
show
|
|
Given how well the original Deadpool Kills the Marvel Universe has sold for Marvel, you can't really blame the publisher for returning to that well. But that does nothing to change the fact that this follow-up reads like a pointless, derivative rehash of a formula we've seen too many times already. Only hardcore Deadpool fanatics need apply.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadpool Killustrated #1 |
Jan 23, 2013
show
|
|
Matteo Lolli's visuals are serviceable enough. The pages documenting Wade's battle with Moby Dick stand out in terms of detail and framing, but generally the book has a pretty plain aesthetic that neither diminishes the script nor does much to enhance it. Fans of Bunn's previous mini will want to check this one out, but more casual Deadpool fans will probably be better off trade-waiting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadpool Max: X-Mas Special #1 |
Dec 07, 2011
show
|
|
DeadpoolMAX fans should have no reason to complain about what is essentially an oversized bonus issue. But casual Deadpool fans and Christmas lovers might be better served looking elsewhere or, at least, heading back to the beginning of Lapham's story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadpool Pulp #1 |
Sep 01, 2010
show
|
|
The attempts to integrate Deadpool's friends and enemies into the story are somewhat less successful. Cable and Stryfe as two rival FBI agents? Benson and Glass stick to the now-familiar system of dual narrative captions for Deadpool. Here, though, they actually have some relevance to the plot in addition to providing a bit of humor. Laurence Campbell's artwork is attractive in its deep blacks and moody tone, but in some ways it only further hinders the book's attempts to capture the pulp aesthetic. Readers may have to accept that Deadpool: Pulp doesn't provide exactly what the title advertises, but the story within shows promise regardless of that title.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadpool Team-Up #897 |
Jan 06, 2010
show
|
|
This isn't a particularly noteworthy Deadpool adventure in any sense, But as always, the best part about this series is that you never know what might be around the corner.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadpool v Gambit #1 |
Jun 23, 2016
show
|
|
There's a lot of potential on display in Deadpool v Gambit #1, but the odd structure and storytelling choices prevent that core dynamic from getting the attention it deserves here. Hopefully now that the setup is more or less out of the way, this series can dig into this rivalry and give Gambit something useful to do for a change.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadpool vs. Carnage |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Deadpool vs. Carnage #1
April 2, 2014
|
|
Artist Salva Espin is back with Bunn for another Deadpool collaboration, and his pencils ave lost none of their appeal. Espin brings a bright, energetic feel to the series, like a Looney Tunes short with a few buckets of blood and hand grenades thrown in for good measure. And Espin spices up his pages with plenty of visual gags and background cameos. As far as Deadpool tales go, this one isn't very deep. But apart from the annoying villain, it has plenty of entertainment value.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool vs. Carnage #3
May 8, 2014
|
|
Cullen Bunn continues to find comedic mileage out of Wade Wilson's latest superpower - the ability to find nonsensical signs all around him and somehow wind up tracking his prey.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadpool vs. Old Man Logan #1 |
Oct 18, 2017
show
|
|
Unfortunately, Deadpool vs. Old Man Logan does little to stand out in a sea of Deadpool crossover comics. This first issue does little to tap into the meat of the Deadpool/Wolverine dynamic. Nor does it showcase Wade's comedic side particularly well. And while the art style is a great fit, the storytelling is riddled with a number of flaws that hinder the flow of the issue. There's a lot of potential to this team-up that isn't being utilized here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadpool vs. Thanos |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Deadpool vs. Thanos #1
September 2, 2015
|
|
This issue marks a promising start for Deadpool's latest mini-series. While Seeley spends too much time setting up the reluctant team-up between the two title characters, he does show a firm grasp on both their voices and the unusual interplay they share. Backed up by solid visuals, issue #1 should easily hook fans of either Deadpool or Thanos.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool vs. Thanos #2
September 23, 2015
|
|
Deadpool and Thanos isn't just a fun comic, it also has a decent helping of drama to back up the fun of seeing these two bitter rivals sharing the page again. However, the book doesn't completely shift into gear in this second issue thanks to a pointless Guardians appearance and a weird plot shift in the final pages.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool vs. Thanos #4
October 29, 2015
|
|
This issue strikes a nice balance between humor and drama. There's fun to be had as Deadpool makes googly eyes at Death and further antagonizes Thanos. There's even a pretty darned good "That's what she said joke" here. But Tim Seeley isn't afraid to get deep as he further fleshes out the unlikely connections between the two leads and waxes philosophical on the importance of death to the course of life.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadpool vs. The Punisher #1 |
Apr 12, 2017
show
|
|
Deadpool vs. Punisher doesn't dramatically reinvent the superhero crossover comic, but it has enough spark to stand apart from the crowd. Writer Fred Van Lente makes the most of this odd pairing of not-quite-superheroes, while Pere Perez strikes the right balance between goofy slapstick and grim, violent romp.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadpool: Back In Black |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Deadpool: Back In Black #4
December 1, 2016
|
|
The appeal with this whole "Deadpool becomes Venom" shtick is that, goofy as the idea is, it does genuinely add something to the larger Venom mythos. And Cullen Bunn is still finding ways to use Deadpool's antics to cast classic Spider-Man stories in a new light.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deadpool: Back In Black #5
December 15, 2016
|
|
The finale is slightly more plot-driven than the previous chapter, which is definitely a good thing. The final battle still feels a bit anticlimactic, which may be the strongest piece of evidence suggesting a sequel is in the works. But that aside, Cullen Bunn is able to deliver a script that's both humorous and strikes at the tragedy of the symbiote.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadpool: Bad Blood #1 |
May 17, 2017
show
|
|
Deadpool: Bad Blood is a graphic novel geared very much towards fans of the character's earliest adventures, and clearly the creative team are aware of that fact. The book does indeed succeed in recapturing a bygone era, warts and all. But ultimately, Bad Blood serves as a reminder of how far Deadpool has come in the decades since his debut.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadpool: Merc with a Mouth #1 |
Jul 01, 2009
show
|
|
Deadpool: Merc with a Mouth #1 is hardly the worst Deadpool story I've ever read, but nor does it include quite the level of amusement one would expect. In this very crowded Deadpool market, any new project is going to have to work quickly to prove its merit. Hopefully Gischler has something more up his sleeve for issue #2.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadpool: Suicide Kings #1 |
Apr 08, 2009
show
|
|
Suicide Kings #1 isn't a total strikeout, but it's performance so far is lackluster enough that I'm none too keen to read the remaining issues. If Benson doesn't spice things up significantly next time around, I think I'll be leaving this game early.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadpool: Wade Wilson's War #1 |
Jun 09, 2010
show
|
|
Wade Wilson's War is a reasonably entertaining read, automatically putting it above 50 or so Deadpool books this month. But that still leaves another 40 to sort through. At this point it takes something really special to keep me invested in a Deadpool project, and Wade Wilson's War doesn't quite have it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deadpool's Art of War #2 |
Dec 11, 2014
show
|
|
|
|
|
Deadpool's Secret Secret Wars #3 |
Jul 29, 2015
show
|
|
Deadpool's Secret Secret Wars accomplishes what it sets out to do - offering a fun, Deadpool-centric new spin on a classic storyline. It even succeeds in tossing in a little dramatic ambition for good measure. this issue's script grows too choppy for its own good at times, but it's still well worth reading for Deadpool lovers.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Death of Hawkman |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Death of Hawkman #1
October 6, 2016
|
|
Apart from the opening flash-forward scene, this book is almost completely focused on Adam Strange as he languishes on Earth and tries to figure out how to return to Rann. It's not a particularly flashy or exciting opening (that opening scene aside), but it does serve as a great character study of a man who simply misses his wife and the call of adventure.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Death of Hawkman #2
November 3, 2016
|
|
For a comic titled "The Death of Hawkman," the first issue featured surprisingly little of Katar Hol. That's not a problem the second time around. Marc Andreyko is able to strike a proper balance between his two leads as he works to bring them together amid the threat of another Rann/Thanagar war.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Death Of Wolverine |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Death Of Wolverine #1
September 1, 2014
|
|
The Death of Wolverine is off to a great start so far. This first issue is easily accessible to Wolverine fans of all kinds. It offers a clean, straightforward beginning to Logan's last adventure, but doesn't skimp on the bloodshed or drama. McNiven proves that he's still a giant among Wolverine artists, while Soule's approach to writing the hero instantly sets him apart from the crowd. It's actually kind of a shame that Soule is getting his start with the character by killing him off.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Death Of Wolverine #2
September 10, 2014
|
|
Charles Soule and Steve McNiven deliver another winner with Death of Wolverine #2. While this issue has its problems in terms of cover price and poor introduction scenes, it thrives on the strength of Soule's characterization and McNiven's bold, detailed take on Wolverine's final adventure.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Death Of Wolverine #3
October 2, 2014
|
|
The extra few weeks of waiting were well worth it, as Death of Wolverine #3 maintains the quality of the previous two issues. Despite some awkward exposition and the high cover price, Soule and McNiven do justice to Wolverine's final sojourn to Japan and his last team-up with Kitty Pryde. Now the creators just need to stick the landing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Death Of Wolverine #4
October 16, 2014
|
|
Unfortunately, the final chapter of Death of Wolverine doesn't quite reach the highs of the previous issues. While the slightly odd choice of final villain can be overlooked, it's harder to ignore the awkward build-up to Logan's death. McNiven's art is great, and he and Soule hit a lot of emotionally resonant beats here, but a deeper glimpse into Logan's mindset could have given this issue the extra punch it needed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Death of Wolverine: Logans Legacy |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Death of Wolverine: Logans Legacy #1
October 16, 2014
|
|
The art proves to be the biggest drawback, however. Granted, it was never going to be an easy transition going from Steve McNiven's work on Death of Wolverine to these fallout comics. Even so, these pages can be pretty rough with their overly heavy blacks and bizarre facial work. Too often facial expressions are completely mismatched with the dialogue or events in the script. In one or two cases it's not even clear what exactly happens between one panel and the next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Death of Wolverine: Logans Legacy #4
November 13, 2014
|
|
The narration can be a bit heavy-handed at times, but Bennett manages to cast Deathstrike as both a sympathetic and terrifying figure. The script also makes great use of artist Juan Doe's flair for vibrant, larger-than-life storytelling.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Death of Wolverine: The Weapon X Program |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Death of Wolverine: The Weapon X Program #1
November 6, 2014
|
|
The main point of interest in this first issue is the protagonist, Sharp. Soule makes a point of shrouding the character and his past in mystery, to the point where we don't even see his face. Depending what direction this series heads in, Sharp could develop into a compelling protagonist. There's potential with The Weapon X Program, but little of its is being realized so far.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Death of X |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Death of X #1
October 5, 2016
|
|
Ignoring the impact this issue has on one particular character, Death of X #1 doesn't disappoint. This issue doesn't offer much information that readers haven't already gleaned about this missing period, but it taps into the tragedy and and darkness surrounding the X-Men as they confront the latest threat to their existence. This issue also makes great use of its art team, proving Aaron Kuder is one of Marvel's best acquisitions in recent years.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Death of X #2
October 19, 2016
|
|
So far, Death of X is succeeding mainly on the appeal of having Cyclops back in the spotlight and in seeing Aaron Kuder tackle the X-men and Inhumans franchises for the first time. But are those elements enough to prop up a story that seems intent on playing out in such a straightforward and predictable fashion? The final two issues need to find ways to shake up the formula next month.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Death of X #3
November 2, 2016
|
|
Death of X was always limited by the fact that it's taking place well before the rest of the X-Men line, and these past two issues have done little to offset that problem or build a compelling conflict between the X-Men and Inhumans. Apart from the growing Cyclops mystery and Aaron Kuder's pages, this series isn't doing much to set the stage for an exciting finale.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Death of X #4
November 24, 2016
|
|
This mini-series didn't exactly live up to its potential. Even at a modest four issues, the conflict between the X-Men and Inhumans has felt drawn out. That doesn't change in this final issue, but it does provide a compelling look at Cyclops at his most desperate.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Death Vigil #1 |
Jul 09, 2014
show
|
|
Death Vigil #1 clocks in at 40 story pages for $3.99, which isn't too shabby at all. It's ample room to introduce the core cast, their worlds, and their ongoing struggle. eji is able to dance around the usual first issue formula by diving into the action first and deferring the setup and exposition until the Calara character enters the picture. The dialogue could use some fine-tuning at times, as certain conversations come across as a little clunky and inelegant (especially during mid-battle bravado). Regardless, this is a solid start for Top Cow's newest series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deathbed #1 |
Feb 22, 2018
show
|
|
Riley Rossmo can always be counted upon to deliver terrific art, even if the story doesn't quite measure up (see Batman: Night of the Monster Men). That's very much the case with this latest addition to the Vertigo line.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deathlok #1 |
Oct 29, 2014
show
|
|
Perkins' art is every bit as essential to the success of this new book as Edmondson's writing. Just as he did on Ed Brubaker's Captain America, Perkins is able to merge the gritty realm of war and espionage with the more outlandish elements of the Marvel Universe. The art transitions nicely between the scenes' of Hayes' quiet home life and the carnage that unfolds on the battlefield. Even Deathlok's costume design succeeds in honoring the source material while blending it with a more grounded aesthetic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deathstroke (2011) |
9 issues
show
|
|
|
Deathstroke #2
October 12, 2011
|
|
The content of these first two issues probably should have been rolled into one. Regardless, it's clear those who like their comics violent and bombastic will have plenty to love. But can Higgins, a writer with a flair for characterization elsewhere, manage something more ambitious with his protagonist over time?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deathstroke #4
December 14, 2011
|
|
Thanks to new developments in this issue, Deathstroke is nicely carving out a place for itself in the New 52. It has more than just a badass main character to rest on now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deathstroke #5
January 11, 2012
|
|
Sparse or not, Higgins doesn't neglect the characterization in this issue. He strikes a proper balance between maintaining Slade's mystique and showcasing just enough vulnerability for readers to sympathize with the character. There's plenty of big action, but this isn't a dumb book by any stretch.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deathstroke #6
February 8, 2012
|
|
Issue #6 is also interesting because Eduardo Pansica come aboard to provide finishes for Joe Bennett's layouts. Not only is it a smooth transition, the end result is actually somewhat easier on the eyes. Pansica is able to hone Bennett's work and provide more detail and variety when it comes to facial work. With DC placing such an emphasis on firm, monthly release schedules, it may suit books like Deathstroke to rely on this approach more often.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deathstroke #7
March 14, 2012
|
|
It's very doubtful that Higgins will be able to completely wrap up all the loose ends still remaining involving Slade's troubled family and his ailing body. Nor does Rob Liefeld seem overly concerned with picking up on those threads when he takes over the series. But at the very least, all signs point to issue #8 delivering the most satisfying conclusion to Higgins' run that could be expected under the circumstances.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deathstroke #8
April 11, 2012
|
|
After assisting Joe Bennett a bit earlier in the series, Eduardo Pansica takes over full penciling duties for this finale. Pansica handles facial expressions and character emotions better, which makes him particularly well suited for this quieter story. Granted, a few of his faces fall on the wonky side, but on the whole he delivers a very somber and visually arresting issue. It's just one more reason why I'm sad to see the book transitioning into a different direction.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deathstroke #16
January 16, 2013
|
|
As abrupt as the transition into the next conflict is on the final page, this issue makes it clear that Jordan will continue to provide Deathstroke with challenges and foes worthy of his reputation.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deathstroke #18
March 13, 2013
|
|
One good thing about this issue is that the final pages do suggest a deeper and more meaningful conflict on the horizon for Slade. Jordan is beginning to tie this series together with the events of Team 7. With both books on the chopping block soon, hopefully Jordan will have time to give Slade's current journey the conclusion it deserves.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deathstroke #19
April 11, 2013
|
|
Perhaps most aggravating of all is the poor characterization of Slade's son Jericho. Gone is the complex, tortured father/son dynamic. In its place is a cold, unfeeling Jericho who feels unnecessarily villainous. Between his one-note portrayal and the generally perfunctory nature of the script, there's just no reason to care about anything that unfolds here. The artwork is solid, at least, but hardly stylish enough to spice up this story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deathstroke #10 |
Sep 24, 2015
show
|
|
As neat as it is to see Deathstroke operating on such a big scale, this also speaks to one of the book's fundamental problems. It's too concerned with drawing in outside characters and conflicts and not enough with building up Slade's own world.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deathstroke (2016) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Deathstroke #1
August 24, 2016
|
|
DC's Deathstroke relaunch isn't entirely without its flaws, but already this is the most enjoyable story Slade Wilson has been involved with in some time. Christopher Priest's knack for weaving complex storylines and deep characters is serving him well, and Carlo Pagulayan's slick art gives the book a very approachable feel. Regardless of your prior attachment to the character, Deathstroke will welcome you with open, blood-stained arms.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deathstroke #2
September 15, 2016
|
|
There's a lot to like about Priests's approach to the series. His writing is intelligent and witty, and he manages to blend a gritty, military-flavored approach with some of the goofier aspects of the DCU. But the frequent chronological jumps make the dense script feel too disjointed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Deathstroke #3
September 29, 2016
|
|
It's a great take on the character, and one that finally allows Deathstroke to reach his potential as a solo player again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Defenders (2017) |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Defenders #1
June 14, 2017
|
|
The Defenders may not appeal to readers specifically hoping for a traditional take on this superhero team, but anyone who enjoyed Brian Bendis' work on books like Daredevil and Alias will be happy to see him return to this cast of characters. And with David Marquez at the helm, this series immediately gets off to a strong start.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Defenders #3
July 13, 2017
|
|
At its best, this series recalls the glory days of Brian Bendis' work on books like Daredevil and Alias. It remains incredibly satisfying to see Bendis working with these characters again, particularly given how radically their lives have shifted over the past decade. Unfortunately, this issue has an annoying tendency to get lost on pointless tangents.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Defenders #4
August 10, 2017
|
|
There's a strong case to be made for The Defenders being crowned the best-looking comic book on the stands right now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Defenders #5
September 14, 2017
|
|
Coming from the high that was The Defenders #4, this issue feels a bit underwhelming in comparison. The overarching plot is beginning to meander as Brian Bendis and David Marquez put Diamondback back into play immediately after his defeat last month.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Defenders #6
October 12, 2017
|
|
Marquez's versatility is on full display in this issue as he shifts between three distinct styles. His traditional superhero pages are as stylish and impeccably rendered as always. But Marquez shifts gears and takes a grittier, more textured approach to certain key scenes, reminding readers that this is a book set on the dark edge of the Marvel U.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Defenders #7
November 16, 2017
|
|
Like all of Bendis' current Marvel titles, The Defenders doesn't seem in any particular hurry to get where it's going, which calls into question whether Bendis can give his story a proper finale when the time comes. But as David Marquez remains the biggest draw with this series, the slow, measured approach certainly has its advantages.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dejah Thoris #1 |
Feb 03, 2016
show
|
|
Dejah Thoris #1 may be accessible to new readers, but this relaunched series doesn't do much to convince anyone to stick around. This issue is dull, plodding, and more concerned with setting up Dejah's new status quo than actually making the reader care about her plight.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Demo, Volume 2 #1 |
Feb 03, 2010
show
|
|
This issue isn't necessarily the strongest of Wood's efforts to date. The story reads very quickly and isn't necessarily as substantive as the more densely plotted issues of Demo Vol. 1 or Local. Also a bit disappointing is that the ending is fairly predictable, compared to certain past issues of Vol. 1 that genuinely surprised me in their twists and turns. But predictable and content-light though it may be, Wood still impresses with his return to Demo. Though the premise never changes, I love the fact that readers never know quite what to expect from future installments.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Despicable Deadpool |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Despicable Deadpool #288
October 25, 2017
|
|
Gerry Duggan has been writing Deadpool in one form or another for five years now. That saga has only seemed to improve in 2017. This issue continues building on the momentum of Secret Empire, with Duggan and Koblish delivering a dark, emotionally charged look at a major falling-out between Wade and the man who once called him "partner."
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Despicable Deadpool #289
November 8, 2017
|
|
Deadpool was among Marvel's best ongoing series before the Legacy relaunch, and it remains so now. Even though this arc loses a bit of momentum early on with the abrupt end to Cable and Deadpool's feud, it quickly makes up for that problem with an epic, bizarre and thoroughly entertaining showdown with Stryfe. Even after five years, this series has lost none of its charm.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Detective Comics |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Detective Comics #849
October 8, 2008
|
|
As far as I'm concerned, Detective Comics offers the only Batman R.I.P. tie-in worth reading. That has nothing to do with its tie-in status and everything to do with the fact that Dini is putting out what may be his best work on the series so far.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #855
July 29, 2009
|
|
Detective Comics is a gorgeous, gorgeous book with two of the most interesting females heroes in DC's stable. At this point, I'm glad Bruce Wayne took an extended vacation, if only because it paved the way for a series like this.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #864
April 28, 2010
|
|
No doubt many readers will be dropping Detective Comics now that Rucka and Batwoman have both departed the series. I'd urge those readers to reconsider. Detective is still in very good hands and remains one of the better Batman books on the stands.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #867
July 28, 2010
|
|
This is one of those stories where I have absolutely no idea if the Batman I'm reading is supposed to be Bruce or Dick. Accessibility be damned, the two are different enough that that should never have to be a problem. The issue also suffers from Scott McDaniel's art. I've never been a fan of his loose, angular pencils, and nothing in this issue manages to change my opinion. Scenes that should generate drama fall flat thanks to a lack of detail and lackluster presentation. I'm very excited for what's to come with Detective, but it's clear I'm going to have to suffer through a few months of boredom to get there.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Detective Comics (2011) |
23 issues
show
|
|
|
Detective Comics Annual #1
August 29, 2012
|
|
Detective Comics Annual #1 does little to push any of the characters involved forward or make changes to the Bat universe, but it does at least solidify Black Mask and a handful of other villains' places in the New 52. Hopefully Detective Comics can find a stronger sense of identity and purpose as the creative team shifts in the coming months.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics Annual #3
July 31, 2014
|
|
The latest Detective Comics Annual tells a side-story of sorts to Francis Manapul and Brian Buccellato's "Icarus" storyline. But with Manapul out of the equation, a lot of that storyline's appeal is lost.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #9
May 3, 2012
|
|
The Two-Face backup feature is no better than the main portion. Harvey's quest hinges around his apparent desire to become Gotham's D.A. again, which is just ludicrous for all sorts of reasons. The entire story is one surreal chain of events, and unfortunately Harvey doesn't look to be faring any better here than he did in Batman: The Dark Knight.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #14
November 7, 2012
|
|
I won't say that if you only read one Bat-book, to make it Detective Comics. It isn't the strongest of that pack by any stretch. But it still has its definite strengths, and when it isn't forced to reference pointless bits of continuity, it succeeds at offering a nice standalone adventure with plenty of familiar faces.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #15
December 5, 2012
|
|
Detective Comics doesn't need a pointless event tie-in to stay relevant. Layman has reinvigorated the book with his first story arc, and I look forward to what he has in store next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #16
January 9, 2013
|
|
The backup story comes in especially handy this month, as it allows Layman to continue his exploration of Ogilvy's rise to power without conflicting with his Death of the Family tie-in. This segment is a fun read, bolstered by the nonlinear approach and a strong depiction of the increasingly villainous Emperor Penguin. Andy Clarke's art is a highlight, providing plenty of dramatic facial work and character designs that are equal parts kooky and creepy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #17
February 6, 2013
|
|
While this issue didn't have a great deal to offer beyond the strong visuals, I'm hoping the end of Death of the Family backdrop will allow Layman to tackle his Emperor Penguin material more directly next month.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #19
April 3, 2013
|
|
This is not the anniversary issue Detective Comics deserved, nor the one it needed. The main tale is a disappointing blend of poor pacing, questionable characterization, and a pointless retcon of the Batman/Man-Bat relationship. The rest of the stories and the art gallery don't do much to justify the $8 cover price. Even fans of Layman's run would be better off skipping this issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #20
May 1, 2013
|
|
This definitely doesn't read like the Detective Comics of even a few months ago. But regardless of the true culprit, the end result is a very disappointing Batman comic. Hopefully a fresh storyline will put this series back on track.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #23.2
September 11, 2013
|
|
The artwork is a major selling point, at least. Neil Googe's dynamic, cartoonish style suits even this more serious version of Harley. Googe's facial work is particularly expressive, and his clean storytelling always keeps the issue humming along. This issue leaves me hoping Googe will have a presence on the upcoming Harley Quinn series, especially if Jimmy Palmiotti and Amanda Conner can return the character to her more slapstick roots.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #23.4
September 25, 2013
|
|
With the visuals steadily taking priority over the writing over time, this issue winds up being a very short read relative to most Villains Month issues. But with so many of these books burdened by needless narration and exposition, it's refreshing to see one writer willing to take the "less is more" approach to this concept.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #27
January 8, 2014
|
|
Unlike the previous Detective Comics anniversary issue, Detective Comics #27 pays proper hoamge to the Dark Knight. This issue packs in a diverse array of talent (if a little light on classic creators) for stories than run the gamut, stylistically and in terms of time period. The Gothopia segment is relatively underwhelming, but that shouldn't stop readers from checking out the fun batch of Bat-tales on offer here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #28
February 5, 2014
|
|
Unfortunately, Jason Fabok doesn't illustrate this issue, and it's probably safe to assume he's moved onto Batman Eternal by now. Aaron Lopresti fills in instead. His art is solid, but it lacks the texture and power Fabok brought to the series. If anything, he would have been better suited to the bright, shining realm of Gothopia rather than the dank halls and twisted inhabitants of Arkham.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #29
March 5, 2014
|
|
Layman does manage to deliver an effective cap to his run, so that this issue works as a larger finale. I do wish he had more space to work with. The immediate fallout of Gothopia could have used some more attention, particularly in terms of Batman's relationships with Catwoman and Poison Ivy. Still, not a bad way for Layman to pass the torch to the next creative team.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #33
July 10, 2014
|
|
With J.H. Williams no longer illustrating Batwoman, the franchise needed a new visual stunner in its ranks. Luckily, Francis Manapul is delivering the goods with Detective Comics. Each page is a sight to behold.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #34
August 7, 2014
|
|
"Icarus" has been a great debut for the new Detective Comics creative team. Unfortunately, they don't quite stick the landing with issue #34. All sense of subtlety gets thrown out the window as Batman dons his mech suit and the conflict devolves into a punch-fest.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #38
January 7, 2015
|
|
Not that the book was in bad hands during their absence, but it's good to have Francis Manapul and Brian Buccellato back on Detective Comcis. The series has returned to being one of the finest visual showpieces in the entire New 52 lineup.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #40
March 4, 2015
|
|
As for the visuals, there are no complaints to be had. This remains one of the best-looking superhero comics from any publisher. Manapul's dynamic layouts and fantastic depiction of Batman combine the best elements of J.H. Williams' Batwoman with Bruce Timm's Batman: the Animated Series designs. There's a fluidity to every page, whether it's full of violent conflict or quietly focused on a small group of characters. Meanwhile, Buccellato's colors give this book a very unique tone among the Bat books, one that gives Gotham a haunting, ethereal glow.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #47
December 10, 2015
|
|
This issue chronicles part 3 of the "Robin War" crossover, as Duke, damian and most of their fellow Robins find themselves locked up in cages like literal birds. That doesn't do much to address one of the big problems with this crossover - that it's taken a perfectly logical conflict between Gotham's government and its teen vigilantes and made one side ridiculously, needlessly villainous.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics: Futures End #1
September 3, 2014
|
|
This issue is less a direct Futures End tie-in and more a follow-up to writer Brian Buccellato's recent Detective Comics Annual #3, as Batman and Riddler team up to battle a resurgent Calendar Man.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Detective Comics (2016) |
9 issues
show
|
|
|
Detective Comics #934
June 8, 2016
|
|
DC's new Batman comic got off to a strong start last week, but Detective Comics is in even better shape with DC Rebirth. The strong emphasis on Batwoman coupled with a generally compelling team dynamic and some excellent artwork make for a worthy addition to the Batman franchise. The series' new villain isn't much to write home about, but hopefully that will change soon enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #936
July 14, 2016
|
|
While the overarching threat in this storyline isn't terribly remarkable, it offers a worthy test for this fledgling team. And that team itself is what's allowing Detective Comics to stand apart from the rest of the Batman line right now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #940
September 15, 2016
|
|
It's no easy feat to stand out when both Tom King and Scott Snyder are writing ongoing Batman comics, yet somehow James Tynion succeeds with Detective Comics. This issue easily ranks as the best Batman comic of the Rebirth era so far.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #944
November 10, 2016
|
|
In many ways, this arc serves as an ideal follow-up to James Tynion's first storyline and the "death" of Red Robin. It doesn't dwell on Tim's absence, but it does force the Dark Knight to acknowledge that loss and to question whether he and his allies do more harm than good to their city.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Detective Comics #952
March 9, 2017
|
|
For all the build-up to the debut of the League of Shadows, the organization doesn't quite live up to the hype. That's mainly because writer James Tynion IV keeps the focus almost entirely on their leader, Lady Shiva. The result is a perfectly enjoyable "Lady Shiva beats up the Batman family" story, but not one that feels particularly groundbreaking yet.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Deus Ex: Children's Crusade #1 |
Feb 10, 2016
show
|
|
There are far worse options when it comes to filling the gap until Deus Ex: Mankind Divided hits than reading this prequel comic. Deus Ex Universe #1 is a competent but largely unremarkable tie-in that doesn't do enough to make the reader connect with the characters. There are moments when the comics shows a warmth and emotion, however, and they offer hope that this series can become something more as it unfolds.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Devolution #1 |
Jan 21, 2016
show
|
|
Remender introduces some compelling idea as he explores a world ravaged by a disease that regresses humans to a more primitive state. Unfortunately, those interesting ideas become mostly window dressing in what is basically a pretty by-the-numbers post-apocalyptic tale.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dexter's Laboratory #4 |
Jul 03, 2014
show
|
|
The writing gets a little sappy as Dexter reaches his profound realization. But there's enough humor and zaniness to offset the sappy stuff.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Diablo |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Diablo #1
November 23, 2011
|
|
There's not much about Diablo #1 that overtly cries "Diablo!!!" But it is a satisfying read, and that's something far too few of the projects can ever claim.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Diablo #2
January 18, 2012
|
|
The art isn't very Diablo-esque, but again, this really isn't a flaw. Between Joseph Lacroix's moody, scratchy pencils and inks and Dave Stewart's equally moody colors, the book resembles a Hellboy comic more than anything. There are far worse franchises to recall.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dial H |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Dial H #4
August 1, 2012
|
|
Mateus Santolouco brings just the right blend of gritty harshness and bizarre imagery to the table in his art. This book looks and feels very much like a lost project from the early years of the Vertigo imprint (albeit with much better coloring). As much as Vertigo has shrunk in recent years, it's good to know that DC is still willing to publish books of that style, even if they now carry the New 52 banner.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dial H #6
November 7, 2012
|
|
Dial H #6 is a perfect showcase for the real potential of this series. It's funny and thoughtful in equal measure, and it reads very much unlike any other book in the New 52 lineup.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dial H #10
March 6, 2013
|
|
At times Alberto Ponticelli's style is too harsh and gritty to suit the tone of the story, even acknowledging that this was once intended to be a Vertigo series. His human figures can be too heavily marked by creases and shadows, especially in light of the precise, clean cover art from Brian Bolland. But the general storytelling works well, and Ponticelli never fails to render the bizarre imagery Mieville cooks up each month.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dial H #14
July 4, 2013
|
|
Hopefully the visuals will improve again as Mieville and Ponticelli move into the final stages of their Dial H adventures. This has been a wonderfully kooky book from the start, and the series has a strong chance of finishing even stronger than it began.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Die Hard: Year One #1 |
Sep 30, 2009
show
|
|
As a tie-in to the four Die Hard movies, this comic is a resounding failure. I have no doubt many buyers will throw down this issue in disgust when they realize they didn't receive what they thought they had purchased. But if you're willing to ignore the license, more or less, and just focus on an interesting crime story, Die Hard: Year One is not so disappointing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Django / Zorro |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Django / Zorro #2
December 17, 2014
|
|
There's still an appeal to this unusual pairing of Wild West heroes, but so far the series hasn't done nearly enough to capitalize on it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Django / Zorro #6
April 16, 2015
|
|
Generally Matt Wagner writes this book in the same style as his other Zorro comics, but occasionally Django's dialogue will recall a bit more of Quentin Tarantino's fiery style. If only the two sensibilities blended more evenly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DMZ |
9 issues
show
|
|
|
DMZ #46
October 14, 2009
|
|
It should be interesting to see where Wood takes the story from here. As I mentioned in my Scalped review this week, it almost seems as if Wood is building towards a big finale in the near future. However, this issue does move a little more slowly than I'd like at times, so I'm not sure just how soon that end would be coming. Still, we're seeing a lot of familiar faces at significant crossroads in their lives. DMZ is beginning to pay off in a major way for those that have followed it from the beginning.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DMZ #49
January 13, 2010
|
|
There's not much to say about Riccardo Burchielli at this point that hasn't already been said. He captures the look of a downtrodden and now war-torn DMZ like few artists could. This issue allows Burchielli a wider range than usual as events unfold on both sides of the DMZ border. Together, both Wood and Burchielli turn in one of their finest installments yet in the long-running series. Plenty of questions remain after the final page, and we can only hope that the oversized issue #50 will address some of them. Whatever the case, I can't imagine readers losing interest at this stage in the game.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DMZ #50
February 10, 2010
|
|
If the intent with this issue really is to bring in new readers, I think DMZ #50 will do a fine job of it. This comic offers fans plenty of what they like wrapped in an eclectic visual package and made accessible for newcomers as well. It isn't as meaty in terms of story as I would have liked, but this comic will certainly tide me over until Wood dives back into the escalating conflict next month.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DMZ #51
March 10, 2010
|
|
But this isn't a totally introspective chapter either. The most effective sequences come when Matty ventures out into a particularly deserted part of the city. Here, with no Liberty News chatter and less dialogue altogether, Wood crafts some powerful material that showcases the truly deplorable state the DMZ is now in. The raw emotion and sense of desolation that Wood and artist Riccardo Burchielli can generate are incredible. This is easily one of the best chapters of DMZ in many months, if not the entire series. It functions well enough as a standalone tale, but I'm more curious than ever to see what Wood has planned for Matty in the rest of the arc.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DMZ #56
August 11, 2010
|
|
Nathan Fox proves to be a good fit for the issue, tackling various points in Wilson's life with just enough visual variety to distinguish each. Credit is also due to Jeromy Cox, whose colors work towards the same end. These past two issues might have been a little more truncated than I would have liked, but it's clear "Collective Punishment" is going to be another memorable chapter of DMZ.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DMZ #57
September 15, 2010
|
|
Cliff Chiang provides the art this month, following up Neil Young's Greendale with another Vertigo project. His work is as clean and expressive as ever. That said, the slightly more angular style in this issue is a step down from his usual look, and the darker, muted colors also knock the issue a notch below Greendale visually. But if this issue is meant to be a final farewell to Amina, I'm happy with what Wood delivered. DMZ is reaching the point where readers had best get used to saying goodbye.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DMZ #58
October 20, 2010
|
|
Perhaps more so than previous chapters of this arc, issue #58 thrives on the success of its guest artist. Danijel Zezelj is the perfect artist to chronicle Decade's journey. Zezelj's own style is full of exaggerated figures and heavy lines, to the point where it resembles nothing if not industrialized graffiti. It's eerily abstract and yet impressively detailed all at once. From the opening pages where Decade silently renews his artistic quest, Zezelj draws the eye and never lets go. With one more issue to go, "Collective Punishment" hasn't worn out its welcome yet.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DMZ #65
May 18, 2011
|
|
As this series moves into the final stretch, the creative team continue to fire on all cylinders.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DMZ #66
June 22, 2011
|
|
Anyone who wants to see a creative team firing on all cylinders would do well to check out this issue. Wood delivers a fitting farewell to what may be his best DMZ creation. The issue is every bit as depressing as it should be this close to the series finale, but also tinged with a faint ray of hope. There may not always be a DMZ, but there will always be a Zee.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Doctor Doom #1 |
Oct 09, 2019
show
|
|
Doctor Doom #1 is a flawed but still engrossing start to the iconic villain's new comic book series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Doctor Fate (2015) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Doctor Fate #2
July 16, 2015
|
|
Paul Levitz is developing a charming new take on the mythos, one that blends the realm of gods and supernatural magic with a very ordinary, relatable young hero.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Fate #3
August 20, 2015
|
|
There's a lot about this series that feels familiar. This issue is the obligatory "rookie teen hero struggles to come to grip with his powers and save his city for the first time" chapter in Khalid's budding superhero career. But even if this issue doesn't break much new ground, it's executed deftly enough to succeed regardless.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Fate #5
October 22, 2015
|
|
DC has plenty of characters who can fill the Spider-Man mold, but right now it's the new Doctor Fate that's getting the job done. This series continues to offer a compelling look at an ordinary young man caught up in circumstances far bigger than he could have imagined.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Doctor Solar: Man of the Atom Vol. 3 #1 |
Jul 14, 2010
show
|
|
None of this is helped by some extremely disappointing artwork from Dennis Calero. I loved Calero's work on the X-Men Noir books, even as I acknowledged they danced a little too far into the realm of photo-referencing. Well, Calero is fully inhabiting that land now. Characters often appear traced and awkwardly posed. Backgrounds are almost nonexistent. It all leads to a very unattractive comic from an artist I know can do far better. The reprint of the original Doctor Solar #1 only illustrates how far short of the mark Vol. 3 has fallen. Doctor Solar's newest series has gotten off to a poor start, yet nothing suggests the book is fundamentally flawed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Doctor Strange (2015) |
13 issues
show
|
|
|
Doctor Strange Annual #1
September 29, 2016
|
|
Though this issue isn't written by regular Doctor Strange writer Jason Aaron, it fits in nicely with the ongoing series. Kathryn Immonen crafts a charming little tale as Clea wanders back into Strange's life in the aftermath of the Empirikul conflict. Immonen does a great job of exploring their complicated romantic history while also allowing Wong to enjoy the spotlight a bit more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Strange #1
October 8, 2015
|
|
It's high time Doctor Strange had his own comic again, and this new series certainly doesn't disappoint. It lends a touch of fun and adventure to Strange's world even as it begins building a massive new threat for the Sorcerer Supreme to contend with. It's plenty accessible to all readers, and it boasts a terrifically surreal art style courtesy of Chris Bachalo. Hopefully this book is a sign of things to come for Marvel's relaunch.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Strange #5
February 4, 2016
|
|
Chris Bachalo's surreal visual style suits the book all the more now that the tone has grown darker and Strange's magical escapades have become that much more fraught with peril. There's a whimsical quality to the storytelling here, but also a strong sense of unease and foreboding.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Strange #11
September 8, 2016
|
|
The first year of this series was an enjoyable ride, but it seems that Jason Aaron is getting to the real heart of his run in this epilogue to "Last Days of Magic."
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Strange #18
March 2, 2017
|
|
The resulting team-up shows Aaron doing what he does best on this book - pairing clever supernatural conflicts with ample amounts of black humor and a healthy dose of Strange's self-loathing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Strange #25
September 21, 2017
|
|
The issue mainly shines in the past, both because of Barber's ability to channel the grandiose tone of the Silver Age Strange comics and because these pages are illustrated by Kevin Nowlan. Nowlan's impeccably rendered art goes a long way towards justifying the cost of admission all on its own.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Strange #382
December 6, 2017
|
|
After only two issues, Donny Cates and Gabriel Hernandez Walta show every sign of becoming one of the defining Doctor Strange creative teams.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Strange #383
December 21, 2017
|
|
This series is frequently blurring the line between telling a Doctor Strange story and a Thor story, and that's not even factoring in the unexpected return of the Sentry. Yet somehow that odd intersection of characters and franchises works better than it has any right to.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Strange #384
January 18, 2018
|
|
What price will Strange pay for tapping into this level of power? That fuels an issue balanced out by equal parts magical spectacle, humorous banter and a dramatic look at a man always paving his road to hell with good intentions.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Strange #385
February 15, 2018
|
|
Even as enjoyable as the Jason Aaron/Chris Bachalo run was, I'm not sure I expected Doctor Strange to emerge as one of the biggest success stories of Marvel Legacy. Yet here we are, with issue #385 providing a satisfying cap to a thoroughly enjoyable debut for the new team.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doctor Strange #386
March 1, 2018
|
|
This issue picks up exactly where Damnation left off, with Strange playing a high-stakes game Blackjack with his very soul in the balance. The result is an entertaining story that boats real stake for our hero even as writer Donny Cates and artist Nico Henrichon have fun with the idea of a demonic casino.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Doctor Strange / The Punisher: Magic Bullets #1 |
Dec 14, 2016
show
|
|
The latest team-up between Punisher and Doctor Strange is an amusing one. The plot in Magic Bullets might be straightforward to a fault, but it's largely made up for by the fun dynamic between the two characters. But as with all Infinite Comics, this story is better experienced digitally rather than in print form.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Doctor Strange: Damnation #1 |
Feb 21, 2018
show
|
|
Damnation doesn't start off quite as strongly as Cates' first Doctor Strange story did. This issue spends little time building to or even justifying Strange's foolhardy decision, and then too much time paving the way for the larger crossover afterward. Even so, much of the charm of the monthly Doctor Strange series remains intact. Rod Reis also proves more than capable of bringing this supernatural adventure to life. Damnation looks to be a pleasant diversion for the next couple months. We'll see if it can grow into something more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Domino #1 |
Apr 11, 2018
show
|
|
If you've been waiting for Domino to branch out on her own, this new series won't disappoint. It delivers some wacky good fun and stylish visuals while also making it plain that being a super-lucky assassin isn't all it's cracked up to be. While there are some nagging storytelling flaws in this first issue, it's clear that Neena Thurman is in good hands.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Doom Patrol (2016) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Doom Patrol #1
September 14, 2016
|
|
With Rebirth, DC has the market on traditional superhero comics cornered. Doom Patrol marks a crucial foray back into more experimental types of superhero storytelling. This new series may not be for everyone. It may not even necessarily appeal to all Doom Patrol fans. But for those who want to explore the weirder side of the DCU while connecting with some lovable but damaged characters, this series will deliver the goods.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doom Patrol #2
October 13, 2016
|
|
If you like your superhero comics on the weird side, this Doom Patrol relaunch won't disappoint. Gerard Way and Nick Derington have even managed to outdo the classic Grant Morrison run in that regard.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doom Patrol #5
March 23, 2017
|
|
The creators aren't just building a new Doom Patrol, they're celebrating the legacy of the team and reminding readers what a shame it's been that they've been out of action for so long. In this era of D Rebirth, it's a very fitting approach.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doom Patrol #7
July 27, 2017
|
|
Doom Patrol is back following a brief hiatus, and the wait was well worth it. This issue manages that delicate task of honoring the franchise's roots while looking ahead to the future.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Doomed #1 |
Jun 18, 2015
show
|
|
This new series introduces a character called Reiser who undergoes a Hulk-like transformation and becomes the new Doomsday. Perhaps not the most clever premise ever to grace the printed page, but writer Scott Lobdell largely makes up for that fact with a surprisingly charming first issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Doomsday Clock |
10 issues
show
|
|
|
Doomsday Clock #3
January 24, 2018
|
|
Between the methodical pacing and the fact that the series is falling behind schedule, it's hard to blame anyone who chooses to wait for the trade. But slow or not, this series is managing to tell a very gripping story that faithfully carries the torch for the original Watchmen. And everything else being equal, it's worth reading the series simply to marvel at Gary Frank's precise, dynamic artwork.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Doomsday Clock #4
March 28, 2018
|
|
Doomsday Clock #4 doesn't do a great deal to push the series' overarching conflict forward. But it does accomplish something more vital - fleshing out the background of the new Rorschach and allowing readers to connect with the character on a deeper level. If Johns and Frank couldn't make readers feel for these characters, what would be the point of publishing a new Watchmen sequel in the first place?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Doomwar #6 |
Aug 04, 2010
show
|
|
DoomWar has been a nice treat for those Black Panther fans bored by years of lackluster storytelling. The series begins to fray at the edges in this final issue, but DoomWar still manages a decent finish. Jonathan Maberry certainly provides a mighty challenge for his two Panther heroes to overcome. My fears that the story lacked the legs to last for six issues have been assuaged. The problem is one that might be familiar to Panther readers - they overcome it a little too easily in the end. For all the massive buildup to the final battle between Doom and T'Challa, the whole thing fades away surprisingly quietly. That's not to say the series doesn't offer plenty of potential for future stories. Just don't expect this issue to devote more than a single page to the fight's aftermath. Also disappointing is how underutilized many of the guest stars were in the end. I nearly forgot the X-Men were a part of this story at times, and even Deadpool essentially keeps the bench warm in this issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dragon Age |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Dragon Age #1
March 31, 2010
|
|
Unlike most videogame comics that are just fundamentally broken, Dragon Age shows real potential to become something worthwhile. In terms of the overly speedy pacing and the needlessly stylized art, it seems as if the creative team was just overeager in this first issue. I'd like to think things will settle down in future installments and that Dragon Age might become an example by which other, similar projects can follow.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dragon Age #2
June 30, 2010
|
|
IDW's first issue of Dragon Age didn't exactly replicate the storytelling success of the game, but it wasn't a total disaster either. One of its chief problems was an overly speedy pace that failed to properly establish character relationships. But with the focus of the series shifting nearly two decades into the future and onto the daughter of Sadatt and Veness, that poor pacing becomes at least somewhat justified. The pacing is far better in this issue, with a tale that flows more naturally and features a more likable bunch of characters. On the down side, Orson Scott Card and Aaron Johnston eventually overload the script with two significant conflicts where either one alone would have sufficed. Hopefully those two divergent plot threads will eventually merge organically. Another drawback is Mark Robinson's art, which, while not terrible, is far too stylized and exaggerated to match the visuals of the game or the tone of the story. But while still rough around the edges, Dragon Age i
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Drax (2015) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Drax #1
November 5, 2015
|
|
If all you want from Marvel's new Drax comic is a fun, lighthearted adventure full of violence and space tomfoolery, this debut issue delivers the goods. The execution is made that much better by Scott Hepburn's amazingly dynamic art. However, the book doesn't show much ambition when it comes to dramatic storytelling. There's potential in exploring the darker aspects of Drax's life and personality, and hopefully we'll see this series delve into those areas.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Drax #2
December 31, 2015
|
|
These days, a superhero comic needs to do more than simply offer fun, lighthearted storytelling to stand out. That's something Drax #1 struggled with last month, but the second issue makes some progress as far as building a distinctive voice and direction for the series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dream Police #2 |
Jun 05, 2014
show
|
|
Despite these strengths, Dream Police still struggles to find its overall voice. It's hard to tell whether Straczynski is actively trying to spoof detective noir tales, but a lot of the tropes and dialogue in this series are familiar to the point of being quaint. And in some ways, the Dreamscape still comes across as a lesser version of concepts like the Matrix or Inception's dream worlds. Hopefully over time, Straczynski can refine his characterization and better establish the unique qualities of this series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Drive #1 |
Aug 26, 2015
show
|
|
Drive #1 marks another successful attempt at adapting the novel into a more visually oriented medium. While this series doesn't really break new ground, it does strike a balance between respecting the source material and taking advantage of the new format.Fans of comic book crime noir will definitely want to give this first issue a try.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ducktales #0 |
Jul 20, 2017
show
|
|
For now, at least, it's more "Donald Duck" than "DuckTales," as the focus remains squarely on Donald and his nephews and characters like Scrooge and Launchpad are completely absent. That's somewhat disappointing, but this issue still succeeds in spinning two amusing, duck-filled yarns as Donald bungles his way through various odd jobs and his nephews get into all sorts of mischief.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dungeons & Dragons |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Dungeons & Dragons #0
August 11, 2010
|
|
The Dark Sun prologue by Alex Irvine is really too short to leave any sort of impression. At six pages, the readers is given little more than a vague sense that Dark Sun is a slightly more fantastical take on Gladiator with a bit of Conan thrown in. There's little humor to be had, and the art is pretty dull to boot. In the case of either story, readers just aren't given enough material to form a solid opinion in either direction. Rogers' series looks like it could have some potential, but until I can get to know the characetrs a little better I have no idea if I should be excited for the book's release. Be glad issue #0 is only a buck. It doesn't offer enough content to justify much more than that.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Dungeons & Dragons #1
November 10, 2010
|
|
Andrea Di Vito's art is also a boon, providing clean, crisp visuals. Perhaps too clean for the seedy world where dungeons and dragons are in fresh supply. The question is how long humor and solid artwork can compensate for a lack of truly compelling cast or conflict. D&D fails to accomplish anything unique or memorable in ts first issue. Perhaps its time to break out the pen, paper, and dice and roll a few new characters who can bring some flavor to the proceedings.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dungeons & Dragons #1 |
May 05, 2016
show
|
|
Whether you're a hardcore Dungeons & Dragons fanatic or simply crave an enjoyable fantasy series about a rag-tag group of heroes battling evil and accumulating treasure, IDW's latest D&D comic will fit the bill.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
DV8: Gods and Monsters |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
DV8: Gods and Monsters #1
April 21, 2010
|
|
This is another strong debut for Wood, but at this point it's rare for the writer to have anything but. Both Wood and Isaacs manage to quickly leave me engrossed in a set of characters I had no interest in before now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
DV8: Gods and Monsters #2
May 19, 2010
|
|
Whether or not you care for the DV8 franchise, this is a mini-series well worth giving a look. The unique premise, Wood's voice, and the slick visuals all help the series stand out in the ever-crowded superhero market.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Dynamo 5 #0 |
Feb 18, 2009
show
|
|
Issue #0 does a decent job of selling Dynamo 5, even if the entire experience is over almost as soon as it begins. If this issue intrigues you enough to give the series another chance, I'd suggest skipping the boorish recap pages and start from the beginning. Jumping-on points are a poor excuse for real, honest reading.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Earth 2 |
12 issues
show
|
|
|
Earth 2 Annual #2
January 29, 2014
|
|
At long last, readers finally have answers to all their questions about the new Batman of Earth-2. This issue hit a few snags along the way and falls a bit short of Taylor's work on the main series. Even so, it sets the stage for some solid drama as Batman's role within the series continues to evolve in 2014.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Earth 2 #8
January 9, 2013
|
|
Yildiray Cinar fills in for Nicola Scott on this issue. He doesn't show quite the flair for dynamic, expressive figures that Scott does. However, his action scenes are framed well, and Robinson gives him plenty to work with as Steppenwolf and Fury unleash hell on their unwitting enemies. Visually, this series has always been on firm footing amid the New 52 catalog.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Earth 2 #15.1
September 4, 2013
|
|
This issue also succeeds in continuing the momentum of its corresponding ongoing series rather than stalling it. Levitz sets new events in motion that will have a clear impact on Earth 2 and World's Finest in the months ahead. Thankfully, not every book has to be swept up by Forever Evil or Zero Year.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Earth 2 #15.2
September 11, 2013
|
|
The meat of the story is meant to be in the flashbacks, but this material is annoyingly incomplete and truncated. We don't see enough of Solomon's (the Cyrus Gold name has apparently been retired) wife and child to care much about their inevitable demise. And these flashbacks end when Solomon is still alive and well. How he actually transforms from ordinary man to immortal zombie and avatar of the Grey is completely ignored. This issue would have been better off focused more fully on the flashbacks and providing a cohesive look at this villain's fall from grace.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Earth 2 #17
November 6, 2013
|
|
Issues like this are why DC really need to reconsider their "no recap pages" policy. It's not quite as accessible as it needs to be given the amount of new readers Taylor's name will be bringing into the fold. And really, all that would be needed is a few, simple paragraphs to provide some context for this war.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Earth 2 #18
December 5, 2013
|
|
And it's definitely nice to have Nicola Scott remaining on board the series. She has a flair for both the dramatic action sequences (especially the Superman/Flash chase) and the stark emotions of Taylor's script. Even a masked character like Batman brims with emotion. This really is among the best looking books DC is publishing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Earth 2 #20
February 5, 2014
|
|
This issue takes a bit of a hit from the fact that Nicola Scott isn't on board. Luckily, Barry Kitson and Robson Rocha do a solid job of filling in. Kitson handles the bulk of the issue, nearly matching Scott's ability to blend dynamic action with expressive character interaction. And Rocha brings a detailed, sinister touch to the Superman scenes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Earth 2 #25
July 2, 2014
|
|
Taylor also deserves credit for addressing a lingering flaw of the book by bringing characters like Alan Scott and Jay Garrick back to the forefront. For a while it seemed as though Earth 2 was becoming yet another Batman/Superman/Wonder Woman-centric comic, but this issue offers a more even focus and big moments for just about every major cast member. More and more, Taylor is finding his footing with Earth 2, while Nicola Scott's art remains as dependably expressive and cinematic as ever. A winning combination, in other words.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Earth 2 #28
November 6, 2014
|
|
In some ways Earth 2 remains superior to its weekly cousin, as it manages to stay more focused and more visually engaging.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Earth 2 #30
January 7, 2015
|
|
This isn't the most successful chapter of Earth 2 since the current status quo began, but it's not an uninteresting read either.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Earth 2 #32
March 4, 2015
|
|
Reading this issue has me less excited for the finale of World's End and more looking ahead to June, when the upcoming Earth 2: The Society series will hopefully even things out for this increasingly hectic franchise.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Earth 2: Futures End #1
September 3, 2014
|
|
The good news is that this issue succeeds better than many Futures End one-shots when it comes to the art. Eddy Barrows handled the entire issue, and he brings a sense of power and grim foreboding to every page. That said, could any of the blame for the choppy pacing be blamed on his page layouts?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Earth 2: Society |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Earth 2: Society #1
June 11, 2015
|
|
This series offers a welcome change of pace for the characters and a more streamlined story after all the flash and pizzazz of Earth 2: World's End.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Earth 2: Society #3
August 13, 2015
|
|
It's a poignant character study that simultaneously emphasizes the chaos that holds sway over Earth 2 as its people struggle to build a new world from the ashes of the old.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Earth 2: Society #4
September 10, 2015
|
|
It's a struggle for this new Earth 2 series to gain any real momentum when each issue focuses on a small handful of characters and spends most of its time locked in the past.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Earth 2: World's End |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Earth 2: World's End #2
October 16, 2014
|
|
The art could stand to be more consistent, and I wish World's End had the "one artist per issue" policy of Futures End and Batman Eternal. But even so, this latest weekly book from DC is quickly establishing itself as one worth reading.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Earth 2: World's End #5
November 6, 2014
|
|
Coupled with the constantly shifting art styles and generally loose quality to most of the pages, the execution of this book still leaves something to be desired at times. Still, there's a definite momentum even this early into World's End.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Earth 2: World's End #25
March 25, 2015
|
|
In better news, this issue manages to be surprisingly consistent in terms of visuals despite the large crew of pencillers and inkers. Much of the credit goes to Scott McDaniel, who provided breakdowns and helped ensure that everyone attacked the script from a similar point of view. The shifts between pencillers aren't nearly as jarring as they might be, and the issue feels more consistent and cohesive as a result.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
East of West |
19 issues
show
|
|
|
East of West #11
April 10, 2014
|
|
East of West sometimes reads like Jonathan Hickman's answer to Game of Thrones, what with the copious lineup of characters and the constant back-stabbery and power plays. And while the sheer visual and conceptual imagination at work in this series is usually enough to keep things afloat even when the story begins to trudge, it does seem as if the book is gaining momentum again
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
East of West #12
May 22, 2014
|
|
East of West seemed to gain some momentum in issue #11, and that trend only accelerates in issue #12. Aside from a brief flashback designed to flesh out another figurehead, Jonathan Hickman focuses his full attention on the gathering of nations this month.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
East of West #13
July 3, 2014
|
|
This time Hickman finally returns to Death and his minions after leaving them hanging in issue #10. The result is a very violent, exciting, and action-packed script. However, the more mystical material involving Wolf and Crow gets bogged down by an overabundance of dialogue in what should be a more visually-oriented sequence.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
East of West #14
July 31, 2014
|
|
As much as this series can frustrate when it goes months on end without focusing on certain characters, this issue suggests that maybe the self-contained approach is better. As Jonathan Hickman transitions between recent key developments and towards a massive war between the Seven Nations, this issue manages to feel pretty disjointed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
East of West #15
September 11, 2014
|
|
The story is well structured and executed, except for the opening segment focused on Xiaolin, which feels out of place in this context. But between Hickman's bold storytelling and Nick Dragotta's rich, imaginative, and occasionally grotesque art, there's plenty to love in this latest chapter.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
East of West #18
March 12, 2015
|
|
There's little point in complaining about a slow-paced issue of East of West. That's just the approach Jonathan Hickman has chosen to take with this series. Issue #18 is a fairly quiet addition to the series, but an interesting one all the same.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
East of West #19
May 14, 2015
|
|
The script is frequently amusing, though there's a sense of darkness that grows over time and as Babylon inches closer to becoming the dangerous man fate demands of him. This issue ranks among Nick Dragotta's best.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
East of West #23
December 31, 2015
|
|
East of West is a series that tends to change in focus and tone with just about every new issue. So after last month's bold, action-driven and almost completely text-less installment, it's not surprising to see issue #23 emphasize dialogue and character interaction over spectacle.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
East of West #24
January 28, 2016
|
|
Issue #24 ends on a high note as Hickman explores the close bond between Death and his partners and hints at monumental changes to come for this trio.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
East of West #26
May 26, 2016
|
|
It's a treat just to see these characters interact with one another, particularly whenever the devious, quick-witted Archibald Chamberlain is involved. There's a constant sense that these characters are testing each other and prodding for potential weaknesses.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
East of West #27
June 30, 2016
|
|
Hickman's script provides a nice balance between politicking and foreshadowing in the early pages and all-out chaos and bloodshed in the latter pages. Nick Dragotta's art seems a bit more rough than usual in those dialogue driven scenes (with the line-work appearing less precise and the figures unusually gaunt), but those problems quickly fade once the action heats up and Dragotta's twisted imagery comes into play.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
East of West #29
September 1, 2016
|
|
This issue wraps up the second act of Jonathan Hickman and Nick Dragotta's epic saga. It does in very satisfying fashion by delivering one of the major, long-awaited moments this series has been building towards for some time.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
East of West #31
February 9, 2017
|
|
The issue becomes a striking meditation on power, resistance and the way simple actions can have far-reaching consequences. The script is made all the more effective by its focus on a group of new characters whose fates are uncertain and not bound by any real rules.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
East of West #32
March 16, 2017
|
|
Chamberlain takes the spotlight in this issue, and the results are predictably enjoyable. It never gets old seeing the silver-tongued Chamberlain talk circles around his rivals. But here we also get a better sense of his murky background and what his end-game is in this massive, post-apocalyptic conspiracy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
East of West #33
May 25, 2017
|
|
You really have to admire this series' ability to include, significant, meaningful developments in each new issue. Even if it often takes months for any given character to cycle back into the dense narrative, no chapter feels wasted or out of place.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
East of West #34
August 3, 2017
|
|
In other words, this is a great way to wrap up the current story arc and set the stage for the next phase of this apocalyptic drama.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
East of West: The World One Shot #1
December 11, 2014
|
|
By and large, this issue is a sourcebook for the sprawling world of East of West, breaking down the various nation states and the timeline of events that have shaped the series. It's a handy resource consdieirng how dense the series can be and how many different characetrs and factions there are. But this is the sort of material that's better suited as supplemental pages in a trade paperback collection rather than a standalone product.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Echo |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Echo #1
March 5, 2008
|
|
And that's all there is to be said for now. Moore's legion of fans certainly won't be disappointed by his new project. Newcomers might not see what all the fuss is about, though. With a six week waiting period between issues, I have to recommend that curious newbies check out the numerous SiP trades first. At least then they'll be able to form a strong opinion right away.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Echo #2
April 9, 2008
|
|
I can already sense that many potential readers are losing interest in following this series on a monthly basis. I can't exactly blame them. I do think that if issues #1 and 2 were bundled together the overall impression might have been better. However, it's too late for that. I'll continue to give this book a chance for now, but I can't promise I won't join the ranks of the trade-waiters eventually.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Echo #7
October 22, 2008
|
|
I felt the art was particularly strong in this issue, mostly because Moore pushes himself beyond his normal boundaries a bit. We're treated to some great shots of the stormy desert, and even a ferocious monkey for good measure. I do often wonder if this series wouldn't benefit from a splash of color, though. On the other hand, hat would probably slow down the production process. I enjoy having such a dependable, solid series from Moore to look forward to every month, and I'm not sure color would be an entirely worthy trade-off.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Echo #8
December 10, 2008
|
|
Still, I'll take this black-and-white drama over colorful Marvel work any day. Moore is truly at home in Echo, and I sincerely hope that whatever fans he may have attracted with his Marvel books will wander this way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Echo #19
January 27, 2010
|
|
If every issue of Echo can read like this over the next year, then I have no doubt this will go down as one of the greats in the indy world.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Edge of Spider-Geddon #1 |
Aug 15, 2018
show
|
|
Edge of Spider-Geddon #1is a fun read for anyone eager to read more about Spider-Punk and his world.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Edge of Spider-Verse #1 |
Sep 10, 2014
show
|
|
Unfortunately, this issue actually suffers from being a Spider-Verse tie-in. There's a hefty amount of exposition in the script as the writers work to establish the cast, set up the showdown between Spider-Man and Mysterio, and eventually connect the dots to Spider-Verse. In the end, the conflict is left hanging so that Noir Spidey can deal with the Morlun situation. This comic leaves you wanting more, which is both good and bad in this case.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Edge of Venomverse (2017) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Edge of Venomverse #1
June 28, 2017
|
|
Edge of Venomverse #1 works fine as a sort of short, condensed take on the origin of X-23 and her first meeting with the NYX cast. It's a story that's well-suited to Ramon Bachs' murky, brooding art style. But it's not one that makes particularly clever use of the Venom element. Nor does it do much at all to build anticipation for the upcoming Venomverse crossover.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Edge of Venomverse #5
August 23, 2017
|
|
Edge of Venomverse ends its run just a sit began, telling another tale of a Marvel hero merging with the symbiote and changing very little as a result. This issue does little to take advantage of this fusion. And ignoring the Venom trappings, the characterization of Deadpool is more obnoxious than amusing. James Stokoe's art is something to behold, but that alone can't make up for the many mistakes this comic makes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ei8ht |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Ei8ht #1
February 18, 2015
|
|
Unsurprisingly, Albuquerque's art emerges as the main selling point here. Ei8ht has a fairly different aesthetic from Albuquerque's recent DC work. The line-work is a bit looser, but not necessarily less detailed. Albuquerque shows a greater range of facial work and emotional expression in this issue, and that goes a long way towards building tone and making characters like Joshua feel like fully realized people despite their aura of mystery. meanwhile, there's a clever use of color driving this book. Most panels feature only one or two hues, with each color denoting a certain time period or locale. The effect is like a more robust version of Casanova (back in the days when that series relied on monochrome art rather than full color). This series' distinctive visual style sets it apart as much as anything.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ei8ht #3
April 16, 2015
|
|
The script this month is a bit inelegantly paced, starting out slow and then cramming several key developments into teh final pages. But the overall effect is strong, as Albuquerque and Mike Johnson continue to build a fascinating world with its fair share of twists and surprises.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ei8ht #4
May 21, 2015
|
|
Artist Rafael Albuquerque continues to fire on all cylinders as the story spans millions of years and tackles everything from Nazi super-science to flying dinosaur jailbreak scenes. For his part, writer Mike Johnson keeps the script fast-paced and engaging.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ei8ht #5
June 18, 2015
|
|
Ultimately, while certain elements in this issue feel rushed, the overall emotional payoff is strong. Better still, there's the promise of more Ei8ht to come in the future. This series ceertainly warrants a sequel.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Electric Ant #1 |
Apr 07, 2010
show
|
|
Electric Ant is an interesting experiment on Marvel's part, but hardly the runaway success that their Oz and Dark Tower books have been. I fully expect this series will pick up when Mack's scripts move deeper into Garson's exploration of his own reality. I just won't count on the visual side of things to improve accordingly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Elektra (2017) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Elektra #1
February 22, 2017
|
|
Elektra's new solo comic isn't groundbreaking in any way, but it does offer an engaging look at a troubled assassin who can't seem to leave her old life behind. As with the previous volume, the art is really the big selling point. It's clean but stylish and shrouded in gorgeous color work that takes advantage of the glitzy Vegas setting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Elektra #2
March 23, 2017
|
|
Elektra's new comic isn't exactly lighting the comic book world on fire with its portrayal of the troubled assassin, but great art is usually enough to make a book stand out regardless.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Empress |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Empress #1
April 6, 2016
|
|
Empress is shaping up to be one of Millar's better creator-owned comics in recent memory. The book thrives on the strength of the art team, as it delivers a cohesive space fantasy universe with just enough quirks to stand out from the crowd. And this opening chapter serves as a great first issue. It starts the book off on an exciting note while also taking time to begin fleshing out the main characters and the struggle between a desperate mother and her overbearing husband.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Empress #2
May 5, 2016
|
|
This book is certainly fun in the way so many Millarworld comics are, but there's no reason it can't strive for more depth at the same time.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Empty Zone #1 |
Jun 18, 2015
show
|
|
If one were to combine Blade Runner, Ghost in the Shell and a few Raymond Chandler novels in a blender, the end result might be something like Empty Zones. Even with all the sci-fi comics Image is currently publishing, this new book has little trouble standing out from the crowd.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ender's Game: Battle School |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Ender's Game: Battle School #1
October 6, 2008
|
|
The issue moves very methodically, as if it's fully aware the story has years and multiple mini-series in which to be told. I imagine many readers, mainly the newcomers, will be left sorely wanting for more. Battle School #1 is a good start to what looks to be a very long and consuming investment. Unfortunately, given the problems I found with issue #1, I look forward to the prospect of reading the novels more than I do of following the comics. Mission accomplished?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ender's Game: Battle School #2
November 19, 2008
|
|
Honestly, Ender's Game: Battle School is one series I'd recommend trade-waiting for unless you already count yourself as a big fan of the books. It's an interesting and unique read among the massive glut of comics each month, but it simply moves too slowly and methodically for its own good at times.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ender's Game: Battle School #3
February 4, 2009
|
|
At this point, I'm torn as to whether I should start reading the original Ender's Game novels. I imagine they would enhance my enjoyment of the comics and flesh out some of those gray areas. On the other hand, reading the novels might blind me to the instances where the comic just doesn't tell its story well enough. At times Ender's Game seems predominately aimed at fans of the novels. But really, if you're only targeting the hardcore audience, what's the point of creating an adaptation in the first place?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ender's Game: Command School #1 |
Sep 10, 2009
show
|
|
Were I able to read this whole mini in one sitting, I'm sure Id have a blast. But as slow moving and split apart as it is, I worry Command School will have a hard time holding my interest despite its strengths.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Enter the Heroic Age #1 |
May 19, 2010
show
|
|
Enter the Heroic Age proves to be a good bargain for the price. With most of the stories succeeding at both teasing larger projects and offering cohesive adventures in their own right, this is easily Marvel's most successful attempt at the format yet. If the series in question are as good as they look in these pages, I think Marvel fans have plenty to be excited about in the coming months.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Eternals (2008) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Eternals #2
July 9, 2008
|
|
By all rights Eternals should be one of Marvel's best books. The Knaufs' last few issues of Iron Man: Director of SHIELD proved they have what it takes to stand up to the giants of the industry. And while their first two issues of Eternals are solid, they don't come together well enough to stand out from the pack.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Eternals #4
September 3, 2008
|
|
If anything, sequences like these demonstrate why the book as a whole isn't quite as good as it could be. The ending page strives for a campy pulp tone that would suit the series well if it were employed more thoroughly. With any luck, the Knaufs will come to this realization. It took them a while to come into their own on Iron Man, and by the end of their run it had become one of Marvel's best books. There's no reason why the same can't happen for Eternals.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Eternals #5
October 1, 2008
|
|
The art isn't exactly doing the series any favors now, but the core of Eternals is very appealing. The Knaufs are following up on Gaiman's plot threads much more aptly than I would have expected. While I wouldn't sugegst starting with this issue, take advantage of the slow week by catching up with Ikaris, Thena, and friends.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ether #1 |
Nov 17, 2016
show
|
|
Suffice it to say that Matt Kindt and David Rubin immediately craft a fantasy world that's both extremely inviting and wholly unique.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
EVE Online: Valkyrie #1 |
Oct 15, 2015
show
|
|
In some ways there's a predictable, almost textbook quality to Ran's origin as she encounters adversity and rises above. However, Wood includes enough flourishes to give the book its own flavor.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Event Leviathan #1 |
Jun 12, 2019
show
|
|
Event Leviathan #1 has mood to spare, but it doesn't give this mystery series the early momentum it needs.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Everafter #1 |
Sep 07, 2016
show
|
|
Fables fans can breathe easy, as Everafter looks to be a worthwhile continuation of the franchise. This new series pays homage to the past while also offering its own fresh and exciting take on these characters. The only flaw holding this book back is that the art, while plenty detailed, is disappointingly plain and lacking in style. But to be fair, the original Fables took some time to find its footing in that regard, too.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ex Machina |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Ex Machina #37
June 18, 2008
|
|
Vaughan also begins to connect back to past events, leading me to believe a big payoff is on the horizon. I assume it has to be coming sooner or later, as this series has a mere 13 issues left. That's a sobering thought. Good thing the series is in no danger of stumbling so far in its final stretch.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ex Machina #41
April 22, 2009
|
|
I sincerely hope we don't have to wait long for issue #42. As the book enters its final year I find myself more excited about the plight of Mayor Hundred and friends than ever. Making us wait another three or four months would just be cruel.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ex Machina #42
May 20, 2009
|
|
Ex Machina isn't moving along quite as fast as it could be. Though there are still 8 issues left, it feels like Vaughan could wrap this story up in half that time if he so chose. But as engrossed as I am at the moment, I'd hate to suggest he hurry things along. Let's just hope this improved shipping schedule isn't merely a passing fad.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ex Machina #43
June 17, 2009
|
|
Vaughan's script leaves us in agonizing anticipation of the next chapter. I don't exactly relish even a month-long wait, but there's no question Vaughan and Harris continue to deliver with every issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ex Machina #44
August 19, 2009
|
|
Tony Harris' art continues to shine in this arc. Whereas past storylines saw Harris' work vary in quality, he has been far more consistent lately. Couple that with the fact that Vaughan is throwing an increasingly bizarre and memorable series of visual requests at Harris, and you have an issue whose art ranks among the best in the series. That goes for the script, as well. This finale is easily one of the better issues of a series that has never, ever been bad. If Vaughan and Harris manage to keep improving in their final storyline, we could be looking at a truly classic finish for this series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ex Machina #45
September 16, 2009
|
|
Luckily, Vaughan doesn't completely ignore the developments of last issue or the newly empowered Suzanne Padilla. Vaughan continues to build on the growing conspiracy against the mayor, which is good. But as for Padilla herself, I'm not quite sold on her new role. She seems a bit two-dimensional as a villain, and I hope Vaughan has bigger plans for her than this issue might indicate. The problem with knowing (more or less) how a series ends is that the climax is in constant danger of fizzling out. That said, this is Ex Machina we're talking about, and Vaughan has never given us any reason to doubt him on this book. As long as Vaughan and Tony Harris maintain their creative synergy in the remaining five issues, I see no reason not to expect a finale to rival Y: the Last Man.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ex Machina Special #4 |
Mar 11, 2009
show
|
|
Overall, this is a nice little appetizer as I wait for more Ex Machina. I just hope the chefs won't be working in the kitchen too much longer. I'm still hungry.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Excalibur #1 |
Oct 29, 2019
show
|
|
Excalibur is another worthwhile addition to Marvel's Dawn of X relaunch, one that blends the old and new.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Existence 3.0 #1 |
Dec 03, 2009
show
|
|
If you're not already on the Existence 2.0/3.0 bandwagon, be sure to keep your eyes peeled for the eventual trade. And don't be surprised when this blockbuster movie adventure gets plucked by Hollywood and turned into an actual blockbuster movie.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Exit Stage Left: The Snagglepuss Chronicles #1 |
Jan 04, 2018
show
|
|
A lot of DC's recent Hanna-Barbera revamps are more interesting curiosities than must-read stories. But just as he did with The Flintstones, Mark Russell is able to overhaul a cartoon icon in a way that serves as profound commentary on contemporary civilization.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Extraordinary X-Men |
12 issues
show
|
|
|
Extraordinary X-Men #2
November 18, 2015
|
|
Extraordinary X-Men has a ways to go before it lives up to that title. Too much about the book feels familiar and played-out in light of past X-Men stories. The plodding pace and unnecessary focus on rebuilding the team don't help. However, Lemire's characterization is strong enough that there's hope the series will find its way once it moves beyond these initial conflicts and into something more exciting and unpredictable.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Extraordinary X-Men #4
December 23, 2015
|
|
Extraordinary X-Men took way too long to bring its cast together, but now that it has the series is quickly reaping the rewards. It's clear there's a lot of potential to mine in this eclectic mash-up of X-Men favorites and newer takes on iconic characters. The addition of Sinister to the mix certainly doesn't hurt. The thing that would most helps this series now is a shift in art style to something that can accommodate the quieter scenes as well as the outlandish ones.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Extraordinary X-Men #5
January 14, 2016
|
|
Extraordinary X-Men is somewhat less than extraordinary when it comes to plot. The series is still fighting that uphill battle to finds its voice and offer readers a fresh, exciting direction.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Extraordinary X-Men #6
January 27, 2015
|
|
Extraordinary X-Men had a rocky start in its first few months, but things are looking up for the series as it begins its second story arc. Jeff Lemire is beginning to dig deeper into his cast of characters and push them in interesting new directions. The change in artist also helps the book's prospects. Hopefully this upward trend will continue as the new arc unfolds.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Extraordinary X-Men #7
February 18, 2016
|
|
Guest artist Victor Ibanez continues to impress with his lively figure work and detailed environments, and hopefully he'll remain a fixture on the series. Unfortunately, this issue doesn't make any better use of the Weirdworld setting than the previous one did.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Extraordinary X-Men #8
March 16, 2016
|
|
It seems a little soon to be kicking off a crossover among the three core X-Men books when all three series are still trying to establish their voice and build a compelling new status quo for the franchise. And it's not surprising that Extraordinary X-men is generally at its best when it's focusing on the team's interpersonal drama rather than the impending clash with Apocalypse. This crossover won't succeed unless it can find ways to shake up the familiar X-Men vs. Apocalypse formula.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Extraordinary X-Men #9
April 21, 2016
|
|
Whether it's a collective of Iron Man-spawned A.I. or super-evolved Inhuman monsters, this issue offers a compelling glimpse of the Marvel Universe in the far future. But maybe a little more plot momentum next time?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Extraordinary X-Men #10
May 26, 2016
|
|
This issue is at its best when Jeff Lemire focuses on the strain Storm feels in confronting an uncertain and very grim future for her people. That's when this story has the gravitas it needs.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Extraordinary X-Men #12
July 28, 2016
|
|
The "Apocalypse Wars" crossover has really fizzled out over time. This issue is ostensibly the final chapter in EXM's portion of the crossover, but there's nothing particularly final or decisive about the events within.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Extraordinary X-Men #13
August 24, 2016
|
|
"The Apocalypse Wars" didn't really do Extraordinary X-Men any favors, and the series is still struggling to find its footing in the immediate aftermath. The visual presentation is improved, and Lemire's characterization is generally entertaining, but the various intertwining conflicts aren't much to write home about at the moment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fables |
16 issues
show
|
|
|
Fables #81
February 11, 2009
|
|
And not enough can be said about the art in this arc. Willingham has mentioned how he has started to allow Mark Buckingham more freedom in his page layouts, and I think this has been a tremendous boon to a series that already looked pretty darn good. The emotional qualities of this issue wouldn't have been so palpable if not for Buckingham's pencils. And then there's the little matter of this being James Jean's final issue as cover artist. This cover is certainly one of the more complex and intricate Jean has turned in. Jean has helped define this book in a way few cover artists ever have, and I'm going to sorely miss him as the series continues on. This is an issue of goodbyes, but also one of new beginnings. I'm pretty confident that Fables can only get more interesting from here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fables #82
March 11, 2009
|
|
I was hoping for "The Dark Ages" to finish off on a high note, as I'm none too excited at the prospect of a three-way crossover. I hope I don't find myself in a situation where I'm forced to go four straight months without a truly stellar issue of Fables. Even if I do, it's going to take something far worse than this entertaining but underwhelming story to turn me away.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fables #83
April 15, 2009
|
|
So far so good. I'm liking where this Fables crossover is going. That said, the real test will come when Jack of Fables and The Literals join in on the fun. Until then, I can't allow myself to be more than cautiously optimistic about the project.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fables #84
May 13, 2009
|
|
As much as I despise Jack, I can't claim this issue was a total waste. Still, "The Great Fables Crossover" seems to have hit a major stall in its second act. Hopefully I can turn to Jack of Fables next time and receive everything I didn't get out of this issue - more adventure and less Jack being chief among those things.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fables #85
June 10, 2009
|
|
I'm also enjoying the silly dynamic between the human Fables and animal Fables on the Farm lately. Silly is the name of the game when it comes to this issue, except when Rose is involved. I like where Bill Willingham and Matthew Sturges are taking her character. I'm just not sure I like that Jack had to be so heavily involved in her downward spiral. Overall, there are bits and pieces of this issue I liked quite a bit. It's a shame the larger crossover had to get in their way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fables #86
July 15, 2009
|
|
I've said many times that Fables became more exciting and unpredictable after the end of "War and Pieces". This issue is a shining example of the creative avenues Willingham is able to explore now that practically anything goes in this universe. If you've fallen off the Fables wagon in 2009, pick yourself up and give it another go.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fables #87
August 12, 2009
|
|
It's certainly nice to have Mark Buckingham back where he belongs after so many months away. Buckingham returns to a more familiar art style compared to what he offered on Jack of Fables, with wide pages and storybook collages forming the borders. Buckingham's return lends the book a comfortable sense of familiarity. With the series now back on track, Willingham and Buckingham can resume shocking and awing as the series builds toward issue #100.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fables #88
September 16, 2009
|
|
Overall, this is one of the strongest issues of Fables I've read in a long time. There is literally no excuse for lapsed readers not to come back and remind themselves why they loved Fables so much in the first place.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fables #89
October 14, 2009
|
|
But other than that, I loved this issue. Fables is just getting better and better by the month. Artist Mark Buckingham is firing on all cylinders. New characters are standing tall and carrying the burden of the spotlight with ease. Fables is in a great state right now, and I once again feel the need to implore lapsed readers (that includes you, Phillips) to get caught up and see what you've been missing lately.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fables #90
November 11, 2009
|
|
But in any case, thick lines can do very little to dampen my enthusiasm for a resurgent Fables. The series continues to engross me with every issue of "Witches", and I very much look forward to the finale next month.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fables #92
January 20, 2010
|
|
But I'll manage. Willingham delivers a fun and whimsical story. Even better, David Lapham settles in for a brief guest stint, and his pencils perfectly suit the tone of the story. Despite his tendency to take on darker stories, Lapham is equally skilled at humor and lighter conflicts. Between the two creators, Fables fans should find enough to sustain them until the series gets back to the Mr. Dark conflict.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fables #94
April 14, 2010
|
|
Though it continues to move a little slower than I would like, I'm nonetheless pleased to see Fables putting itself back on track. Issue #100 isn't so far away now, and this new arc shows every sign of being an enjoyable build-up to the next watershed moment for the series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fables #96
June 16, 2010
|
|
This isn't a "bad" storyline, necessarily. It's just a slow, plodding flashback tale that kills the pacing of the series at the exact point when it should be ramping up. All I can do is keep my fingers crossed that the flashback will end soon and Rose Red will get her lazy butt out of bed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fables #100
December 31, 1969
|
|
Finally, this issue includes materials for both a Fables-themed board game and a puppet theater. These are... interesting inclusions, but it's difficult to imagine many readers doing more than quickly glancing at the two sections and moving on. But while the bonus content in this issue could have been a bit more consistent, it's hard to argue Fables #100 doesn't offer plenty of bang for the buck. More importantly, it serves to inject some energy back into a book that's been flagging for too long.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fables #111
November 30, 2011
|
|
The art remains solid despite the fact that Shawn McManus steps in to provide finishes on some later pages. There's little to distinguish McManus from Mark Buckingham in most cases, which helps the book maintain a cohesive feel. However, one element that is missed is the altered coloring for the Oz segments. There's now less to distinguish the two halves of the tale visually. But there are far worse problems to have than too much consistency.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fables #150
July 23, 2015
|
|
Fables #150 wraps up the series about as well as can be expected given how unfocused it's been of late. The main story is hindered by the handling of the final Rose Red/Snow White showdown and the fact that the former's motivations are never entirely clear. However, that story still includes a number of memorable moments along the way. Moreover, it's accompanied by a wide array of backup tales that both enrich the main story and provide proper farewells for a host of characters. It's not perfect, but this issue offers a bittersweet farewell to a Vertigo mainstay.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fables: The Wolf Among Us |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Fables: The Wolf Among Us #1
January 14, 2015
|
|
With the core Fables series ending in a matter of weeks, it's good to know we'll have at least one quality Fables comic on the stands for the foreseeable future. The Wolf Among Us is an enjoyable look back at a simpler time in the series' timeline. It combines familiar elements with a strong noir approach. And even if the art has its issues, the rotating team of pencillers keep the script humming along. Fans of the franchise should definitely give this comic a look.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fables: The Wolf Among Us #2
February 12, 2015
|
|
This interplay of seedy drama and charming fairy tale tropes defines Fables, and it's good to see that it persists even in this prequel. Fans of the franchise really won't want to miss this comic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Faces of Evil: Kobra #1 |
Jan 28, 2009
show
|
|
Once again, this issue sets up a compelling story and then snatches it away from readers. Thankfully, the issue offers a more or less complete story, unlike the glorified teaser trailer that was Faces of Evil: Solomon Grundy. Brandon accomplished what he set out to do, which was to pique my interest in future Kobra stories. I just wish I knew when and where to expect the snake's return.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fade to Black #1 |
Mar 17, 2010
show
|
|
Fade to Black isn't a total lost cause, but so far it plays out in a far more generic fashion than any book involving cannibals has a right to. I hope to see both creators push for a more unique style, or at least a stronger execution, in future installments.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fairest #1 |
Mar 07, 2012
show
|
|
Phil Jimenez lends a much different aesthetic to the Fables universe with his art. It's certainly much more detailed and intricate than readers have come to expect from the various books. And though I'm rarely fond of Jimenez's pencils when inked by Andy Lanning, the colors smooth out the thick, black lines enough to balance out the combination. However, while detail is all fine and well, this issue lacks that whimsical storybook quality that defines Fables. Mark Buckingham's art succeeds not because of minute detail, but because it captures the look and fell of these popular fairy tales while dragging them kicking and screaming into the modern world. It would be nice to see a little more of that quality from the visuals in future issues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Falcon (2017) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Falcon #1
October 11, 2017
|
|
This new series shows some potential as it attempts to chart a new course for Sam Wilson, but the lackluster execution makes it a tough sell for all but hardcore Falcon fans. This first issue struggles to properly balance the Marvel Universe with real-world drama, and the dialogue has a tendency to become overwrought and stilted. If Sam is going to thrive as he returns to his old role, it's not going to be a quick or easy transition.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Falcon #2
November 9, 2017
|
|
It's never a great sign when the title character is the least interesting player in their own book. That's turning out to be the case for this new Falcon series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Falcon #3
December 14, 2017
|
|
When even Joshua Cassara's gritty art shines better in the supernatural-focused scenes, maybe it's time to transition this creative team to a different project.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fall of the Hulks: Alpha #1 |
Dec 03, 2009
show
|
|
Overall, Parker and Pelletier make a fine team, and it's a shame we won't be seeing more of them as Fall of the Hulks progresses. The Alpha issue isn't a perfect beginning to the event - it provides an awful lot of setup for what seems (for now, at least) to be relatively little payoff. But in and of itself this issue entertains, and that's more than I've been able to say about a lot of Hulk stories lately.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fall of the Hulks: Red Hulk |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Fall of the Hulks: Red Hulk #1
January 27, 2010
|
|
Red Hulk haters take note - the character is far from the weak link in this issue. If it weren't for some lousy dialogue and the continuously loopy shipping schedule of Fall of the Hulks, this could easily rank as one of Marvel's better books this week. I expect the latter problem will iron itself out sooner or later, but it remains to be seen if Parker can find a better handle on A-Bomb and the other weaker characters in this series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fall of the Hulks: Red Hulk #2
February 24, 2010
|
|
Apart from these flaws, the issue just doesn't come together in an altogether satisfying manner. The script shifts between flashbacks and present day sequences frequently. It covers several different conflicts at once. In its worst moments this book reads more like a distillation of everything Greg Pak and Jeph Loeb weren't able to fit into their own books. Issue #1 focused on the rebirth of Cosmic Hulk. This issue is all about Thundra and Lyra. Next month is A-Bomb's turn. Where's the connective tissue? Parker has proven by now he has the talent to take point on these stories. I would love to see him take on a Hulk book that allows him more room to breathe and tell a complete and satisfying story. As it is, this issue almost gets us there.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fallen Angels #1 |
Nov 12, 2019
show
|
|
|
|
|
Fantastic Four (1998) |
13 issues
show
|
|
|
Fantastic Four Annual #32
July 8, 2010
|
|
Hitch's widescreen art is a plus, but it also suffers from the same flaws much of his post-Ultimate work has in terms of consistency and clarity. In a sense this issue reads like a leftover tidbit from Millar's FF stint. It's earnest in what it sets out to do, but the substance isn't there.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #551
November 7, 2007
|
|
It's difficult not to view McDuffie's last arc as a placeholder before Millar and Hitch, but don't discount it without giving it a try. McDuffie and artist Paul Pelletier are capable of some good, solid FF stories, and I think this arc will prove to be their crowning achievement on the book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #552
December 12, 2007
|
|
The worst part for me came at the end, when I suddenly realized McDuffie only has one issue left to wrap up both the current storyline and his entire run on the title. Maybe he can pull the rug out from underneath his readers at the last moment, but I really doubt it at this point. McDuffie's run has been far from the worst to besmirch the title over the years. I was just hoping for more from the writer than Black Panther wrestling the Silver Surfer in space. February and Mark Millar can't come soon enough for me.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #553
January 30, 2008
|
|
There isn't much else to be said about this issue. The art is competent as always, and I'm particularly impressed with Paul Pelletier's design for future Doom's armor. In the end, this issue and arc aren't meant to do much more than tide us all over until Millar's first issue. It does that well enough, so I bid farewell to McDuffie. Now how about transferring him over to Black Panther, Marvel? That series could use a few more intergalactic wrestling matches.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #554
February 13, 2008
|
|
That's all there really is to hold against Fantastic Four #554 anyway. A lot of little things keep it from reaching Ultimates or early-Civil War level. I'm still incredibly excited about the next 15 issues, and you should be too.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #555
March 12, 2008
|
|
I really can't think of a reason why someone wouldn't want to read this series now. Then again, some people give me the impression they just don't like reading good comics. Regardless, Millar and Hitch are making good on their promise to morph Fantastic Four into the World's Greatest Comic Magazine again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #557
May 21, 2008
|
|
Easily the highlight of this issue is seeing Hitch flex all his muscles once more. The fog of war is lifted and the issue is much better off for it. While Hitch can't seem to draw classic Iron Man to save his life, every other person, place, and thing in this issue is flat out gorgeous. While still not as satisfying as the first two issues, Millar and Hitch deliver a major improvement that leaves me eager to see where the next arc may lead us.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #559
August 13, 2008
|
|
It always helps to have Hitch on the job. I'm not sure how many other artists at Marvel could properly depict the scale and variety of characters Millar throws out. Hitch, when he hits the mark, turns in some of the best work of his career. And while he usually does hit this mark, there are troublesome flashes. Certain pages, most notably a conversation between Sue and Elyssa, appear rushed. Carefully placed lines suddenly become haphazard. I hate to think of this series falling to Ultimates-level delays, but I hate even more to think that Hitch is rushing in order to turn in pages faster. The wait for new issues is hard to bear, and that's precisely why I want to see top-level work from both creators when they do finally arrive.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #582
August 25, 2010
|
|
Neil Edwards' art has improved greatly in these last two issues, but it's still hampered by oddly framed panels, some inconsistent figure work, and the occasional and downright odd facial expression. The series should benefit greatly from the arrival of Steve Epting next month. After a year of highly enjoyable storytelling, the real payoff is about to begin.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #583
September 22, 2010
|
|
"Three" has gotten off to a slightly more understated start than I might have expected, but I'm plenty psyched for the remaining issues of this arc. Hickman looks to be making good on the better part of two years of build-up. With Epting providing a bit of artistic stability to the series, Fantastic Four has nowhere to go but up from here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #585
November 24, 2010
|
|
Steve Epting's arrival as new regular artist hasn't been quite the boon for the series as might have been expected sadly. Epting's artistic strengths simply lie in other realms, such as the darker, espionage-tinged world of Captain America. He doesn't fully capture the bold, larger-than-life, Kirby-esque quality of Dale Eaglesham's issues. While certain sections of the book are visually stunning, particularly those set in Atlantis, scenes involving Galactus and other loftier concepts lack the aura of the fantastic. It's an unfortunate flaw in an otherwise stellar story arc.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #587
January 25, 2011
|
|
The death in this issue is surprising in various ways. At the moment it's still not entirely clear what ramifications this issue will have for the Fantastic Four franchise as this series draws to a close and F.F. begins. But considering that Hickman's run so far has been thoroughly enjoyable and masterfully plotted, the sadness stemming from this death should be tempered with a healthy dose of excitement for the future.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #600
November 23, 2011
|
|
Again, the main story segment in Fantastic Four #600 isn't as cohesive or gripping as it should be, but as a complete package this issue delivers the goods. $8 is a lot to ask for one issue, yes. But for an issue that could just as easily qualify as a trade in its own right, it's not so bad.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fantastic Four (2012) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #11
August 14, 2013
|
|
One can't judge the future of Fantastic Four based on the current creative arrangement, but so far the prospects for a series only plotted by Fraction aren't looking bright.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #12
September 11, 2013
|
|
At this point I'm, hoping the appearance of Karl Kesel as the new regular co-writer next month can help smooth things over. This series has lost a lot of momentum in a short amount of time, even as Fraction's overall plan for the two FF books seems to be entering a critical phase.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #13
October 16, 2013
|
|
Again, the diminished humor is a concern, with only a brief scene between Johnny Storm and Bentley "Wiz-Kid" Whitman offering any real levity. But this issue doesn't necessarily call for that approach considering the darker nature of the conflict. We'll see if the remaining few issues can invoke more laughs, or if it's all grim and serious from here on out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #14
November 21, 2013
|
|
Kesel finds more success with his villains, as we see the alternate Earth's Doom, Annihilus, and Kang plot against the FF and bicker among themselves. This is a fun dynamic that I wish had been explored more in previous issues. Better late than never The issue brings us one step closer to Doom the Annihilating Conqueror, and on that font, at least, the series is moving towards a memorable conclusion.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #15
December 19, 2013
|
|
Finally, the change in artist has hurt this series as well. The currently storyline's lack of emotional weight and excitement isn't helped by the fact that the figures are uniformly stiff and awkward and the facial expressions forced. At this point, it's just as well this series is due for a relaunch soon. It needs a fresh start.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fantastic Four (2014) |
9 issues
show
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #1
February 26, 2014
|
|
In a lot of ways, Robinson and Kirk provide a very comfortable and familiar take on the Fantastic Four with this first issue. And considering how the previous series started to lag in its final months, it's not unwelcome to see the series revert to what has worked in the past. But what will really defined this run, for better or worse, is the darker material lurking beneath the surface. Assuming the book doesn't become too mired in darkness, this has all the makings of a memorable creative pairing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #6
June 26, 2014
|
|
The main appeal with this issue is in seeing Leonard Kirk's somber, moody visuals transition to Dean Haspiel's Silver Age throwback style. At least we can expect more of that as this arc progresses.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #8
August 14, 2014
|
|
It's bizarre to see the Avengers battling Sue Storm after all their history and shared adventures, but in general this issue is effective in piling on the despair and further maneuvering the team to their breaking point.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #9
August 28, 2014
|
|
This is probably my favorite issue of James Robinson's Fantastic Four run so far. And not for any one, particular reason. The series has reached a point where the characters are still embroiled in the darkness of this massive anti-FF conspiracy, but there's also hope on the horizon and a sense of new possibilities being explored.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #642
January 21, 2015
|
|
At least the pointless fighting looks spiffy thanks to Leonard Kirk's art. Kirk delivers some of his strongest work on the series so far, with clean, refined figures and emotionally charged facial work. Based on the setup in this issue, it seems that Robinson will be giving his collaborator plenty of eye-catching material to work with over the next few months.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #643
February 26, 2015
|
|
Between the big character moments and the always impressive visuals from Leonard Kirk, "The End is Fourever" is becoming quite a satisfying read.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #644
March 12, 2015
|
|
This issue doesn't lack for excitement or spectacle. Leonard Kirk has somehow achieved a new level of visual flair with his refined, larger-than-life pencils. He's definitely helping the series go out with a bang.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #645
April 29, 2015
|
|
There's no telling how long Marvel will go before publishing a new Fantastic Four comic. But at the very least, the current series was sent out with style and grace. The FF received the happy ending they needed after being put through the wringer for so long.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fantastic Four #1 |
Aug 08, 2018
show
|
|
|
|
|
Fantastic Four: The Lost Adventure #1 |
Feb 13, 2008
show
|
|
This issue is a no-brainer for fans of the classic FF. Less dedicated readers may scoff at the $5 price tag, and rightly so. Marvel packs in both Kirby's original pencils and a reprint of Fantastic Four #108, but not every reader is going to find those extras worth the price hike. The latter addition especially is a pretty poor read, and only serves as a testament to the fact that Marvel should have published Kirby's story as it was originally intended. This is likely the last collaboration between Lee and Kirby we'll ever see, and I just find myself wishing for more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Far Sector #1 |
Nov 13, 2019
show
|
|
Fast-paced and enticing, Far Sector #1 kicks off DC's newest Green Lantern epic in style.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fatale |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Fatale #7
August 15, 2012
|
|
You can't go wrong with a Brubaker/Phillips collaboration. Even so, Fatale is making a strong case for being the best of their projects. It combines all the familiar elements with a new and distinctly original horror slant.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fatale #11
January 2, 2013
|
|
Sean Phillips is also in fine form with this issue. Brubaker's script allows for a strong sense of variety. The rural setting is a nice change of pace, and the eerie, surreal desert scenes in the flashback and the dark, haunted panels of the opening and closing scenes are an effective contrast. The concept behind this series is a really great one, and that seems to be reflected in the output of both creators as they continue to deliver some of the strongest collaborations yet.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Father Robot #1 |
Jul 17, 2014
show
|
|
|
|
|
Fathom |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Fathom #1
August 13, 2008
|
|
If you've been looking forward to Fathom's return, I suspect this issue is just what you're looking for. It looks and feels much as it did under Michael Turner's hands, which is a fitting tribute to the late artist. As for me, Fathom pretty much sums up everything I don't want from my comics. I'm prepared to send this series to its watery grave.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fathom #3
October 29, 2008
|
|
Without Michael Turner, I really don't think Fathom has anything to offer the industry. I'd like to cast this issue off into the ocean where it belongs. I figure the dolphins and sea turtles can't choke on it any worse than I have.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fear & Loathing In Las Vegas #1 |
May 26, 2016
show
|
|
The comic is a must read for Thompson fanatics, but maybe seek out Top Shelf's complete hardcover instead.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fear Agent #28 |
Jul 28, 2010
show
|
|
It falls upon Hilary Barta's "Tales of the Fear Agent" backup to lighten the mood. The art is very solid, at least in the main segment. Mike Hawthorne and Tony Moore collaborate on the pencils. As with earlier issues, the two achieve a style that falls pretty close to Moore's solo work and captures much of the same energy and detail. As for the backup, though, the heavy blacks and distorted figures don't mesh with the quirky sci-fi setting of Fear Agent. Fear Agent is finally back and in fine form. Just expect to be depressed, rather than amused, by the events of this issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fear Itself |
8 issues
show
|
|
|
Fear Itself #3
June 1, 2011
|
|
Fear Itself is developing into a disappointingly lackluster event after a strong first issue. The question is this - are we still trapped in an overly long setup phase, implying that the story will pick up once Odin and the Serpent make their movies? Or is this all there is to the Fear Itself equation? Hopefully the former is true, and the second half of Fear Itself will address the many missteps of the first.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fear Itself #4
July 6, 2011
|
|
With four issues down, it's looking doubtful that Fear Itself will ever truly live up to its potential. But with the promise of epic carnage in issue #5 and some real answers regarding the nature of Odin's relationship to the Serpent, there's no reason to bail on this series now
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fear Itself #5
August 10, 2011
|
|
Fear Itself as it stands doesn't operate as a proper metaphor for our times like Civil War did. I wish it did, and that the worst Western Civilization had to worry about these days was big people whacking each other with hammers in the streets. I truly hope that these last two issues will finally achieve that deeper emotional connection that has only been sporadically apparent across Fear Itself and its tie-ins.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fear Itself #6
September 14, 2011
|
|
Though still annoyingly uneven as a whole, the better portions of Fear Itself #6 help to redeem the series. It's almost certainly too late for this event to live up to its original potential, but there's a good chance it will end on a strong note as all sides converge for one last, epic brawl.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fear Itself #7
October 19, 2011
|
|
Perhaps one reason the main story feels so disjointed is that a significant amount of the extra pages are devoted to epilogue segments. The sad truth is that no event storyline truly ends, but merely sets up the next big thing down the road. Fear Itself is guiltier than most in this regard. There are no less than four epilogues designed to pave the way for new books launching in the coming weeks. Other than Jason Aaron's Incredible Hulk prologue, none of these segments are very enticing. Rather than learn what Marvel's heroes and villains are up to after the dust of Fear Itself settles, it would have been nice to see the more immediate fallout.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fear Itself: Black Widow #1
June 29, 2011
|
|
The issue never really carries any sense of conflict, even when Natasha seems to be in dire straits. Bunn could have used the backdrop of Fear Itself more effectively and done more to explore Natasha's present state of mind. But as a fun, simple adventure starring the inimitable Black Widow, this one-shot succeeds. Whether that's actually worth $3.99 is up to you.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fear Itself: Sin's Past #1
April 20, 2011
|
|
There is some new material to be had, at least. Writer Jim McCann and artist Stefano Landini deliver a framing sequence that sees the current Steve Rogers arrive at the scene of a post-bombing Statue of Liberty. here McCann covers Sin' actual origin and indoctrination by her father. This material is far more useful and relevant. The problem being that Ed Brubaker already covered the same exact material in near identical fashion when he brought Sin back into the fold in 2006. The moral of the story is to take that $5 and just devote it towards Brubaker's Cap. This issue doesn't offer much beyond simple nostalgia value for fans of the '80s-era Cap stories.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fear Itself: The Worthy #1
July 27, 2011
|
|
$3.99 for some 50 pages of story isn't a bad deal, even if some segments are markedly better than others. The real problem is that these eight stories are all available for free on Comixology. Marvel fans owe it to themselves to at least check out the Hulk and Thing tales, but only those without access to Comixology should consider paying for the material.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fear Itself: Fearsome Four |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Fear Itself: Fearsome Four #1
June 8, 2011
|
|
The combination of artists Michael Kaluta, Ryan Bodenheim, and Simon Bisley also adds to the jumbled feel. Bisley's exaggerated work at least fits the nightmarish landscape. Kaluta's scratchy pencils and Bodenheim's more refined pages are constantly at war with each other. As with the script, the series would be better off sticking with one visual approach or the other. Either way, Fear Itself: Fearsome Four needs to find its voice and its team dynamic soon.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fear Itself: Fearsome Four #3
August 17, 2011
|
|
The art also falters this month, which is disappointing considering the eclectic blend of horror-induced visuals on tap last month. This issue merely offers a mishmash of flat, unengaging panels from several pencilers. Looking at both the art and the writing, the series isn't doing a very good job of capitalizing on its potential. Is there still room in the final issue to turn that around?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fear Itself: Hulk vs Dracula |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Fear Itself: Hulk vs Dracula #2
September 28, 2011
|
|
But this isn't a mindless story throughout. There's plenty of tension and character drama in the mix as Dracula and his allies seek a method of stopping their unstoppable foe. Gischler proved way back in The Death of Dracula #1 that he's capable of molding these sinister figures into compelling protagonists. Nothing has changed since. Both as a drama and an action epic, this mini-series is delivering. Let's just hope this isn't the last we'll see of Gischler's Dracula once the dust settles.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fear Itself: Hulk vs Dracula #3
October 12, 2011
|
|
Structurally, Hulk vs. Dracula doesn't make the best use of the three-issue format. So much time is spent building towards the final showdown between Hulk and Dracula that the actual battle barely has a chance to unfold. And while Gischler deserves credit for not delivering the sort of neutral, easy finish that cleanly shuffles Hulk back into Fear Itself proper, it's no longer clear how this book is supposed to be reconciled with the main event. But lukewarm finale aside, this tie-in did a fine job of reviving some of my lagging interest in Fear Itself.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fear Itself: Spider-Man #2 |
Jun 08, 2011
show
|
|
Thanks to the inclusion of JJJ and Norah and other little touches, this series fits in nicely with Dan Slott's Amazing Spider-Man. With that in mind, even those Spidey fans ignoring Fear Itself would do well to give this particular tie-in a read.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fear Itself: The Deep |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Fear Itself: The Deep #1
June 1, 2011
|
|
Fear Itself: The Deep would be a perfectly decent book if not for the questionable depiction of Namor and the simply flat characterization of Attuma. Hopefully the book will improve as the Defenders come together and embark on their new mission.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fear Itself: The Deep #4
September 28, 2011
|
|
Most event tie-ins face all manner of structural limitations, but the best books are those that can sidestep those limitations and offer a compelling story regardless. Fear Itself: The Deep didn't manage that much, and in the end serves only as a lukewarm coda to Namor's canceled series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fear Itself: The Fearless |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Fear Itself: The Fearless #6
January 4, 2012
|
|
The art remains pretty solid as the book reaches the halfway point. Paul Pelletier's scenes of Asgard at war are particularly eye-catching. There are a few signs that the biweekly schedule is taking its toll, unfortunately. Danny Miki's inks are a bit loose and scratchy, and Wolverine once again falls victim to an improperly colored costume. But if coloring snafus and an underwhelming main villain are the worst this book has to suffer from, then readers can count themselves lucky.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fear Itself: The Fearless #8
February 1, 2012
|
|
The Fearless is now two-thirds of the way through. As fun and enjoyable as the book can be, it's past time to move beyond the standard formula and build towards the final confrontation between Sin and Valkyrie.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fear Itself: The Fearless #9
February 15, 2012
|
|
As usual, the art is a little scratchy at times, but still pleasing to the eyes. It's fun to see Mark Bagley dabble in a more fantastical realm, and the story suits Paul Pelletier's talents particularly well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fear Itself: The Fearless #10
March 7, 2012
|
|
The art is a little more rough than it's generally been, which is unfortunate considering the scale of the fighting in this issue. Paul Pelletier's pencils are solid, though the inking remains a bit fuzzy. But Mark Bagley's pages are comparatively lacking in detail. In particular, a double-page spread of Valkyrie and her allies fizzles when it should have been a visual treat. Hopefully this isn't a sign of what to expect from the final two chapters of the series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fear Itself: The Fearless #12
April 4, 2012
|
|
All eyes are on Avengers vs. X-Men at the moment. Still, is it too much to hope that Valkyrie and her new mission find an ongoing place in Marvel's lineup above and beyond what Secret Avengers can allow?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fear Itself: The Home Front |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Fear Itself: The Home Front #3
June 15, 2011
|
|
As with the previous two issues, the remaining backups are completely forgettable. Howard Chaykin's experiments with single-page storytelling still fail to pay off. While this particular tale doesn't read like it was ripped from a longer story, it still proves wholly unsatisfying. The final tale featuring Cardiac is hardly more fulfilling despite its larger page count. Again, had this series been condensed and focused solely on Speedball's conflict, the end result would have been much more pleasing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fear Itself: The Home Front #5
August 17, 2011
|
|
The Mr. Fear story from Howard Chaykin is as annoyingly brief and choppy as all the other one-pagers, but still vaguely amusing in its way. And finally, American Eagle makes a welcome return in an unusual tale from Si Spurrier. Like the Blue Marvel segment in issue #4, this story seems barely interested in acknowledging Fear Itself, but it too provides a platform for an underutilized character and manages to reaffirm the the themes driving Fear Itself, if not the actual events of the crossover. There's a sly, knowing tinge to Eagle's dialogue that adds a slight meta quality to the story without overdoing it. Taken as a whole, this is one of the stronger issues of the mini-series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fear Itself: Uncanny X-Force |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Fear Itself: Uncanny X-Force #1
July 6, 2011
|
|
It's not surprising that Uncanny X-Force would be drawn into Fear Itself given how well received the series has been. However, this mini lacks the qualities that make the main series so memorable.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fear Itself: Youth in Revolt |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Fear Itself: Youth in Revolt #1
May 11, 2011
|
|
Mike Norton delivers a very clean and expressive set of pencils. His figures are a little too spartan at times, but the storytelling never fails. If a bit flawed in its first issue, Fear Itself shows enough promise to leave one hoping for a possible ongoing series from these creators.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fear Itself: Youth in Revolt #3
July 6, 2011
|
|
Issue #3 isn't entirely flawless. The series is so precariously crammed with characters as it is, and McKeever makes the mistake of dragging a new faction of heroes into the mix. These new characters add nothing to the proceedings beyond occupying a few panels. The last thing Youth in Revolt needs at this point is more conflict, so hopefully McKeever can remain tightly focused in the second half of the book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fear Itself: Youth in Revolt #4
August 24, 2011
|
|
Prodigy also stands out this month as the pressure of his newfound responsibility begins to weigh down heavily. Prodigy is indicative of many characters in this book who have come so far since the days of Civil War and yet are still seeking their place among Marvel's more established heroes. If this series isn't necessarily vital to Fear Itself, it still has a valid message to convey about heroism in the Marvel Universe. And it's a fine character drama to boot. With a gripping story and some terrific pencils from Mike Norton, this series continues to be well worth the price of admission.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fear Itself: Youth in Revolt #5
September 21, 2011
|
|
The story may not have much impact on Fear Itself at this point, and in fact could just as easily be taking place in the midst of half a dozen different Marvel events, but it continues to do a fine job of shining a spotlight on these young heroes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fell #9 |
Jan 16, 2008
show
|
|
Take this issue, for instance. Dt. Fell jumps at the opportunity to work as a hostage negotiator. The majority of the issue takes place in a dank hallway outside the criminal's apartment door. However, Ellis finds creative ways to show the reader what is happening inside the apartment without actually showing them. It doesn't hurt that Ellsi has Ben Templesmith's art to rely on. I'm sure Templesmith could make just about anything look interesting with his unique watercolor style. This issue only grows more interesting once Fell gains entrance to the apartment and saves the day with his own unique brand of justice. I'm sure it's been said before, but a $2 comic like Fell often feels like it offers more bang for the buck than regular $3 series. If you can't spare the scratch for something this good, maybe you need a new hobby.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
FF #18 |
May 30, 2012
show
|
|
This issue represents the best of what Hickman and his collaborators are capable of with this franchise. This issue has drama, but also plenty of heart and humor. Funnily enough, FF has never been stronger than in these last, waning months of Hickman's run.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
FF (2012) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
FF #12
September 25, 2013
|
|
This issue as a whole is an eclectic blend of random asides like that and more focused drama. A lot of books would suffer some sort of tonal imbalance as a result, but again, it plays right into the nature of FF. It's great to see the creators emphasize humor and the younger characters and their antics even as they maneuver the adults into the confrontation that's been building for the past year. The only downside is that the growing sense of finality suggests that the Fraction/Allred saga really is going to end soon, even as this issue once again reinforces how vital FF is to Marvel's lineup.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
FF #13
October 23, 2013
|
|
And the art remains as gorgeous and vibrant as ever. Once again, there's a sense that Mike Allred is cutting loose even more than usual and letting the art dictate the flow of the story. This issue has visual cutaways and dimension-hopping galore. Allred's standout pages involve his rendering of Red Ghost's mind-bending time-journey. We wind up with four distinct versions of the character entering and exiting the stage. It's the sort of bizarre sequence that might have been too confusing if not for the clear, engaging way it's rendered.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
FF #14
November 27, 2013
|
|
And one again, the visuals are the prime selling point of the series. Mike Allred doesn't necessarily break the usual mold of superhero page construction as much as he did in the previous couple chapters, but there's still a pervasive sense of energy and whimsy on every page. Sly visual gags like putting Fraction's face on a milk carton ad for missing children only serve to heighten the fun and enjoyment this book provides.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
FF #15
December 18, 2013
|
|
But as much as this series emphasizes playful antics, it never forgets to showcase the adults and their deeper struggles too. This storyline isn't really boiling down to a question of whether the FF can overcome Doom. That's pretty much a given. The emotional heart of this final conflict is how Scott can handle himself against the man who killed his daughter. Will these 16 issues result in redemption for this troubled hero, or colossal failure? That question alone is enough to leave me craving next month's series finale.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
FF #16
January 23, 2014
|
|
Had this issue only included the main story segment, I would have found its Scott and Doom-centric focus a fairly underwhelming end to the series. Luckily, there's a fairly hefty epilogue sequence that brings the entire FF and Fantastic Four casts into the limelight and offers one last hurrah for this era of Marvel's First Family. The writers wrap up various loose ends and remind us how great the many character dynamics in the FF are. And Mike and Laura Allred take the opportunity to bedazzle readers one last time with their art. It's good to know that, even if the FF kids may be taking some time off, at least the artists have found a new home with Silver Surfer. If they can bring the same level of visual fidelity and whimsy to Surfer that they did to FF, that book will automatically rank among Marvel's best.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fight Club 2 |
7 issues
show
|
|
|
Fight Club 2 #1
May 13, 2015
|
|
Fight Club 2 is a success in some ways. Palahniuk transitions smoothly from prose to comics, and he's found a great team of artists to help visualize this world. This first issue is very impressive on a technical level and sometimes very amusing. However, it also reads a little too much like the original story, and the violent anarchist Tyler Durden doesn't have the same appeal he did back in 1996. Hopefully this series can grow beyond the boundaries of the book and find new ways to satirize the modern world.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fight Club 2 #2
June 25, 2015
|
|
This issue makes excellent use of the format, from the opening page modeled after in-flight safety cards to the constant juxtaposition of Sebastian and Marla's points of view to the recurring visual motifs like prescription pills blocking captions and word balloons. The book is very cleverly designed, but the story is still coming together.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fight Club 2 #3
July 23, 2015
|
|
This issue offers something Fight Club fans have no doubt been waiting for since this sequel was announced - the reunion between Sebastian and Tyler Durden. That reunion comes as Sebastian languishes outside Project Mayhem headquarters and waits to be re-inducted into the group. While the issue is a bit sluggish and slow-moving overall, their interaction is easily among the most compelling material in the series so far.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fight Club 2 #4
August 27, 2015
|
|
This series has proven somewhat disappointing so far in its reluctance to move beyond the tropes and trappings of the original Fight Club. And while issue #4 is still guilty of resurrecting familiar beats and characters, it also makes some important steps towards becoming its own story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fight Club 2 #6
October 29, 2015
|
|
This series has grown quite a bit over the past few months, evolving from an engaging but fairly redundant sequel to the original story to a book that expands the mythology in interesting ways and takes full advantage of the comic book medium.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fight Club 2 #8
December 23, 2015
|
|
It's been fascinating to watch the creative relationship between Chuck Palahniuk and Cameron Stewart grow and flourish over the course of this series. Any question of why Fight Club 2 needed to be told as a graphic narrative rather than a prose novel has been answered with the last few issues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Final Crisis |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Final Crisis #1
May 28, 2008
|
|
The best solution is simply to allow him the time he needs, however long that might be. Infinite Crisis derailed because DC valued a prompt shipping schedule over a quality product. Final Crisis, despite its various birthing woes, has already proven itself a superior comic in my eyes. I can only hope it will earn better treatment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Final Crisis #2
June 25, 2008
|
|
Despite all my complaints and criticisms regarding this issue, Morrison and company don't need to bend over backwards to fix this book. The core story is still ripe with potential. When the New Gods actually appear, which is all too rarely, many of my complaints temporarily evaporate. The main thing this book needs is a tighter focus and less extraneous nonsense. That said, the project is probably too far along at this point for any major changes to be made, and the most I'll allow myself to hope for is that the story will pick up once evil wins the day. I never expected to be rooting for the bad guys.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Final Crisis #6
January 14, 2009
|
|
Though at times it appears that DC hired a rotating cast of artists to barf on the page and call it a day, I can't help but label Final Crisis #6 as my favorite installment of the series. Everything Morison has been attempting to do with this story really starts to hit home for me. Some may complain that certain plot elements are wrapped up too easily, but I find that to be a bonus. With so much out of the way, Morrison has set the stage for a truly epic and unpredictable finish in two weeks. I can't wait.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Final Crisis #7
January 28, 2009
|
|
Morrison has done some amazing things with Final Crisis. It serves as his ultimate statement about heroism in the DCU and the very nature of the universe and storytelling. His ambition has been amazing to witness, but too rarely has it been tempered by basic rules of narrative storytelling. Thanks both to Morrison's questionable storytelling decisions and the wonky art, Final Crisis will always be a diminished work of greatness. It's painful sometimes to think of what could have been, but it's equally painful to think that this epic saga has come to a close.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Final Crisis: Requiem #1
July 9, 2008
|
|
DC has released surprisingly few Crisis tie-ins so far. For whatever problems this issue may have, it still managed to impress me with its quality. I really hope Requiem will set the standard for the numerous tie-ins that are to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Final Crisis: Legion Of Three Worlds #1 |
Aug 20, 2008
show
|
|
Frankly, the only connection I can form between Final Crisis and Legion of Three Worlds is that both books are packed with characters and not overly accessible to new readers. Both are rewarding experiences to those with a reasonable knowledge of the DCU, however, and that should be enough for most readers.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Final Crisis: Superman Beyond 3D #2 |
Jan 21, 2009
show
|
|
Despite these few problems, I really enjoyed my experience with Superman Beyond. It has proven itself the most important of the Crisis tie-ins, and it offers a tantalizing glimpse of how the story as a whole could have played out. I may very well be in the minority on this one, but I'd say your Crisis reading experience is incomplete without this one. For better or worse.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Firefly #1 |
Nov 01, 2018
show
|
|
|
|
|
First Strike |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
First Strike #1
August 9, 2017
|
|
If IDW is going to keep publishing annual Hasbro crossover events, at least they're being handled well. First Strike manages all the tricky challenges of a first issue, laying out the groundwork for new readers, quickly establishing its conflict and ensuring that the human drama is never lost amid all the action and spectacle. This is a great spot to either jump on board the Hasbro-verse or remind yourself why it's so exciting having these characters sharing the page in the first place.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
First Strike #2
August 24, 2017
|
|
The series is beginning to lose it focus as writers Mairghread Scott and David Rodriguez draw in more characters and shift away from exploring the core Scarlett/Ironblood relationship that was so critical in issue #1. There's plenty of fun spectacle here, but less opportunity for the writers to settle in with any one character.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
First Strike #3
September 14, 2017
|
|
Like Revolution before it, First Strike succeeds in capturing the fun and zaniness of being a kid and mashing action figures together.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
First Strike #4
September 28, 2017
|
|
It's not often that I find myself wishing an event comic had a smaller scope, but that's where we are with First Strike. As fun as it is to see so many Hasbro characters mashed together in one epic team-up, the series is only really making great use of a small handful.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
First Strike #5
October 12, 2017
|
|
First Strike's penultimate issue unfolds largely as the previous four have, juggling a large cast but only really making use of a small handful of characters.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
First Strike #6
October 26, 2017
|
|
For however much IDW is doing right with these properties, they make it very difficult for those readers who just want to read one book and leave it at that.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
First Wave |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
First Wave #3
July 28, 2010
|
|
Rags Morales also helps sell this new vision of the DCU as one to be remembered. His work is frequently gorgeous and always stylishly noir. Unfortunately, the presence of two inkers prevents the issue from achieving a truly consistent and cohesive visual tone. There are flaws in First Wave, but the strengths greatly outweigh them. I'm having a blast in Azzarello's new world, and I'm already feeling a twinge of sadness that the series is half over.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
First Wave #4
September 29, 2010
|
|
Rags Morales' art continues to impress. His slightly exaggerated but highly detailed pencils fit in very well with the pulp aesthetic and retro-future tone of the series. Morales' line-work is a bit less precise and defined than it has been, though. The truly worrisome quality with this mini-series is that it doesn't seem poised to reach a satisfying and conclusive finale in two issues. This wouldn't have been a problem in the days when First Wave was still planned as an ongoing, but with the future uncertain beyond issue #6 First Wave needs to overcome its pacing problems and find a proper resting point.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flash (2011) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Flash Annual #4
July 30, 2015
|
|
This annual serves as a solid companion piece to the main Flash series, exploring the origins of this new team of villains and the shared tragedy that unites them. Unfortunately, the subpar visual quality holds the story back.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #23.1
September 5, 2013
|
|
Chris Batista's art creates a decent sense of consistency with the main Flash series. One thing that becomes immediately apparent is that Batista can draw a mean gorilla. He captures all the rage and power of Grodd's return, as well as the ferocity as Grodd battles both man and ape in his takeover of the city. The human characters sometimes suffer from inconsistent emotional range, but the gorillas look fantastic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #23.3
September 18, 2013
|
|
Also like the Grodd issue, this story has the benefit of introducing new plot twists and generally feeling more relevant to the larger Forever Evil picture than most Villains Month issues. Presumably this issue is intended as a prologue to the upcoming Rogues Rebellion mini-series, as the creative team is identical. This is certainly a strong indicator of that book's quality. Patrick Zircher's moody art is an excellent fit for the Rogues and their seedier vision of the Gem Cities.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #50
April 21, 2016
|
|
The tables have turned as the Rogues join forces with the CCPD to arrest the Flash. That's not a bad status quo reversal to celebrate the series' 50th issue. It certainly makes for a dramatic anniversary issue. Unfortunately, it also feels a bit rushed despite the extended page count.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flash (2016) |
27 issues
show
|
|
|
Flash Annual #1
January 31, 2018
|
|
If you're not currently reading the ongoing Flash comic, this annual issue is as get a jumping-on point as any. It finally touches base with the original Wally West and makes the most of his lonely, unhappy status quo. At the same time, it also sets the stage for what promises to be an epic conflict in "Flash War." If only the wait for the rest of this storyline weren't so long...
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #1
June 23, 2016
|
|
Barry Allen needed a fresh start after the last couple years' worth of New 52 stories, and that's exactly what this new series is delivering. The Flash #1 focuses less on DC Rebirth fallout and more on rebuilding Barry's life and supporting cast. Between the strong characterization and the gorgeous art, there's plenty of reason to be excited for this new book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #2
July 14, 2016
|
|
If The Flash doesn't qualify as the most gorgeous-looking book in the DC Rebirth lineup, it's definitely up there in the rankings. Artist Carmine Di Giandomenico and colorist Ivan Plascencia were born to collaborate on this book. Di Giandomenico's lithe, dynamic characters and Plascencia's eye-popping colors easily make this the most visually enticing Flash comic since Francis Manapul's run.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #4
August 11, 2016
|
|
This issue is pretty blatant about telegraphing where the arc is headed, and we can only hope that Williamson has a few curve balls planned in the weeks to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #6
September 15, 2016
|
|
Di Giandomenico's sleek figures, coupled with FCO Plascencia's vivid colors, result in one of the best-looking comics in the Rebirth lineup. It's equally pleasing to see Joshua Williamson's saga reach a major turning point in this issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #8
October 13, 2016
|
|
As much as this new series has done to reinvigorate Barry Allen and his world, it kind of dropped the ball with the reveal of Godspeed's true identity and motivations.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #9
October 27, 2016
|
|
This standalone issue operates on a terrific premise, as the Wally Wests of the pre-Flashpoint and New 52 universes team up from the first time. Seeing the older Wally mentor his younger counterpart gives this issue a ton of heart, to the point where you have to wonder if Barry really should defer to his former sidekick in this area.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #12
December 15, 2016
|
|
Joshua Williamson excels at exploring the growing bond between Barry and Wally, one built as much on humor and the love of speed as a sense of family and legacy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #14
January 12, 2017
|
|
The stage is set for a somber, character-driven Rogues story, with a healthy dose of Barry/Iris romance thrown in. That's a promising sign, as is the return of artist Carmine Di Giandomenico.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #18
March 9, 2017
|
|
In short, there's a nice blend of character drama and Flash Rogue banter on display here. However, Jesus Merino isn't very successful when it comes to capturing the book's dynamic, angular aesthetic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #19
March 23, 2017
|
|
While entertaining, for most of this issue the team-up doesn't give the impression it's going anywhere particularly noteworthy. It doesn't help that Jesus Merino's art in these pages feels plain and lacks the dynamic quality of most Flash issues. But the issue makes a hard swerve in its final few pages.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #20
April 13, 2017
|
|
There's a charming, Silver Age quality to this series that's reflected on this issue's cover - the old "hook readers with a melodramatic take on the evens within" trick. No, readers shouldn't expect a story about Iris West turning to the dark side, but they should look forward to an issue that puts the intrepid reporter in the spotlight for a change.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #22
May 17, 2017
|
|
"The Button" reaches a slightly underwhelming finish, as the story provides few answers to the mystery that's been slowly unfolding across the DCU for the past year. But the characterization shines even if the plot itself stalls out. And Howard Porter does a great job of evoking both DC Universe Rebirth #1 and Watchmen in his art.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #23
June 1, 2017
|
|
This series never feels entirely right unless Joshua Williamson and Carmine Di Giandomenico are both in the driver's seat. That reunion helps start this new story arc off on the right note.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #24
June 15, 2017
|
|
Joshua Williamson uses Hal's presence to its fullest, drawing from his own relationship to fear and forcing Barry to confront how fear is the real culprit behind his recent miseries.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #30
September 14, 2017
|
|
This new villain doesn't leave a strong impression in terms of look, powers or motivation. His tendency to monologue doesn't exactly endear him to the reader, either. But at least Barry's own personal drama carries more weight as the ramifications of Barry's Negative Speed Force exposure continue to play out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #32
October 12, 2017
|
|
Neil Googe's style may lack the slick, angular quality of Carmine Di Giandomenico's, but Googe still injects the story with ample energy and a proper sense of speed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #33
October 26, 2017
|
|
DC picked a weird place to begin their newest Dark Nights: Metal tie-in, as "Bats Out of Hell" interrupts the flow of the ongoing Dark Flash storyline. That aside, this issue serves as a promising start for "Bats Out of Hell." It builds very naturally on the events of Metal #3 and the disappearances of Batman and Superman, to the point where it almost reads like Metal #3.5.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #35
November 23, 2017
|
|
DC really hasn't been doing this series any favors lately with its oddball structure and publishing strategy. The recent "Bats Out of Hell" crossover interrupted the flow of this Black Hole storyline. Even worse, there's no discernible reason why this short, current arc, "Black Hole Rising," couldn't have been compressed down to one issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #36
December 14, 2017
|
|
This series has been through a few rough patches of late, but this new arc feels like the fresh start Barry Allen and friends needed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #38
January 11, 2018
|
|
This isn't necessarily Kolins' strongest Flash work. His figure work is fairly loose, particularly late in this issue. But even so, there's nothing like the dynamic, animated quality Kolins brings to Flash's adventures.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #39
January 25, 2018
|
|
It would be nice if the cover didn't blatantly spoil the big reveal, but Di Giandomenico and Joshua Williamson still succeed in building to a major crescendo as they establish the latest threat to Barry and his world.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #40
February 15, 2018
|
|
This new arc is giving writer Joshua Williamson his first real chance to play with Gorilla Grodd as a lead villain, and it's not disappointing so far. Williamson is able to paint Grodd as a menacing threat while still making his motivations clear and understandable.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flash #41
March 1, 2018
|
|
This series often tests whether it's possible to cram too many speedsters into one book. In this case, I can't help but feel that the notion of Barry having his speed stolen by Gorilla Grodd would carry more weight if he didn't have three different speedster partners ready and waiting to pick up the slack.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flash Gordon: Zeitgeist #1 |
Nov 30, 2011
show
|
|
You really can't expect much for a dollar these days, but Zeitgeist delivers nonetheless. This is a promising start to Dynamite's latest attempt to revive a classic comic icon.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flash: Rebirth |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Flash: Rebirth #2
May 6, 2009
|
|
Despite some interesting developments and a solid take on both Barry Allen and Wally West, the Johns/Van Sciver duo is starting to disappoint me given the high quality of their Green Lantern work. As mentioned, I have every hope that this issue's ending spells the beginning of greater things for Rebirth. However, with the story now 40% over, the clock is ticking for the Fastest Man Alive.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flash: Rebirth #1 |
Jun 08, 2016
show
|
|
DC has had a solid track record with their Rebirth relaunches so far, and Flash is no exception. This issue manages to play on familiar tropes even as it begins building a dangerous new status quo for Barry Allen. It features some of the best art seen from the Rebirth lineup so far and even manages to expand on the events of DC Universe Rebirth in a cool way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Abin Sur - The Green Lantern |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Abin Sur - The Green Lantern #1
June 1, 2011
|
|
No doubt this series will gather steam as it veers away from simply showcasing alternate takes on familiar GL concepts and more directly intertwines itself with the events of Flashpoint. But with only two issues remaining, Schlagman has precious little time in which to pick up the pace.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Abin Sur - The Green Lantern #2
July 6, 2011
|
|
Unfortunately, this book also shares another similarity with the film. Sinestro's inevitable fall from grace is handled with the same speed and lack of craft. The relationship between these two Lanterns was the prime appeal of the series, and it's disappointing to see it rushed to an abrupt conclusion here. Will there be anything of value left to redeem the final issue?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Abin Sur - The Green Lantern #3
August 17, 2011
|
|
On the plus side, Adam Schlagman does deliver a proper ending to Abin's tale. All the seemingly extraneous material involving the Guardians and the White Entity turns out to have relevance to the story. If rushed, the ending to this mini proves more satisfying than those seen in many of the other Flash point tie-ins.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Citizen Cold #2 |
Jul 13, 2011
show
|
|
Kolins' current art style is well suited to this story. Though Mike Atiyeh's painted colors often come across as too strong, Kolins lends an energy to his pages that hasn't always been apparent in previous works. It seems Kolins is more at home with the Rogues than Flash from both a writing and artistic standpoint.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Deathstroke and the Curse of the Ravager |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Deathstroke and the Curse of the Ravager #2
July 13, 2011
|
|
The art is also a bit weaker than it was in issue #1. Joe Bennett's panels grow fairly muddy or unclear at times, and the opening battle lacks the full sense of power and chaos it should have possessed. That said, other pages have a better sense of flow and boast more detail. Hopefully this series will allow Bennett plenty of practice as he gears up for Deathstroke's ongoing book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Deathstroke and the Curse of the Ravager #3
August 3, 2011
|
|
That being said, this was a fun read that paves the way for an ongoing Deathstroke book. Whether this series will actually have any bearing on how Deathstroke is portrayed in his new book is doubtful, but hopefully that series will at least retain some of the more lighthearted qualities seen here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Emperor Aquaman #3 |
Aug 10, 2011
show
|
|
That's not to say this issue doesn't hold some appeal still. Bedard ties most of his threads together nicely enough. The scenes of Aquaman sacrificing his soul and his marriage for his people are very effectively handled. Vicente Cifuentes' art is also generally strong aside from some occasionally dubious facial work. Had this series simply distanced itself from the main Flashpoint threads a little more, it may have been able to reach a more fitting and satisfying conclusion.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Hal Jordan #3 |
Aug 24, 2011
show
|
|
This series never had more than a ghost of a concept to hinge on, and thus would have been better off in a done-in-one format. At least we can finally look forward to the return of the real Hal Jordan next week.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Kid Flash Lost |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Kid Flash Lost #2
July 27, 2011
|
|
Though problematic, Kid Flash Lost has improved, and there's always the hope that it will improve even further in the final issue. My main hope is that Gates can either make something more of the tension between Bart and Barry or put that plot point to bed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Kid Flash Lost #3
August 24, 2011
|
|
But if the series isn't much of a looker, at least it delivered in the home stretch. Geoff Johns now faces some unexpected competition as he closes the door on this era of the Flash family next week.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Legion of Doom #3 |
Aug 17, 2011
show
|
|
The moral of this series is - more Plastic Man is a good thing. Someone at DC should take note.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Reverse-Flash #1 |
Jun 22, 2011
show
|
|
Taken strictly on its own merits, this is a solid entry into the Flashpoint lineup, if one of questionable relevance.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: Secret Seven #2 |
Jul 06, 2011
show
|
|
Secret Seven is a series that deserved more space than the Flashpoint framework allows. You can't have payoff without proper build-up, and so what might have been a strong climax to a longer story is instead merely truncated and abrupt.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: The Outsider |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Flashpoint: The Outsider #1
June 22, 2011
|
|
The Outsider is an unusual Flashpoint tie-in. Despite that, or because of it, it's a tie-in that leaves quite an impression. It may not be my favorite Flashpoint book so far, but issue #1 leaves me looking forward to the next chapter more than any other.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: The Outsider #3
August 17, 2011
|
|
The art isn't spectacular here. It provides the proper level of darkness and mood, but isn't really framed to take proper advantage of the fight scenes between Desai and J'onn. On the other hand, James Robinson does some of his best work in recent years with The Outsider. This series captures the charm and writing quality of Starman that hasn't always been apparent in his more mainstream efforts. I do wish the story had attempted to delve deeper into Desai's mind and motivations. We never really see beneath the calm, cool veneer he debuted with. But in terms of pacing and plotting the series managed to stay more consistent and satisfying throughout than most of the tie-ins.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Flashpoint: The World of Flashpoint |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Flashpoint: The World of Flashpoint #2
July 6, 2011
|
|
Rex Ogle deserves credit for taking what could have been a bland, uninteresting concept and adding greater life to it. Perhaps the wider Flashpoint focus detracts from Traci's story, but Ogle has at least ensured that readers will be invested in the outcome of issue #3.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Flashpoint: The World of Flashpoint #3
August 3, 2011
|
|
This issue does succeed in feeling more relevant than most tie-ins, as it unfolds amid the final battle in Flashpoint #4. But though this series has always managed to spotlight the various corners of the Flashpoint universe, it can't do enough to salvage its own plot threads at the end.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Foolkiller (2007) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Foolkiller #1
October 24, 2007
|
|
In short, this is a stellar first issue for Greg Hurwitz. I'm already feeling a bit despondent that Foolkiller will only last five issues. It ain't the most original book on the block, but a bloody hand down a garbage disposal never felt so good.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Foolkiller #2
November 28, 2007
|
|
Compared to the first issue, Foolkiller #2 is slightly disappointing in the way it stops the flow of the story to delve into the main character's origin. The issue is hardly without it merits, though, and I really look forward to the rest of the series now that the main plot looks to be back on track. Garth Ennis and Matt Fraction should look out. I may just have a new favorite vigilante hero by he time Foolkiller is done.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Foolkiller: White Angels #1 |
Jul 16, 2008
show
|
|
At this point, my biggest worry is the upcoming guest appearance by Punisher himself. I can't imagine why a story like this needs such cross-promotion, other than the inevitable boost in exposure. Foolkiller continues to be a strong part of the MAX lineup, and Marvel definitely needs to let Hurwitz keep doing his thing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Forever Evil |
7 issues
show
|
|
|
Forever Evil #1
September 4, 2013
|
|
But Finch's facial work often suffers. With Justice League of America, he had made some strides in offsetting the often lifeless quality of his characters in earlier works. That quality is less evident here. Compounding the problem is the strange, shimmery coloring, which often drowns out the black inks on various characters' faces and creates an overall unfinished sensation. Ideally this is a flaw that can be addressed in subsequent issues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Forever Evil #2
October 2, 2013
|
|
But if those are the worst complaints to lodge against Forever Evil so far, the mini-series is doing pretty well for itself. I'm eagerly awaiting the full formation of Lex Luthor's band of villains, their war with the Syndicate, and now whatever mysterious conflict lurks on the other side.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Forever Evil #3
November 6, 2013
|
|
That speaks to a larger concern with this book now. Forever Evil doesn't seem to be moving as quickly as you'd expect of a book that's now delivered three of its seven issues. Luthor's team is still just barely coming together, much less waging war against the Crime Syndicate. As much as it seemed there was an even darker, Darkseid-centric conflict lurking beyond the Crime Syndicate showdown, it's tough to imagine Johns having time for that material in the remaining four issues. Does that mean Forever Evil will ultimately just lead into another event as Trinity War did into this? That would be a disappointing way to wrap up what has been such an enjoyable conflict so far.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Forever Evil #4
December 23, 2013
|
|
The extra few weeks' wait was certainly worth it for this issue. Forever Evil #4 makes some mistakes in terms of separating Batman and Luthor's factions and trying to hard to humanize Luthor. But it also manages to build Luthor's team into a compelling force and inject the plot with a spark of life it was starting to lose. Hopefully, things are only going to get bigger and more explosive from here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Forever Evil #5
February 6, 2014
|
|
David Finch's art shows some signs of the deadline pressure. In general, his facial work and sense of scale and proportion are weaker than they were in earlier installments. The perspective in the big fight scene between Luthor's Society and Deathstroke's mercenaries can be weird at times. But Finch still nails the emotion and drama when it matters most, particularly in a key scene involving Power Ring.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Forever Evil #6
March 5, 2014
|
|
Forever Evil #6 leaves readers wanting more, and that's both its greatest strength and one real weakness. It's a fantastically entertaining comic that capitalizes on Johns' flair for writing villains and all the build-up that has taken place so far. But it's depressing to think that this gathering of villains only has one more issue left before evil recedes again. I wanted more interaction among Luthor's group and between that group and the Crime Syndicate. The emergence of Forever Evil's final threat runs the risk of distracting from what has made this event work so well in the first place.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Forever Evil #7
May 21, 2014
|
|
As much as Forever Evil has been an example of how to do event comics properly, it's disappointing that the series couldn't end on a higher note. But despite the oddity of Luthor's final scene and the excess amount of setup in the closing pages, there's plenty of material to enjoy in this finale. Johns has once again weaved his magic with DC's villains and molded Luthor into a more complex and morally unpredictable figure than ever before. Hopefully what comes next will be just as compelling.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Forever Evil Aftermath: Batman vs. Bane #1 |
May 01, 2014
show
|
|
The storytelling flaws here are frustrating, because occasionally it seems like Tomasi does have a great handle on Bane. This issue is at its best early on, when Bane is patrolling his city, dealing with looters the Old Testament way, and meting out his peculiar version of justice and mercy. Both this issue and Arkham War could have been great with a more introspective and cerebral approach.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Forever Evil: A.R.G.U.S. #1 |
Oct 30, 2013
show
|
|
There's little reason to suspect this book's visual woes will improve, but hopefully Gates writing will ensure A.R.G.U.S. is worth following.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Forever Evil: Arkham War |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Forever Evil: Arkham War #1
October 9, 2013
|
|
Arkham War isn't a bad event tie-in, but if it's going to stick to a predictable formula of Bane battling one Arkham-ite after another, it could grow very stale very quickly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Forever Evil: Arkham War #2
November 14, 2013
|
|
Arkham War definitely improved in its second issue. However, most of the villains in this series are basically just eye candy and cameo fodder, and it would be nice to see more of them used as purposefully as characters like Scarecrow and Penguin.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Forever Evil: Arkham War #3
December 12, 2013
|
|
Scot Eaton's art is generally solid, though his re-designed Bane costume doesn't do anything to help the book in the showdown with Croc. Otherwise, Eaton capably depicts a Gotham mired in darkness and renders each new Bat villain with the proper love and attention. Villains like Mr. Freeze and Poison Ivy have rarely looked better in the New 52.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Four Eyes |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Four Eyes #1
October 1, 2008
|
|
Naturally, a book featuring dragons better have some damned good dragon art, and Max Fiumara certainly deliver in that regard. The few pages that offer glimpses of these figures are impressive to behold. Luckily, that sense of detail extends to quieter sequences as well. The art is fairly exaggerated, yet also impressively detailed and laid out. After only one issue, Kelly and Fiumara have proven themselves to be a winning team, and it's one I plan on supporting, hopefully until the very end.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Four Eyes #3
May 20, 2009
|
|
Though certainly not soon enough for my tastes. I fear the leaves will be turning yellow by the time Four Eyes #4 hits. Even if that proves to be the case, the wait will undoubtedly be worth it. Four Eyes boasts a unique story and some of the finest artwork in the industry. Kelly and Fiumara can take as long as they need to put this story together.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Four Eyes #4
June 16, 2010
|
|
Four Eyes #4 serves as a mostly excellent cap to a very strong opening story arc. It's a shame we couldn't have gotten this comic in hand a year ago. But at least now fans can rest easy knowing Kelly and Fiumara have delivered one complete story in this new world. With any luck, when Four Eyes does finally return the book will be talked about more for its high quality than its shipping schedule.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Franken-Castle |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Franken-Castle #17
June 3, 2010
|
|
I hope enough time has passed that the shock has worn off and readers ambivalent on the FrankenCastle concept have elected to give the series a shot. It's a strange and unique take on the character, one that is sorely needed after so many years of gritty crime adventures. Whether you start with this issue or check out the Marvel Must Have reprint also on the stands this week, give FrankenCastle a fair shot. You might just fall in love with this poor monster of a man all over again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Franken-Castle #18
June 23, 2010
|
|
The real test comes in the next two months as Franken-Castle begins its crossover with Dark Wolverine. I have my doubts as to whether the story justifies such a lengthy endeavor, but we'll see. It's not as if Remender has steered his readers wrong once since launching this direction last year.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Franken-Castle #21
September 29, 2010
|
|
The real attraction in this issue may be for the art of Dan Brereton. Brereton's work has been saved for where it fits best in this series - rendering plenty of imposing, larger than life monsters and generally creepy visuals. The old-school horror vibe in this issue is much appreciated, and the painted style sets this issue apart from most Punisher stories that have come before. Sadly, the Franken-Castle era ends with more of a whimper than a bang. But on the bright side, Remender's epilogue story suggests it might not be so bad for the franchise to get back to basics.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Frankenstein, Agent of S.H.A.D.E. #0 |
Sep 12, 2012
show
|
|
I'm pleased to see that the series hasn't suffered from the shift in writers, and I may have to add Frankenstein to my regular slate of New 52 books once again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Franklin Richards: Not So Secret Invasion #1 |
May 07, 2008
show
|
|
More problematic is the fact that these stories never change. Apart from the Skrull story, I could have sworn I've read each and every one of these adventures before. How many times can Franklin accidentally break or steal something from his dad's lab and be forced to clean up the mess? At this point I've just reached my total saturation level with these comics. I don't expect earth-shattering revelations or major upheavals in an all-ages book like this. I do, however, expect the reading experience to evolve a little from issue to issue. If more of the same is all I can expect with each issue, maybe it's time Marvel found a new formula.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Freddy vs. Jason vs. Ash: The Nightmare Warriors #1 |
Jun 24, 2009
show
|
|
Freddy vs. Jason vs. Ash: The Nightmare Warriors #1 isn't a great comic. And at $3.99, there are certainly better ways to spend your money this week. However, if you've been following the saga of Ash through all its twists and turns at Dynamite, I doubt this issue will disappoint. The creative team takes a winning concept uses it to pave the way for what should be a fun mini-series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Freedom Fighters #1 |
Sep 01, 2010
show
|
|
The script jumps between characters in the early pages, each dealing with their own weird, wacky conflicts. Even when the full team bands together, the issue can't seem to decide what the conflict of the story is. Is it the search for a fabled Confederate super-weapon? Is it the hunt for the kidnapped Vice President? Is it the presence of mysterious spirits within a remote mountain? Palmiotti and Gray seem to throw a wide array of situations and ideas on the page in the hope that some will stick. s a result, the series feels too cluttered and unfocused for its own good. Some of the dialogue can be downright silly at times, which only further screws with the tone of the book. Freedom Fighters isn't that far off from being a worthwhile read. The team is interesting, some of the ideas at play are clever, and the art is solid, if cluttered at times. What Palmiotti and Gray need to do is sit back, simplify things, and let the characters breathe. Hopefully issue #2 will mark a return to form
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Friendly Neighborhood Spider-Man #1 |
Jan 09, 2019
show
|
|
Friendly Neighborhood Spider-man #1 has plenty of appeal as it explores the quieter side of Peter Parker's life.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
From Under Mountains #1 |
Sep 30, 2015
show
|
|
From Under Mountains #1 is a promising debut for this new comic, and one that doesn't require any familiarity with the other 8house comics. While the split focus makes it tougher to latch onto the characters right away, the issue quickly finds its groove and builds up an intriguing fantasy realm.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Fury MAX (2012) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Fury MAX #1
May 3, 2012
|
|
I half feared the MAX imprint was doomed once Jason Aaron's PunisherMAX wrapped up. leave it to Garth Ennis to once again inject new life into this mature-readers label.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fury MAX #2
May 16, 2012
|
|
Ennis is single handedly keeping the MAX imprint alive right now. And if Fury MAX accomplishes anything, it's proving that there's still a place for these darker, more grounded Marvel stories.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fury MAX #5
August 1, 2012
|
|
Unfortunately, the final page reveals that issue #6 won't be along until the very end of September. Two months is a long wait, but these first five issues prove that it'll be well worth it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Fury MAX #8
January 2, 2013
|
|
Quirks aside, Ennis and Parlov's return to the MAX universe remains as solid as ever. And the more dependable shipping schedule during this second half doesn't hurt.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Future Quest |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Future Quest #1
May 17, 2016
|
|
Future Quest is one of those comics where readers only need to look at the cover to know if it's the book for them. If you crave a dose of classic old-school adventure with some familiar faces and a few high-concept twists thrown in, Future Quest won't disappoint. You don't even need to have a pre-existing attachment to the characters, just a love of comic book team-ups.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Future Quest #4
September 1, 2016
|
|
At this point I'm wondering if Future Quest needed a few more months to simmer before seeing the light of day. As it stands, we still haven't seen an issue drawn entirely by main artist Evan Shaner.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Combat (2012) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
G.I. Combat #0
September 5, 2012
|
|
It isn't enough for DC to offer traditional war-themed comics. The lackluster sales on this series and its predecessor are proof enough of that. The tales in G.I. Combat need to showcase war as it exists in the DC Universe, reflecting all the colorful characters and concepts that dwell within. Issue #0 does a better job than any issue previous of satisfying that need.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Combat #1
May 3, 2012
|
|
DC could just as easily have titled this issue Men of War #9. And that's worrisome, because as enjoyable as the first segment is, there's absolutely nothing to suggest that G.I. Combat will find any more lasting success than its predecessor did.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Combat #2
June 6, 2012
|
|
Jimmy Palmiotti and Justin Gray improve their take on the new Unknown Soldier in this issue. The character is fleshed out a bit more, and the writers spend ample time showcasing his superhuman abilities in action. The result is a perfectly competent, grounded take on superhuman warfare. Dan Panosian's jagged, scratchy style suits the tone of the story well. The problem is that it doesn't do anything new with the Unknown Soldier concept. It's a simple modernization of the original character. Not for the first time, I find myself wondering why DC couldn't have brought back Joshua Dysart's mature, fascinating re-imagining of the concept.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Combat #3
July 5, 2012
|
|
At this point, it's hard to imagine G.I. Combat lasting any longer than Men of War did. Neither story offers the sort of long-term appeal to keep the series humming along. The series needs a shake-up, and the sooner, the better.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Combat #4
August 1, 2012
|
|
This has been and still is a perfectly enjoyable book, but both segments need a bit of a push forward at this point, particularly The War That Time Forgot.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
G.I. Joe #2
February 11, 2009
|
|
Once again, the new issue of G.I. Joe shows plenty of promise, but it just doesn't reach high enough to fully convince me IDW can succeed where others have failed. Perhaps once the other Joe books launch I won't be left so wanting each month. Or perhaps not. But I'm willing to stick around and see if these Real American Heroes have the right stuff.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe #3
March 11, 2009
|
|
G.I. Joe continues to be a solid read, but it also continues to play things by the book. Maybe that's a good thing considering where this franchise was a year ago. Playing it safe may help put the Joes back on track, but they're never going to be true American heroes again until Dixon tries for something new and exciting. I'd like to think he's cooking something up as we speak. We'll see over the coming months.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe #4
April 1, 2009
|
|
I will say, though, that I'm enjoying Robert Atkins work on the book. Though it carries a bright, cheery tone that doesn't do much to dispel the idea we're reading a toy commercial, it's a much more detailed, thoughtful, and consistent take on the Joe-verse than he various other books have demonstrated. IDW clearly saved the top artistic talent for this series. I wonder why they haven't reserved the top ideas in term of storytelling. Everything we're seeing in G.I. Joe: Origins, G.I. Joe: Cobra just seems to outdo the events in this book. Heck, even Dixon's own take on Destro in Movie Prequel #2 puts this one to shame. Clearly something is wrong here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe (2008) |
9 issues
show
|
|
|
G.I. Joe #10
October 21, 2009
|
|
I'm not asking that Dixon suddenly cram Cobra Commander, Storm Shadow, Serpentor, and every other major face into this book, but I would like to see the series speed itself along. The dragging pace is killing the series, and it only causes projects like G.I. Joe: Cobra to stand out even more. This should be the flagship title in the Joe franchise, not its weakest link.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe #12
December 3, 2009
|
|
Luckily, issue #13 is only two weeks away. I sincerely hope that a new arc will give Dixon a fresh focus on his characters. The last thing this book needs is more Joes or Cobras. I could happily go another year or more without a glimpse of Cobra Commander. I simply want standout characters like Destro to become the norm rather than the exception. And is it too much to ask than something blow up more than once an arc?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe #16
March 24, 2010
|
|
This series is generally a decent read. Issues like this veer more towards "good". The visual quality of G.I. Joe is certainly on the way up now that Robert Atkins' clean, slick pencils have returned. But the book needs minor adjustments to become great. The franchise as a whole is in much better shape than it was two years ago before coming to IDW. I just continue to hope that all of IDW's books can display the same storytelling brilliance as G.I. Joe Cobra.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe #17
April 21, 2010
|
|
I found G.I. Joe #17 to be one of the more enjoyable installments of the series so far. It should be interesting to see if Dixon can maintain his newfound momentum now that the story looks to be veering in entirely new directions next month.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe #18
May 19, 2010
|
|
I hope this more character-specific focus to storytelling becomes the norm for the book. As aggravating as it can be to have characters drop off the radar for months on end, I'd rather see Dixon do justice to a few characters at a time rather than a disservice to many.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe #19
June 16, 2010
|
|
With G.I. Joe: Cobra shifting its focus to Serpentor and other areas for the duration of the summer, this series has a chance to claim some more glory for itself. Dixon's writing has been on an upward trend for many months now, and I think the book maybe able to win over some readers bored of the slow pacing of late.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe #20
July 8, 2010
|
|
G.I. Joe continues to carry its momentum forward even as haphazard pacing sometimes threatens to derail the book. The series feels very fractured at times as subplots surface and vanish and artists rotate in and out of the book frequently. This month's artist is Alex Cal, who manages to hit a bit closer to home when it comes to Robert Atkins' familiar aesthetic. Cal's work is quite attractive at times, but the often awkward, lifeless figures and poses suggest a bit too much reliance on photo-referencing. This is G.I. Joe, man. Leave that crap at the door. Dixon's script manages to generate a good amount of tension as separate factions of Joes investigate eerie Cobra goings-on in the middle of the ocean. It's frustrating that villains like Cobra Commander and Destro once again sit the month out. I also find myself wishing the plot could have been urged forward more than it is by the end of this issue. Still, what Dixon does offer is enjoyable. Plenty of minor characters are given time t
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe #21
August 11, 2010
|
|
Dixon's script packs a decent amount of suspense. Imagine if G.I. Joe crossed with The Poseidon Adventure. I particularly enjoy reading the fiendish extremes Cobra is willing to stoop to to protect their interests. As with many issues, however, I wasn't quite satisfied with the amount of story being delivered. G.I. Joe moves too slowly from month to month. With A Real American Hero back on the block, this book is facing even more stiff competition than usual. As Dixon moves towards his final story arc of Season 1, I hope he intends to turn up the pace considerably.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe #22
September 9, 2010
|
|
Alex Cal's art also seem to be steadily improving. Like Robert Atkins, Cal provides a tone that strikes the middle ground between G.I. Joe: Cobra's gritty realism and A Real American Hero's flashy throwback style. Cal still needs to work on effective panel framing and finding more natural poses for his figures. That aside, all signs point to the next arc as being a worthy finale for Season 1. I just hope the addition of another iconic Cobra villain won't upset the delicate balance of storytelling Dixon has achieved in recent months.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe (2014) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
G.I. Joe #2
October 23, 2014
|
|
This is easily among IDW's best-looking Joe books. But that alone isn't enough. This series needs to cut the chatter and ramp up the action soon.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe #6
March 5, 2015
|
|
It continues to amaze me that a G.I. Joe comic can have so much talk and so little action. It's not that the franchise can't blend political drama and more serious elements with the more familiar Joe elements. G.I. Joe: Cobra and it successors have done that well over the years. The problem is that too rarely does this even read like a G.I. Joe comic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe #1 |
Sep 18, 2019
show
|
|
G.I. Joe #1 helps reinvigorate a tired franchise thanks to a very different story direction.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe Movie Prequel: Rise of Cobra |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
G.I. Joe Movie Prequel: Rise of Cobra #2
April 15, 2009
|
|
I'm increasingly bemused to see so much of what is great about G.I. Joe being relegated to outside books. Why can't Dixon's Destro be written this well in the main series? This issue managed to restore some of my faith in the movie after a glimpse of the design for Cobra Commander very nearly killed it. That undoubtedly makes it a success, but I'd much rather be able to reserve this praise for the main series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe Movie Prequel: Rise of Cobra #3
May 6, 2009
|
|
Overall, these movie prequels are a bit light on story to really justify the cover price. That said, they're well put together and further proof that IDW knows how to do right by the franchise. I'm sure I'll be able to wholeheartedly recommend the trade, but in individual spurts I'm not quite as confident.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe Movie Prequel: Rise of Cobra - Duke #1 |
Mar 11, 2009
show
|
|
So far, both of Chuck Dixon's current G.I. Joe projects have offered pieces of what I want in a Joe comic, but neither has assembled the full package. This is a decent comic, but it accomplishes nothing beyond explaining the events that led to Duke joining with the Joes. I honestly don't care so much how these events play out in movie continuity. The simple truth is that, for whatever Rise of Cobra #1 accomplishes, it's being beaten at its own game by G.I. Joe: Origins. As the series fans out to focus on the other main Joes, I hope it can find something more to offer readers.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe Special: Helix #1 |
Aug 12, 2009
show
|
|
This issue is pretty much a mess all around, but there's no reason it should have been. Though Helix has almost no standing in the G.I. Joe universe yet, I could easily see myself growing to love this character. However, her sophomore appearance will need to offer a significantly better show if this new heroine has a hope of catching on.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero #156
July 21, 2010
|
|
There are certain old school hitches in the writing, mostly with an overabundance of exposition in a few scenes, but by and large Hama captures that winning blend of grounded military conflict and over-the-top fun. The series is a nice companion to IDW's own continuity, focusing on all the classic Joe stars that don't always receive much face time in the current books. The dynamic is certainly new, though, as the series sees Cobra legitimized even as the Joes fall back and struggle to regroup. Augustin Padilla also fits right in with the tone of the series. His art is slightly "'90s" in its abundance of muscles and ink lines, but it works here. They say you can't go home again, but so far Hama's return to A Real American Hero proves that isn't always true.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero #157
August 4, 2010
|
|
Augustin Padilla fits right in with his energetic pencils. His musclebound heroes and sinister villains are certainly more outlandish than what we're seeing in IDW's other books, but that's the whole point. G.I. Joe fans should find plenty to love with this series, and even newcomers may discover why everyone remembers A Real American Hero so fondly in the first place.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero #159
October 20, 2010
|
|
Augustin Padilla's artwork s similarly outlandish and fun, with plenty of scratchy blacks and bulging muscles that capture the '90s aesthetic well without falling prey to the more glaring faults of the time. In short, Hama and Padilla offer enough classic G.I. Joe goodness to keep readers hooked. I continue to look for signs that Hama is still willing to push the envelope, and that this arc won't reach the simple, happy conclusion it seems poised to do.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero #161
December 31, 1969
|
|
SL Gallant fills in for Augustin Padilla this month. Gallant's style has often shifted as he has rotated between IDW's various G.I. Joe books. Here, Gallant manages a surprisingly effective homage to the earliest years of the series, channeling the style of artists like Herb Trimpe. It's a nice shift from the sometimes overly exaggerated visuals of Padilla. And if Padilla ever does move to another permanent gig, Gallant and his retro approach would be a welcome replacement.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero vs. the Six Million Dollar Man #1 |
Mar 01, 2018
show
|
|
It's all executed well enough, but nothing about the story or the artwork feels particularly new or exciting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Cobra |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Cobra #1
March 18, 2009
|
|
For the most part, this is what I want out of my G.I. Joe comics. It's very disappointing to see IDW's side projects find so much success while the main series takes it easy on the opening stretch. Let's hope the example G.I. Joe: Cobra is already setting will be followed by future stories.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Cobra #3
May 13, 2009
|
|
The writing truly makes a lot out of what could just as easily have been a simple, by-the-numbers spy story. Crown made the comparison to Greg Rucka's Queen and Country last month, and I think it's an apt one. This is a very methodical and tempered look at the war between former Saturday morning cartoon characters. The dialogue is crisp and well thought-out. The art is moody and understated, forgoing superheroes for simple men and women of action. The series is entirely unlike what we might have expected from a Cobra-centric story in years past, and that's a very good thing. Even if the idea of IDW's Joe relaunch doesn't appeal to you, I highly recommend giving Cobra a shot. This is one particular battle the bad guys are more than welcome to win.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Cobra #11 |
Dec 15, 2010
show
|
|
Antonio Fuso's artwork was frustratingly erratic on the first arc of this second Cobra series, with background work in particular becoming all but nonexistent. Fuso still isn't entirely consistent in quality, but he is improved. Oddly, now it's his figures that vary in detail and execution. Faces may be well-defined in one panel but amorphously rendered in the next. But again, the overall effect is better than in the previous Chuckles arc and manages a stronger, more foreboding tone. The ongoing future of this series remains in question, at least until the next round of solicits. But if this arc truly is the finale for G.I. Joe: Cobra, it should be a satisfying one.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Cobra Civil War #1 |
May 25, 2011
show
|
|
Though it returns in a somewhat more flawed state, it's good to have a Cobra book back on the stands. Hopefully Fuso can build up his new cast to the point where they'll be able to hold their own against fallen greats like Chuckles and Xamot.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Cobra Special #2 |
Sep 29, 2010
show
|
|
Whatever slightly underwhelming qualities this issue might have, it still very much represents a return to form for the series. G.I. Joe: Cobra Special #2 reminds readers why this books has been so creatively successful in the first place, and it certainly builds anticipation for the return of Chuckles and the rest of the gang.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Cobra Vol. 2 |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Cobra Vol. 2 #2
February 17, 2010
|
|
But aside from the problems with the art, which I hope will work themselves out as time goes on, this book is quickly becoming one of my favorites. I never knew how much I craved a dark and gritty G.I. Joe book until Cobra came along.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Cobra Vol. 2 #3
March 31, 2010
|
|
Unfortunately, the art is beginning to bug me more and more each month. Antonio Fuso's work was impressive enough on the original mini-series. His style is dark but also muted and understated, perfect for the tone the writers are trying to generate. Unfortunately, Costa can't seem to craft a convincing world for his characters to inhabit. Whenever a building or piece of architecture takes up significant page real estate, the eye can't help but notice how fake and unnatural it appears. Fuso slathers objects with cheap Photoshop filters. Rather than making these objects look stylized, it simply causes backgrounds and objects to stand out in awkward ways. Looking back at Fuso's work on Cobra Vol. 1, it's clear this is a more recent problem for the series. I hope it's something that can be addressed. The only thing keeping Vol. 2 from surpassing the original right now is the uneven execution of the art.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Cobra Vol. 2 #4
April 28, 2010
|
|
These next months should be very interesting ones for Cobra fans. Rather than ride the momentum of the Cobra Commander reveal, Costa and Gage are shifting focus to another iconic Cobra villain. I have serious reservations about this decision, but I also know that the series has been far too entertaining for me not to give the writers the benefit of the doubt.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Cobra Vol. 2 #5
June 9, 2010
|
|
Coming back to those original two questions - yes, the writers managed to fit Serpentor into their grounded G.I. Joe universe. What they haven't managed to do yet is elevate the villain in the same way they have so many others. This arc has plenty of time to truly establish Serpentor and Scoop as major players in this world. With any luck, connection to previous storylines will begin to surface as well. Whatever happens, I fear the art will be the true bane of this story arc unless changes are made.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Cobra Vol. 2 #6
July 21, 2010
|
|
The art is still a disappointment, sadly. Sergio Carrera's art is too flat and simplistic. The colors do nothing to help, often slathering characters and backgrounds with identical mottled textures. Somewhat more easy on the eyes are the numerous watercolor pages that detail the mythology driving Serpentor's cult. The problem here is that the writers alternate one page of mythology with every one page of story. In the end, the reader may not feel as if they were given a full month's worth of material. All things considered, this issue marks a steady rise in quality. But this still isn't the G.I. Joe: Cobra I've come to love over the past year.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Cobra World Order Prelude #1 |
Oct 15, 2015
show
|
|
This issue is somewhat more entertaining than reading a Wikipedia entry, but in terms of building excitement for Cobra World Order, it's a dud.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Hearts and Minds #2 |
Jun 30, 2010
show
|
|
I've been waiting for an IDW G.I. Joe series that can capture my attention the way G.I. Joe: Cobra does. It seems I've finally found one in Cobra. On the surface this book is nothing too ambitious or unusual - merely an exploration of the psyche of one Joe and one Cobra member each month. But the appeal lies all in the execution. Max Brooks makes Firefly and Tripwire both shine through just the right combination of snappy dialogue and suspenseful storytelling. The outcome of these tales is rarely in question, but the journey never fails to be engrossing. Howard Chaykin and Antonio Fuso make the most of their scripts, though both artists do have their stylistic quirks. Brooks accomplishes quite a lot in both 11-page segments, never leaving the reader feeling there should have been more space allotted. That's not to say I don't crave more, of course. Brooks has proven himself a worthy addition to the Joe ranks, and I sincerely hope this isn't the last of his involvement we see at IDW.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Movie Adaptation #1 |
Jul 01, 2009
show
|
|
This issue also ends on a very abrupt and unsatisfying note. I don't get the impression this mini-series is really meant to be divided as such. IDW has a habit of releasing trades of movie adaptations before the single issues even finish shipping. With that in mind, the trade might be worth checking out for those truly curious about this project. For the rest of us, however, IDW is doing too much good, original work with the franchise to waste much time on a movie adaptation. This project isn't shaping up to be as bad as some similar efforts, but that in itself isn't much of a compliment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Origins |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Origins #1
February 18, 2009
|
|
From a writing standpoint, this is what I expected from IDW's G.I. Joe relaunch. It's a shame Hama hasn't been given the main Joe series, because I fully expect he could return the characters to a sort of glory they haven't enjoyed in years. Let's hope Origins is just the start for Hama.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Origins #2
March 25, 2009
|
|
Unfortunately, the art is the real factor that drags this series down from greatness. On the plus side, Tom Feister only contributes to the cover this month, leaving Mike Hawthorne to handle the interior work alone. Though the visuals are more consistent as a result, they simply aren't very good. The detail is sorely lacking in many instances, as it falls on the colorist to provide many of the finer shadows and highlights. Given that Hawthorne himself is that colorist for much of the book, you can see the problem. When Erik Swanson steps in to provide colors, the page suddenly comes alive for a brief time. The great benefit of dividing art duties among a penciler, inker, and colorist is that each is allowed to focus on what they do best. I wish more IDW books would follow this division of labor, because it seems to be a problem plaguing many of their licensed properties on a consistent basis.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Origins |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Origins #12
February 3, 2010
|
|
Art isn't normally the strong suit of the G.I. Joe books, but Origins #12 is one notable exception. Fans of Templesmith's work may get a kick out of the issue, but even Baroness lovers will be hard-pressed to find much enjoyment in the script.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Origins #19
September 22, 2010
|
|
Silent issues are far less of a novelty now than they were in 1984. If Marvel's "Nuff Said" event from 2002 taught us anything, it's best when these projects occur organically rather than being pre-planned or editorially mandated. Whatever the inspiration behind this particular issue, Origins #19 will hardly leave the impact its predecessor did.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Origins #20
October 13, 2010
|
|
Lapham doesn't always shine when working with licensed books, but thankfully this arc shows none of the flaws of his Modern Warfare series. The plot is tight, the dialogue catchy, and this issue offers plenty to keep readers coming back for the next two installments. It's debatable whether Origins can truly find its own identity when it so closely follows the Cobra formula. Still, more of a good thing is always welcome.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Retaliation Prequel #1 |
Feb 15, 2012
show
|
|
The artwork has its moments, but it's wildly inconsistent to do the script justice. Salvador Navarro tries overly hard to emulate the movie look in some cases and not enough in others. Certain characters resemble the actors, while others seem pulled from the Real American Hero comics instead. At times poses are extremely stiff an unnatural. But at others, the characters become dynamic and the action flows much more smoothly. It's a shame the art can't offer more stability, but this is hardly the worst-looking movie tie-in ever published.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Snake Eyes - Agent of COBRA |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: Snake Eyes - Agent of COBRA #1
January 21, 2015
|
|
If Snake Eyes is a man of few words, at least this issue allows him to express himself through the art of killing. Paolo Villanelli's art doesn't necessarily shine when it comes to fine details or facial work, but he really captures the dynamic, graceful quality of Snake Eyes' swordplay. Hopefully this series will take advantage of that talent by giving the ninja ample amounts of enemies to slice.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
G.I. Joe: The Cobra Files #1 |
Apr 10, 2013
show
|
|
In general, the character dynamics are strong and the generally darker tone associated with the Cobra books is still very much effect. All that's really missing is a stronger emphasis on actual Cobra characters. Without that, there isn't quite as much distinction between Cobra File and the other G.I. Joe books as there should be.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Galaxy Quest: Global Warning #1 |
Aug 13, 2008
show
|
|
|
|
|
Galaxy Quest: The Journey Continues #2 |
Feb 26, 2015
show
|
|
|
|
|
Gambit (2012) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Gambit #2
August 29, 2012
|
|
Clay Mann's art helps keep the heist sequences engaging, at least. Mann has a real talent for rendering powerful, fluid figures that Asmus puts to good use. I do wish that the coloring meshed better with the pencils and inks, however. The colors are too shimmery and ethereal for what would otherwise be a realistically rendered issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gambit #4
October 24, 2012
|
|
Ultimately, what is the point of all of this tomfoolery? Asmus never reveals much about Remy's new partner, Joelle, or why she went through all this trouble on what was apparently a simple death wish. At the end of the conflict, Gambit is still in the exact same wayward emotional state he began the series. There's just too little sense of purpose, impetus, or clear direction to the book. Without those qualities, I can't picture myself following Gambit's solo adventures much longer.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Gamora |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Gamora #1
December 21, 2016
|
|
The long wait for Gamora's solo series was worth it. This new comic offers a fascinating glimpse into Gamora's early family life, one that suggests Nebula might be the real star of the series. And with the talented Marco Checchetto bringing this story to life, Gamora is a promising addition to Marvel's cosmic stable.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gamora #4
March 23, 2017
|
|
This issue features plenty of big moments, though the relentless pacing sometimes prevents the story from reaching its full emotional potential.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Gamora #5
June 1, 2017
|
|
It's a shame that Gamora of all books didn't stick around a little longer. There's a lot to like about this series, between the intimate look it provides at the Most Dangerous Woman in the Galaxy and the gorgeous visuals of Marco Checchetto.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Gears of War Hardcover Vol. 1 Review #1 |
Oct 20, 2009
show
|
|
Gears of War the comic isn't quite the failure many recent videogame adaptations have been, but nor does it do much to convince readers they should put down the Xbox controller and pick up a book. Besides featuring some inherently wooden characters, the book is hopelessly sandwiched between two games, limiting its creative potential. And with the second game having been on store shelves for almost a year now, it becomes harder and harder to determine what purpose this series hopes to accomplish.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Generation Gone #1 |
Jul 20, 2017
show
|
|
|
|
|
Generation Hope |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Generation Hope #1
November 3, 2010
|
|
If nothing else, though, the art for the series is quite attractive. Salvador Espin delivered eye-catching visuals in his recent Hulk work, and that same expressive, vibrant style remains. The colors are toned down here, but that serves the slightly more grounded feel of the series. Whether rendering the surreal and twisted surroundings of Kenji or simply showcasing the fiery personalities aboard the Blackbird, Espin brigns plenty of life to this new book. The hope is that Gillen will eventually be able to do the same in his writing. Phonogram proved Gillen has a unique understanding of modern teens struggling with unusual abilities. Hopefully that same magic can soon be rekindled in Generation Hope.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Generation Hope #2
December 2, 2010
|
|
Too many X-books lack a distinct voice and identity already. If Generation Hope can't find its voice soon, it will never be able to stand out among the many other teen superhero books on the market.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Generation X #2 |
Jun 01, 2017
show
|
|
Some teen X-Men books really shake up the formula, and others seem content to play it safe. Generation X is, sadly, shaping up to be the latter.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Generations (2017) |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Generations: Banner Hulk & The Totally Awesome Hulk #1
August 2, 2017
|
|
Generation s isn't shaping up to be a particularly groundbreaking series for Marvel. With little background for the premise of this crossover or its ties to Secret Empire and Marvel Legacy, Generations: Hulk simply plays out as a fun, character-driven team-up between two heroes. But for fans of these two characters, that should be enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Generations: Miles Morales Spider-Man & Peter Parker Spider-Man #1
September 27, 2017
|
|
Generations: Spider-Man ranks among the more disappointing chapters of the series, as it fails to add much to the Peter/Miles dynamic even with the shift in time period. As with Spider-Men II, this story is at its best when Peter is absent from the picture entirely. But for anyone who fell in love with Ramon Perez's art on Amazing Spider-Man: Learning to Crawl, this issue is a must-read.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Generations: Sam Wilson Captain America & Steve Rogers Captain America #1
September 27, 2017
|
|
Generations: Captain America is essential reading for anyone who's been following Nick Spencer's Captain America saga, regardless if you've been reading the other one-shots. This issue reads like the proper finale to that long run, offering the closure to Sam Wilson's tenure as Cap that Secret Empire didn't. It doesn't take full advantage of the time travel premise, but it works as well as could be hoped given the limited space available.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Generations: Wolverine & All-New Wolverine #1
August 16, 2017
|
|
It's clear by now that each Generations one-shot is going to follow a very specific formula, which could start to work against the series as that formula grows more and more played out. But it's one that works well in this Wolverine crossover. This issue makes the most of the Wolverine/X-23 dynamic and celebrates the legacy of a fallen X-Man.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Genius |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Genius #1
August 7, 2014
|
|
The cover art is not at all representative of the inner contents, and in this case that's a good thing. The interior art isn't so pointlessly sexualized. Afua Richardson opts for a slightly surreal style, full of dynamic angles and exaggerated characters. The approach works for the most part, though people and objects tend to stand out from the vaguely defined backgrounds like paper dolls. Here again, the book veers away from the Top Cow norm, and that's not a bad thing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Genius #2
August 14, 2014
|
|
The artwork is certainly interesting, and the heavy use of shadows suits the tone of the book. But at time the figures are too exaggerated and stand out too much from the backgrounds.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ghost Racers #1 |
Jun 10, 2015
show
|
|
For the most part, this series is a fun ride (pun intended). But there are elements that can certainly be improved as the next race unfolds.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ghost Rider (2006) |
12 issues
show
|
|
|
Ghost Rider Annual #1
November 14, 2007
|
|
Reading this annual was a risk that paid off, luckily. It won't convince me to pick up anymore issues before Aaron's arrival, and I'm not sure how excited I should be for Ghost Rider even then. Regardless, if you need a quick fix of Ghostey goodness, this is about as good a choice as you're likely to find.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghost Rider #20
February 13, 2008
|
|
Despite the huge improvement that comes from Aaron's debut, Ghost Rider just isn't his best work. If you want to see Aaron better handle a major Marvel icon, check out this week's issue of Wolverine. Clearly he'll be fighting an uphill battle with Ghost Rider in the future.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghost Rider #21
March 19, 2008
|
|
Aaron's knack for gritty characters and gritty situations shine through, and the book's strong points manage to outweigh its faults. I'm glad to be feeling an emotion resembling joy after reading Ghost Rider again. I'm just not sure how long that feeling can last without some sort of major shakeup or upheaval.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghost Rider #22
April 16, 2008
|
|
I wouldn't mind all of this so much if the book were more of a looker. Characters lack the detail and menace that made previous regulars Mark Texeira and Javier Saltares such a winning team. If anything, Roland Boschi's art has gotten even less detailed than last month. Even hiring a separate inker would probably do wonders for what has become an extremely bland looking series. When you consider that his looks are all Ghost Rider has at the moment, that's a pretty huge problem.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghost Rider #23
May 21, 2008
|
|
That being said, I'm more than ready to drop this book now. Aaron and Boschi have had an entire arc to win me over, and they haven't. At this point even a halfhearted Secret Invasion tie-in would be an improvement.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghost Rider #24
June 18, 2008
|
|
With two other Aaron-penned books on the stands today, it's only that much harder to put up with mediocre efforts like this. I'm not sure anyone can enjoy Scalped and claim to be fully satisfied by Ghost Rider. The gulf is just too wide.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghost Rider #25
July 16, 2008
|
|
Ghost Rider still has a long way to go before I'm happy with it, but I wound up enjoying the latest storyline more than I expected. I have no idea if the imminent return of Danny Ketch means better tidings or doom for all mankind. All I know is I'll continue to give the series a chance for a while longer.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghost Rider #26
August 20, 2008
|
|
I really hope this issue is a sign of better things to come for Ghost Rider. There's no question now that the series has potential, and I'd love to see Aaron and Huat continue to capitalize on it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghost Rider #27
September 17, 2008
|
|
Ghost Rider is quickly becoming a book I actively look forward to each month instead of just casually flip through. For once, it feels as if the series is actually moving somewhere. I can only hope that somewhere is a place worth seeing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghost Rider #29
November 19, 2008
|
|
Though a little underwhelming as a whole, this issue has its moments, and it leaves me with little doubt that next month will be an improvement.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghost Rider #30
December 17, 2008
|
|
Like I said, I never really expected to be this engrossed by a Ghost Rider book, but it's clear that all Johnny Blaze needed these many long years was the right creative team. Finally, at long last, he has one.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Ghost Rider #32
February 18, 2009
|
|
Aaron has the potential to take this book in a new and interesting with the next arc. However, issue #33 won't be quite the fresh break we were all expecting, and it remains to be seen whether that's a good or bad thing for Ghost Rider.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ghost Rider: Danny Ketch #1 |
Oct 22, 2008
show
|
|
Ghost Rider fans, and Danny Ketch fans in particular, are in for a wild ride over the next few months. Ghost Rider: Danny Ketch #1 offers hope that this mini-series will prove to be more than a quick cash-in, and that the character's return was motivated by more than mere nostalgia.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ghost Riders: Heavens On Fire #1 |
Aug 05, 2009
show
|
|
So issue #1 is fun, most certainly, but not wholly satisfying given how long we've been waiting. I also picture a bit of righteous anger when readers realize they're now paying $3.99 for what is still really a $2.99 story. Heaven's On Fire can get by on sheer kinetic energy for now, but if Aaron really wants to hammer home the idea that this is Johnny Blaze's final stand, he'll need to turn up the character drama in issue #2.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ghostbusters 101 #1 |
Mar 23, 2017
show
|
|
These characters aren't particularly compelling yet, and it often feels like the creators are telling two completely separate stories at once here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ghostbusters International |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Ghostbusters International #1
January 28, 2016
|
|
The first issue of Ghostbusters International isn't the strongest start we've seen from IDW's various mini-series. Despite the straightforward premise, there's a seeming reluctance to dive into the new global status quo for our heroes. Even so, the book features all the humor, slick artwork and fun character dynamics we've come to expect from these comics by now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ghostbusters: Crossing Over #1 |
Mar 14, 2018
show
|
|
Ghostbusters: Crossing Over #1 delivers a slow but enjoyable start to this epic crossover series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ghostbusters: Get Real #1 |
Jun 18, 2015
show
|
|
It's a testament to how "outside the box" IDW has been with the Ghostbusters franchise that the notion of the movie Ghostbusters meeting their animated selves from The Real Ghostbusters is not the strangest thing to happen. It's a solid premise, regardless, and one Erik Burnham and Dan Schoening exploit to great effect in this first issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ghostbusters: The Other Side #1 |
Oct 15, 2008
show
|
|
For better or worse, the entire issue is really nothing more than setup for the larger story. As such, it's hard to judge the faults too harshly, because it still shows the potential to be a worthy continuation of the Ghostbusters mythos. The Other Side #1 will prove at least mildly amusing for most fans, and I'm hoping the next few months can manage a great deal more than that.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ghosts #1 |
Oct 31, 2012
show
|
|
Yes, $8 is lot to ask for any comic, but Ghosts offers a wealth of content, and quality content at that.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Giant-Size Astonishing X-Men #1 |
May 26, 2008
show
|
|
So while Giant-Size Astonishing X-Men isn't the best installment of the series, it's still a satisfying and mostly fantastic conclusion to what may well be the greatest X-Men run ever. I may have a soft spot for Grant Morrison's New X-Men and the Chris Claremont/John Byrne days, but there's only one real candidate for best story in my mind. As far as I'm concerned the series is done now. I'll probably be first in line to snatch up issue #25 this summer, but it won't be the same. Whedon and Cassaday have set the bar astronomically high. Any team that can top them would be astonishing indeed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Giant-Size Spider-Man #1 |
May 29, 2014
show
|
|
If you're looking for an all-ages-oriented Spider-Man comic that offers a lot of bang for the buck and can also serve as a primer for Spidey's Silver Age history, you could do a lot worse than this Giant-Size special.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Giants #1 |
Dec 14, 2017
show
|
|
|
|
|
Go Go Power Rangers |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Go Go Power Rangers #1
July 26, 2017
|
|
Does the world truly need two ongoing Mighty Morphin Power Rangers comics? Not necessarily, and some readers may find that this prequel doesn't do quite enough to stand apart from its sister series. But regardless, the terrific visuals and high school character drama combine to form an enjoyable teen superhero book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Go Go Power Rangers #2
August 30, 2017
|
|
After two issues, Boom has more than justified the existence of a second ongoing Power Rangers comic. Go Go Power Rangers works as a fitting companion to its sister series, telling a more character-driven story that wouldn't necessarily be possible on Mighty Morphin Power Rangers. The series is thriving on the strength of Dan Mora's artwork, working both as an epic superhero adventure and a humble slice-of-life drama.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
God Complex #2 |
Jan 06, 2010
show
|
|
This series certainly has potential, but so far the familiar premise and dull as dishwater lead hero have conspired to drag God Complex down. This book needs to develop a strong personality of its own, and quickly.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
God Complex #1 |
Oct 12, 2017
show
|
|
This series is based on a line of high-end action figures created by co-writer Bryan Lie, which explains the gorgeous, eye-popping character designs. I'm not sure how much the mythology behind God Complex existed prior to this series, but it certainly makes for an inviting world.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
God Country |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
God Country #1
January 12, 2017
|
|
As much as it succeeds in giving a weight and context to these events, it tends to be too little heavy-handed for its own good.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
God Country #2
February 16, 2017
|
|
This is a high fantasy story anchored by very grounded, very human drama. Even as elderly hero Emmett Quinlan defies the gods who want him to hand over his mystical sword, he also has to come to terms with overcoming his Alzheimer's and truly meeting his family for the first time in years. That balance between big and small is the source of this book's appeal.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
God Hates Astronauts #2 |
Oct 02, 2014
show
|
|
I like to think of God Hates Astronauts as the adults-only version of Axe Cop. It has the same stream-of-consciousness storytelling and endlessly bizarre plot twists and characters, just with a lot more violence and cursing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
God of War (2010) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
God of War #1
March 31, 2010
|
|
There isn't much to recommend about God of War the comic thus far, which puts it on equal footing with 90% of the videogame adaptations on the market. Still, I won't write it off just yet. Wolfman has only begun to dive into the meat of his story. There's a chance future issues will pick up as body parts start flying and epic showdowns unfold. But maybe I'm just setting myself up for yet more disappointment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
God of War #2
May 26, 2010
|
|
God of War might have been that all-too-rare decently executed videogame comic if not for horribly mismatched art and a plot that needs some streamlining and focusing. I'm about ready to give up on this one, but Wolfman still has plenty of time left to kick his storyline up a few notches and at least attempt to make up for the series' visual flaws.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
God of War #3
July 21, 2010
|
|
The series is still awkward to read for two primary reasons, though. First, Wolfman abruptly shifts into flash-forward mode in this issue after spending so much time focused on Kratos' past. Framed more effectively, this technique could have benefited the story, but instead it only muddles the plot. The other central flaw is a familiar one. The art in this series is far too abstract and hazy to tell a proper story. It's "stylish", and certain panels might look fine blown up into full-size paintings, but the storytelling flow is almost nonexistent, as is character detail. God of War has improved in its third chapter, but not nearly enough to truly live up to the games that inspired it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
God of War #4
September 15, 2010
|
|
Marv Wolfman's script spends too much time mired in the past when the present day sequences stand a much better chance of offering God of War lovers what they crave. And when the issue does shift from one time period to the other, it provides precious little indication of the transition. This series is playing out like too many videogame comics before it - nigh unreadable at times, and a pale shadow of the source material.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Godzilla in Hell |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Godzilla in Hell #1
July 15, 2015
|
|
But for now, it works. Stokoe's art makes sure of that. He was pretty much born to draw a Godzilla comic. His style is slightly cartoonish (capturing that campy Godzilla charm) but also amazingly detailed and intricate. The sheer amount of effort put into rendering all the scales and ridges and individual tiny figures in these panels is practically mind-boggling. Equally impressive is the sense of motion and energy in his panels. This comic plays very much like a classic Godzilla movie, albeit it with monsters on a far bigger and more elaborate scale. Even if this comic never develops a deeper conflict than what we see in this first issue, it'll be worth following just to see what new and twisted designs Stokoe can conjure.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Godzilla in Hell #3
October 1, 2015
|
|
This series is suffering from a case of diminishing returns. It's understandable, really, as there's only so much you can do with the concept of Godzilla stomping and smashing his way through Hell in an almost silent narrative before it starts getting old.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Godzilla in Hell #4
October 22, 2015
|
|
Readers should know the drill by now. This dialogue-free issue features copious amounts of kaiju carnage as Godzilla battles Ghidorah and Destoroyah in what basically amounts to the giant monster version of Valhalla.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Godzilla: Oblivion #1 |
Mar 31, 2016
show
|
|
The conflict is straightforward and the characters not especially complex. Though is that really necessary in a Godzilla book? Fialkov at least ensures that the humans are likable enough that readers don't want to see them eaten or squished, and he delivers a story that's equal parts campy and dramatic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Goldie Vance #1 |
Apr 14, 2016
show
|
|
This new mini-series may draw inspiration from the likes of Nancy Drew and Lumberjanes, but it never reads like a mere jumble of outside influences. Instead, this first issue offers an engaging look at plucky teen heroine/aspiring detective Goldie as she works to solve a mystery in her father's hotel.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Goners #1 |
Oct 23, 2014
show
|
|
Visually, this series takes the Locke & Key approach with its stylized, vaguely cartoony character designs. It's an interesting look that does more than anything else to distinguish Goners right now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Gotham By Midnight Annual #1 |
Jul 30, 2015
show
|
|
This annual issue continues the trend of diminishing visual returns. There's plenty of shadow, but not nearly as much mood or sense of style.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Gotham Gazette: Batman Alive? #1 |
Mar 04, 2009
show
|
|
There's not a great deal worth complaining about when it comes to Gotham Gazette - Batman Dead? #1. It's a mildly entertaining look at some of the smaller supporting characters in the Bat franchise. However, as a primer for Battle for the Cowl, Gotham Gazette kicks off this event with a whimper rather than a bang. As far as I'm concerned, the fun doesn't start until next week.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Graveyard Shift #1 |
Dec 24, 2014
show
|
|
You have to respect the courage in releasing any sort of vampire-themed comic in today's undead-saturated market. And even if Graveyard Shift doesn't reveal any particular new insights to vamprie storytelling, this debut issue is charming enough to warrant a look.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Grayson |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Grayson Annual #3
June 30, 2016
|
|
If not necessarily remarkable, this issue does serve as one final reminder of how vital this series was for the evolution of DC from the grim New 52 era to the more fun-loving Rebirth.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Grayson #17
February 25, 2016
|
|
Seeley crafts a fun, action-packed new chapter this month that makes the most of the growing bond between Dick and fellow Spyral agent Tiger.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Greek Street |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Greek Street #5
November 4, 2009
|
|
Greek Street continues to be a challenging book, rewarding those who either know their Greek myths or are at least willing to keep a browser tab open on Wikipedia. This is a book that can be thumbed through quickly, but just like 100 Bullets, true appreciation can only come from a slow, methodical read of each issue. Milligan has created a fascinating playground for he and Gianfelice to explore. For however much this issue might have slowed the momentum, I'm eager to see characters and conflicts heat up in true mythological fashion.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Greek Street #6
December 3, 2009
|
|
Artist Davide Gianfelice continues to hold his own. With so many faces in the book, it must be challenging to set each cast member apart visually, but Gianfelice manages well enough. The aforementioned trippy sequence also allows Gianfelice to cut loose and have some fun for a few pages. There are times when certain panels could certainly benefit from stronger, clearer background details, but on the whole Gianfelice continues to be an apt fit for the book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Greek Street #8
February 3, 2010
|
|
Greek Street doesn't immediately welcome new readers like other Vertigo books might, but it does reward those who offer a long-term commitment. By now readers should be able to decide if the book clicks for them or if it's time to move on. As for me, I'm quite content to stick around and see where the series takes me.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Green Arrow #4 |
Sep 29, 2010
show
|
|
Perhaps most annoying about issue #4 is its decision to rehash the Martian Manhunter encounter from Brightest Day #10. That encounter lacks proper context within this issue. Krul's take also fails to offer anything new to the sequence despite it occupying a significant chunk of this issue. The decision to split the Brightest Day characters and conflicts across so many books was a dubious one at best, and instances like this only highlight the many structural problems that arise as a result of so much inter-connectivity. Green Arrow has enough positive traits at present that I'm perfectly willing to keep following along for now. However, Krul needs to focus more heavily on what works in this series while doing what he can to flesh out the supporting cast
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Green Arrow (2011) |
10 issues
show
|
|
|
Green Arrow #17
February 6, 2013
|
|
Sorrentino delivers a bold, strikingly designed issue full of dramatic angles, powerful figures, and a heavy interplay between light, shadow, and color. Color especially is a huge focus, and I love how certain panels fade to black and white at key moments. There's no substitute for a comic where one artist handles the pencils, inks, and colors all on their own.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Arrow #27
January 8, 2014
|
|
But as ever, it's really Andrea Sorrentino's artwork that propels this series forward. Sorrentino takes a fairly minimalist approach when it comes to facial work, offering just enough shape and shadow to convey the necessary emotions. It's more about energy and design and action storytelling in this book. Sorrentino's rendition of the battle between Ollie/Shado and the Shield Clan stands as one of the best of this run. There's a fluid sense of motion, and the use of small panels and monochromatic colors to highlight Ollie and Shado's precise movements is inspired. Sorrentino delivers striking image after striking image,and he also ties them all together with a keen eye for sequential narrative.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Arrow #31
May 7, 2014
|
|
In the end, there's a sense that everything wraps up a little too neatly with this finale issue. Many of the newer characters introduced over the last year are left in a sort of limbo state, and it's unclear how much impact this entire storyline will really have on the book moving forward. This issue is more successful at building excitement for the upcoming clash with Richard Dragon than it is in giving Ollie's quest a completely satisfying resolution. But at least we do have that gang war to look forward to when Ollie returns to Seattle.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Arrow #32
June 5, 2014
|
|
Somehow, Andrea Sorrentino still manages to keep up with the monthly grind and deliver his typical gorgeous, striking superhero imagery. His style definitely suits the dank, rain-soaked alleys of Seattle and Ollie's frantic battle with the Longbow Hunters. However, there were a couple instances where Sorrentino's use of silhouetted figures made it difficult to tell which character was featured in the panel. On the plus side, Sorrentino takes the opportunity here to shake up his usual style for the Richard Dragon-centric flashback scenes. The colorful, textured imagery is a great counterpoint to the stark, washed-out images of the present-day scenes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Arrow #33
July 2, 2014
|
|
Andrea Sorrentino's art is as strong as ever, full of striking design work and energetic choreography. But this issue is also a great showcase for Marcelo Maiolo's colors. Maiolo's deftly transitions the issue between past and present by alternating warm hues and heavy shadows. And his trademark use of washed-out, mono-chromatic panels to highlight key action beats works especially well during the battle sequences this month.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Arrow #50
March 17, 2016
|
|
The script slowly builds towards the next big showdown between Ollie and his Warg enemies, but even after 40 pages offers little in the way of payoff.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Arrow #51
April 7, 2016
|
|
Green Arrow #50 didn't really deliver on the much-hyped clash between Green Arrow and Deathstroke. This issue picks up the slack, though it's still a bit slow in building towards the main event.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Arrow #52
May 5, 2016
|
|
Writer Ben Percy works to wrap up not just his yearlong run and the Lukos conflict, but the past five years' worth of stories. It should come as no surprise that this issue doesn't have nearly the space required to pull off something so ambitious. The ending in particular feels incredibly rushed and not terribly satisfying.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Arrow: Futures End #1
September 3, 2014
|
|
I do wish the story in this one-shot were more self-contained. Lemire's script wraps on a very open-ended note, directing readers to check out an upcoming issue of Futures End for further resolution. But if nothing else, that serves as a reminder that Lemire will still have a hand in the future of Green Arrow, even if he's no longer writing Ollie's solo series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Green Arrow (2016) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Green Arrow #1
June 16, 2016
|
|
The relaunched Green Arrow has been the most pleasant surprise of DC Rebirth thus far. It's amazing how a little facial hair and left-wing diatribes can do so much to make Oliver Queen feel like his pre-New 52 self again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Arrow #4
August 4, 2016
|
|
It seems nothing can slow this book's momentum, not even losing artist Otto Schmidt. Juan Ferreyra brings his own terrific sense of style to the book, a style that's very much in line with Schmidt's but also wholly unique.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Arrow #9
October 20, 2016
|
|
As always, the romance between Ollie and Dinah is the driving force of the series. But it's also nice to see that Percy can dabble in the sort of social commentary that defined the Green Arrow/Green Lantern days without being so heavy-handed and while still adding a touch of the absurd.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Green Arrow / Black Canary #1 |
Oct 10, 2007
show
|
|
This first issue has some major pitfalls, many of which can't really be discussed. Still, Winick has a better handle on both Ollie Queen and Dinah Lance than many readers give him credit for. Fans of either character will probably find something to enjoy here, even if Green Arrow/Black Canary #1 doesn't make a strong case for its own continued existence.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Green Arrow: Rebirth #1 |
Jun 02, 2016
show
|
|
In a lot of ways, this comic is the first true test of DC Rebirth. Can a series truly feel new and different when it retains the same writer from the previous volume? In this case, the answer is a resounding yes. Ben Percy's earlier Green Arrow run was by no means bad, but this issue immediately reaches a new level of quality.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Green Lantern (2005) |
12 issues
show
|
|
|
Green Lantern #33
July 30, 2008
|
|
With only Johns' own Action Comics to rival this series as DC's best ongoing book right now, this issue of Green Lantern gets another unequivocal recommendation from me. If you've skipped over "Secret Origins" for any reason, you're going to be plenty sorry when Blackest Night arrives.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #36
December 31, 2008
|
|
One area that sees significant improvement from the last issue is the art. Shane Davis handled the pencils for the Crisis special. While he did a pretty good job with the issue, I found his work to be a significant step down from series regular Ivan Reis. Fortunately (and in defiance of what the solicits said), Reis is back for this issue. It's unfortunate that he didn't return in time to render the epic space battle between the Green, Yellow, and Red Lanterns, but Reis can make even the most boring of situations look dynamic and interesting. And whatever small problems I may have with this arc, it's certainly not boring. Green Lantern is back, baby. Let's hope it sticks around this time.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #38
February 25, 2009
|
|
I hate to complain so much about what is still one of my favorite superhero books on the stands. As jumbled as this issue is, it still does a lot to get me excited for the future, both "Agent Orange" and Blackest Night. The characters themselves are still strong. Johns reveals the crippling flaw behind the power of the Blue Lanterns, making this already intriguing Corps even more compelling. Johns even ties his script into the events of Green Lantern Corps, making me all the more happy I read both books. I just fear Johns is treading a thin line between intrigue and outright silliness with some of this color-changing nonsense. The idea of seven colors of Lantern Corps could have easily been a ridiculous one, and it's been through the combined efforts of Johns and his artists that it has instead succeeded so well. I'd hate to see the War of Light devolve into a farce just as Blackest Night is looming.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #39
April 8, 2009
|
|
Many of the developments in this issue are intriguing. Unfortunately, the series can't seem to shake a growing undertone of silliness regarding all the warring colors. Can't everybody just turn into White Lanterns or Rainbow Lanterns or whatever and get it over with? Green Lantern is a book i continue to look forward to eagerly each month, but I worry it won't truly return to its former glory until the Black Lanterns take the stage.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #40
April 29, 2009
|
|
But overall I'm satisfied with how Agent Orange is shaping up. With a terrific new villain and the promise of great character moments to come, as well as the looming release of Blackest Night #0 this weekend, it's a great time to be a Green Lantern reader.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #41
May 27, 2009
|
|
Still, I can appreciate the unique visuals, even if they don't always succeed. My main problem with this issue is an all too common one at this point. Johns frequently interrupts the tale with snippets of other stories. We see Torquemada, the Green Lantern hunting for the Anti-Monitor's corpse, for the first time in many, many months. Sinestro also randomly stops by for a single page. These scenes work well in and of themselves, but in the context of the issue as a whole they feel random and out of place. I realize Johns needs to keep all his plates spinning leading into Blackest Night, but there has to be a better way to structure his arcs without so many unexpected cutaways. As usual, though, I can forgive this series its mild digressions. I'm too captivated by everything going on in front of me to care.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #42
June 24, 2009
|
|
Blackest Night is now only a few weeks away. I truly hope the beginning of this massive storyline and the introduction of Doug Mahnke on art will help put this book back on track. It's never been a more exciting time to be a Green Lantern reader, but that hardly means there aren't significant problems to be addressed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #43
July 8, 2009
|
|
Green Lantern has remained one of DC's best books despite the past few months of relatively lackluster installments. But with Blackest Night here and Mahnke on board, I'm hopeful those days are over. Unless you allow this issue's cover to shape your expectations, I can't imagine readers walking away disappointed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #44
July 22, 2009
|
|
Issue #44 isn't quite as good as the superb issue #43, but it easily ranks among the best of the week. I suppose the complaint could be voiced that this issue doesn't fully stand on its own without the need to read Blackest Night #1. But frankly, if you're reading GL and not Blackest Night, you're doing something wrong. My excitement for this event has only grown in its first two weeks.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #47
October 28, 2009
|
|
All in all, issue #48 is one of the stronger issues of Green Lantern this year, but it isn't perfect. As mentioned, there are times when the shifting focus detracts from the flow of the script. Johns focuses a single page on John Stewart, which does little but remind readers that John has a role to play in Blackest Night. Also, the transition between Atrocitus' role early in the issue and his later appearance is poorly handled. I was left wondering if Johns skipped over some vital piece of the story, and if he plans on revisiting it later down the road. But that aside, Green Lantern #48 was a satisfying read and just one more sign that the Lantern books are firing on all cylinders these days.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #54
May 26, 2010
|
|
The jury is still out on Johns' new Green Lantern conspiracy. But as far as pure entertainment value goes, the series is firing on all cylinders at the moment. I very much look forward to more from Atrocitus and Dex-Starr next month. Hopefully the rest of the regular cast will step up to the plate soon as Johns makes his long term intentions for the franchise more and more clear.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #60
December 31, 1969
|
|
Doug Mahnke's pencils are more consistently awesome than in recent issues, a fortunate fact considering how much this issue hinges on the art. As this arc begins winding down and building towards "War of the Green Lanterns" next year, Green Lantern is quickly picking up some serious steam.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Green Lantern (2011) |
10 issues
show
|
|
|
Green Lantern Annual #3
December 24, 2014
|
|
It's a solid finale that concerns itself more with the characters and conflicts at hand rather than trying to set up future storylines. If only more event comics were like that.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #28
February 6, 2014
|
|
Billy Tan and Alessandro Vitti prove to be solid matches for one another, artistically. Both have fairly scratchy styles that capture the darkness of the Red Lanterns and the heroism of the Green Lanterns. Both have their issues with facial work and emotional range, but in terms of visual cohesion, this issue satisfies.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #39
February 5, 2015
|
|
There's a sense that Robert Venditti is striving to return the series to some semblance of normalcy and end the nonstop stream of crossovers, which is certainly welcome. However, this issue winds up being a little too uneventful.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #43
August 6, 2015
|
|
This series needed a change of pace after years of crossovers, and that's what Robert Venditti has delivered with this post-Convergence status quo upheaval. Unfortunately, the book's new direction is already losing steam thanks to a sluggish pace and a lackluster supporting cast.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #46
November 5, 2015
|
|
This issue wraps up most loose threads as Hal forms an impromptu alliance with Relic in order to neutralize Black Hand's out-of-control abilities. The conflict isn't anywhere near as epic or action-packed as the cover would suggest, but Robert Venditti handles the mistrustful relationship between Relic and Hal very well.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #48
January 7, 2016
|
|
In some ways, this series has a lot going for it at the moment. Hal Jordan's already precarious status quo is given more urgency by the fact that his nephew's life now hangs in the balance. Unfortunately, this issue pretty much squanders that urgency by taking an extended detour in Gotham City.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #50
March 3, 2016
|
|
The art is also fairly inconsistent, as regular artist Billy tan is joined by guest artist Vicente Cifuentes and various inkers. Some of the larger splash pages look good, but too often the art looks rushed and suffers from bland, flat facial work.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #51
April 7, 2016
|
|
It's becoming harder and harder to maintain interest in the current volume of Green Lantern when the book is losing steam and DC Rebirth relaunch is right around the corner.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern #52
May 5, 2016
|
|
This particular Green Lantern series has meandered quite a bit over the past year as it's explored Hal Jordan's renegade status quo. The good news is that writer Robert Venditti is able to bring that status quo to an effective conclusion in this finale issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Green Lantern #1 |
Nov 07, 2018
show
|
|
The Green Lantern #1 brings the franchise back to basics, but there's plenty of flavor to set the book apart.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Green Lantern Corps (2006) |
9 issues
show
|
|
|
Green Lantern Corps #17
October 24, 2007
|
|
If Dave Gibbons' writing doesn't quite compare to Johns' on Green Lantern, that's only because Johns has ascended to some superhuman level of storytelling. Gibbons manages to accomplish quite a bit with a cast of characters I honestly didn't care much for a few months ago. In the same vein, while the large cast of artists don't usurp Ivan Reis' throne, their combined effort is more than enough to get the job done. One complaint that might be lodged against Johns issues is that the full scope of the war isn't well-represented. That's where this series steps in. In this issue we get a wider glimpse of the war for New-Earth, and one fairy major revelation that will obviously affect the Lantern books for a good, long while. I'd say that's well worth your money.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern Corps #26
July 23, 2008
|
|
Still, it's hard to deny that this issue doesn't have certain merits. Pointless as it may be in the end, the clash with Mongol was pretty cool. In a week where it seems like every major superhero book is filled with fight scenes, GLC tops most with its engaging characters and some eye-catching art by Patrick Gleason. In terms of detail and scene composition, Gleason seems to get better and better by the month. I think GLC has a lot to offer fans who still need more after each month's installment of Green Lantern. All the same, I feel like this series could be doing more to quench that thirst.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern Corps #33
February 11, 2009
|
|
Patrick Gleason's art is a bit of a mixed bag, unfortunately. There are a few breathtaking scenes to behold, especially when the page opens and Gleason can focus on wide, epic shots. However, his figure work suffers a fair bit, particularly with a series of flat, disjointed faces. But problems aside, this series is unquestionably required reading for Lantern fans. This franchise is now too wide in its scope for one series to have a hope of covering it all. Now bring on issue #34, DC. I needs me some Mongul vs. Arkillo action.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern Corps #35
April 15, 2009
|
|
As crowded as both Lantern books are these days, it's almost enough to make one wonder if a third series isn't necessary. The fact that I'd so quickly accept a third lantern book is proof enough that DC is doing right by this franchise. Things are only heating up as Blackest Night looms closer.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern Corps #40
September 10, 2009
|
|
If the script nods off a little in places, at least the art is as strong as ever. Patrick Gleason is a master of epic layouts and generally dynamic storytelling. His one flaw - an inconsistency in facial work, is far less prevalent here than in many issues. So far it appears Blackest Night will be showcasing Gleason at his best. Hopefully the same will be said for Tomasi in the end. Make no mistake - I enjoyed this issue a lot. The scope of the conflict is certainly there, but the pacing lacks some of the breakneck speed of The Sinestro Corps War. Hopefully the next issue will speed things along.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern Corps #42
November 11, 2009
|
|
But that doesn't imply Tomasi forgets to work in some key character moments as well. Tomasi continues some solid work with Kilowog, who shows a rarely-glimpsed vulnerable side. Tomasi also continues to make me both love and hate the Alpha Lanterns. Amid all the chaos, it's telling that the Guardians continue to be their own worst enemies. But the true highlight involves a much-loved character who takes charge and attempts to strike a mighty blow against the Black Lanterns. Whether they actually succeed you'll have to see for yourself. The important thing is that, by the end of this issue, Blackest Night will have become that much more engrossing and memorable. I'm sure many readers are already firing up their computers and venting various emotions across the Internet. But don't let the upset cries fool you. Green Lantern Corps #42 is easily one of the best chapters of Blackest Night yet, if not the best. And I'd like to think that things will only get bleaker and thereby more engrossin
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern Corps #49
June 23, 2010
|
|
Green Lantern Corps is in good hands at the moment, but there is certainly a great deal of room for improvement in the coming months. I'm waiting for Bedard to unleash more of the creative energy that made him stand out in R.E.B.E.L.S. Once that happens, we should hopefully have a GL series that lives up to its legacy yet carves a distinct new path in the DCU.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern Corps #50
July 28, 2010
|
|
Green Lantern Corps is riding taller this month thanks to a returning villain who clearly has more potential left to explore. the main cast isn't faring quite as well, however, and the series has a ways to go before it starts to rival Pete Tomasi's work of the past few years.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern Corps #52
September 22, 2010
|
|
As for Kyle, Soranik Natu, and the other Lanterns, few really seem directly impacted by the events of this arc. The one character who does come out the other side stronger and more interesting is Hannu. Adrian Syaf's art isn't very impressive in this issue either. Syaf's style is too traditionally superhero-oriented for a GL book in general, but this issue in particular is further plagued by anatomical inconsistencies and boring layouts. Like the Heroic Age-era Avengers book at Marvel, the Green Lantern books have needed to find their new voices and identities alongside the Brightest Day push. Whereas Geoff Johns' Green Lantern and Pete Tomasi's Emerald Warriors have done reasonably well in this regard, Green Lantern Corps is still searching. Hopefully Bedard can rekindle the series' fire as he moves into his second arc.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Green Lantern Corps (2011) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Green Lantern Corps Annual #2
January 29, 2014
|
|
The other flaw is with Neil Edwards' art. At his best, Edwards is a cinematic storyteller on par with the likes of Bryan Hitch. But here, his work is all over the place. It's frustrating to see him focus so much attention on facial work, only to have panels ruined because the faces don't match the tone of the conversation. Tom Derenick's origin pages are a little more successful in terms of storytelling, but they too are unnecessarily cramped. The wide scope of the story is betrayed by small, overstuffed panels.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern Corps #7
March 21, 2012
|
|
I appreciate what Tomasi set out to do with this issue, but it didn't elevate John Stewart in the way it needed to. The ending in particular was too sappy to carry the emotional weight intended. This series really needs to prove that John has a reason to be in the spotlight other than the fact that he has nowhere else to be. It's not as if Guy and friends aren't capable of carrying the book on their own.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern Corps #8
April 18, 2012
|
|
Fernando Pasarin makes a welcome return with this issue. His pages are, as always, fantastically detailed and well laid out. His art carries a slightly lighter tone this time around thanks both to the humor in the story and the lack of severed limbs. Pasarin's work is a good way to kick off a new storyline for the Corps.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern Corps #31
May 14, 2014
|
|
Bernard Chang continues to prove himself as one of the more capable artists working in the GL franchise. His work is smoother and more refined than the scratchy pencils and inks seen in Green Lantern #31, and his characters far more expressive.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Green Lantern Corps: Edge of Oblivion |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Green Lantern Corps: Edge of Oblivion #1
January 13, 2016
|
|
It's unfortunate that Green Lantern: the Lost Army ended so quickly, but DC's newest Lantern comic is a worthy replacement. Between the dramatic premise, Van Sciver's detailed art and Taylor's impeccable characterization, there's a lot to like about this new series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern Corps: Edge of Oblivion #2
February 10, 2016
|
|
Green Lantern: Edge of Oblivion has quickly established itself as the must-read title in the Green Lantern franchise. Between Taylor's top-notch characterization, Van Sciver's epic artwork and the general sense that anything can and will happen to our heroes, there's a lot to love with this mini-series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern Corps: Edge of Oblivion #5
May 11, 2016
|
|
Unsurprisingly, Green Lantern Corps: Edge of Oblivion isn't quite as strong in the wake of Ethan Van Sciver's departure and the visual shakeup that's occurred as a result. This issue has moments of epic visual spectacle, but also cases where the clash between art styles proves distracting. Luckily, there's still plenty to love in Tom Taylor's handling of the Lantern crew and the epic conflict they face as the end of the universe looms.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Green Lantern: Earth One #1 |
Mar 09, 2018
show
|
|
While hampered by pacing problems, Green Lantern: Earth One offers an engrossing overhaul of an iconic hero.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Green Lantern: Emerald Warriors |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Green Lantern: Emerald Warriors #4
November 10, 2010
|
|
If there's anything this series could stand, it's a more diverse cast. The world doesn't strictly need three ongoing books featuring the Green Lanterns, and it would be nice if smaller players from rival Corps like Bleez and Warth had more of a presence. What interaction there is between Bleez and Guy, though, is deliciously sinister. Tomasi also needs to focus on selling Sodom Yat in his new role as fanatical messiah of Daxam. At present it's a little bit of a stretch. Fernando Pasarin continues to impress with his consistently detailed pencils. He doesn't have quite the skills in shot framing and choreography as Patrick Gleason did in GLC, but he's a worthy partner for Tomasi all the same. With the sense that answers are coming soon and Guy's descent into rage is just around the corner, Emerald Warriors is doing more and more to generate interest each month.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern: Emerald Warriors #13
August 24, 2011
|
|
In some ways it seems a waste of time and space to completely ignore the larger events of the GL franchise for such an unimportant and continuity-light tale. But this issue is fun and uncluttered, something that he GL books haven't always managed of late. And Tomasi thankfully avoids going meta with his ending. As a celebration of two diametrically opposed DC heroes and their not-quite-friendship, this finale is a worthy read.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Green Lantern: New Guardians |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Green Lantern: New Guardians #6
February 22, 2012
|
|
In terms of character interaction, things aren't much better. Invictus is too lacking in personality at this stage. He does at least qualify as the noble sort of villain who believes himself to be in the right, but that amounts to little in the end. Tony Bedard would be much better off embracing the high concept sci-fi elements and avoiding these drawn-out fight scenes that merely stall the larger conflict. There's a solid foundation beneath all the flash, and it needs to be brought to the forefront.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern: New Guardians #27
January 22, 2014
|
|
Andrei Bressan fills in for Brad Walker this month. The art is serviceable, but rarely stands out in any way. Bressan conveys the action-oriented scenes well enough. It's the more dialogue-driven fare that suffers from dull facial work and sometimes bizarrely proportioned figures. The visuals get the job done for this one-off issue, but a return to normalcy next month won't be a bad thing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern: New Guardians #40
March 18, 2015
|
|
Despite this being a finale issue, Jordan's script is more focused on what lays ahead. There are new developments that beg to be followed up, and a general open-ended sense of excitement about it all. Maybe New Guardians doesn't immediately have a successor lined up, but this issue certainly proves the need for such a book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern: New Guardians: Futures End #1
September 18, 2014
|
|
Though an unseen presence for much of the issue, Kyle is an interestign character study. Has he been corrupted by absolute power, or is he still worthy to wield the White Light? Unfortunately, the protagonist of this issue, a stubborn woman named Saysoran, doesn't benefit from the same depth
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Green Lantern: The Lost Army |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Green Lantern: The Lost Army #2
July 15, 2015
|
|
The book also benefits from a talented artist. It's a little strange seeing Jesus Saiz exploring the cosmos after so much of his previous DC work was devoted to more grounded heroes (as in Checkmate) or horror (as in Swamp Thing). Saiz certainly shakes up his style, inking and even coloring his own work. While his work lacks a bit of the shadowy definition it had in Swamp Thing, Saiz's storytelling is as clean and refined as ever.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern: The Lost Army #4
September 17, 2015
|
|
The plot certainly picks up the pace in this issue as more is revealed about the Lost Lanterns' plight and the fate of other missing characters, but Bunn doesn't allow the conflict to get ahead of itself.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lantern: The Lost Army #6
November 19, 2015
|
|
This issue is crammed full of epic Lantern warfare, while still making room for solid character moments as the creators explore more of John Stewart's past and several big transformations. At times this issue is a little too crowded, but at least it wraps up the current conflict while setting the stage for Edge of Oblivion.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Green Lanterns |
9 issues
show
|
|
|
Green Lanterns #4
August 4, 2016
|
|
This issue packs in plenty of energetic, large-scale artwork, as well. It's unfortunate that Robson Rocha has to be joined by two other artists, but the issue manages to feel largely cohesive despite the constant back-and-forth of the art.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lanterns #9
October 20, 2016
|
|
This issue kicks off a new story arc called "The Phantom Ring," which basically asks the question, "What if someone could harness the power of a Lantern without training and discipline?" It's an intriguing question, and one that bears immediate fruit as Sam Humphries introduces a new villain with a serious case of Green Lantern envy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lanterns #30
September 7, 2017
|
|
Visually, this issue struggles in other areas, including the uniformity of Barberi's facial work and the repetitive use of splash pages. It's hard not to wonder how this issue might have turned out with a different creative pairing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lanterns #34
November 2, 2017
|
|
Seeley really nails the dynamic between Simon Baz and Jessica Cruz, channeling the bond between two partners who have grown comfortable working with one another, even if little else in their lives seems to be going as planned.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Green Lanterns #41
February 22, 2018
|
|
I appreciate that this series is trying to find that balance between cosmic adventure and showcasing the mundane struggles that make up Simon and Jessica's personal lives, but right now the book isn't succeeding in that goal.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Grendel (1993) |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Grendel: Behold the Devil #1
November 21, 2007
|
|
It's safe to say many of you reading this have never read a Grendel comic before. While I would urge you to at least check out Devil By the Deed before anything else, there is little in this issue to put off the Grendel layman. Long term fans may not see much in the way of originality yet, but it's obvious bigger things are on the horizon.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Grendel: Behold the Devil #2
December 19, 2007
|
|
While I'm pleased to see Wagner illustrating one of his greatest creations again, I'm a little underwhelmed by the finished product. As part of Grendel tradition, every Hunter Rose story is colored in black, white, and red shades. Typically, this leads to some rather interesting effects as pages become more and more drenched in blood. However, Wagner just doesn't go far enough with this series. Most pages are completely lacking in any shades of red, resulting in a fairly bland overall look. If Gotham City can have a red skyline in Batman: The Animated Series, why not Grendel's New York?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Grendel: Behold the Devil #6
April 16, 2008
|
|
I'm not going to waste more space complaining about the lackluster use of red coloring again. It's something that has bugged me from day one, and I've learned to live with it by now. For all its unchanging faults, this book still has much to offer the discerning Grendel reader.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Grim Leaper |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Grim Leaper #2
June 20, 2012
|
|
The backup feature also manages to entertain, even if it has no real connection to the main story beyond offering a grim tale of romance and heartache. Ryan K. Lindsay's script provides an amusing parody of old-school romance comics that's juxtaposed against some very twisted imagery from Jordie Bellaire. If nothing else, this series illustrates the need for more romance-fueled stories in this industry.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Grim Leaper #4
August 29, 2012
|
|
Even at four issues, Grim Leaper might have been slightly too long for its own good. Wiebe didn't explore his clever concept to the extent he could have. But there's always room for a more ambitious sequel. And if the main feature and backups proved anything, it's that we need more romance comics willing to subvert familiar formulas.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Groo vs. Conan #1 |
Jul 24, 2014
show
|
|
Aragones is in his usual fine form, visually, but the issue is actually most impressive when his characters intersect with Conan's world and Aragones' style bumps into Tom Yeates' more traditional Conan imagery. I really look forward to see how much Aragones and Yeates can push the envelope when these two barbarians actually meet.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Groot #2 |
Jul 02, 2015
show
|
|
As with issue #1, the writing is plenty humorous and entertaining, just not possessed of a great amount of depth.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Guardians of Infinity |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
|
|
Guardians of Knowhere (2015) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Guardians of Knowhere #1
July 15, 2015
|
|
Mike Deodato's art is impressive, at least. Compared to his previous big cosmic epic (last year's Original Sin), Deodato devotes more attention to his backgrounds and ensuring that figures and environments fit together in a natural way. The few wide shots of Knowhere the script permits are breathtaking. And the Drax/Angela fight, while dull from a storytelling standpoint, puts Deodato's flair for big superhero action to good use.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians of Knowhere #4
September 17, 2015
|
|
Guardians of Knowhere is a frustratingly paced comic. The series was slow to get underway, and even in its final chapter hasn't quite built up the compelling conflict it needed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy - Mission: Breakout #1 |
May 04, 2017
show
|
|
It's entirely possible that this comic will hold more significance who have actually experienced the ride and crave a souvenir of the experience. But on its own merits, this reads like a pretty run-of-the-mill Guardians comic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy (2008) |
8 issues
show
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy #1
May 14, 2008
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy further proves there's plenty of life in the Marvel Universe out among the stars. With a rip-roaringly good cast, trippy visuals, and a great cliffhanger to cap it all off,this series has all but cemented its place in my pull list permanently.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy #2
June 18, 2008
|
|
Whatever flaws Guardians may have, though, I forgive them for the sheer sense of fun and excitement the book delivers. Between this series and Nova, cosmic Marvel is undergoing a new golden age. That alone is enough to pique my interest for Annihilation 3.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy #5
September 17, 2008
|
|
The only drawback to the confined setting is that Paul Pelletier's artwork suffers a bit. Pelletier's strength has never been in his figure work, but rather his exciting landscapes and background vistas. He isn't given much chance to work in that area, and his figure work is about all that's left. Still, that's hardly enough to drag down this book very much. Guardians continues to develop into one of my favorite ongoing books, and that's something no amount of event tie-ins are going to change.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy #14
May 27, 2009
|
|
It's hard to say whether this complaint holds any water until next week. On its own merits, Guardians of the Galaxy is still standing tall and strong. And is that Cosmo andRocket Raccoon I see on next issue's cover? This is going to be awesome...
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy #18
September 23, 2009
|
|
This isn't the strongest issue of Guardians to hit the stands, but it still managed to be one of the better books I've read this week. I'm just crossing my fingers that the two halves of the team reunite soon and begin dealing with the giant ball of chaos brewing in the 21st Century.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy #24
March 17, 2010
|
|
This issue ends on a rollicking cliffhanger that, unfortunately, will have been spoiled already for a great many readers. You certainly shouldn't let that dissuade you from reading this book. Guardians is now as entertaining and engrossing as it's ever been. The book may be going on hiatus after next month, but Abnett and Lanning have left me convinced Marvel's cosmic lineup is still in expert hands no matter what happens.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy #25
April 21, 2010
|
|
Speaking of The Thanos Imperative, this issue doesn't overtly build towards that event as much as might be expected. Certainly Nova #36 was a more direct lead-in. But in the end I think Guardians fared better in its approach. Nova left too many loose threads dangling by the end, whereas Guardians #25 feels like a satisfying wrap-up to the past two years of storytelling. If the book really has to end here, I can be content with what Abnett and Lanning have delivered. As with Nova, I'm confident that we'll be seeing plenty more of this ragtag bunch of heroes and rascals throughout the year.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy Annual #1
December 11, 2014
|
|
Most of the appeal comes from seeing this team interact with a '70s-era Nick Fury and company. However, there is a poignant quality to the story, too, as Bendis frames the tale from Carol Danver's point of view and focuses on her homesickness.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy #6
September 25, 2013
|
|
Sara Pichelli's art makes any wait well worthwhile. Her action storytelling, already vibrant enough on Ultimate Comics Spider-Man, has seen further improvement with this new project. Her battle scenes between Angela and the Guardians crackle with life and convey a sense of motion and fluidity that's rare in comics. Her facial and emotional work, if more subtle, is equally pristine.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy #12
February 26, 2014
|
|
Sara Pichelli and Stuart Immonen make a terrific team with this crossover. Which is good, since Immonen steps in to render a couple pages of this issue. Both have very clean, vibrant styles that mingle well and prevent any sort of weird tonal shift from taking place. Pichelli still handles the lion's share of this issue, where her flair for expressive facial work comes in handy over and over again. I'm already salivating at the thought of one day owning this story in an oversized hardcover edition. This art deserves no less.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy #13
March 26, 2014
|
|
This final issue is anticlimactic in some ways, with the trial seeming like little more than an afterthought in the end. But Bendis crams in plenty of entertaining character banter and sets a number of balls rolling as the two books move their separate ways again. And the big takeaway from the crossover is that the X-Men and Guardians have built an ongoing relationship, promising more crossover between the two titles and Greg Rucka's upcoming Cyclops spinoff. Given how much fun the pairing was here, that's definitely a good thing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy #16
June 26, 2014
|
|
But while the storyline is improving, the art quality continues to suffer. The shifts from Nick Bradshaw to David Marquez to Jason Masters are jarring, and Marquez's work here is a far cry from his smooth, vibrant style on Ultimate Spider-Man.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy (2015) |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy #1
October 15, 2015
|
|
This issue makes for a fun read as it reacquaints fans with the team eight months after Secret Wars. Ben Grimm makes for a fitting addition to the team, though it's really Kitty Pryde as the new Star-Lord (Star-Lady?) and Peter Quill as the horribly bored new ruler of Spartax that give this issue its drive.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy #6
March 10, 2016
|
|
There's some appeal in seeing Star-Lord and Kitty Pryde reunited and trying to pick up the broken pieces of their romance, but that drains away over the course of this issue. This issue focuses entirely too much on their banter and squabbling, with little tangible progress for either character.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy #11
September 1, 2016
|
|
With this issue, Guardians makes its belated entry into Civil War II. Given the team's ties to Carol Danvers and other earthbound heroes, there's some potential to be mined from dragging them back to earth at this point in time. But none of that makes for a particularly compelling tie-in yet.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy #19
April 12, 2017
|
|
This issue truly marks the end of an era at Marvel, and Brian Bendis and his collaborators give the Guardians the farewell they deserve. This issue has the scope of a huge event crossover but keeps the focus squarely on the Guardians and their family dynamic. It's a gorgeous comic, and one that manages to be funny and heartfelt in equal measure.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy #150 |
Jan 03, 2018
show
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy #150 isn't an ideal series finale. It doesn't offer much in the way of closure, and it suffers from a lot of the flaws that have hindered the series since the Legacy relaunch. Still, between the strong characterization, Kuder's vibrant artwork and the return of a fan-favorite hero, there's plenty more good than bad in this comic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy #1 |
Jan 23, 2020
show
|
|
Marvel's latest volume of Guardians of the Galaxy is a perfect excuse to jump on board the franchise.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy & X-Men: The Black Vortex: Alpha #1 |
Feb 04, 2015
show
|
|
This is the first chapter in a much larger crossover. That means there's ample time for improvement, but readers really need to be given incentive now to keep sticking around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Guardians of the Galaxy: Telltale Games #1 |
Jul 26, 2017
show
|
|
If you're burnt out on Guardians of the Galaxy comics, this new mini-series probably won't do anything to help. This is a very traditional take on the franchise, one that could just as easily be an extension of the regular comics or movies as a prequel to the Telltale game. But between the fun tone, strong team dynamic and expressive art, it's at least a very well-executed Guardians story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Guardians Team-Up #5 |
May 07, 2015
show
|
|
This issue practically sells itself on the strength of its premise alone. Who doesn't want to read about a team-up between Rocket Raccoon and the Pet Avengers? The results are every bit as wacky and entertaining as you'd expect.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Guarding the Globe #1 |
Sep 05, 2012
show
|
|
All in all, Guarding the Globe #1 is a strong start for the new series. I didn't think I would be very interested in a second Invincible book, but Hester is quickly proving me wrong.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Gwenpool Holiday Special: Merry Mix Up #1 |
Dec 15, 2016
show
|
|
Though conceptually similar to the DC rebirth Holiday Special, Gwenpool Holiday Special: Merry Mixup proves to be the stronger of the two books. Part of that is simply due to its willingness to quit before wearing out its welcome. But more importantly, the various holiday-themed vignettes actually tie together to tell a larger story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Gwenpool Special #1 |
Dec 07, 2015
show
|
|
Gwenpool is arguably the least essential element of this holiday-themed anthology comic. Still, her presence is one extra dose of fun in a book that already has a lot going for it. The various stories here combine to form a charming look at how Marvel's heroes come together to celebrate the holidays.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps |
8 issues
show
|
|
|
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #1
July 27, 2016
|
|
The Green Lantern franchise had fallen on hard times, particularly over the course of the past year. Thankfully, this new series quickly and gracefully wipes the slate clean. This issue manages to shine a light on Hal Jordan as he begins his quest to restore the Green Lanterns, and it succeeds equally well in exploring the rise of the Sinestro Corps. Any fans who might have drifted away from Green Lantern lately would do well to give this series a look.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #9
November 24, 2016
|
|
Robert Venditti creates a nice sense of scale as the resurgent Green Lanterns find themselves simultaneously liberating a planet and battling Brainiac. He's ably assisted by Rafa Sandoval, who delivers a nonstop dose of sweeping battles and powerful, dynamic figures.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #10
December 15, 2016
|
|
This issue is structured a bit weirdly, with a pair of Brainiac-centric scenes book-ending Hal Jordan's struggle to emerge from the afterlife back into the land of the living. Tonally, not a great match, but the Hal scenes work very well on their own.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #21
May 25, 2017
|
|
The series' current story arc reaches an uneven conclusion here. The problem is mostly one of pacing. After so much build-up, it's bizarre to see the Sarko threat so quickly and easily dealt with. Because of that, there's a general lack of urgency and dramatic tension in this issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps: Rebirth #1 |
Jul 13, 2016
show
|
|
Count the Green Lantern franchise as one more DC property that's been given a huge boost thanks to Rebirth. This one-shot helps wrap up loose ends while also allowing Robert Venditti a fresh start with the series and the chance to build a bigger, better status quo for Hal Jordan. With Van Sciver providing some dependably excellent Lantern imagery, this issue serves as a strong debut for the new series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Halo: Blood Line |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Halo: Blood Line #2
January 27, 2010
|
|
I'm optimistic that Blood Line will only continue to get better now that the basic setup material is out of the way and the characters are beginning to be explored in greater depth. This is a worthy offering for fans of the games, but I'd like to think even non-gamers would find something to appreciate in this series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Halo: Blood Line #3
February 24, 2010
|
|
At the rate things are going, I'll have no qualms about labeling Blood Line Marvel's best Halo effort yet. Van Lente isn't working with the most original premise imaginable, but he brings his usual charm and freshness to the book anyway.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Halo: Escalation |
11 issues
show
|
|
|
Halo: Escalation #1
December 11, 2013
|
|
So far, Escalation doesn't compete on the same level as Marvel's best Halo comics. This series has a lot of potential, but it's currently held back by dull characterization and flat artwork. Hopefully these problems can be shaken off over time, and Escalation can prove that it has a worthwhile story to tell and isn't just filling the gaps between games.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Halo: Escalation #6
May 29, 2014
|
|
Fans of this current storyline will be pleased, as writer Chris Schlerf references the events of Halo Wars and the mystery of the Spirit of Fire's disappearance.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Halo: Escalation #9
August 28, 2014
|
|
Dark Horse's new Halo series didn't get off to a great start in its first story arc. But things have certainly turned around for Escalation in recent issues. Now that it revolves directly around Master Chief and the Didact in the aftermath of Halo 4, Escalation is both more relevant and more exciting that it's ever been.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Halo: Escalation #10
September 25, 2014
|
|
This issue opens with a brief but effective flashback to John's past before resuming the seemingly unwinnable battle with the Didact. This has developed into a conflict that would have been worthy of a game. I wish the art was more adept at channeling the games, though, as it tends to feature flat perspectives and washed out colors.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Halo: Escalation #11
October 23, 2014
|
|
Unfortunately, Escalations starts to backslide into old habits as the new team transitions in. The story is less of a focus than the action, as two new Spartan IVs named Ray and Thorne take the spotlight.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Halo: Escalation #12
November 26, 2014
|
|
This series continues struggling to regain its footing with a new creative team steering the ship. As with issue #11, this arc suffers from a no-nonsense approach to storytelling that allows for plenty of action but not much in the way of character development.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Halo: Escalation #13
December 24, 2014
|
|
This issue has been billed as an ideal jumping-on point for new readers and the start of a major new storyline that builds towards Halo 5. It doesn't disappoint in that regard.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Halo: Escalation #14
January 29, 2015
|
|
Unfortunately, this series still doesn't live up to the source material visually. The trademark Halo Weapons, costumes, and architecture are all there, but the figures are flat and the action scenes fairly lifeless. Still, fans of the increasingly complex Halo mythology will want to give this current storyline a look.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Halo: Escalation #19
June 25, 2015
|
|
Even as dialogue-driven and setup-focused as this issue is, it immediately ramps up the tension and paves the way for an exciting showdown. There's a cat-and-mouse quality to the conflict, wand I found myself rooting for both sides at different intervals. Unfortunately, as is too often the case with this book, the art isn't up to par with the writing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Halo: Fall of Reach - Boot Camp |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Halo: Fall of Reach - Boot Camp #1
September 15, 2010
|
|
Ultimately, Boot Camp #1 fails to surpass its source material in any significant way. As such, it's difficult to recommend reading this comic over Nylund's novel. With Boot Camp lasting a mere four issues, I'm not sure Reed will be afforded the time to give his characters the focus and attention they deserve.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Halo: Fall of Reach - Boot Camp #2
October 20, 2010
|
|
Too often, however, the script glosses over key scenes and interactions too quickly. This story needs a slower, more focused approach that the comic simply isn't able to provide. Reed also fails to properly transition between scenes, particularly as the script cuts away from the boot camp for a few pages. Nor is Felix Ruiz's art terribly effective in conveying the action o flow of the story. Ruiz's work is too scratchy and haphazard to suit the tone of the Halo universe. The series could certainly benefit from brighter colors and cleaner lines. In sort, this comic continues to offer no incentive to choose it over the Fall of Reach novel. Even those who haven't experienced the source material will likely be annoyed by the needlessly brisk pace and quick story cuts.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Halo: Fall of Reach - Covenant #3 |
Sep 07, 2011
show
|
|
|
|
|
Halo: Fall of Reach - Invasion #1 |
Jan 18, 2012
show
|
|
If you've been following these comics so far, you likely won't find any incentive to stop reading now. The final few issues will be the ones that truly determine whether this adaptation was successful or not.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Halo: Helljumper |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Halo: Helljumper #1
July 22, 2009
|
|
In the end, as much as the dialogue and character interaction impress, the real test of this new series will come as the conflict heats up and the battle between the ODST troopers and the Covenant truly begins. This comic has a good chance of topping Marvel's first Halo effort, and I'll be interested to see if it accomplishes that much.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Halo: Helljumper #2
August 26, 2009
|
|
At least David's impeccable sense of dialogue is still present. The writer doesn't have much time to flesh out his heroes, but he makes the most of what he does have. By now readers should have no problem caring for partners Dutch and Romeo as they fight to stay alive against increasingly overwhelming odds. Last issue was a bit light on the action, and this issue maybe slips a little too much in the other direction. I'm not even sure it's a problem of striking a proper balance so much as it is that the story will read better as a completed graphic novel. Halo: Uprising certainly worked better as a whole, and the same may apply to Helljumper. It has its weak points so far, but on the whole I'm finding Marvel's second attempt in this universe every bit as engaging as the first.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Halo: Helljumper #3
September 23, 2009
|
|
Eric Nguyen's art is solid, if not as impressive as David's script. As I noted last month, Nguyen's figures tend to appear very flat and dull when not bathed in light. This quality tended to drag down issue #2, as most of the action took place in dark corridors. Luckily, as most of this issue takes place in a bright desert setting, it's not so much a problem this time. Nguyen also does a good job in employing various tricks and techniques to ensure the Helljumpers aren't dehumanized by their full body armor and covered faces. Assuming the lights don't go out again, I don't think we'll have much to worry about from either creator in the remaining chapters. If you happen to grow bored with Firefight mode this week, I'd recommend giving Helljumper a glance.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Halo: Helljumper #4
October 28, 2009
|
|
Helljumper #3 is a satisfying read, but also a brief one. Much like Uprising before it, Helljumper is a project probably best left for the trade. But given that it helps flesh out some of the stars of ODST very well, fans of the game owe it to themselves to check out Helljumper in one form or another.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Halo: Initiation #1 |
Aug 14, 2013
show
|
|
And the problem with focusing so much of this issue on Palmer's battlefield exploits is that the art doesn't do them justice. Marco Castiello's work is decent enough in the dialogue-heavy scenes that bookend the story. But his storytelling is completely inadequate when the action heats up. Characters don't seem to run so much as stumble in place. A shot of a Brute throwing a gravity hammer has absolutely zero sense of motion. At times the art zooms in so close that it's not even clear what Palmer is doing as she battles Covenant troops. It's not a good sign for a series where the action is only likely to get bigger and more superhuman.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Halo: Rise of Atriox #1 |
Aug 30, 2017
show
|
|
Rise of Atriox gets off to a mostly enjoyable start in its first issue. The creators paint a bleak picture of a few hapless soldiers making their final stand against an overwhelming enemy, which is something the Halo franchise often does well. At the same time, while this issue paint Atriox as an unstoppable force of nature, it makes no effort to explore him in any depth. Future installments need to do more to balance action with strong characterization.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Halo: Uprising |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Halo: Uprising #2
November 21, 2007
|
|
Ultimately, Halo: Uprising #2 is a flawed but enjoyable experience. Unfortunately for Marvel, that's not going to be enough to drag readers away from their Xboxes and turkey dinners on what has to be the least popular week for buying comics of the entire year. Assuming the next issue comes out in the next month, let's hope it hits before the post-Christmas bout of retail apathy sets in.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Halo: Uprising #3
August 13, 2008
|
|
It's almost amusing to see Chief gravitate towards weapons like the Mauler and Bubble Shield in his battles, as if Bungie made that a specific story requirement. Actually, I'm pretty certain they did. Once the thrill of seeing Alex Maleev doodle master Chief wears off, the comic comes across as more of a promotional tool than a legitimate, worthwhile story. And considering there's nothing left for Bungie to promote, one has to wonder why anyone is even bothering anymore.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Halo: Uprising #4
April 15, 2009
|
|
In the end, Halo: Uprising managed to rise above and reach a surprisingly solid conclusion. I'm hopeful the crews behind Marvel's upcoming Halo books will learn from the mistakes made here and craft stories that can consistently capture what makes Halo fun. At the very least, let's hope we don't have to wait a year between issues anymore.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Harley Quinn (2013) |
25 issues
show
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #0
November 20, 2013
|
|
Harley Quinn #0 is light on plot and heavy on goofy antics. It;s a nice change of pace for a character who has been too mired in darkness lately, even if the humor is a little too specific to comic industry inside jokes at times. And each page with its new artist is a sight to behold. As long as the writers focus less on fourth wall-breakage and more on actual plot when the series truly begins, this should be a comic well worth following.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn Annual #1
October 29, 2014
|
|
There's no harm in DC churning out extra Harley Quinn comics as long as they're worth reading, and this issue most certainly is. It offers plenty of entertainment value, but also celebrates the Harley/Ivy relationship in a big way. The issue and its hallucination sequences also makes great use of the rotating artists. The "Rub n' Smell" technology is pretty gimmicky (as well as pointless for digital readers), but it certainly doesn't harm the book in any way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #7
June 19, 2014
|
|
I wouldn't mind if Harley Quinn took a page from Deadpool and injected a bit more drama into these comedic misadventures, but at least the book remains enjoyable.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #9
August 13, 2014
|
|
The focus in this story is a bit scatterbrained. And while maybe that's appropriate given the star of the series, it is a little annoying to see the writers jump from a stage performance to a Psycho spoof to another roller derby match before the issue abruptly ends. I would have liked to see the middle element remain the sole focus of the issue. But regardless, there's plenty of fun to be had here, as well as a more intimate look inside Harley's troubled mind. And best of all, we only have to wait two weeks for the next issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #10
August 27, 2014
|
|
Chad Hardin is absent again, with another Harley Quinn Invades SDCC artist in the form of Marco Failla, Failla is adept at channeling Hardin's style and retaining the book's bright, airy style of presentation. Hoeever, his work suffers during the roller derby scenes, As the crowds and background details fade away, so does the sense of motion and perspective. Failla's rendition of Harley's oversized roller derby opponent is also a bit underwhelming. She looks less like a giant powerhouse of a player and more like a stick-thin fashion model who happens to be 12-feet-tall. But the art picks up as the story shifts to other locales and other antics.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #11
October 22, 2014
|
|
This issue is easily one of the most entertaining and amusing chapters of Harley Quinn to date. That said, with Power Girl apparently sticking around for a bit, I do hope to see the writing veer into more dramatic territory eventually. Harley's is a great character because of the undercurrent of sadness about her, and it could be fascinating to explore her sudden motivation for wanting to be accepted and validated as a superhero.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #12
November 20, 2014
|
|
The art in this issue is cleverly divided, with regular artist Chad Hardin tackling the bookend scenes set on Earth and John Timms handling the many pages in between. Timms has established himself as more than capable of handling Harley's zany life, and he has no trouble capturing the whimsical, stream-of-0-consciousness quality to Harley's misadventures here.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #14
January 28, 2015
|
|
That being said, it is interesting to see the writers explore different facets of Harley's character throughout the issue. She isn't just her typical goofball self. We see a sentimental side as she defends an innocent woman from thieves. We even see her revert to a completely normal and lucid state as she rises to the challenge in her new job. You have to wonder if moments like that are building to something bigger for Harley. Using Marvel's current Deadpool comic as a gauge, there could be real potential in exploring Harley's serious side and the resulting tension that arises in her fractured mind.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #15
March 4, 2015
|
|
These scenes create a bit of a visual problem, though. John Timms steps in to illustrate some, but not all of these side-stories. The shift between Chard Hardin and Timms' pages is often jarring. Hardin does great work with his expressive, vibrant pages, but it's a shame this issue couldn't have been a little more visually cohesive.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #16
April 2, 2015
|
|
This issue again sees Chad Hardin and John Timms share art duties. Both artists have really defined the look of New 52 Harley and her world by now, injecting each page with style and zany charm. Their styles are just different enough to clash a bit, though. Whereas issue #15 divided their pages in a pretty natural way, this issue just abruptly switches from Hardin to Timms. Ideally, the two-month hiatus will allow the art crew to get a head start on Harley's next big adventure.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #17
June 10, 2015
|
|
Harley Quinn has come a long way from her early New 52 appearances. This series continues to emphasize her as a likable (if still demented) heroine with a real desire to help her community and build a new life for herself. Unfortunately, it's a struggle just to cover all the elements of Harley's life, much less flesh out her new team of helper Harleys. Hopefully the series can find a better balance as this new story arc unfolds.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #18
July 15, 2015
|
|
This issue showcases more of the potential in the idea of Harley Quinn leading a team of sidekicks. While the script sputters in spots, it continues the series' emphasis on zany adventures with a healthy dose of character drama to balance things out.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #19
August 27, 2015
|
|
This is one of those weird transitional issues that attempts to both wrap up the current conflict and set the stage for the next big storyline, not really doing justice to either in the end.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #22
November 19, 2015
|
|
Lately this series has shown a renewed emphasis on showcasing Harley's darker side. It's been a nice change of pace, as she's practically evolved into a full-blown heroine over the past couple years. This issue offers plenty of entertainment as an old villain resurfaces and Harley wages bloody war against a group of Russian gangsters.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #23
December 17, 2015
|
|
This series has been dealing with some recurring pacing problems that persist for another month. This issue once again wraps up one conflict in its first half before shifting gears to a completely unrelated conflict in the second. Perhaps the best thing that could happen to the book is that it shift towards more of a standalone, one-and-done format while still building its ongoing plot threads.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #24
January 21, 2016
|
|
It seems we'll have to wait another month for the "Harley Quinn in Arkham" storyline that was promised. This issue becomes distracted by a less compelling conflict that results in little more than Harley and her friends killing a bunch of mercenaries. Visually distinctive, but otherwise not particularly memorable.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #25
February 17, 2016
|
|
It's unfortunate that this series can't seem to shake its pacing problems, because otherwise this is one of the strongest chapters of Harley Quinn in the past year. Harley's showdown with Joker was worth the long wait, and her interaction with her supporting cast adds a lighthearted counterpoint to that dramatic reunion.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #26
March 23, 2016
|
|
Harley Quinn has been a fairly frustrating read over the past year. There's a lot to love still about the character and her portrayal, but the book is constantly suffering from odd pacing and storytelling choices that serve to always make Harley feel like a character in flux.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #27
April 28, 2016
|
|
Despite its flaws, this issue reads like something of a return to form for a series that's struggled to find balance in recent months.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #28
May 18, 2016
|
|
Harley Quinn has often struggled to regain its footing in the past year, but this latest arc, while brief, has helped to put things back on track. The amusing dynamic between Harley and her new admirer is a big part of this, but it's also a matter of the series slowing down just enough to find its focus again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #29
June 23, 2016
|
|
This issue features a particularly bizarre combination as gangsters mesh with anime-style mecha warfare. It's a story that would only work n Harley's bizarre little corner of the DCU.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #30
July 28, 2016
|
|
Technically this issue qualifies as a series finale, even if DC is relaunching Harley Quinn in a mere seven days. But if this were the final chapter from Amanda Conner and Jimmy Palmiotti, it would serve as a satisfying conclusion.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: Futures End #1
September 24, 2014
|
|
Chad Hardin returns to the series, giving it a nice visual boost in the process. Hardin's expressive facial work and semi-cartoony figures have always suited the series well, and only more so now that Harley's surroundings have become that much weirder.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Harley Quinn (2016) |
17 issues
show
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #1
August 3, 2016
|
|
With everything changing in the DCU lately, Harley Quinn remains the one constant. But that's not a bad thing. Other than the annoying and overlong recap sequence midway through, this issue offers an enjoyably silly new adventure for Harley and a celebration of some of the key friendships in her life. And thanks to the art team, the new series looks every bit as snazzy as the old.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #2
August 17, 2016
|
|
Given how cluttered and poorly paced the previous volume of Harley Quinn could be at times, there's something to be said for the more simple, straightforward approach this relaunch is taking. Issue #2 isn't particularly deep, but it offers plenty of entertainment value as Harley and friends fend off the ravenous undead. It's just a shame the series is already relying on fill-in art. Maybe the switch to the twice-monthly schedule wasn't the best move?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #3
September 8, 2016
|
|
The conflict continues to entertain, while at the same time helping this book maintain a clear, cohesive focus that the previous book often lacked. The fact that Poison Ivy is back in the spotlight doesn't hurt, either. Once again, it's enough to make one wish Amanda Conner and Jimmy Palmiotti were writing an actual Harley & Ivy comic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #4
September 22, 2016
|
|
It's still wacky and entertaining in the series' familiar way, but the plot could have been structured much more efficiently.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #5
October 6, 2016
|
|
This latest transformation is part of what's shaping up to be an entertaining new mission for the character. This issue does dwell a little too long on Harley's efforts to recruit her new punk band (especially when it comes to Red Tool's weird, off-putting little subplot), but there's plenty of amusement to be had along the way.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #6
October 20, 2016
|
|
Harley Quinn has started a punk band. That's really all you need to know about the series' current story arc. The result isn't a terribly dramatic story. There's little sense of danger or conflict. The focus is simply on Harley and her friends making awful music together and looking to punish some wrongdoers who need punishing. But that's generally enough for right now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #7
November 3, 2016
|
|
This issue doesn't end things on the most exciting or dramatic note, but it's enough to take in the sights as Harley explores a superhero-themed bondage club.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #8
November 24, 2016
|
|
It's unfortunate that the long-awaited Bahamas vacation only amounts to one single-issue adventure, but it makes for an enjoyable read all the same.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #9
December 8, 2016
|
|
This issue may be a bit scatterbrained in focus, with two separate dream sequences interspersed between a roller derby battle and various other set pieces, but it does the trick as far as conveying just how depressed and adrift Miss Quinn has become.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #10
December 22, 2016
|
|
It's always nice seeing Dawn artist Joseph Michael Linsner render Harley, but in general this issue lacks consistency and does little to truly take advantage of Harley's North Pole escapades.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #11
January 5, 2017
|
|
If there's another shoe yet to drop, it needs to drop soon, because so far this arc is struggling to take advantage of this rare Harley/Joker reunion.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #12
January 19, 2017
|
|
By all rights, the return of the Joker to these pages should be cause for excitement. DC has kept the villain on a short leash for so long. But reading this arc, it's difficult to walk feeling anything other than confusion or bewilderment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #13
February 2, 2017
|
|
It's been clear from the beginning that there's something Amanda Conner and Jimmy Palmiotti haven't been telling us regarding the return of the Joker in this series. Rather than form the basis of a compelling mystery, however, that fact has only caused frustration. This issue finally peels back the curtain on that mystery, but not in a way that feels particularly satisfying.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #15
March 2, 2017
|
|
The book opens strong with a sequence from Joseph Michael Linsner (a creator whom I'd really like to see draw a complete issue of Harley Quinn one of these days), but it then makes a series of jarring transitions as it bounces between Khari Evans and John Timms' pages.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #18
April 20, 2017
|
|
Timms always brings a slightly more sinister edge to the book, and that's certainly called for given the subject matter. Still, there's a growing concern that this series is losing its bite.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #23
July 6, 2017
|
|
We're probably all starting to sound like a collective broken record here, but it's frustrating that, issue after issue, the main story in Harley Quinn is outshone by the Batman: The Animated Series-inspired backup tale.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn #34
January 10, 2018
|
|
Harley Quinn #34 unfolds much in the same way the rest of this volume has. It offers moments of goofy fun humor and emotional depth, but the script proves too scatterbrained and disjointed for its own good. The art can only do so much to propel that messy narrative along. This is a road trip comic that needed to spend less time on the journey and more on the end point.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Harley Quinn and Her Gang Of Harleys |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Harley Quinn and Her Gang Of Harleys #1
April 13, 2016
|
|
So far, this new series isn't doing much to suggest that DC needs three simultaneous Harley Quinn comics. While it features a rock-solid portrayal of Harley herself, attractive visuals and a more focused script than can generally be found in the main series these days, the bland, one-note characterization when it comes to the Gang of Harleys is a major drag. What;s the point of an ensemble-based Harley Quinn comic if the ensemble cast doesn't measure up?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn and Her Gang Of Harleys #2
May 12, 2016
|
|
There appears to be a limit to how many Harley Quinns one comic can properly handle. This series was already struggling to balance the Gang of Harleys, most of whom are significantly less compelling protagonists than Harley herself. Once you factor in Harley Sinn and her own team of evil Harley-inspired assassins, the gag starts to wear out its welcome.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Harley Quinn And Power Girl |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Harley Quinn And Power Girl #1
June 17, 2015
|
|
It's not exactly deep, but DC's new Harley Quinn spinoff is plenty entertaining. This issue proves there's more mileage to be had with this unusual pairing of heroines. However, the series needs to delve deeper into their dynamic if the formula if the series wants to maintain its momentum for six issues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn And Power Girl #3
August 20, 2015
|
|
The creative team behind this Harley Quinn spinoff are laboring under no delusions about this being a story-driven comic. The goal is clearly to have as much fun with the Harley/Power Girl team-up as possible over the course of six issues, and it's definitely succeeding.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley Quinn And Power Girl #4
September 24, 2015
|
|
The wacky, lighthearted approach to Harley Quinn & Power Girl stands out all the more now that the main series is venturing into darker territory. The book is a lot of fun, but also takes the time to explore its three leads in a bit more depth. That said, the plot is a little too thin at this point, and the art quality isn't quite up to par with earlier issues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Harley Quinn and the Suicide Squad: April Fool's Special #1 |
Apr 06, 2016
show
|
|
You can't really go wrong when a comic promises a new Harley Quinn adventure drawn by Jim Lee. This issue has that to offer, but also an equally appealing segment rendered by Sean Galloway and a generally entertaining (if somewhat disjointed) script by Rob Williams. If this is what we can expect from the new Suicide Squad comic during DC Rebirth, things are looking up for the troubled team of villains.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Harley Quinn Holiday Special #1 |
Dec 10, 2014
show
|
|
Finally, Conner and Palmiotti team with the legendary Darwyn Cooke for a New Years-themed tale as Harley freaks out over a gray hair and searches for father Time. Not the actual DC character, but rather a hapless old man in a nursing home she mistakenly believes is the source of her current woes. This is Harley at her most ditzy and entertaining. And it goes without saying that Cooke's art is gorgeous. His style is a bit looser and more spartan than usual, but he still makes this strip pop[ with style and flair.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Harley Quinn Invades Comic Con International: San Diego #1 |
Jul 16, 2014
show
|
|
Like Harley Quinn #0, Harley Quinn Invades Comic-Con features a varied assortment of artists, though not nearly as many as the former. Other than Paul Pope's opening page, this isn't a "one artist per page" story, but one where the pages are haphazardly divided among several artists. All generally capture Chad Hardin's expressive, wacky style, though never with as much flair. Strangely, Comic-Con itself isn't rendered that well, coming across less like the mammoth gathering of geeks that it is and more like a typical, cluttered small-town convention. There's little sense of scale to Harley's surroundings. The standout visual sequence comes when Conner herself steps in to illustrate "Hurl Girl," the comic within a comic. I'd pay money to read a Hurl Girl mini-series if Conner illustrated it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Harley Quinn Valentine's Day Special #1 |
Feb 11, 2015
show
|
|
Any fan of the ongoing Harley Quinn series would do well to pick up this latest special. Not only does it offer the series' first real interaction between Harley and the Dark Knight, it delivers a wacky romp of a story that consistently entertains and makes great use of the rotating team of artists.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Harley Quinn: Road Trip Special #1 |
Sep 10, 2015
show
|
|
This latest Harley Quinn spinoff is more of the same in terms of offering a fun, breezy adventure that doesn't quite live up to the standard of the main series. What's most disappointing is that the writers had an opportunity to explore Harley's past and her family life in greater depth, but they never fully capitalize on it. Maybe next summer.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Harley's Little Black Book |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Harley's Little Black Book #1
December 2, 2015
|
|
There's ample room for a comic that features Harley Quinn butting heads with DC's most iconic heroes. Sadly, this first issue doesn't do enough with the Harley/Wonder Woman pairing. It wastes some strong potential in favor of showcasing Harley mainly in a solo capacity. And while it's nice to see Conner drawing as well as scripting for a change, she doesn't handle the entire comic herself. This book has a ways to go before it starts living up to its potential.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley's Little Black Book #2
February 10, 2016
|
|
If you crave a little more direct interaction between Harley Quinn and the rest of the DCU, this new series fits the bill. It retains the light tone and charm of the main series while dragging various DC icons in for silly team-ups. Unfortunately, this is the second time in a row the series has ignored the opportunity to explore Harley's fragile psyche in greater depth. That sets a bad precedent going forward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Harley's Little Black Book #3
April 20, 2016
|
|
There's a clear trend developing with this new series. Harley's team-ups with various DC heroes are entertaining, but each issue spends too much time welling on pointless detours and not enough exploring these oddball character dynamics. Even Linsner's art can't quite save this new issue from its weaker elements.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Harvest #5 |
Jan 02, 2013
show
|
|
Colin Lorimer's artwork really seals the deal here. Lieberman's voice is distinct, but Lorimer truly brings it to life with his striking page design, murky world, and effective use of color. The color in particular really hones in on the shifting tone and complements the mood perfectly. I look forward to more of this bloody world Lieberman has created, but only if Lorimer also returns to give it life.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Haunt (2009) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Haunt #1
September 30, 2009
|
|
Haunt may not have turned out exactly like I expected, but it still proves disappointing nonetheless. I'm willing to give the creative team another chance to see if Haunt merely needs a few chapters to pick up steam, but I only have so much patience for these sorts of shallow, grim and gritty comics.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Haunt #2
November 4, 2009
|
|
So far, Haunt hasn't shown me it matters enough to warrant such an upheaval. The book is slowly getting better, but it continues to leave a bad taste in my mouth all the same. It will be some time yet before the Spider-Spawn accusations die away.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hawk and Dove (2011) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Hawk and Dove #1
September 7, 2011
|
|
And then there's the art. Rob Liefeld's style is easy to mock for its grossly inflated anatomy, intensely rigid facial expressions, and overabundance of pouches and shoulder pads. But though the former two flaws are readily apparent, there's no denying the sheer energy that Liefeld's pencils bring to the book. The coloring also helps smooth over some of his inconsistencies. Hawk and Dove is very '90s-esque in some ways. It's crafted very much like a summer popcorn film, and it's not ashamed of it either. That's exactly the sort of superhero book where Liefeld's style is most appropriate.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hawk and Dove #2
October 5, 2011
|
|
This book doesn't need to be deep or ambitious to be a worthwhile read, but there some very basic qualities it lacks at the moment.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hawk and Dove #4
December 7, 2011
|
|
I'm not sure what else to say about Rob Liefeld's art at this point, other than that his usual anatomical eccentricities hit a new level when dealing with characters of the non-super-human variety, as seen frequently in this issue. I'm not sure the book can ever function as the serious superhero family drama it strives to be with visuals like this. But ignoring the visuals entirely, there are some serious scripting flaws that need to be addressed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hawk and Dove #5
January 4, 2012
|
|
As Sterling Gates departs the series and leaves Rob Liefeld in complete control, there's little to suggest the book will be veering from its present course. I've given it more than a fair shake at this point, but I'm not sure I can keep going any longer.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hawkeye #16 |
Jan 22, 2014
show
|
|
As usual with these Kate-centric issues, Annie Wu steps in to provide the art. She has a softer touch that suits Kate's world well without veering too far outside the established Hawkeye aesthetic. The art manages to be both laid back and dynamic as the situation demands. However, Wu doesn't bring the same eye for design as Aja, nor the emphasis on small, repeated panels that makes his issues so visually appealing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hawkeye (2016) |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Hawkeye #2
January 5, 2017
|
|
The new Hawkeye series reads basically like a direct continuation of Matt Fraction and Annie Wu's Kate Bishop saga, but what better run to draw from?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hawkeye #8
July 6, 2017
|
|
Kelly Thompson's script manages to add extra dramatic weight by switching between present-day and flashback sections, though after a while it becomes clear that the former just isn't as compelling.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hawkeye #9
August 3, 2017
|
|
In short, the series achieves a nice blend of goofy action and violent tension. Artist Leonardo Romero helps further that balance with his clean, elegant art style.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hawkeye #10
September 7, 2017
|
|
It's haunting and gorgeous, yet also energetic and action-packed. But while the art is really the driving force of this issue, Kelly Thompson's script doesn't disappoint, either. The tone is equally fun and foreboding as Kate deals with the mess madame Masque is currently making of her life.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hawkeye #12
November 16, 2017
|
|
This issue feels very much like a transitional chapter as the series moves into Marvel Legacy. That said, the sheer entertainment value in this Kate/Laura/Gabby team-up is more than enough to make up for any plotting concerns.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hawkeye #14
January 4, 2018
|
|
Romero once again kills it in this issue, with page after page of stylish action and expressive (but not overly detailed) figure work. It's a real shame this series is nearing its end.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hawkman: Found #1 |
Dec 27, 2017
show
|
|
Hawkman Found #1 isn't a critical Dark Nights: Metal tie-in, but it is a well-crafted one.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
He-Man / Thunder Cats |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
He-Man / Thunder Cats #1
October 5, 2016
|
|
The comic industry has delivered a stream of great crossover stories in recent years, but so far He-Man/Thundercats isn't one of them. This first issue is too grim and straightforward for its own good, and it fails to exploit the character dynamics. This series looks like a cartoon come to life, but the story needs to pick up the pace if He-Man/Thundercats is going to live up to its promise.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
He-Man & The Masters of the Universe #6 |
Jan 30, 2013
show
|
|
The artwork has never been a particular strong suit with this series. However, issue #6 is at least the most visually consistent, as Pop Mhan pencils and inks every page. The character designs offer all the power and bombast you'd expect from a He-Man comic. The He-Man/Skeletor battle is framed much better than a lot of the other tent pole fight scenes have been. One area that the book continues to suffer from, however, is that the world itself doesn't feel like Eternia. It has a very generic, medieval Europe quality to it, and shows none of that signature blend of technology and barbarism that defines the franchise. This is a world where heroes pilot fancy hovercraft vehicles and use advanced computers, yet still wear fur underwear over their armor. I'm hoping the new series will better capture that aesthetic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
He-Man & The Masters of the Universe (2013) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
He-Man & The Masters of the Universe #1
April 17, 2013
|
|
Art quirks aside, this is a great second start for a franchise that was already in good hands. Now that the creative team shifts of the mini-series are behind us, I have high hopes for Giffen's continued revamp of the He-Man mythos.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
He-Man: The Eternity War |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
He-Man: The Eternity War #1
December 24, 2014
|
|
The Eternity War has all the scope you'd hope for from such a moniker. He-Man and She-Ra lead a ragtag band of Masters and Snake-Men against the seemingly unstoppable Hordak. Unfortunately, this issue doesn't do enough to build from that initial setup.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Head Smash OGN #1 |
Aug 06, 2013
show
|
|
The page construction is also frequently problematic. The book relies on a repetitive system of page layouts where the bottom half of the page regularly features two panels on the left and one on the right. But the layouts are never consistent as to whether the eye is supposed to move left/down/right or left/right/down. Similarly troublesome is the coloring technique. The color scheme shifts from scene to scene, but sometimes it shifts within scenes as well, creating the illusion that the location has changed. The generic script is bad enough, but basic visual flaws like these and others (including frequently absent question marks in the lettering) are the real bane of Head Smash.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hellblazer |
9 issues
show
|
|
|
Hellblazer #237
October 24, 2007
|
|
Odd ending aside, this issue displays a little bit of everything that has made the Diggle/Leonardo Manco run so enjoyable. Stellar art that would be right at home in any of the darker Vertigo books, plenty of atmosphere, and a healthy dose of humor to boot. I'm pretty sure I caught a subtle nod to Constantine's original inspiration, the musician Sting. If you haven't been following Hellblazer so far, this obviously isn't a good place to start. Still, you'd be well-served to start at the beginning of Diggle's run, because this is the best work of fiction John Constantine has been involved with in years.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellblazer #247
September 17, 2008
|
|
With Diggle's run drawing to a close, I feel like I have to savor every single page of each issue. It's probably going to be a long time before Hellblazer becomes this enjoyable again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellblazer #248
October 22, 2008
|
|
With Diggle's run nearly wrapped up, I'm inclined to feel every bit as nostalgic as the main character at the moment. It can be hard to make such a well-trodden hero stand out these days, but Diggle makes it seem easy.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellblazer #249
November 19, 2008
|
|
That aside, Diggle sends Constantine off in good form. I truly hope his run serves as a lesson to the editors at Vertigo. Hellblazer needs more extended runs like this. It's no coincidence that all the best Hellblazer writers - Jamie Delano, Garth Ennis, and Warren Ellis included - stayed on the book for years at a time. Constantine may be a prickly, hard to love character at first glance, but when you spend some time getting to know him you'll never want to leave.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellblazer #250
December 17, 2008
|
|
On its own, this issue is a reasonably amusing collection of Christmas stories. It just so happens that "reasonably amusing" isn't what I want from Hellblazer at the moment. Incoming writer Peter Milligan didn't quite impress me here, and I can only hope that this issue isn't an indication of things to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellblazer #251
January 21, 2009
|
|
When all is said and done, this issue is somewhat less than a rousing start, but hardly an unenjoyable one just the same. For now I plan to keep my expectations firmly in check in hopes that Milligan and crew will pleasantly surprise me in the coming months.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellblazer #253
March 18, 2009
|
|
This little story could easily be inserted anywhere within the last few years of Hellblazer stories with no trouble. I remain hopeful that later arcs will somehow build upon "Scab" and lend new meaning to these events, but I'm no longer expecting that to happen. Milligan cooked up a decent opener to his run. Let's hope he's gotten warmed up and has something truly magical in store next.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellblazer #265
March 24, 2010
|
|
But this issue doesn't just recall the Thatcher era in tone. It very directly references it. Hellblazer is like Punisher MAX in that it allows its hero to age in real time. Constantine's rapidly marching age seems to be the theme of the tale. As he confronts old bandmates and rekindles the spirit of the punk era, Constantine's long years show themselves in a way they rarely have in this series. There are writers who feel Constantine should have been left behind when the grim and gritty '80s ended. Even if Milligan isn't a supporter of that idea, I get the impression he plans to explore it to its fullest in this arc. This is an interesting first half, to be sure. The ending left me a little ambivalent, but still plenty eager to return next month. I just hope Milligan is laying the seeds for another long-term adventure for Constantine. His past stories, and Andy Diggle's run before that, have largely soured me on the idea of short, inconsequential Hellblazer tales.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellblazer #300
February 20, 2013
|
|
Two areas of Milligan's script proved to be a little bothersome. The first involves a brief appearance by that classic Constantine nemesis, the First of the Fallen. While his appearance is welcome, this demon's role in the story is abrupt and a little strange. More significantly, the final two pages are unnecessarily vague and even frustrating. I understand what the creators were trying to do with this sequence, but the storytelling falters right at the finish line. Even so, this issue is a worthy finish to the series and this incarnation of John Constantine. The team behind March's Constantine launch have some mighty big shoes to fill.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hellblazer #1 |
Aug 25, 2016
show
|
|
So far, The Hellblazer doesn't boast the most compelling conflict John Constantine has ever faced. The series is smaller in scope than its predecessor and in no real hurry to tip its hand to readers. Luckily, the strong characterization makes it an enjoyable read all the same. It doesn't hurt that Moritat's distinctive art style is such an ideal match for the series. Given time and room to grow, this book could easily become something special.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hellblazer: Rebirth #1 |
Jul 20, 2016
show
|
|
Like a great many characters, John Constantine is getting back to basics for DC Rebirth. But unlike many of his colleagues, Constantine didn't necessarily need a refresh in the first place. This new series succeeds in returning to a more familiar status quo for the character, but so far there's not nearly enough about The Hellblazer that feels exciting or different.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hellboy |
7 issues
show
|
|
|
Hellboy: In the Chapel of Moloch #1
October 29, 2008
|
|
And, most importantly, it features some gorgeous art. Mignola's work always carries a very Gothic quality, and the fact that the story involves an old chapel and a series of Goya-esque paintings only makes it seem all the more fitting. There's nothing in this issue as ambitious as some of the more major Hellboy stories, but it's very pleasing to the eyes nonetheless. Long term fans will be pleased. Newcomers probably will be as well, though they may be better off starting with the first trade, if only to witness a more epic Hellboy tale. In any case, it was good to have you back Mignola. Let's do this again sometime.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellboy: Krampusnacht #1
December 20, 2017
|
|
Even by the usual standard of standalone Hellboy adventures, Krampusacht is a pretty light and spartan little outing for our demonic hero. Even so, this issue offers an emotionally satisfying look at the battle between the two characters. This issue is worth the price of admission just to see Hughes' vibrant take on the long-running franchise.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellboy: The Storm #1
July 8, 2010
|
|
It isn't too long before the literal and metaphorical storms begins brewing and Hellboy is horn-deep in danger and mysticism once more. Plenty of familiar faces crop up, both in flashback form and as active players. This issue could perhaps have offered a slightly more satisfying mixture of exposition, tension-building, and action, but I imagine the trade will deliver a better reading experience in that sense. Fegredo continues to establish himself as the strongest of Mignola's collaborators, with a moody style that strongly evokes Mignola's own yet rife with its own subtle nuances. This looks like it could be a good one, even by the normal Hellboy standard.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellboy: The Storm #2
August 4, 2010
|
|
Duncan Fegredo continues to prove himself a worthy companion to Mignola. Many scenes in this book depend heavily on Fegredo's ability to convey emotion with little or no exposition. He succeeds and then some. And there's still a healthy dose of violence as Hellboy battles a demonic hedgehog. That's right. Now you know you want this book. Hellboy: The Storm is quickly distinguishing itself as one of Mignola's watershed stories and a defining chapter in the plucky demon's life.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellboy: The Storm #3
September 1, 2010
|
|
The raw emotions at play as Hellboy leaves his newfound happiness behind for the uncertainty of battle are powerful. The Storm is easily one of the most emotionally gripping stories Mignola has told. It's a good thing he has Duncan Fegredo at his side. Fegredo's visual style and sense of composition are second only to Mignola's in the Hellboy comics, and his ability to convey emotion is even stronger. As excellent as the Storm has been, in the end it's but a prelude to Hellboy: The Fury. With a setup this good, I can't wait to read the next chapter.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellboy: The Wild Hunt #1
December 3, 2008
|
|
The atmosphere is assisted by the able hands of Duncan Fegredo, definitely one of the better collaborators Mignola has worked with. Fegredo's style is very reminiscent of Mignola's, yet still carries a unique quality. It's unfortunate that Mignola can't illustrate more of his scripts, a la In The Chapel of Moloch, but I rarely find his artists to be poor compromises. The Wild Hunt is not nearly as accessible as 2008's other offerings, and it plays out as a very simple tale i this early stage, but I still think Hellboy fans will enjoy themselves here quite a bit. Hellboy is one of those good things you can never have too much of, after all.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellboy: The Wild Hunt #2
January 7, 2009
|
|
The Wild Hunt #2 offers a hellish amount of fun and quality content for $3. It makes me all the more reluctant to start forking over $4 or $5 for mainstream comics. If you love Hellboy, you'll love this comic. If you haven't fallen in love with the series yet, I highly recommend getting caught up soon.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1952 |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1952 #1
December 3, 2014
|
|
Those who crave a traditional, action-oriented Hellboy comic may be a little disappointed with this issue. That said, there's a lot to be said for the character-focused approach Mignola and Arcudi take as they begin exploring Hellboy's first mission. Pair that with Alex Maleev's haunting art and you have all the makings of another classic Hellboy story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1952 #2
January 7, 2015
|
|
There's a terrific sense of foreboding to this issue, enhanced significantly by Alex Maleev's moody visuals. Maleev captures the spirit of Mike Mignbola's art even as he adheres to his own style and approach to page construction.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1952 #5
April 2, 2015
|
|
With this final issue, the creative team wrap up their look at Hellboy's very first mission. And never let it be said they didn't do justice to such a key moment in the hero's storied career. The focus in this finale is largely on action, but still there's the sense that Hellboy has matured and grown as an adventurer as he grows comfortable punching Nazi monstrosities.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1953 |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1953 #1
October 29, 2015
|
|
The real fun in this issue is gaining more insight into Professor Bruttenholm's past and his relationship with Hellboy. It's just a shame "The Kelpie," which flashes further back into Bruttenholm's formative years isn't a bit longer or more in-depth.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1953: Beyond The Fences #1
February 24, 2016
|
|
Dark Horse's latest Hellboy project is already off to a terrific start. This new series builds on the foundation of Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1952 as it explores the team's growing bond and builds a sinister new threat lurking in a peaceful suburban town. Paolo Rivera's art alone makes this issue worth a read.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1954 |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1954: Ghost Moon #1
March 9, 2017
|
|
The setting is certainly novel, and easily the biggest factor working to distinguish this book from the rest of the Hellboy pack. I do wish the script were a little more graceful in its exploration of that setting and the Chinese legends fueling the conflict, however.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hellboy in Hell |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Hellboy in Hell #1
December 5, 2012
|
|
If there's any flaw with this issue, it's that the ending is a bit abrupt and the issue as a whole feels annoyingly brief. Luckily, the second and third issues have been solicited, so it appears that Hellboy in Hell will maintain a monthly schedule at least long enough for momentum to build and the overarching conflict to reveal itself more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellboy in Hell #6
May 14, 2014
|
|
As with any Mignola-illustrated comic, the artwork is the main draw. Mignola didn't draw the original story, "Hellboy and the Vampire of Prague." So it's a treat to see him tackle the villain himself. And as always, Mignola is able to use darkness and shadow better than just about any artist in the industry. His Hell is a far cry from traditional depictions of the realm, more dilapidated and isolated and sad than fire and torment. Couple all that with inspired use of snake and bird imagery to depict the suffering souls, and you have another issue showcasing Mignola at the top of his storytelling game.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hellboy in Hell #7
August 27, 2015
|
|
Any issue illustrated by Mignola is a visual treat, but this one is all the more striking because of the unusual variety to the pages. Mignola and colorist Dave Stewart render Hellboy's visions in a lush, painterly style that contrasts with the somber, colorless scenes of Hell and the more traditional supernatural antics later in the book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hellboy: Winter Special |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Hellboy: Winter Special: 2017 #1
January 26, 2017
|
|
Mike Mignola and friends are back with one winter-themed one-shot, one that offers another satisfying dose of Hellboy. While the three stories in this issue share the winter theme, stylistically and tonally they're all drastically different.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Herc |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Herc #4
June 1, 2011
|
|
Neil Edwards is back as full penciller this month, though inker Scott Hanna is proficient enough that it doesn't make discernible difference either way. As always, what the series lacks in style and flourish it makes up for with detail, consistency, and generally competent storytelling. All the creators are working together to deliver what may be the most well-rounded Hercules story in a long time.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Herc #6
August 3, 2011
|
|
It's impressive to see how well Neil Edwards' pencils have held up over the course of the series so far, especially considering the sheer amount of action and spectacle in these last few issues. Edwards brings a very precise and cinematic quality to the book. What does need improvement however, is his anatomy. Edwards shares many similarities with Bryan Hitch, and like Hitch figures are sometimes rendered in static poses, bending and twisting in ways that shouldn't be possible on a normal human body. As before, Edwards still has a ways to go in terms of finding a truly unique visual style.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Herc #10
November 30, 2011
|
|
The plot here is fairly basic, but also enjoyable. The writers make good use of Russian mythology as they position Baba Yaga as Herc's latest foe. Ultimately, there's the sense that Pak and Van Lente could have done far more with the villainess (especially considering how Mike Mignola has used her in his Hellboy stories), but the cancellation simply didn't allow for anything more ambitious. The writers deliver humor, action, myth, and a little bit of heart, and that's everything this series needs. Herc deserved better than this quiet finale, but no doubt the Lion of Olympus will persevere and return in a new form.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hercules: Fall of an Avenger #1 |
Mar 17, 2010
show
|
|
Hercules: Fall of an Avenger has its entertainment value, but aside from the backup it lacks the true emotional punch of the better heroic tribute issues. Judging by the ending it appears the real meat of the story is being reserved for issue #2 anyway. Let's hope Pak and Van Lente have a stronger dose of drama planned for the second half.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hercules: The Thracian Wars #1 |
Apr 30, 2008
show
|
|
All told, this issue is priced just right and does a respectable job of putting the fledgling publisher on the map. I just have serious reservations about the ability of the next four issues to keep that trend going. Once the price shoots up to $3 or $4 a pop, I expect a legion of readers will simply slip away to the greener pastures of the other Herc book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hercules: Twilight of a God #1 |
Jun 03, 2010
show
|
|
Again, those that have a history with and a love for this futuristic setting will certainly extract the most enjoyment out of Twilight of a God. But if Marvel hoped to snare a few readers based solely on their love of Incredible Hercules, they'll probably be disappointed. Twilight of a God isn't a bad book. It's simply a slow, plodding one of limited appeal.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Heroes In Crisis |
9 issues
show
|
|
|
|
|
Heroic Age: 1 Month 2 Live #1 |
Sep 01, 2010
show
|
|
Remender's script is a bit uneven, but what matters most is that he's able to sell Sykes as a believable and identifiable protagonist. Some aspects of his origin story are a bit hackneyed, particularly in how he simultaneously gains his powers and a ticking death clock. But I found myself readily willing to overlook these sillier elements in favor of the bigger picture. Remender has quickly established Sykes as a character worth following amid all the gods and titans wandering the streets. I hope the incoming creators will be able to keep the quality of 1 Month 2 Live at a consistent level. Remender tends to set the bar high wherever he goes, but in this case there's still plenty of room for growth.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Heroic Age: Prince of Power #1 |
May 13, 2010
show
|
|
Considering how many Marvel gods have died lately, it's interesting to see the themes Pak and Van Lente are laying out in this mini-series. Prince of Power sees one character trying to rescue a god, another trying to learn how to kill them, and a third uncovering the formula for becoming a god. I'm certainly curious to see how far the writers take their exploration of godhood. With any luck that exploration will persist beyond the four issues on tap here. I do miss Incredible Hercules, if only because it provided a nice, stable home for this ongoing saga. The creative team have made no secret that more is to come after Prince of Power. Hopefully the inner contents of the various series will continue to stay cohesive even as covers and titles change.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hit-Girl #1 |
Jun 27, 2012
show
|
|
It's a shame this book couldn't have debuted before Kick-Ass 2. The impetus and drama simply aren't present since we know exactly where the main characters will end up by the time the series wraps up. Still, with a stronger focus on characterization over violence and spectacle, Hit-Girl makes some definite improvements to the formula.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hit-Girl #1 |
Feb 21, 2018
show
|
|
Hit-Girl is a predictably shallow comic, one more interested in offering up gory, frenetic displays of violence than trying to craft a compelling narrative. There's always a certain appeal in a series like that, especially one that doesn't attempt to cling to the grounded approach of the main Kick-Ass books. But in the end, that appeal is limited. There's simply not enough depth to this series to enable it to rise above the pack.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
House Of M #1 |
Aug 19, 2015
show
|
|
House of M doesn't start off on a great note, as this issue struggles to define itself outside the shadow of the original crossover. Luckily, a clearer direction does develop by the end, suggesting that the new House of M will only get better over time.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
House of M: Avengers |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
House of M: Avengers #1
November 14, 2007
|
|
As for Christos Gage, I can't say I'm particularly impressed with his first issue. Gage tends to run circles all over the Marvel Universe, writing an X-Men comic here, a Captain America spinoff there. As such, the quality of his storytelling varies with every effort. Gage seems a bit too wrapped up in telling a goofy riff on 70's crime dramas and blaxploitation movies. Case in point - Luke Cage gets in a fistfight with a mutant hustler in a full pimp outfit. I'm also disappointed that Gage glosses over each new member's introduction. By issue's end, the Avengers have mostly assembled with little to no fuss. I'm still hopeful that the series will pick up once characters like Misty Knight and Franck Castle join the fray. But for now, this is one House I'm not excited about revisiting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
House of M: Avengers #2
December 5, 2007
|
|
It's nice to see Mike Perkins enjoy more of a spotlight. Most of the time, Perkins is recognized as the guy who draws an awful lot like Steve Epting, if he gets any recognition at all. Perkin's style fits the dark, retro feel of the series like a glove, though he occasionally struggles making more outlandish characters like Feral look convincing. I guess it should come as no surprise that House of M: Avengers hearkens back to books like Union Jack, since the Gage and Perkins also collaborated on that mini-series. I hope the quality remains consistent for the remaining 3 issues, because I'm having a grand old time reliving the House of M.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
House of Mystery (2008) |
9 issues
show
|
|
|
House of Mystery Annual #1
October 14, 2009
|
|
Don't get me wrong, all of these creators are doing fine work with their respective characters. I love the attempt to show the Vertigo universe as a cohesive whole. There's a certain Seven Soldiers-esque quality to the overarching storyline as various heroes confront a vast threat without ever really meeting one another. But to some extent, this issue feels like a case of wasted potential. Why not shake up the creative teams a little? Why not have Milligan write Madam Xanadu and Wagner tackle Constantine? As enjoyable as the issue is, it could have taken a few more chances. The sense of connectivity is fun, but no characters from any franchise are really permanently affected by the events of the issue. But above all, this annual is a fun celebration of all things Vertigo, and I hope it inspires some similar collaborations in the future.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
House of Mystery #2
June 4, 2008
|
|
House of Mystery is taking its sweet time getting anywhere, but that's okay by me. With some of Vertigo's finest at the helm and a setup where just about anything is possible, I'm becoming hopelessly enthralled by Vertigo's latest series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
House of Mystery #3
July 2, 2008
|
|
It may be slow going, but House of Mystery is quickly shaping up to be one of Vertigo's better books. The final few pages go a long way to keeping my interest kindled. If you aren't following this book monthly, you may want to go ahead a pre-order the trade now. I doubt you'll be disappointed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
House of Mystery #4
August 6, 2008
|
|
In its best moments, House of Mystery reminds me of the World's End arc in Sandman. Not quite as literary and finely-tuned maybe, but the core concept is similar, and Sturges and Willingham kindle a similar appreciation for stories in all their varied forms. I have no idea where this series will end up in twelve months, and the thought makes me happy indeed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
House of Mystery #5
September 3, 2008
|
|
This is definitely my favorite Vertigo series launch since Scalped. I can understand why many readers would choose to trade-wait House of Mystery, even if I have no desire to. When Vol. 1 rolls around in a few months, do yourself a favor and dive into its many mysteries.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
House of Mystery #6
October 1, 2008
|
|
Perhaps House of Mystery is just going through a series of growing pains as it ventures into a wider world. It's certainly too early to claim the book has lost its way. Still, too many months with an incomplete product will force me to resort to trade-waiting instead.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
House of Mystery #7
November 5, 2008
|
|
I still enjoy House of Mystery, but it seems to me the book is hitting a sophomore slump of sorts. Sturges needs to inject some life into his portion so that it doesn't continue to lag behind the side stories. We are to believe the House offers a few worthy stories of its own, correct?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
House of Mystery #8
December 10, 2008
|
|
It can still be argued that this arc is moving at a snail's pace. The characters have been trapped underground for months and show no signs of emerging yet. I just can't bring myself to be bothered much by the slow pacing like I would with other books. Issues like this tell me that Matthew Sturges is crafting something special with House of Mystery. I'm all too happy to let him go about it at his own pace.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
House of Mystery #22
February 4, 2010
|
|
House of Mystery still falls a bit short of the level I'd like to see it at, but the series is definitely on the rise with this arc. I just hope Strawberry doesn't stink up the joint in the same way Jack did his best to tarnish Fables. If the ending to this issue is any indication, I'm a little worried.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
House of Penance #2 |
May 12, 2016
show
|
|
If you're going to build a horror comic around a real-world location, you could do a lot worse than the massive, nonsensical Winchester House. Peter Tomasi and Ian Bertram are making the most of that inspiration, crafting a comic that's propelled by a massive sense of unease and foreboding.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
House of X |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
|
|
How to Understand Israel in 60 Days or Less - HC #1 |
Nov 03, 2010
show
|
|
The script is charming and straightforward, and the same goes for the art. Glidden's pages certainly won't bowl readers over in their detail or composition, but she offers a clean, approachable style that takes great care to capture the architecture and other trappings of her destinations. The watercolor finishes add an extra layer of brightness and clarity. From what I've seen of the original self-published pamphlets, the color alone may justify a repeat purchase for old fans. How to Understand Israeli in 60 Days or Less is a worthwhile read for any comic fan who enjoys autobiographical work or enjoys being exposed to foreign cultures with a more personal touch.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Howard The Duck (2007) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Howard The Duck #1
October 3, 2007
|
|
Don't read Howard the Duck #1 expecting high art or deep, compelling drama. This issue is meant for little more than light entertainment. Several comparisons can be drawn to the old Looney Toons animated shorts. One sequence in particular could have been ripped straight from a Bugs Bunny/Elmer Fudd encounter. Marvel seems to enjoy ripping on old favorites like Bugs and that everpresent rodent at Disney, but it's all in good fun. Thanks to the addition of Juan Bobillo on pencils, this issue brings back memories of the good old days of Dan Slott's She-Hulk. Marvel doesn't really have enough in the way of humorous comics these days, so this mini-series should suffice at least until Peter David (hopefully) puts She-Hulk back on track.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Howard The Duck #2
November 7, 2007
|
|
Luckly, there are some amusing moments to be had. I'm surprised Marvel didn't just hand the She-Hulk reins to Templeton, as he displays a similar penchant for the sillier aspects of the Marvel Universe like Dan Slott is known for. Part of me wished they had, because duck-hunting gags are not enough to support more than a single-issue storyline. Now that we're moving onto a third issue, I really hope Templeton has something more up his sleeve.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Howling Commandos #1 |
May 13, 2009
show
|
|
Frankly, the only real appeal for me when it comes to Cap: White is Tim Sale's art. Howling Commandos lacks that, and it doesn't have enough merit otherwise to make up for it. The story is only just barely tied to White from what I can tell, so it doesn't even function as a proper tie-in. At most, I might recommend this issue to newer readers who picked up Secret Warriors this week and wanted to learn more about the Howling Commandos. Even then, there are certainly better options available.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Huck #5 |
Mar 17, 2016
show
|
|
For a book that started out as a simple "Superman by way of Forrest Gump" story, Huck has certainly taken some interesting turns recently.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hulk (2008) |
23 issues
show
|
|
|
Hulk #4
June 25, 2008
|
|
If Hulk were just one of many ongoing books featuring the Green Goliath, I could easily write it off as a harmless little action romp. However, this is your only real source for the character in Marvel's entire catalog, Marvel Adventures Hulk notwithstanding. At a time when the character should be hitting new levels of quality and exposure, that's a hard pill to swallow.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #5
August 6, 2008
|
|
Bad dialogue, poor pacing, maltreated characters - the only saving grace for Hulk continues to be Ed McGuinness' art. However, this book has passed the point where I can just cover the word balloons with a Sharpie and stare at the pictures. I hate that this series is my only outlet for Hulk stories, and I hate that so many great Marvel characters are being dumped upon for no apparent or meaningful reason. Most of all, I hate the fact that this series will sell more copies in a week than many smaller, deserving books will all year. So if you're in the shop this week, staring at this issue and wondering if you should add it to your stack, think twice. It'll make me angry, and you wouldn't like me when I'm angry.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #6
September 24, 2008
|
|
In the end, Hulk leaves readers with the promise that the series will soldier on much as it has for the past year. That's probably the single worst message I could have hoped to take away from these proceedings. I desperately want a proper Hulk book that carries on from previous storylines. Instead, this series resurrects a simpler, played out version of the character and forces him to play second-fiddle to a vapid monster that would be more at home in a Dragonball Z movie. What's a Hulk fan to do?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #7
October 22, 2008
|
|
Hulk is like a train wreck that keeps getting worse as more and more trains pile on top of each other. Now that Black Panther and The Ultimates 3 are thankfully gone, there's no question in my mind that Hulk is now officially Marvel's worst ongoing series. That hasn't dulled its sales any in past months, and I doubt even the absence of McGuinness will do much to harm it at this point. Still, I can keep hoping.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #8
November 26, 2008
|
|
I really wish I could force myself to enjoy this book for what it supposedly offers, but I just can't. Red Hulk is a terrible, terrible character without an ounce of depth. Green Hulk is a pale shadow of his recent self that takes a gamma-irradiated dump on all the good work that writers like Peter David and Greg Pak have done. You can call Hulk simple, stupid fun, but I've yet to discover where the fun is.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #18
December 16, 2009
|
|
This is easily the best issue of Hulk in its two-year lifespan, for whatever that statement is worth. It's probably no coincidence that Red Hulk is all but absent this month. However, it's really the art that steals the show, as Loeb is still struggling to find his footing. But with all the Hulk-related books in December performing well, I think it's safe to say Fall of the Hulks is off to a promising start.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #19
January 20, 2010
|
|
Whereas in its first year Hulk was just a big, dumb, fun book that usually forgot to focus on the last quality, the series is now in a far better state. I worry about the continued presence of some of Hulk's less redeeming qualities, but the improvement is undeniable nonetheless.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #20
February 17, 2010
|
|
The rest of the book's cast often strike me the same way. In general, Loeb seems more at home depicting his villains rather than his heroes. The X-Men rarely have anything memorable to say, whereas figures like The Leader and MODOK stand out far more. Given how pointless the X-Men's role is, I think this series could do with a bit of general pruning. Loeb has proven he's capable of more dedicated character work than previous Hulk storylines would have suggested, but only so many characters can receive the benefit of that work in one sitting. More and more, I just wish Fall of the Hulks was conceived as a smaller-scale and more tightly focused project. If this is supposed to be a means to an end, why do those means have to be so scatter-shot and unfocused?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #21
March 17, 2010
|
|
I'm doing my best to to keep a stiff upper lip as I look ahead to World War Hulks. All three Hulk writers - Loeb, Greg Pak, and Jeff Parker, have done good work on their respective books lately. But ultimately Fall of the Hulks was far more chaotic and disjointed than necessary. If Hulk #21 is any indication of the tone and execution of World War Hulks, I'm about ready to get out while the getting is still good.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #22
May 12, 2010
|
|
But if smashing is what you came for, smashing is what you will happily receive. As stupid as the Hulked-Out Heroes concept is, at least it offers plenty targets for Red Hulk to clobber. The fact that Red Hulk is the only intelligent Hulk in the room helps keep the extended brawl from degenerating into a series of punches and poorly worded retorts. Scratch that - Red Hulk manages one line that rivals Iron Man's "Oh, the humanity" from issue #2 in sheer lameness. For the most part, I would recommend to ignore the words in this book and admire the punches. Ed McGuinness is in particularly fine form this month. The colors of Morry Hollowell and Chris Sotomayor lend an extra dose of energy that hasn't been seen in past issues. With all the new Hulks running around, this is certainly a visually diverse issue and a real feast for the eyes at times. Just not for the brain. Hulk has its merits, but those interested in emotional conflict and characterization had best turn their attention to Gre
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #25
September 22, 2010
|
|
Both Hulk books are clearly in a period of transition right now thanks to the new creators and new story directions. So far, Hulk seems to emerge on better ground, even if it isn't entirely free of flaws. What matters is Parker and Hardman manage to hit the ground running, and this arc could easily develop into something memorable depending what direction they choose to head in.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #26
October 20, 2010
|
|
Parker is in danger of wearing out the familiar "heroes fight each other, then band together" formula, though. The pace of the script is kept very brisk, with Red Hulk first aiding Iron Man in wrapping up last month's battle before joining Thor in space to pound some meteors into dust. It's not the most cerebral a Hulk book has ever been, but the script isn't simpleminded either. Parker strikes a proper balance between smashing and character building. Hardman's art remains a bit of an unusual adjustment, as it's far darker and more laid back than anything seen on the series previously. Still, it's clean, attractive work that suits the world of Red Hulk. The only real downside to this series in the backup feature. Parker's A-Bomb is far too annoying for his own good, and the story itself seems to have little relevance to anything at all. As with so many of these $3.99 books, a lower price tag and the absence of this supplemental story would be far preferable.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #39
August 17, 2011
|
|
Gabriel Hardman returns as artist this month. I'll admit to not being fully sold on the idea of his darker style on a Hulk book initially, but since Parker's first arc Hardman seems to have found the proper handle on the characters. His art is perfectly suited to the flashbacks and quieter character moments, and it quickly expands and grows to encompass the bombastic fight scenes later on. All in all, this series is showing no sign of losing steam.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #45
December 8, 2011
|
|
It's been a while since we've seen Red Hulk take charge and smash his way to victory. But as the arc moves towards its true conclusion, that should hopefully be in the cards.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #48
February 1, 2012
|
|
The entire conflict wraps up (for now) at the end of this issue. The ending does seem a bit abrupt, as Red Hulk and Zero/One are left to merely continue their hostilities another day. But next issue promises more in-depth interaction between father and daughter Hulk, so that should be something worth looking forward to.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #49
March 7, 2012
|
|
Elena Casagrande continues to deliver a solid set of visuals on this series. Her work is more thin and angular in this issue, which helps recall John Romita Jr.'s Eternals mini-series. Whether intentional or not, that's not a bad thing to be compared to by any stretch of the imagination.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #51
May 9, 2012
|
|
This leg of the Haunted Hulk wraps up a bit abruptly by the end of issue #51, but Parker makes it clear that a larger supernatural conflict is still building. No doubt next month's guests stars will bring an entirely new dose of fun to this arc.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #52
May 23, 2012
|
|
This arc wound up being more of a fun diversion for Red Hulk than the intensely dramatic adventure it seemed to be at first glance. Hopefully the upcoming Mayan arc will be a little more plot-driven.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #53
June 6, 2012
|
|
In short, whether you're a fan of any of these characters or just a fan of exciting, darkly humorous superhero adventures, this issue demands to be read. Go on -- show Alpha Flight the love they didn't receive in their own book.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #54
June 20, 2012
|
|
Having Dale Eaglesham on board doesn't hurt this arc either. Red Hulk has never felt more powerful vibrant than he does here. Eaglesham slathers every page and panel with intricate detail, but doesn't neglect elements like choreography, facial work, and general tone and mood. As bombastic as the villains and conflict are, Eaglesham's dramatic line-work ensures that readers will take the threat seriously nonetheless.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #55
July 5, 2012
|
|
It remains to be seen how much this series will change when it willallegedlymorph into something else later this year. But if Parker can retain the same sense of scale and fun Mayan Rule has offered, there's little reason to worry about the future.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #56
August 15, 2012
|
|
Dale Eaglesham's artwork isn't quite up to the quality established in the previous issues. Some of his framing is a little odd, with characters seeming to fade out of focus and into the background. On the plus side, the lengthy flashback to the origins of the gods allows Eaglesham to branch out and tackle some more unusual, non-super-heroic imagery. Hopefully Eaglesham will be back in top form for the finale issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #57
August 29, 2012
|
|
This was a great but sadly under-appreciated run. I have little faith that the latter aspect will change with the shift to Red She-Hulk. But as long as Parker is given an outlet to continue exploring these characters, there's no reason to get too choked up about the shifting tides.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hulk (2014) |
7 issues
show
|
|
|
Hulk #4
June 12, 2014
|
|
Not counting the upcoming Original Sin crossover, this issue essentially serves as the finale to Mark Waid's Hulk run. And it serves as about as satisfying a conclusion as you might expect considering that this series and status quo are only four issues old.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #8
November 6, 2014
|
|
For a series that started out on the wrong note earlier this year, Duggan has really turned things around.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #10
January 7, 2015
|
|
Gerry Duggan continues to hit all the right notes with his Hulk run. Doc Green's quest to eliminate all Hulks puts him in the path of Red Hulk, resulting in his fiercest challenge yet. It's a showdown long in the making, and Duggan doesn't disappoint as he explores the deepseated, years-long rivalry between the two Hulks.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #12
March 5, 2015
|
|
The issue spends too much time setting up their team-up with Hulk and not enough time actually reveling in it. Still, this book has plenty of momentum as Duggan and Bagley continue pushing forward.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #13
March 19, 2015
|
|
This is a fast-paced chapter with a number of key developments, but also a healthy amount of levity along the way. Not only does artist Mark Bagley pack in some top-notch action scenes, he establishes himself as one of the few artists to convincingly portray Steve Rogers as an old man.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #14
April 9, 2015
|
|
The plot is fairly sparse, the dialogue somewhat uneven in its execution, and Duggan becomes a little preoccupied with Deadpool even after the character's importance to the story is through. This issue is more a chance for Mark Bagley to strut his stuff.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #15
April 23, 2015
|
|
It's a satisfyingly epic showdown on a grand scale. Not only does Mark Bagley's art capture all the ferocity and brutality of this showdown, Gerry Duggan includes humorous little asides that show various other characters across the continent reacting to the seismic shifting caused by the brawl
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hulk (2016) |
5 issues
show
|
|
|
Hulk #3
February 23, 2017
|
|
The series is clearly a meditation on trauma, PTSD and the struggle to rebuild a life after the unthinkable. Maybe that won't satisfy readers looking for a heavy dose of smashing, but it all makes for a fantastic character study.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #6
June 1, 2017
|
|
This series continues to show plenty of promise, but it needs a tighter approach to pacing and a willingness to stay mired in darkness as long as Jen's character arc demands it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #7
June 15, 2017
|
|
Slow pacing is becoming a real sticking point with several ongoing Marvel titles right now, and Hulk is possibly the biggest offender of them all.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #8
July 13, 2017
|
|
The series has little sense of momentum at the momentum, and maybe it's just as well that it's getting relaunched and re-branded for Marvel Legacy in a few months.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Hulk #9
August 10, 2017
|
|
It's really the same story month after month with this book. The general status quo and psychological approach are compelling, but the lack of momentum and forward progress has really started to hold the series back.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hulk Smash Avengers #1 |
May 03, 2012
show
|
|
Hulk Smash Avengers is light and enjoyable but also forgettable, It remains to be seen if future issues can manage something more as they advance farther into the Marvel timeline.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Human Bomb #1 |
Dec 05, 2012
show
|
|
Luckily, the deeper conspiracy involving Mike's powers and the sinister organization that created them is more interesting. At this point it seems clear that Palmiotti and Gray are building towards the eventual debut of the full Freedom Fighters lineup, and this issue pushes that momentum forward a bit more. But ultimately the book doesn't seem to know what kind of tone it wants to strike. A group of villains that acts as superhuman suicide bombers should really be a more dark and terrible concept than this issue suggests. Jerry Ordway's artwork doesn't really help in that regard either. Ordway's style has a distinctly Bronze Age feel to it, and coupled with the overly heavy inks it's not the best choice for rendering a contemporary, military-focused superhero story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Human Target #1 |
Feb 10, 2010
show
|
|
This new incarnation of Human Target is not a total disappointment, but it also fails to capture the spark of better projects to carry the name. I'd suggest fans of the show ditch whatever preconceptions they have about Christopher Chance and check out Milligan's Vertigo series instead. Perhaps the best thing about the show from a comic fan's perspective is that these stories are finally being collected in their entirety.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hunger #1 |
Jul 24, 2013
show
|
|
This issue wouldn't have succeeded without an artist that can juggle both the comedic, down-to-earth elements and the cosmic spectacle. And though Leonard Kirk's previous Marvel work hasn't focused much on the cosmic end of the spectrum, he thrives in this issue. His space battles are highly detailed, often unfolding across two pages of explosions and warring robots. Another standout sequence involves various alternate versions of Rick Jones all being simultaneously rocked by the multiversal chaos. Hunger may be the closest Genis-Vell fans will come to seeing the under-appreciated hero back in action.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hunt For Wolverine #1 |
Apr 25, 2018
show
|
|
Hunt for Wolverine #1 will disappoint anyone hoping for a clear, concise look at Wolverine's return to life. This story is less concerned with providing answers than it is setting up a pointlessly large crossover event. The lead story at least features some strong artwork and a few memorable flashback scenes, but neither is enough to justify the high cover price. Nor does this issue build much enthusiasm for what's to come for the character.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Hyperion #1 |
Mar 24, 2016
show
|
|
The main problem is Wendig's decision to keep the title character at a distance, instead framing the issue from the perspective of a teenage runaway named Doll. Hyperion himself becomes almost incidental to the story, which, despite a blatant Mad Max homage late in the game, doesn't really pack the scope necessary for a hero of Hyperion's stature.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
I Am Groot #1 |
May 24, 2017
show
|
|
I Am Groot #1 is a perfectly entertaining new addition to the Guardians franchise. The art alone is a pretty strong selling point. But even with Groot's new status quo, the series doesn't do much to venture outside of the safe, comfortable confines readers are used to by now. Unlike Rocket #1, I Am Groot #1 is content to play things safe.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
I Kill Giants |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
I Kill Giants #5
November 12, 2008
|
|
J.M. Ken Niimura really shines this month thanks to a few gorgeous splash pages. As the book grows progressively more dark, Niimura expands his scope and makes it seem as if an epic brawl between girl and giants is finally at hand. Niimura's loose style is occasionally tough to decipher, but generally he makes for an excellent artistic complement to Kelly's writing. I'm anxious to see where the duo is headed with this story in the final two issues. Whether or not Barabara's fantasies are real, this is going to be one fight to remember.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
I Kill Giants #7
January 14, 2009
|
|
Unlike Barbara, I hope we readers won't have to say goodbye after this mini-series. I'm looking forward to an increased focus of Kelly's Four Eyes, but I also hope we'll see another collaboration from this duo. And whether that collaboration is a Giants sequel or something else entirely, I'm going to be first in line to read it. Sorry Batman, you may be facing more competition in the future.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Iceman (2017) |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Iceman #1
June 7, 2017
|
|
Iceman #1 doesn't make the strongest case for this series as an ongoing story, as it could just as easily be a standalone one-shot starring the frozen X-Man. But it's a very well-executed story regardless, one that showcases Bobby Drake's crazy personal life while still making the most of his incredible powers. Iceman is shaping up to be a worthy addition to the ResurrXion lineup.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Iceman #4
August 24, 2017
|
|
Iceman and Daken make for a surprisingly effective pair. That's the main takeaway from this issue, which pits the two mutants against one another as Bobby tries to track down a wayward student.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Iceman #5
September 6, 2017
|
|
It's a shame the artwork in this issue isn't stronger, because otherwise Iceman #5 is a strong finish to the series' first arc. It dabbles in well-worn tropes but executes them in an effective way, as writer Sina Grace cuts to the heart of Bobby Drake's personal struggles. We've seen him confront his insecurities many times over the years, but finally there's a sense that Bobby is moving forward and embracing a brighter future.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Iceman #7
November 2, 2017
|
|
These past two issues have left me yearning for a more lasting reunion of the original Champions, both because writer Sina Grace taps into that fun team dynamic and because he could have done so much more with it.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Iceman #8
December 7, 2017
|
|
There are some moments of fun centered around the young Bobby's anxiety and out-of-control powers, but in general this issue struggles to generate good banter or really delve into the troubled Drake family dynamic.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Iceman #10
February 8, 2018
|
|
The resolution to that battle is handled well, emphasizing Bobby's innate optimism rather than leaning on the old "Iceman finally taps into his true mutant potential" chestnut. But in general, this issue doesn't focus enough attention on Bobby himself.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Ignition City #1 |
Apr 08, 2009
show
|
|
Ignition City offers an interesting new world for Ellis to explore. I'm not immediately sold on the series in the way I was with Planetary, Transmetropolitan, or many of Ellis' best works, but it's a good start.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Image United |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Image United #1
November 25, 2009
|
|
Let's level here. I don't have a particular fondness for Image of the '90s. I don't appreciate the storytelling conventions of the time. With Image United celebrating many of the same qualities I disapprove of, I was clearly never the intended target audience. Most readers will know before ever picking up the issue if Image United is really for them. If you can find real enjoyment out of this project, I salute you. For my part, I'm going to go huddle in the corner with my Absolute Sandman books for a while.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Image United #2
December 23, 2009
|
|
Image United is a chaotic mess of a crossover, and I doubt many readers will be surprised to hear that. There are those who will happily pick up each issue in order to relive their formative comic-reading years. Then there are others who will need to be especially careful to grab Invincible #69 this week, if only to remind themselves that Image doesn't still put out this sort of thing every week.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Immortal Hulk #1 |
Jun 06, 2018
show
|
|
|
|
|
Immortal Iron Fist |
11 issues
show
|
|
|
Immortal Iron Fist Annual #1
September 26, 2007
|
|
Where this issue falls painfully short is the art. Howard Chaykin has been all over the underbelly of the Marvel Universe lately, and his style obviously works better on some series than others. I'm rather spoiled by David Aja's fluid pencils, and Chaykin doesn't strike me as the most suitable replacement. In fact, I'm convinced Danny Rand is a Skrull now. Why? Well, take a look at the wrinkles below his lips in every panel and tell me it doesn't look a little bit Skrully. The flashbacks are handled by Dan Brereton, who doesn't impress except for a short sequence that is painted over by Jelena Djurdjevic. Her style is close enough to that of her husband's so as to be nearly identical, and this is a very good thing. If both Djurdjevics would do more interior work at Marvel I would be a much happier comic book fan.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Immortal Iron Fist #9
September 26, 2007
|
|
This is the first issue (to my knowledge) to feature only David Aja on pencils. The various fill-in artists have always been well suited to their flashback sequences, but I'm more than happy to see Aja carry the book completely on his own. Frankly, I'm surprised Marvel hasn't snatched him away to draw a book that actually sells well. Maybe comic fans are actually listening to all the praise and are finally starting to give this series the love it deserves.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Immortal Iron Fist #12
January 16, 2008
|
|
So this issue sounds pretty much perfect at this point, right? Unfortunately, there's a third artist on board this month, one that doesn't mesh well with the other two. Javier Pulido was probably chosen for his ability to mimic Aja's style. Mimicry it may be, but none of the subtleties are present in his work. Compared to Aja or Kano, Pulido's pencils are a downright bore. Hopefully with a new one-shot issue taking the place of issue #13 next month, Aja will find enough time to avoid unnecessary fill-in artists for the big finale.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Immortal Iron Fist #14
April 30, 2008
|
|
I truly pity the self-professed comic fan who isn't following The Immortal Iron Fist. With a mere two issues left for Fraction and Brubaker, every last moment with these characters is made all the more precious. I don't think I'd trade those last issues for all the Secret Invasions and Final Crises in the multiverse.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Immortal Iron Fist #17
July 23, 2008
|
|
So, while the writing is generally a pleasant surprise, the art is more of an unpleasant one. I thought Marvel made a good choice in selecting Travel Foreman to be the new regular artist. He really nailed it in his past Iron Fist work. That's why I'm so confused. Foreman drastically altered his style in the past few months, to the point where I don't even recognize it. I didn't realize the cover was actually representative of what the interior art looked like. Characters are are dark, grimy, and literally bulging with excess muscle. Compared to the graceful, flowing art of artists like David Aja, this series looks all wrong to me. The one thing that can be said is that Foreman shows versatility. Unlike past issues, he handles flashbacks as well, and his style shifts markedly. And for the better, luckily. It's good to know that Foreman is capable of altering his style so easily. With any luck, the general art style will improve sooner or later. The series may never again reach that earl
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Immortal Iron Fist #19
October 29, 2008
|
|
With a solid script and characterizations that fall right in line with past arcs, there's less and less to distinguish Swiercynski's writing from Fraction's. The art, however, is markedly different. That's not entirely a bad thing, but the art is one area that still feels like a significant step down. Travel Foreman's pencils are vibrant and expressive, but this is sometimes taken to an extreme. Occasionally figures are over-inked to the point where they appear to be roughly chiseled out of wood. Foreman is obviously capable of shifting his style, so I'd like to see him tone down the more extreme qualities in future issues. Aside from that, I'm more satisfied with the current direction of Iron Fist than I ever would have expected.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Immortal Iron Fist #22
February 4, 2009
|
|
But all this aside, Immortal Iron Fist is by far my favorite work from Swiercynski since his arrival at Marvel. He continues to prove that the Fraction/Brubaker run was more than just a flash in the pan, and that Danny Rand is more than capable of supporting an ongoing series for years to come.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Immortal Iron Fist #23
March 11, 2009
|
|
The art has remained a slight sticking point for me. Travel Foreman can draw dynamic fight scenes like few others, but his figures tend to be exaggerated well past the point of visual clarity and good taste. I'm not quite o bothered by his more exaggerated qualities now. It may simply be that the story arc calls for exaggerated features. Danny and friends have been put through the ringer, and their bodies show every painful encounter. In any case, there are moments where Foreman really shines in this issue. Unlike Swiercynski, Foreman doesn't carry over the tone of the Fraction issues, but at his best he establishes his own unique look for the series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Immortal Iron Fist #24
March 25, 2009
|
|
Unfortunately, we have a few more weeks to wait before reading the next "real" chapter of Immortal Iron Fist. That said, there's no reason to complain when the filler issues are this consistently entertaining.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Immortal Weapons |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Immortal Weapons #1
July 22, 2009
|
|
Iron Fist fans should embrace this issue wholeheartedly. It offers a lot of great kung-fu content, and it succeeds, if only for a while, in making us forget that there isn't an ongoing Iron Fist book on the stands. Vote with your dollar, and maybe we can fix that.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Immortal Weapons #2
September 2, 2009
|
|
The backup feature from Duane Swiercynski and Travel Foreman is more enjoyable, luckily. Foreman's art is every bit as dynamic as it was on the main book, even if Swiercynski seems to be aiming a little low in Danny Rand's current adventure. With the feature 40% over, I'm not expecting many surprises out of Danny's hunt for a missing child. Still, it's entertaining, and that automatically puts it one or two steps above the main portion of the issue.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Incredible Hercules |
4 issues
show
|
|
|
Incredible Hercules #113
January 16, 2008
|
|
At this point the only things keeping Incredible Hercules from ranking as the best book of the week are the unfortunately-timed Immortal Iron Fist and the slightly underwhelming pencils of Khoi Pham. I don't want to be too hard on Pham. This is some of the best work I've seen from the artist so far. Still, it doesn't quite measure up to what we're seeing in some of the other Aftersmash books. If only Ed McGuinness were drawing this series instead of Hulk. I think I'd be in comic book heaven.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hercules #117
May 21, 2008
|
|
Once again the Secret Invasion tie-ins prove themselves to be superior to the main event itself. This arc gets off on the right foot precisely because it blends so well. I was left with the distinct impression that this story would have proceeded as it is regardless if Secret Invasion existed. At the same time, the tie-in allows for a couple neat little Skrully revelations. The best recommendation for tie-in books has always been to follow the books you normally do. Those are some sage words of wisdom. If you've been having a blast with Herc so far, that won't change one bit. If you've passed the series by each month, what the heck are you waiting for? God Squad!!!
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hercules #133
August 26, 2009
|
|
One significant area of improvement we've seen in the past two issues is the art. The series has been on a relative slump most of the year, and more than anything I lay the blame at the rotating cast of artists. The series just hasn't looked very stylish since the conclusion of "Love and War". Luckily, Rodney Buchemi brings a huge step up in visual quality. The art is noticeably more sleek and bright. And any Cho-centric story calls for some oddball visuals amid the floating numbers, all of which Buchemi handles well. Considering he'll be the artist for Assault on New Olympus, it's pleasing to see Buchemi turning in good work. However much Incredible Hercules might have tapered off in the first half of 2009, I'm looking forward to big things in the remainder of the year and beyond.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hercules #134
September 10, 2009
|
|
Unfortunately, I do prefer at least a little character building time with my humor, and that's one area this Thorcules arc is falling behind on when held against the Amadeus Cho story from last issue. Herc loses a bit of his luster when Cho isn't around to serve as a foil. Young Zeus is a decent enough replacement, but it's still not quite the same. I think Greg Pak and Fred Van Lente would have done well to connect the two arcs together in some way. s it is right now, they're completely independent of each other. Both offer a lot of what I love about the series, but not quite all in one package. More than anything, I just look forward to the inevitable reunion between Herc and Cho.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk (1999) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #111
November 21, 2007
|
|
This issue is worth a read if you find yourself enamored with the Renegades. As a satisfying tie-in to a big summer event, it only manages to fall flat on its face, leaving a Hulk-sized crater in its wake.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #112
December 19, 2007
|
|
It's doubtful Incredible Hulk's new status quo will last for very long, so I'd strongly suggest hopping on board while the fun lasts. Who would have thought Hercules could carry the weight of a book like this on his burly shoulders?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk (2009) |
10 issues
show
|
|
|
Incredible Hulks Annual #1
June 29, 2011
|
|
"Identity Wars" certainly had its moments. But in the end, this storyline doesn't really justify the price of admission. Hopefully that won't discourage Marvel from continuing to experiment with this crossover format.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #602
September 23, 2009
|
|
Don't get me wrong, I'm enjoying this series quite a bit. It's funny, it's action-packed, and it features some quality characterization of Banner and Skaar. It's also pleasing just to have a Hulk book that doesn't make me want to retch for a change. Although, with the way the art has been so far, I may not be able to say that much longer.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #604
November 18, 2009
|
|
This book may not be as troubling a read as that other Hulk book, but I'm beginning to enjoy the series less and less as time passes. Incredible Hulk needs the benefit of one artist and a clearer focus on the path ahead. Issue #604 doesn't seem as if it accomplished much of anything. With Fall of the Hulks looming so closely, that just perplexes me.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #605
December 9, 2009
|
|
The Savage She-Hulk back-up is decent, but fairly underwhelming in its conclusion. I definitely get the sense the story was dragged out longer than necessary. Still, it establishes Lyra's role in Fall of the Hulk's and offers more gorgeous Michael Ryan art, so it accomplishes its mission in the end. I'm really hoping to see the entire Hulk family kick it up a few notches and wow readers in Fall of the Hulks. I'm feeling some gamma-powered excitement for this franchise again, and it's been far too long.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #606
January 20, 2010
|
|
But as long as you either don't give a hoot about Shulkie or ignore the backup, you'll find much to enjoy in this issue. Fall of the Hulks is having a very positive effect on the franchise as a whole, and nowhere is that more evident than with this series.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #608
March 17, 2010
|
|
Incredible Hulk has a strong foundation. Banner is in a very interesting place at the moment. His relationship to his son, his ex-wife, and his fellow heroes is ripe for exploration. Paul Pelletier also has the book looking better than it has in a while. The problem is that Fall of the Hulks dilutes these strong qualities and drops too much extraneous clutter on the series. I'll keep my fingers crossed that War of the Hulks can offer a more streamlined and less disjointed conflict for both Hulk books, but at the moment I'm beginning to look to the faraway point when Incredible Hulk can be left alone again. Isn't that what Hulk always wanted for himself?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #610
June 16, 2010
|
|
But that aside, I'm keen to see how this storyline wraps up. The main storyline is improving rapidly, the backup feature remains as solid as ever, and it looks as if both will soon be converging in the aftermath of World War Hulks.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #611
August 11, 2010
|
|
But though issue #611 retains a few rough patches, this is easily the best issue of Incredible Hulk I've read in some time. I hope the new Incredible Hulks direction will be able to maintain this level of quality. If so, Hulk fans who have been cautiously optimistic of late might be able to finally let their guard down and embrace the series wholeheartedly again.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hulks #615
October 27, 2010
|
|
Barry Kitson delivers on the action once again in this issue. His character scale is in need of some serious fine-tuning, but otherwise the series packs all the detail and energy I expect of it. As for the backup feature, Ben McCool's Red She-Hulk tale is neither as annoyingly vapid as the recent A-Bomb shorts nor as memorable as the previous issue's Skaar feature. On the whole, Incredible Hulks has been steadily improving since the name change. These final two issues of "Dark Son" could easily improve even more.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hulks #618
December 31, 1969
|
|
With vibrant, energetic art like this, it doesn't matter if the script is a bit plain and straightforward. "Dark Son" provided enough character drama for the time being. These next few issues are the palette cleanser. And so far, it's a very tasty cleanser indeed.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk (2011) |
9 issues
show
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #3
December 21, 2011
|
|
At least his interpretation of Hulk is solid. The juxtaposition of the man vs. monster angle remains strong. The character retains his previous level of relative intelligence, allowing him to successfully narrate the series without it descending into farce. Hulk is the right blend between savage and hero. But will that be enough to carry the series for any real length of time?
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #4
January 11, 2012
|
|
In some ways it's even justified given the course the character has taken these last few years. At the same time, it's a very extreme direction to venture into, and the longer it lasts, the harder it'll be to ever paint Banner as a heroic figure again. The most significant test this series faces right now is in proving that this new Hulk/Banner dynamic has long-term potential.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #8
May 30, 2012
|
|
Fundamentally, this series is on firmer ground as it barrels into its second story arc. Unfortunately, there are some notable flaws remaining that still prevent Incredible Hulk from reaching its full potential.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #9
June 13, 2012
|
|
In general, this arc is an improvement over the first seven issues of the series, both visually and in terms of storytelling. Still, the sense of progression is lacking as Hulk ends this issue pretty much where he started. The wackiness and rampant smashing can only carry Stay Angry for so long.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #10
June 27, 2012
|
|
Stay Angry is goofy good fun. However, after three chapters it's not enough to keep seeing the same pattern of disorientation, smashing, and last-minute scene change. It's time the book revealed more about what Banner is up to and what sort of greater conflict the Hulk faces in his future.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #11
July 25, 2012
|
|
I feel like I say this at the end of every Hulk review now, but this book really needs to push forward and show readers what Banner's ultimate plan is. We've been given far too many intermediate chapters that offer plenty of fun but no real substance or sense of progression.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #12
August 8, 2012
|
|
This arc was beginning to drag, but luckily Aaron sticks the landing as he paves the way for his final showdown between Hulk and Banner. With only a handful of issues remaining in this run, it's doubtful slow pacing will be a recurring complaint now.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk (2017) |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Incredible Hulk #711
December 21, 2017
|
|
I don't think I've ever been more excited as a Hulk reader than in 2005, when Greg Pak was weaving the original Planet Hulk saga and drastically overhauling that character's role in the Marvel U. I wish that same sense of excitement and wonder was driving its sequel. But after three issues, Planet Hulk II still feels like a dull, unnecessary retread of the original.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Incredible Hulks |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Incredible Hulks #612
September 1, 2010
|
|
The loss of Paul Pelletier's pencils is also felt. Tom Raney makes for a decent replacement in this relatively quiet, dialogue-heavy story, but his use of perspective in the more action-oriented scenes is generally awkward. It's really Brian Ching's work in the backup feature that stands out in its style and power. The best that can be said about "Dark Son" so far is that readers only have to wait two weeks for the next chapter. Hopefully the arc will kick into gear by then.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Incredible Hulks #613
September 15, 2010
|
|
Those who have been paying attention to the Hiro-Kala backups will likely find these next issues more enjoyable. The conflict with Hiro-Kala isn't given proper context or buildup in Greg Pak's main story, but that isn't necessarily Pak's responsibility. For his part, Pak tones down the silly drama and focuses more on Hulk's current state of mind. The newly cowed and de-powered Skaar is also very interesting to read, and a nice counter to the simple barbarian the character has been for much of his shelf life. I just wish the series did a better job of justifying its large cast. Many characters - Jen Walters, Lyra, and Korg - are so barely present as to not even be worthwhile additions to the book. Pak needs to either trim the fat or find a use for the forgotten members of the Hulk family. Perhaps a battle with Hiro-Kala is just the ticket.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Independence Day #1 |
Mar 23, 2016
show
|
|
It's debatable whether the world needed an Independence Day comic, but at least this Resurgence prequel has something to offer readers. The characters might be bland and the artwork uneven at best, but the idea of a submarine crew waging war against alien stragglers has its definite appeal.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Indestructible Hulk |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
Indestructible Hulk Annual #1
December 4, 2013
|
|
The art in this issue is is nicely textured and visually evocative thanks to its use of color and elements like Benday dots. It bodes well for Mahmud Asrar's role on the relaunched Wolverine and the X-Men series next year, as this issue proves he can handle simple character interaction and wild and crazy superhero showdowns in equal measure.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Indestructible Hulk #5
March 20, 2013
|
|
Leinil Yu's art has always been an uneven fit for this series, as his harsh figures and heavy lines don't really mesh with Waid's dialogue-driven scenes. But given the underwater setting and heavier focus on smashing in issue #5, that problem isn't as pronounced. This still isn't the most refined work we've seen from Yu at Marvel, but them's the breaks when you want your Leinil Yu-pencilled comic to stick to a monthly schedule.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Indestructible Hulk: Special #1
October 16, 2013
|
|
Jacob Wyatt pencils and inks this middle installment of the crossover. Unfortunately, his style lacks some of the dynamic quality of Kris Anka's work in the first issue. And that becomes a problem during the fight scenes between Hulk and the Abomination. The two characters aren't quite as powerful and menacing as they should be. But otherwise Wyatt's work suits the story well. He captures a Silver Age vibe and ensures that all his characters are graced with expressive facial work despite the relatively simple nature of the art. And Jordie Bellaire's colors further that Silver Age feel.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Indestructible: Stingray #1 |
May 28, 2015
show
|
|
Indestructible fans will want to give this issue a look, but newcomers are better off gravitating towards the main series first.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Infamous Iron Man (2016) |
10 issues
show
|
|
|
Infamous Iron Man #1
October 19, 2016
|
|
In many ways, Infamous iron Man is exactly the sort of Iron Man comic Brian Bendis and Alex Maleev should be working on. It's dark, moody and filled with just enough twists to make Doom's journey from villain to hero unpredictable. That doesn't change the fact that this issue is a slow start for a series that needs to work harder to prove that Doom is better off taking up the mantle of another character.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Infamous Iron Man #2
November 17, 2016
|
|
This book feels very much like a continuation of International Iron Man. Not just because it features the same creative team, but also because the pacing is equally slow and laborious.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Infamous Iron Man #4
January 26, 2017
|
|
It took a few issues, but this new series has succeeded in justifying both Victor von Doom's turn to good and his decision to shroud himself in Iron Man's image rather than his own. The result is a drastically different take on Doom, but one that both honors the past and plays to Brian Bendis' storytelling strengths.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Infamous Iron Man #6
March 30, 2017
|
|
Once you make the decision to recast Victor Von Doom as a hero, the logical next step is to make Reed Richards the villain. The inverted dynamic is at the heart of this series' second story arc. Unfortunately, the book's lackadaisical pacing continues.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Infamous Iron Man #8
May 25, 2017
|
|
Surprise, surprise. The latest chapter of Infamous Iron Man is another slow, methodical read. But more than ever, the strong characterization is making up for the glacial story pace.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Infamous Iron Man #10
July 27, 2017
|
|
Slow pacing and decompression are problems plaguing too many Marvel books right now. What makes it especially frustrating with Infamous Iron Man is the knowledge that this series looks to be ending with the Marvel Legacy relaunch.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Infamous Iron Man #11
August 31, 2017
|
|
It's strange to think that this series is ending with next month's issue #12, because it barely feels as though Brian Bendis and Alex Maleev have accomplished anything with Victor Von Doom over the past year.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Infamous Iron Man #12
September 28, 2017
|
|
This issue marks the end of Victor Von Doom's latest solo series, if not necessarily the end of his tenure as Iron Man. It's a bittersweet experience at best.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Inferno #2 |
Jun 11, 2015
show
|
|
. The book is as much a chance for Dennis Hopeless to reconnect with characters from his X-Force work as anything else, which is probably why the characterization is so appealing.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Infinity |
6 issues
show
|
|
|
Infinity #1
August 12, 2013
|
|
That said, this issue also illustrates why Cheung would have been an unwise choice to pencil the entire series. Four different inkers, including Mark Morales and Cheung himself, handle different portions of these 64 pages. And unsurprisingly, the difference in line weight, draftsmanship, and clarity among these four inkers is very noticeable. The reprinted FCBD material is the most clean and elegant, unfortunately. Perhaps the upcoming issues will be able to offer more visual consistency despite the fact that Opena and Weaver will be dividing pages.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Infinity #2
September 4, 2013
|
|
Opena's art in particular is extremely event-worthy as he depicts epic space battles and the retaliation by Gladiator and his Shi'ar warriors. Meanwhile, Weaver excels at delivering a more subtle, emotionally-focused series of pages. Not entirely dissimilar in the first place, Weaver and Opena's styles mesh well thanks to Justin Ponsor's unifying colors. Even with five artists working across three titles, Infinity is shaping up to be an unusually cohesive event book in both art and scripting.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Infinity #3
December 31, 1969
|
|
As with the previous issue, Jerome Opena and Dustin Weaver divide up the pages, with Opena handling the conflicts in space and Weaver those on Earth. Infinity as a whole has an impressive sense of visual consistency despite being divided up among these two artists and Mike Deodato and Leinil Yu. Each artist has his own approach to anatomy, framing, and so forth, but there's a common sense of grit, weight, looming darkness and larger-than-life spectacle that unites every page of the story. Opena stands out especially in how his scenes blend massive scope with more personal confrontations. His flair for body language comes into play in a major way as Gladiator looms over Captain America, yet still comes away from the scene as the lesser hero in the end.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Infinity #4
October 9, 2013
|
|
While this issue does stand alone without the need for Hickman's tie-ins better than the previous two have, it does still suffer from the series' other perpetual flaw. It's too late into the game for there to be such a tenuous link between the two halves of the story. The only common factor between Thanos' invasion and the Builders' intergalactic conquest right now is the revelation that the Builders have a deep-seated hatred for Earthlings. That's enough to suggest these two conflicts will ultimately merge into one, but time is growing short to build a unified threat for our heroes.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Infinity #5
October 30, 2013
|
|
It's just that, structurally, it's really seeming as though Infinity would have functioned better as a looser sort of crossover between the two Avengers books. This event's problems are minimal compared to most, but that continues to be an aggravating quirk with the story.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Infinity #6
November 27, 2013
|
|
One area Infinity thankfully bucks the trend of Marvel's recent events is the ratio of actual story material to epilogue scenes. Too often, series like Fear Itself and AvX seemed in a hurry to wrap up so the final issues could devote more time to teasing what came next. There's a bit of that here, but only after several dozen pages of brawling and exploding and avenging. As much as this story (any superhero story, for that matter) is ultimately a bridge towards other things, Hickman doesn't beat readers over the head with teases for Inhumanity or future Avengers storylines. In that way and others, Infinity serves as a model of how to do these projects right.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Infinity Heist |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Infinity Heist #1
September 25, 2013
|
|
Al Barrionuevo's art also keeps the issue humming along. He excels at providing expressive, energetic renditions of villains and dynamically framed panels. There's a kinetic energy to the book that can't be denied, making this easily the most visually striking of the various Infinity offshoots.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Infinity Heist #2
October 23, 2013
|
|
Visually, this issue is a bit weaker as well. The colors are a problem, with several artists providing colors for Al Barrionuevo's pencils. There are many panels where one figure will be bathed in a gritty, textured layer of shadow while others are brighter and more simple. It's an odd effect that doesn't really do the series any favors. Luckily, Barrionuevo's pencils are still clean and expressive, with some dynamic framing shots helping to keep things interesting even as the action remains elusive.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Infinity Man And The Forever People: Futures End #1 |
Sep 11, 2014
show
|
|
I feared this issue would fall flat because the ongoing Infinity Man series has only been around for a couple months. Why should we care what happens to these characters five years in the future? But Dan DiDio and Keith Giffen brush past those concerns easily enough, offering a somber, even tragic look at the fate of the Forever People after wars and tragedies have torn them apart.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Infinity Wars (2018) |
3 issues
show
|
|
|
|
|
Infinity: Against the Tide #1 |
Aug 20, 2013
show
|
|
Latour's storyboards are key to the issue's success, because Alessio's painted style is the exact sort of approach that so rarely works in comics. Too often, painters deliver a series of individually striking panels that fail to combine and form any sort of sequential flow. Instead, this issue offers a best of both worlds scenario. Readers get all the detail and scope of painted art, but the focus is always on how the figures move and interact and how each moment transitions into the next. Surfer summoning his board to slice an Aleph in half is easily one of the most memorable sequences seen in an Infinite Comic so far. The worst that could be said is that Alessio's Skrulls are too pretty and not alien enough.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
|
Infinity: The Hunt |
2 issues
show
|
|
|
Infinity: The Hunt #1
September 11, 2013
|
|
Artist Steve Sanders isn't given much to do in this issue, aside from a well-crafted title page that offers a diagram view of the new Avengers Academy. Aside from that spread, this issue offers little more than various heroes standing against blue, amorphous backgrounds. Hopefully that, at least, will change as the characters are called upon to join the defense of Earth.
View Issue
Full Review
|
|
|
Infinity: The Hunt #2
October 2, 2013
|
|
Steve Saunders has more chances to shine in this issue, which he does with about a 50% success rate. The quality of his work varies almost from panel to panel. At times he brings a laid back, elegant charm to the Marvel Universe in the heat of battle, and at others his pencils become muddled and stiff. A book like this should at least be able to bank on reliably bombastic visuals.
| |